The practical glossary for packaging, automation & CAPEX
Technical terms explained precisely, from 40 years of project practice in industry. For plant managers, buyers and anyone who wants to really understand a quotation. Each entry also shows the German term.
693 terms Deutsches GlossarNo term found. Try a different spelling or category.
0-9
3D laser scan (point cloud)
Digitalisation & AIA method in which a 3D scanner measures rooms and equipment without contact and stores the result as a point cloud, a set of millions of individual measuring points with spatial coordinates. The scanner is set up at several positions, and the individual scans are then joined into one overall cloud using targets or shared geometry. This step is called registration. Many devices take photos at the same time and colour the points. The point cloud can be loaded into CAD systems and serves as a basis for layout planning, clash checks and as-built documentation, especially in brownfield projects. For design work it is often converted into surface or solid models, which means additional effort.
From practice
Every scan shows the hall on exactly one day. If a pipe is laid or a rack moved afterwards, the point cloud knows nothing about it. So have the scan done as close to detailed planning as possible, and agree beforehand what will be delivered, in which format and to what accuracy. Whatever the scanner cannot see is missing. Behind control cabinets and above suspended ceilings there will be gaps, and it will not find cables in the floor at all. If forklifts and people walk through the picture during the scan, you get ghost points in the cloud afterwards. The scan really pays for itself when moving equipment into the building and in clash checks. You then see on screen that a sprinkler pipe hangs exactly at palletiser height, instead of finding out during installation. Also check who in your organisation can actually open these volumes of data.
5 Whys
Quality & safetyA questioning technique for root cause analysis in which, starting from an observed problem, the question why is asked repeatedly. Each answer becomes the basis for the next question until a cause is reached at which a lasting countermeasure can be applied. The method comes from Japanese car manufacturing and belongs to the lean and kaizen toolbox. Five is a guide figure, sometimes fewer questions are enough and sometimes more are needed. Each answer should be backed by observation where the problem occurs, or by data, rather than by assumption. The method follows a single chain of causes. Where a problem has several causes, it is combined with an Ishikawa cause and effect diagram. In the 8D report and in the CAPA process it is often used for the root cause step.
From practice
Most chains stop too early, and they stop at a person. Operator not paying attention, action training, case closed. A few weeks later the same thing happens on the other shift. At that point keep asking why the machine lets the error happen. A typical chain looks like this. Cartons open up at the palletiser because the glue does not hold. It does not hold because too little glue is applied. Too little comes out because a nozzle is partly blocked. It is blocked because it is only cleaned after a fault, and that in turn because the maintenance plan has no interval for it. Only there can something be changed for good. Do the analysis at the machine and not in the meeting room. Around a table, guesses quickly turn into facts because nobody contradicts them.
5S
KPIsA method for organising a workplace in five steps, originating in Japanese lean practice: Sort, Set in order, Shine, Standardise and Sustain. First, everything not needed at the workstation is removed. Each remaining item then gets a fixed, marked place, and the area is cleaned. Standardise turns this order into a binding rule. Sustain keeps it alive through regular audits. On packaging lines, 5S mainly concerns change parts, tools, spare parts kept at the station and consumables.
From practice
The tidy-up day is the easy part. Trouble starts afterwards, because within a few weeks everything lies wherever it happens to fit. Usually nobody owns the area and there is no fixed date for the audit. On packaging lines, a change-parts board with shadow outlines right at the machine pays off. If a part is missing, everyone sees it at a glance, and nobody searches for ages before finding out the stop is still in the workshop. I have little time for walk-rounds with a scoring table when nothing happens afterwards. If your changeovers involve a lot of searching, start with the change-parts trolley, because the result shows fastest there.
8D report
Quality & safetyA structured method and associated report format for handling complaints and quality problems in eight disciplines. D1 forms the team, D2 describes the problem, D3 defines immediate containment actions, D4 identifies the root cause, D5 selects corrective actions and verifies that they work, D6 implements them, D7 prevents recurrence including on similar products and processes, and D8 closes the case and recognises the team. A D0 step for emergency response is often placed in front. The method comes from the automotive industry, where it is standard in dealings with suppliers. Root cause analysis uses tools such as the 5 Whys, the Ishikawa diagram and Pareto analysis. A related approach is CAPA from the GMP world.
From practice
An 8D report from a supplier often reads like this: cause operator error, action operator retrained. That closes the matter for the supplier, but not for you by a long way. Check in D1 whether the team includes someone from the line where the defect arose. In D3 it pays to look closely at which goods were really blocked and sorted, including those in transit and in the supplier’s warehouse. For D4, ask for two causes, why the defect could occur and why it was not detected. The second is usually the more interesting one. Have the effectiveness proven with inspection results over several weeks, because a signature alone is not enough. The report is only closed once those results are in. If your own customer asks you for an 8D report, by the way, your D4 will be read just as critically.
A
Acceptance certificate
Project management & CAPEXWritten document recording the formal acceptance of a machine or line, with date, signatures of both parties, outstanding items and deadlines. It refers to the performance tests carried out and states which deviations are still open. As a rule, acceptance brings several legal consequences, namely transfer of risk, reversal of the burden of proof, start of the warranty period and the due date of the final instalment. That is why it is the legal turning point of the project. Outstanding items are always recorded with a deadline and value, never as a blanket statement.
From practice
A good acceptance certificate refers to the performance tests, meaning test records and endurance runs, and lists every deviation with an owner and deadline. It also sets out which portion of payment is withheld until resolved. Photos and HMI screenshots belong as an attachment. Never sign subject to reservation without concrete points. A blanket reservation carries little weight in court and still blocks cooperation. Go through the outstanding items with the supplier at the machine before signing, not at a desk. How the certificate works legally is something to clarify beforehand with your lawyer, ideally already at the contract stage.
Acceptance criteria
Project management & CAPEXMeasurable conditions under which a machine or line is considered accepted. Typical items are performance, availability, reject rate, formats, documentation and safety. Each criterion comes with a target value, a measurement method, a measurement period, and the product and packaging material used for measuring. The criteria are agreed before ordering and recorded in the user requirements specification (URS) and in the contract. They are verified in two stages, at the factory acceptance test (FAT) at the supplier and at the site acceptance test (SAT) at the installation location. The contract defines what happens if criteria are not met, for example rectification or a withheld portion of payment.
From practice
Acceptance criteria without a measurement method are worthless. High availability cannot be accepted, but a fixed percentage of machine-related availability over three shifts with two named formats can. Set the criteria out in the user requirements specification, repeat them in the contract and verify them at FAT and SAT using the same protocol. Clarify beforehand what counts as a machine-related fault and what does not, otherwise every stop gets argued over at acceptance. I also have the product and packaging material written down that will be used for measuring. If you run with the best carton and fresh film, you reach values that nobody sees in daily operation later.
Advance payment guarantee
CommercialA guarantee from a bank or credit insurer by which a supplier secures repayment of a down payment. If the supplier fails to deliver as contracted, for example because of insolvency, the buyer can claim the amount from the guarantor. It is normally issued for the full down payment and handed over before payment is made. Under German law, one common form waives the guarantor’s right to have the supplier pursued first, while a guarantee on first demand obliges the guarantor to pay initially without examining the claim. It is either limited in time or ends when the document is returned, usually after delivery. For the supplier it ties up part of the guarantee facility with its bank and costs commission. A performance bond, by contrast, secures the entire performance.
From practice
Pay the down payment only once the original guarantee is in your hands. That sounds obvious and is still often done the other way round, because the supplier is pushing to buy material. Check the amount, order number and beneficiary on the document. A guarantor from the same group of companies helps little if the whole group gets into trouble. The tricky part is a fixed expiry date. If delivery slips, the security lapses while your money is still with the supplier. Note the date and ask for an extension in good time. The original belongs in the accounts department’s safe, not in the project file. After delivery, return the document promptly. Until then the supplier pays commission on it, and sooner or later that turns up in his prices.
AGV
IntralogisticsDriverless vehicles that transport pallets or containers on defined routes. They are track-guided, for example by magnetic tape or an induction loop in the floor, or they navigate by laser scanner and reflectors. A control system assigns the jobs and regulates crossings and handovers. Designs include underride, fork and tugger vehicles. The classic application is pallet transport between the end of the line and the warehouse. Usually economical from multi-shift operation upward. The freely navigating evolution is the AMR.
From practice
Classic AGVs follow fixed installed tracks and suit stable processes with a few well-defined routes, such as pallet transport from the end of the line to the warehouse. They are reliable and predictable, but layout changes take effort because the track has to be rebuilt. Economic viability comes from forklift trips saved in multi-shift operation. The Shopfloor Analysis provides the transport volumes per route as the basis for the calculation. Ask the supplier about the handover points as well. The interface to the line or the racking is usually where things stick first, especially when a pallet arrives crooked.
AI assistant (shopfloor)
Digitalisation & AIA voice-based assistance system on the line that answers operators’ and maintenance staff’s questions about faults, changeovers or maintenance, usually via tablet or HMI. Its answers draw on the plant’s documentation and fault history. Technically it is usually a language model connected to those documents. The system supports diagnosis and access to knowledge. Interventions in the control system remain with people, and the assistant does not change parameters.
From practice
The benefit shows on the night shift, when no specialist is reachable and the fault is on page 340 of the manual. Whether the assistant finds it depends on the documents. That means well-maintained documents, a fault history with the solutions and not just the messages, and an interface that works with gloves on. Involve the line leads early, or the tablet stays in the cupboard. Let the shift staff ask real questions from their daily work, including the clumsily worded ones. And measure whether downtime actually gets shorter or whether the search has merely become more convenient.
Air preparation unit
Mechanical engineering & componentsAn assembly at the inlet of a pneumatic machine that conditions compressed air from the network for the consumers. It usually consists of a manual shut-off valve, a filter with condensate drain, a pressure regulator with gauge and an electrically operated on-off valve that can exhaust the machine. Depending on the application, a soft-start valve and a lubricator are added. Filter and regulator are often combined as a filter regulator. Fine filters or activated carbon filters are fitted downstream for sensitive valves or vacuum generators. Compressed air quality is specified to ISO 8573-1 in classes for particles, water and oil. The on-off valve is part of the safety concept because it can depressurise the machine on emergency stop or when guard doors are opened.
From practice
The lubricator is a relic that refuses to go away. Current valves and cylinders come with a factory lubrication and need no oil in the air. Once you start oiling, though, you have to keep going, because the oil washes out the factory lubrication. With new machines I therefore ask whether the lubricator is really needed, and if so, which H1 oil it is filled with. Look at the condensate drain too. A drain that only opens when the pressure is switched off does little on a machine that runs round the clock. Where the unit is mounted matters as well. If it sits low at the back between cable duct and wall, nobody will change the filter element. Operators like to turn up the regulator when a cylinder seems sluggish. A lockable regulator saves a fair amount of discussion.
Alarm management
Automation & roboticsSystematic design of the fault and warning messages of a plant. It defines which events are reported, with what priority, text and expected response. Alarms are classified by type and priority, acknowledged by the operator and archived with a timestamp. The aim is for operators to identify the cause during a fault instead of searching through a flood of simultaneous alarms. First-out annunciation, which marks the alarm that triggered first, and the suppression of follow-up alarms serve this purpose. Guidance is provided by EEMUA 191 and IEC 62682.
From practice
After an emergency stop the alarm list fills up, and the cause sits somewhere far down, usually between lots of follow-up messages. Require an alarm list with text, priority and operator guidance in the user requirements specification, together with first-out annunciation and follow-up alarm suppression. A good sign at acceptance: an operator finds the triggered sensor without the programmer. I have the alarm texts shown to me beforehand, because a message that only quotes a number helps nobody at three in the morning. Standing alarms get ignored sooner or later, and then the one important alarm is lost along with them. Either you fix the cause or the alarm goes.
Allergen changeover
Quality & safetyA product changeover on a line in which allergens from the previous product must not reach the next one. Usually an allergen-free product follows an allergen-containing one, but changes between products with different allergens also occur. This requires validated cleaning. The basis is allergen management within the HACCP concept and customer standards. Verification is visual and by rapid tests, and for critical allergens in the laboratory as well. The sequence of products and the cleaning validation determine changeover time and product safety.
From practice
On packaging machines, allergen changeovers are mainly a problem of accessibility. Product residue sits in vibratory troughs, under belts, in the multihead weigher and in the sealing jaws, in other words wherever you cannot get at it without tools. When buying, check whether all product-contact parts can be removed without tools or at least inspected. Plan the production sequence from allergen-free to allergen-containing, and the changeover gets shorter. Validate the cleaning with tests. A visual check alone is not enough, because you only see flour dust in a trough when it is too late. Put these requirements in the URS. Retrofitting later is expensive and brings downtime with it.
Aluminium profile system
Mechanical engineering & componentsA modular kit of extruded aluminium profiles with slots that take connectors and T-slot nuts. The profiles come in grid dimensions with various cross-sections and slot widths, and the accessories are matched to the respective system. Joints are bolted, so constructions can be changed and extended later. Profile systems are used for light machine frames, guard fencing, workstations, conveyor frames and fixtures. The surface is usually anodised. Compared with a welded steel construction, profile frames go up faster but are less rigid. Open slots are unsuitable for product areas with wet cleaning, and closed or covered profile variants are available for those.
From practice
Because everything bolts onto profiles so quickly, some machines grow a structure of brackets, angles and extra plates over the years that no longer appears on any drawing. In wet areas the slots collect product residue and cleaning agent, and the cover strips are gone after a few modifications anyway. Settle on one system and one profile size for the whole plant. T-slot nuts and connectors from different manufacturers often almost fit, and on a guard door almost means it will work loose at some point. For fixed guard fencing the Machinery Directive requires fixings that can only be undone with a tool. Check this after modifications, before somebody fastens the fence with wing screws.
Andon
Automation & roboticsVisual display of the line status for everyone at the workplace. The word comes from Japanese and means lantern, and the principle comes from lean management: make problems visible immediately and call for help before minutes turn into hours. An Andon system consists of signal lights or signal towers, display boards with output against plan, and buttons for calling help. It is completed by an escalation chain that defines who is informed after what time for which message. The system is driven from the line PLC or from a control system.
From practice
Andon only works with a response chain. It must be settled who arrives within what time when the light is red. Without a defined escalation the board becomes decoration. Digital Andon systems link the alarm to MES data and send faults to the maintenance team’s phones, but that only works when the fault causes are coded cleanly. At the start, a signal tower per line and a board with the five most frequent faults of the week are often enough. Fix the colours in writing and put their meaning up at the line, otherwise every shift reads the light differently. Also check that the tower can be seen from the aisle when the forklift is parked in front of it.
Anomaly detection
Digitalisation & AIA method that learns a machine’s usual behaviour from process data and reports deviations from it, for example changed current draw, vibration patterns or temperature profiles, without the fault having to be defined in advance. It supplements fixed threshold values and provides early indications of wear or process drift. Statistical methods or machine learning are used, first trained on data from normal operation. The result is usually a deviation score or an alert, and the method does not name the cause.
From practice
Anomaly detection reports deviations, not causes. After start-up, many alerts turn out to be changeovers, cleaning or a new packaging-material supplier. Without event context, the system learns these states as faults, or the team switches the alerts off. Then the project is dead before it has found anything. Plan a training-in phase in which the maintenance team evaluates the alerts. Give the system events as context, meaning format, order and cleaning. Define beforehand which alert triggers which response and who receives it. An alert that belongs to nobody simply stays unread, however clever the analysis behind it.
Anti-slip sheet
IntralogisticsA paper sheet with an anti-slip coating that lies between layers of cartons on a pallet and significantly increases the coefficient of friction between the layers. It improves load securing, reduces shifting during transport and can partly replace stretch film or strapping. Versions differ in coating, basis weight and recyclability. The sheet is placed by hand or by a slip-sheet inserter on the palletiser. Its coefficient of friction is determined in the laboratory with a tilt or sliding test.
From practice
An anti-slip sheet only works if it actually lies between the layers. The palletiser needs a slip-sheet inserter with a reliable sheet gripper for that, otherwise the sheet is missing on every third layer. Check the coefficient of friction against your carton surface, because glossy laminated lids behave differently from rough testliner. For cold chains the coating must be moisture-resistant, otherwise the sheet softens. With export shipments you should document the proof of load securing with a tilt test. Mind how the sheets are stored too: if they warp in damp air, the inserter starts to jam.
Apple
Digitalisation & AIA manufacturer of computers, tablets and smartphones, namely Mac, iPad and iPhone, with its own operating system. In an industrial setting it is mainly the mobile devices that are used, for photos, notes, checklists and 3D views directly on the shop floor. On walk-throughs the iPad serves as camera, notepad and sketch pad in one. Machine models can be shown in USDZ format as an AR view in the real hall. What has been captured is afterwards evaluated in the office and taken into reports.
From practice
On a walk through the hall the iPad is the most practical tool. You photograph the spot, write the comment straight onto it and sketch directly over the layout. Machine models can be placed into the hall as an AR view, see USDZ. That shows you before the purchase whether the plant fits the space intended for it. For an Efficiency Day the documentation then emerges during the walk-through and not later at a desk, where nobody remembers which photo belongs to which spot. Name the photos on site with line and station, otherwise you spend the evening sorting pictures that nobody can assign any more.
Approved vendor list (AVL)
Project management & CAPEXA company’s list of approved suppliers, the approved vendor list. Anyone not on the AVL is often not even allowed to submit a quotation. Admission usually requires supplier qualification, called onboarding on corporate projects and handled, for example, via Coupa. Proof of insurance, certificates and compliance declarations are requested, and sometimes an audit. The AVL can be divided by commodity group, so that a supplier is approved only for certain services. On corporate projects, onboarding is a separate, time-critical project step.
From practice
Getting onto a supplier list at a large corporation often takes weeks. It starts with registration in the procurement portal, then come proof of insurance, certificates and compliance, sometimes audits as well. Anyone who needs a new specialist supplier on a project starts onboarding in parallel with the technical clarification and does not wait for the award stage. Otherwise the preferred supplier is in the quotation but cannot be ordered from, and the schedule has a hole. Ask procurement early which suppliers are already approved and what lead times onboarding has. Smaller suppliers should prepare the typical documentation as a ready package.
AQL (sampling inspection)
Quality & safetyAcceptance quality limit. In sampling inspection by attributes, the AQL is the worst process average that is still regarded as acceptable when a continuing series of lots is submitted. It is stated as percent nonconforming items or as nonconformities per hundred items. ISO 2859-1 contains the sampling plans. Lot size and inspection level give a code letter, which in turn gives the sample size and, for the chosen AQL, the acceptance and rejection numbers. The standard provides normal, tightened and reduced inspection with rules for switching between them. Separate AQL values per defect class are common. The AQL says little about a single lot, and worse lots are also accepted with a certain probability. Inspection by variables is covered by the ISO 3951 series.
From practice
Plenty of packaging specifications state an AQL but no defect classes. Goods receiving and the supplier then argue over whether a smeared print is a major or a minor defect, on precisely the day the line is waiting for the material. Define the defect classes with examples, ideally with photos and boundary samples. Be careful with defects that can lead to a recall, such as a wrong barcode or a missing allergen on the label. A sample is the wrong tool for those, they need a label check at the line that inspects every pack. Look at how the sample is drawn as well. Ten folding cartons from the top layer of the first pallet are not a random sample. And an accepted lot only tells you that the sample was fine.
Articulated-arm robot
Automation & roboticsThe all-rounder among industrial robots, an arm with six rotary axes and a large working envelope that palletises, picks and handles. The axes are arranged one behind the other like an arm with shoulder, elbow and wrist, so the robot can approach a product from almost any direction. For pure palletising, variants with four axes are often used. Selection criteria are payload including the gripper, reach, cycle time, ingress protection (hygiene) and the safety concept of the cell, which follows ISO 10218. The robot is mounted on the floor, on the ceiling or on a pedestal.
From practice
For palletising and case packing, the articulated-arm robot is the all-rounder: long reach, high payload, any pack pattern. Its limits are at very high cycle rates, where delta or gantry robots take over, and in space. The safety fence and restricted area need floor space. Include the cell size in the layout, including access for pallet changes, because that is where many retrofit projects in existing buildings fall down. Check the factory floor as well, since the robot puts dynamic loads into the foundation. And count the payload honestly. Gripper, layer package and an allowance for the worst case all count.
Artwork (print file)
Packaging technologyThe approved digital print file for a pack or label, from which the repro house and the printer produce the printing plates or cylinders. Besides the design and the mandatory information, the artwork contains barcodes, colour specifications including spot colours, and technical elements such as the die line, bleed, print mark and blank areas for coding on the line. It is usually supplied as a PDF/X file. Before printing it goes through an approval process involving marketing, quality assurance and packaging engineering. Every change creates a new version with its own version number, which is often printed in small type on the pack. The packaging specification refers to the valid artwork and also defines material and dimensions with tolerances.
From practice
Artwork is created in marketing, but it has to run on the line. Something tends to get lost in between. The print mark moves a few millimetres because it spoils the layout, or the blank area for the best-before date suddenly sits where the printer on the machine cannot reach. On folding cartons the glue flap gets varnished as well, and the hotmelt no longer holds. That is why I have every artwork approval countersigned by someone from engineering, even if supposedly only some text has changed. A different varnish alone changes the coefficient of friction, and the film suddenly behaves differently on the forming shoulder. Set up a short sheet of technical requirements for each line, covering position and contrast of the print mark, blank areas and varnish-free zones. Attach that sheet to every brief sent to the agency.
As-built documentation
Project management & CAPEXDocumentation that reflects the condition of a plant as actually built after installation and commissioning. It differs from the design status because cable routes, terminal assignments, set-up dimensions and software versions are regularly changed on site. These changes are first marked up by hand in red on the documents during the work and then transferred into the original files. Depending on the agreement, as-built documentation includes the layout, circuit diagrams, P&IDs, parts lists, cable lists, parameter lists and a control system backup of the final state. It forms part of the agreed documentation scope and is the basis for maintenance, later modifications and periodic inspections.
From practice
The control cabinet holds the drawing with the red marks from commissioning. On the server sits the PDF from the FAT. And nobody remembers which jumper went onto which terminal, or why. That gets expensive at the first weekend breakdown, if not before. Specify in the contract when the as-built documentation is due and which software version it must reflect. If part of the final payment depends on it, it usually arrives more punctually. Then spot-check the documents on site. Pick three terminals, a sensor and a pipe and compare them with the drawings. If those do not match, the rest usually does not either. The red-marked drawings stay in the cabinet until the clean set has been checked.
Asana
Digitalisation & AIA cloud-based tool for task and project management. Tasks have owners, due dates and dependencies and can be displayed as a list, board, timeline or calendar. In small teams it replaces the classic Excel task list. It is used through a browser or an app, and everyone involved works on the same list, and changes are visible to all straight away without anyone having to send round a new version. Each task carries an owner and a due date, so it is visible who is to do what by when.
From practice
POWERJO manages project tasks and the open items list, LOP for short, in Asana. Everyone on the team can see it, and every item has a due date and an owner. That replaces the Monday morning question of who was actually going to do what. Anyone who keeps a shared task list with the supplier on a client project saves the weekly back-and-forth of comparing email statuses. The question of which version of the Excel list is the current one disappears as well. It takes discipline: an item without an owner and a due date is not an item but a wish. And close tasks only when the result has been checked, not as soon as somebody says they took care of it.
Aseptic filling
Packaging technologyFilling of a sterilised product into sterilised packaging under sterile conditions, so that a long shelf life is reached without refrigeration or subsequent heat treatment. The product is sterilised beforehand, in food usually by high heating. Product path, packaging and filler enclosure are sterilised, the packaging with H2O2, peracetic acid or steam. Sterile air, monitoring of the sterile conditions and validation complete the system. Unlike hot filling, where the hot product itself decontaminates the container, the packaging here is decontaminated separately. Used for milk, juices, sauces and pharmaceutical products.
From practice
Aseptic filling is a process project and cannot be handled as a machine purchase. Product preparation, sterilisation, filler, packaging and cleaning chemistry must be validated together, and the operating team needs different knowledge from a standard filling line. Anyone with a sterility problem seldom finds the cause at the filler alone. It can lie with the packaging, a seal, the sterile air or a door that was opened too early. Do not underestimate the time needed for validation and regulatory coordination. And cost honestly into the operating budget the sterilisation time before every production start and the consumption of chemicals and sterile air.
ATEX
Quality & safetyShort name for the EU rules on explosion protection that apply to manufacturers of equipment for potentially explosive atmospheres and to the operators of such areas. Explosive atmospheres arise from combustible dusts such as flour, sugar or milk powder, and from gases and solvent vapours. The operator divides the areas into zones and records this in the explosion protection document, into zones 0, 1 and 2 for gas and zones 20, 21 and 22 for dust. The manufacturer supplies equipment of the category that matches the zone. Ignition sources such as hot surfaces and electrostatic charging are assessed as well.
From practice
In packaging areas, Ex zones often arise unnoticed, at bagging plants, flour silos, icing sugar dusters or sugar conveyors. Icing sugar in the packing hall is regularly overlooked, because supposedly nothing but packing happens there. The operator must designate the zones in the explosion protection document, and the machine supplier provides equipment of the appropriate category. To do that, the supplier needs the zone for each installation location in writing, which is why it belongs in the URS. If it is missing, the machine gets retrofitted. ATEX-compliant motors, sensors and extraction systems are considerably more expensive than standard components and have longer lead times. Also think of dust deposits on machine parts, since whirled-up dust can create a zone in the first place. Settle the classification early with the explosion protection specialist.
Audit trail
Quality & safetyA tamper-proof, chronologically ordered record of all relevant changes to the data and parameters of a system. It states who changed what, from which value to which, when, and why. Typical sources are the machine controller, the HMI, recipe management and the electronic batch record. It depends on personal user accounts with graded rights, a reliable system clock and entries that can be neither altered nor deleted afterwards. In regulated sectors the audit trail is mandatory, for example in pharma under 21 CFR Part 11 and EU GMP Annex 11. In the food industry it is increasingly required.
From practice
An audit trail is only as good as the login in front of it. If all operators share one password at the HMI, the log ends up saying operator and nothing more, and that helps nobody. With new machines, clarify which parameters are recorded, how long the data is kept, where it is stored and who evaluates it. At acceptance, try changing a setpoint and then look for the entry. Sometimes it is simply not there. An audit trail nobody ever reads only proves its worth after a complaint, but then it does so very well. A glance now and then at changed sealing temperatures, limits and recipes costs little.
AutoCAD
Digitalisation & AIA widely used CAD system from Autodesk for 2D drawings and 3D models. Its drawing format DWG and the related exchange format DXF are the de facto standard for data exchange in mechanical engineering, plant design and architecture. Drawing content is organised in layers, and recurring elements are stored as blocks. In plant design AutoCAD is used mainly for 2D layouts, installation plans and foundation plans. 3D machine models are usually created in parametric design systems and passed on as 2D derivations or exchange files, in neutral form for example as a STEP file.
From practice
Almost every machine supplier delivers layout drawings as DWG or DXF. Explicitly request the installation drawing in the exchange format in the tender, and not just as a PDF. Only then can the machine be placed cleanly in your hall layout and checked against material flow. A PDF can be looked at but not pushed into place. Ask for media connections, maintenance areas and door swing areas to be in the drawing as well, otherwise the machine fits on paper and no longer once the control cabinet door opens. Also specify which coordinate system and unit apply, otherwise drawings arrive at the wrong scale or rotated.
Automated storage and retrieval system (AS/RS)
IntralogisticsAn automated storage and retrieval system for containers and cartons, served by stacker cranes or shuttles. The goods are brought to a workstation, known as goods-to-person picking. Containers arrive in the order in which they are needed, which makes the picking sequence-accurate. Designs include the stacker crane in the aisle, the shuttle per level and compact stores in which containers are stacked in blocks and served by vehicles on a grid. A warehouse management system administers the container locations. Economical with a high item count and limited floor space. The pallet-based high-bay warehouse is a separate term.
From practice
An AS/RS pays off with many small items and high access frequency on limited floor space, typically spare parts stores, small parts or e-commerce. The interface to production makes the difference. How containers reach the line, how they get back and who sets the priority are points that some projects leave open while the store itself is planned in detail. A Shopfloor Analysis often shows that it is not the warehouse but the routes between warehouse and line that set the takt. Also ask what happens when a device stops. Without emergency operation or a way round, the whole aisle stays out of reach.
Autonomous mobile robot (AMR)
IntralogisticsAutonomous mobile robot, the more freely navigating evolution of the AGV. AMRs map their surroundings themselves, usually with laser scanners and the SLAM method (simultaneous localisation and mapping), and locate themselves on that map. They avoid obstacles dynamically and need no fixed guide track such as magnetic tape or an induction loop. The vehicles come as platforms with a roller or lifting top and as tugger units. A fleet manager assigns the jobs and regulates traffic. More flexible with layout changes, more demanding in traffic control with many vehicles.
From practice
AMRs pay off with changing routes, many handover points and layouts that change often. You pay for that with traffic management for many vehicles, WLAN coverage throughout the hall and clear rules for mixed traffic with forklifts and people. The dead spot behind the racking is the classic. Then the vehicle stops and waits for a job that arrived long ago. Also check how the vehicle behaves at handover points when the floor is dirty or pallets sit crooked. Route analysis comes before the investment. Without solid transport volumes per route, any vehicle count stays a guess. Also ask who clears a stuck vehicle, and how fast.
Availability
KPIsFigure giving the share of actual running time in the planned production time. It is calculated as planned time minus downtime, divided by planned time. Losses arise from faults, changeovers and waiting for material or personnel. Availability is the first factor of OEE and usually the one with the greatest potential for improvement. It should be distinguished from technical availability, which only considers stoppages caused by the machine itself and appears in supply contracts as a guaranteed value.
From practice
An availability promise is only as good as the measuring rule behind it. Write into the contract which stoppages count: machine, packaging material, product, operator. Also define the period of measurement and the formats it covers. One good day says little about a month with three format changes and film from a poor batch. The supplier usually guarantees only machine-related availability. Bad cups, torn film and the missing forklift driver are on your account, and the line stands anyway. So insist on proper downtime recording with cause codes from acceptance onwards. Only once the coding of the stoppages is settled does the percentage figure in the contract mean anything.
B
Bag sealing machine
Packaging technologyPackaging machine that closes filled bags and flexible packs. Common methods are sealing by heat, pressure or ultrasound, as well as sewing and clipping. Among sealers there are hand sealers, impulse sealers, which heat only while the seal is made, and continuous sealers, in which the bag runs on belts through a heating zone and a cooling zone. Bags of plastic, aluminium foil or laminated film can be processed. Automatic models can label or print the bag before closing. In the food industry the closure is meant to seal the product tightly and so protect its shelf life.
From practice
The closure must suit the contents, the bag quality and the transport, whether it is sealed, sewn or clipped. Common faults come from product caught in the seam and from uneven bag feeding. A sensor for seam inspection and clean extraction before closing save a lot of rework. Have the machine show you how the bag mouth is pulled smooth before it is closed, because a wrinkle in the seam often shows up as a leak only at the customer. Do not judge the seam by eye alone. At acceptance, ask for a leak test on bags from the running line, and use real product, because a trial run with clean goods hides the product caught in the seam.
Ball screw
Mechanical engineering & componentsA machine element that converts rotary motion into linear motion. Balls run in helical grooves between screw shaft and nut and are returned to the start of their circuit through a recirculation channel in the nut. Rolling friction gives a much higher efficiency than a trapezoidal lead screw, so a ball screw is generally not self-locking. Vertical axes need a holding brake on the motor. Characteristic values are nominal diameter, lead, dynamic load rating, accuracy class and preload. Rolled screws are cheaper, ground screws more accurate. Ball screws are found in linear axes, lifting units, electric cylinders and format adjustments. The screw is usually supported by a fixed bearing at one end and a floating bearing at the other.
From practice
A ball screw copes badly with dirt and side loads. The nut is built for axial force. If it also has to guide the carriage because the linear guide is misaligned or undersized, the screw will not last long. At acceptance, check that screw and guide run truly parallel and that a bellows protects the screw from product residue. On vertical axes the brake belongs in every design review, because without it the load simply runs down when the power fails. Screw and nut are matched as a pair at the factory. So ask whether nuts are available on their own or only as a complete assembly. A nut is never wound off the screw without a mounting sleeve. Otherwise the balls end up on the shop floor and the nut goes back to the manufacturer.
Band wrapper
Packaging technologyMachine that gathers several products into one sales unit with a band of paper or film. The products are grouped in a pattern beforehand, the band is laid around the bundle and glued or sealed at the overlap. It uses much less material than a shrink film sleeve and increasingly replaces it in multipacks. Typical products are cans, cups and bottles. Design is a compromise between band strength and the handling stability of the bundle.
From practice
Paper bands save plastic and are considered easy to recycle, which makes them a topic in every multipack project with the EU Packaging and Packaging Waste Regulation, the PPWR, in mind. The limit is stackability and transport load. A multipack with a band tolerates less handling than one in shrink film, and when the pallet shifts in the lorry the bundle is the first to show it. Band width and the gluing or sealing method count in the design. Also tell the supplier whether the bundle travels in a carton or loose on a tray, as that changes the required holding force considerably. Have bands checked with a transport simulation on the finished pallet before the changeover is released.
Barrier coating
Packaging technologyA thin layer on paper, board or plastic film that shields the product against water vapour, oxygen, grease, oil or the transfer of aromas. It is applied as a dispersion or lacquer, by extrusion, or vapour-deposited as an extremely thin metal or oxide layer. The barrier depends on the coating material, layer thickness and freedom from defects, and is described by values such as oxygen transmission rate and water vapour transmission rate. In food packaging the coating protects shelf life and quality without affecting the product. Bio-based variants made from renewable raw materials are being researched as an alternative to conventional systems.
From practice
Coatings are increasingly replacing aluminium foil and multilayer films so that packaging remains recyclable. For the line this means that sealing windows and friction values change. A film that looks the same on the data sheet runs differently. It seals at a slightly different temperature, slides differently over the forming shoulder and may stick to the jaws when warm. So test new coated materials on the machine at nominal output and under the climate conditions of your plant, in summer as well as in winter. A coating that is tight in the laboratory can leak after creasing or at the seal seam. Check the finished pack, not just the reel.
Base load (standby consumption)
Production & energyEnergy consumption that occurs independently of production, including at night and at weekends. It covers lighting, ventilation, heating and cooling as well as IT and controls, and also machines in standby with heated sealing jaws, running vacuum pumps or idling conveyors. In compressed air, base load comes mainly from leakage. It is determined from the load profile during production-free periods, for example the night from Saturday to Sunday. Part of it is technically necessary, for cold stores or safety systems, for instance. The rest can be reduced through shutdown concepts and energy saving states in the machines. In the energy industry, by contrast, base load means the grid load that is present around the clock.
From practice
The most honest view of a plant is the load profile of a Sunday night. Nobody is producing, yet the factory often draws a surprising amount of power. Usually a compressor keeps running because the network is hissing in many places. Then there are machines that never get switched off completely, because heating up on Monday takes too long. Sometimes that is justified, often it is just habit. For new machines, ask for an energy saving state that lowers the heaters, switches off vacuum and drives and comes back up at the push of a button or on a timer. Put it in the specification, or it will not come. And settle who shuts off the compressed air to a hall on Friday. A solenoid valve in the supply line that closes on a timer does not forget.
Basic / detail engineering
Project management & CAPEXTwo-stage planning. Basic engineering fixes the concept, layout and main components and forms the basis for the tender and budget approval. Detail engineering works these decisions up to construction-ready level, meaning the drawings, lists and connection plans from which the plant is built and installed. How the work is split between operator, planner and supplier is defined in the project. Skip basic engineering and you pay for it twice over in detail engineering.
From practice
Basic engineering produces the layout, material-flow concept, capacity balance, main component list and a cost estimate with a stated accuracy. That is the basis for the approval request and the tender. Detail engineering follows after award with foundation drawings, utility connections, interface lists and the safety concept. Keeping the two stages cleanly separated avoids detail questions being decided within the tender that would restrict competition. Mix them and you get quotations built on half-finished planning, and you pay for the clarification later as a variation order. Define in the basic stage what the supplier may design freely and what not.
Basis weight (grammage)
Packaging technologyMass of a paper, board or corrugated board per square metre, given in g/m². For corrugated board, the total basis weight results from the liners, fluting and adhesive. Because the fluting medium is drawn longer when it is corrugated, more paper goes into the web than the surface area suggests. Basis weight affects material cost, strength and the weight of the shipping unit. On its own it is not a reliable measure of stacking strength, which is described by values such as edge crush resistance (ECT) and box compression strength (BCT).
From practice
Buyers like to compare only grammage and price per square metre. That is misleading, because a lighter construction using better papers often delivers more edge crush resistance than a heavier one made from recovered paper. Buy strength values, not weight. Conversely, reducing basis weight only saves money if the stacking factor in the warehouse still holds and the cartons do not buckle on the line. In a quote comparison, have the constructions disclosed: paper grades, flute type and basis weight per ply. Two offers with the same grammage can differ clearly in a stacking test. At goods-in, a spot check of basis weight and moisture pays off. A delivery at the lower end of the tolerance behaves differently on the line than one at the upper end.
Batch control (ISA-88)
Automation & roboticsA standard (IEC 61512) for automating batch-oriented processes such as charging, mixing and cooking. It separates the recipe (what should happen) from the equipment (with what) and structures sequences into procedure, unit procedure, operation and phase. The physical model divides the plant into process cell, unit, equipment module and control module. Recipes range from the general recipe through the master recipe to the control recipe, which executes the individual batch. This way recipes can be changed without reprogramming the control system.
From practice
ISA-88 pays off once several products run on the same plant and recipes are changed frequently. The effort lies in a clean breakdown of the phases: phases that are too coarse are inflexible and ones that are too fine become unmanageable. Clarify who is allowed to maintain recipes and how batch reports are generated. Without recipe discipline and training, even a batch control system is quickly bypassed with manual intervention again. Demand that phases can be tested individually and run in manual mode, because at two in the morning only the programmer will help you otherwise. Have recipe changes logged with version and user, otherwise nobody knows after the next complaint who changed what.
Batch management
Digitalisation & AIManagement of quantities of a raw material, packaging material or product that were made under the same conditions and are therefore labelled and handled together. Each batch receives a unique batch number and attributes such as production date, best-before date, origin and quality status. Via the production order, batch management links the raw material and packaging batches used with the finished goods batches made from them. This allows tracing in both directions, from what went into a product to where a batch was delivered. For food, the General Food Law Regulation (EC) No 178/2002 requires traceability one step back and one step forward. Blocked batches may be neither consumed nor shipped.
From practice
The gaps in batch management usually sit where material moves on by hand. A silo filled from three deliveries, a tub of rework that goes back into the mixer the next day, a reel of film that runs across two orders. If nobody books anything there, traceability ends at exactly that point. In an emergency you then block a whole week of product instead of one shift. Run through it once with a real batch and time how long it takes until you know which raw materials went in and which customers received it. The IFS Food or BRCGS auditors want to see such a test anyway. On new lines, the question of where batches change and where they are recorded belongs in the user requirement specification. Later it tends to be dismissed as a pure software topic, and by then the line is already built.
Batch size
CommercialThe quantity of a product that is manufactured in one run without a changeover. It means a production batch, not the ordered quantity. Small batches increase flexibility and reduce stock, but cost more changeover time per piece. Large batches cut the changeover cost per piece, but tie up material and storage space. The economic batch size results from the ratio of changeover costs to stock holding costs. On a packaging line a batch ends with a change of format, packaging material or label and, where necessary, with cleaning.
From practice
Batches are getting smaller, which is why changeover time often counts for more than cycle rate on new lines. A machine with a high nominal output helps little if it is rebuilt for a long time after every order. Before you enlarge batches and build up stock, cut the changeover time, for example with SMED. Then small batches become economical. Scheduling should sequence formats with similar settings back to back, so all the pouches in one format first, then the changeover. At acceptance, ask for the changeover time between your most frequent and your rarest format. The fastest variant alone says little.
Battery limits
Project management & CAPEXThe contractually defined limit of a supplier’s scope of supply against work carried out by others and by other trades. It fixes where the conveyor technology ends and who supplies the utility connection, control-system integration, safety fencing and foundation. Each battery limit comes with a handover point, for example the terminal strip in the control cabinet, the flange at the connection or the edge of the belt, and with responsibility for supply, installation and commissioning. Battery limits are marked on the layout and detailed in the interface list. The term comes from plant engineering.
From practice
Many variations arise in the no-man’s-land between two trades. That is the last metre of conveyor belt, the cable from the control cabinet to the machine, the compressed-air shut-off valve or the emergency-stop chain across the line. Mark every limit with a handover point and responsibility on the layout. With three companies involved, an interface overview sheet belongs with every order. Otherwise, when something stops, everyone points at someone else. Go through the limits at the kick-off with all trades together on the layout, and each one sees what is still missing from their quotation. Read the quotations also for what is missing: if no supplier mentions cable trays or fixing material, you pay for them later.
Belt conveyor
IntralogisticsA continuous conveyor on which a circulating belt carries the goods. The belt runs over a drive pulley and a return pulley and is supported by a slider bed or by carrying idlers. A take-up keeps the belt under tension, while crowned pulleys or adjustable rollers keep it tracking straight. Belts consist of fabric plies with cover layers of PVC, polyurethane or rubber, and grades suitable for food contact are used where needed. Fitted with cleats or flights, the belt conveyor also handles inclines. In packaging lines it transports single products and small packs, while for bulk material it often runs with a troughed belt. It is distinct from modular belt conveyors and roller conveyors.
From practice
Everyone likes to turn the tensioning screw on a belt conveyor when the belt runs to one side. After a few weeks it is tensioned crooked and wanders off even more. Decide who adjusts the tracking and mark the basic setting. For cleaning, a quick-release tensioner is worth its weight in gold. Without one the belt only gets wiped from above, and underneath grows whatever should not grow there. Fabric belts with open edges soak up moisture, which is a hygiene problem in wet areas. When ordering, clarify how the belt is joined into a loop. A welded endless belt only fits a conveyor that can be opened sideways or taken apart for it. Otherwise the splice has to be made on site with a press and a specialist. Keep a ready-made spare belt of exactly the right length in stock.
Bill of materials (BOM)
Project management & CAPEXA structured list of all assemblies, individual parts and bought-in components of a machine, with quantity, drawing or item number and manufacturer. It is the basis for manufacturing, procurement, spare parts management and maintenance. A distinction is made between the design BOM, which shows the functional structure, the manufacturing BOM, which follows the assembly sequence, and the spare and wear parts BOM that matters most to the operator. The BOM is multi-level, so an assembly contains further assemblies and individual parts. It is created in design, usually in the CAD or ERP system, and changes with every drawing revision.
From practice
I always ask for the BOM with the manufacturer’s designation and the manufacturer’s item number. A list that only knows the machine builder’s internal number ties you to them for every order, and even for a standard part you then have to ask the machine builder instead of the dealer round the corner. Check whether the bought-in parts comply with your plant standard, meaning drives, sensors and pneumatics. Otherwise you have one more make in the store. An electronic BOM that can be imported into the maintenance system saves more time than any discount negotiation. Watch that the status matches the plant: after commissioning, the BOM has to be brought to the as-built status.
Bin picking
Automation & roboticsRemoval of randomly positioned parts from a container by a robot. A 3D sensor captures the scene as a point cloud, the software recognises the parts from a model, calculates grip points and checks whether the gripper collides with the container wall. Afterwards the robot places the part in the correct orientation, often at a handover station where the position is checked once more after the grip. Challenging cases include tangled parts, emptying the last few parts, and glossy or transparent surfaces.
From practice
Bin picking is mature for metal parts and stable cartons, but remains difficult for pouches, films and transparent items. On a project, the recognition rate with a nearly empty container and the time for image capture plus path calculation decide the outcome, because that time counts towards the cycle. Clarify what happens with parts that cannot be gripped, how the container is shaken or exchanged and who brings the reference parts for the test. Insist on a test with parts from running production instead of clean samples, because dirt, deformation and batch change the recognition. Define the acceptance criteria beforehand, including what counts as a failed pick.
Bio-based barrier coatings
Packaging technologyCoatings made from renewable raw materials that are applied to paper or plastic packaging and form a barrier against moisture, oxygen, grease or aromas. Typical base materials are cellulose, starch or proteins. They are an alternative to conventional systems, which often rest on fossil raw materials, and reduce the share of fossil plastics in the pack. Bio-based says only something about the origin of the raw material and nothing about biodegradability or recyclability. Their use is growing as sustainability requirements for packaging material increase.
From practice
Bio-based coatings are a topic for the future, but not yet mature for every application. Barrier values, sealing behaviour and availability vary, from batch to batch and from supplier to supplier. Ask for values at your own humidity rather than at standard climate, because many barriers lose effect in damp conditions. Pilot with one product and one line, and document machine parameters and shelf-life tests before you convert the range. Also clarify with the recycler whether the coated material belongs in the waste paper stream or the plastics stream before you market it as recyclable.
Blank (case blank)
Packaging technologyThe flat-delivered, die-cut and scored corrugated sheet from which a case erector, wrap-around case packer or tray former forms the pack. Depending on the machine it arrives as a flat-folded carton with a glued flap, which the erector opens, or as an open sheet that is only folded around the product at the machine. The design follows the FEFCO catalogue. Quality results from flute type, grammage and scoring. Dimensional deviations, flatness and moisture of the blank have a direct effect on running behaviour in the magazine and folding station.
From practice
The blank is the packaging material with the greatest influence on the fault rate at the end of the line. Damp, warped sheets or inconsistent scoring jam in the magazine and tear when folded, and the machine gets the blame. Dust and burrs from the die-cut edge also build up in the magazine and at the pick-off points. Fix tolerances, storage conditions and inspection criteria in the specification, and trial every new supplier on the machine before switching. Blanks from cold or damp storage should be given time to adjust in the hall before processing. Check a sample at goods receipt for scoring and flatness, otherwise the shift hunts for the fault at the machine.
Blank magazine
Packaging technologyStorage hopper on case erectors, cartoners and wrap-around case packers, from which flat-lying blanks are removed one at a time and fed into the erecting process. There are horizontal, vertical and inclined designs, and removal is by vacuum cups or mechanically. Side guides and stops are set to the blank format. Refilling is done by hand or automatically, and on some machines while the machine is running. Magazine capacity, refill method and blank quality determine unattended running time and the fault rate. Sensors report the fill level and detect when two blanks are pulled at once.
From practice
Many cartoners stop not because of the machine but because the magazine is empty or two blanks are picked at once. Check the magazine capacity against your output and work out how many minutes the machine runs without refilling. Refilling once an hour hardly anyone notices, but every ten minutes ties up one person at the machine. Watch for an ergonomic refill height, because a magazine that has to be loaded above head height will not be loaded carefully on the night shift. Warped or damp board will not run through any magazine, so the storage conditions of the blanks matter too. Double-blank detection and a level sensor belong in the basic specification.
Blister machine
Packaging technologyPackaging machine that produces blister packs. In the forming station a plastic film is heated and thermoformed into cavities. After the product is placed in, the machine seals on a lidding layer of film, board or aluminium and punches out the single pack. The lidding layer protects the product from moisture and dust. Machines differ in their degree of automation, for example in film feeding, trimming and product loading, which can also be done by hand, and in the size and shape of the cavities. In the food industry they are used to pack single portions such as cheese, sausage or fruit.
From practice
With blister machines the costs sit in the format tooling and in film consumption. A format change usually means a new tool set, from the forming die to the punch. So check tool change time, tool price per format and lead time. A new product without a tool waits for weeks, and the tool often decides the start date. Ask about punching waste as well. Punching leaves a skeleton of film that counts as loss and has to go somewhere, and the arrangement of the cavities on the web decides how big that skeleton is. For food products, also look at the hygienic design and the cleanability of the forming station.
Blister packaging
Packaging technologyPackaging made of a deep-drawn plastic tray with individual cavities or pockets into which the product is placed. The cavities are closed with a lidding layer of film, board or aluminium, which is sealed or glued onto the rim. A blister protects against moisture and dust and keeps the product visible. It is used for single portions of food, for chewing gum, food supplements and other small items. Blister machines produce it by forming the tray, loading the product and sealing the lidding layer. The material mix of plastic and board makes recycling harder, which is why interest in mono-material and recyclable designs is growing.
From practice
Blisters offer product protection and visibility but face recycling pressure because of the material mix of plastic and board. Check alternatives such as paperboard skin packs or mono-material blisters before investing in new tooling. The PPWR is changing the framework here. Tooling is tied to the format, so a wrong decision stays with you for a long time. Have samples in the new material run on your machine before you order a tool. Ask your recycler as well whether the composite can be separated. Mono-material often seals in a narrower window, and board takes up moisture when it stands in the warehouse.
Block stacking
IntralogisticsStorage of pallets without racking, stacked on the hall floor and arranged in blocks. The depth of a block results from the number of pallets one behind the other, the height from the number of pallets on top of each other. Space-efficient for large quantities of the same item, but without direct access to every pallet, since only the front and top pallets can be reached. Last in, first out is the normal case, and removal in first in, first out sequence takes extra effort. It requires stackable load units with sufficient compression strength and a level floor with adequate load-bearing capacity.
From practice
Block stacking only works to first in, first out with discipline and clear block formation per item and batch, ideally with floor markings. If you mix batches in one lane, the first retrieval has you moving half the store while the shift stands by and watches. Stack height and pallet stability limit its use, and a good pack pattern pays off doubly here. Check what the bottom pallet bears once the carton has absorbed moisture. The aisle width for the forklift needs planning too, otherwise the block corners take the damage. Before building racking, ask first whether a better organised block store is enough.
Bottle unscrambler
Packaging technologyA machine that singulates empty plastic bottles supplied in bulk from a hopper, uprights them and hands them over standing to the line. Common as a rotary unscrambler with pockets in which the bottles are detected and placed in the correct orientation. Bottles that do not drop into a pocket correctly are rejected and usually fed back to the hopper. Downstream there is often an air conveyor that guides the bottles by the neck ring. The unscrambler is the alternative to a stretch-blow moulder directly coupled to the filler, when bottles are bought in.
From practice
Unscramblers are sensitive to bottle geometry. Light, tall or asymmetric bottles tip over, oval bottles jam in the pockets. Every bottle shape is its own format with its own pockets. Have every format tested at the manufacturer with your own bottles, including bottles from different deliveries so that the real tolerances show up. Then check hopper capacity and how the hopper can be emptied at changeover. Leftover bottles in the hopper cost time, and light bottles tend to pick up a static charge and cling to the guides. The brochure output usually applies to the easy bottle. What the unscrambler still manages with your smallest and lightest bottle is not stated there.
Bottleneck
KPIsThe station that limits the throughput of the overall system. A line produces only as much as its slowest part lets through. The theory of constraints after Goldratt describes this relationship. An improvement at a station away from the bottleneck therefore does not raise the output of the line. First the bottleneck is found from downtime data, queue observation and cycle times, and then it is relieved specifically. After that the bottleneck moves to another station, and the investigation starts again. A bottleneck can be a machine, but also the material supply, an inspection point or the shift staffing.
From practice
An Efficiency Day begins with the search for the bottleneck. You look at where products back up, where the next machine waits and which station stops the line most often. Downtime data from the MES are often enough, otherwise a stopwatch and one shift of patience will do. Then the bottleneck is relieved, right where it sits. Check the buffers before and after it, keep changeovers at the bottleneck short, and arrange breaks and shift handover so that it never runs empty. A minute lost at the bottleneck is a minute lost for the whole line. Then measure again, because the bottleneck moves. I look first at where goods are waiting and only then at the evaluation. A queue often says more than a chart.
The box compression test measures how much compressive force a carton withstands before it fails. In the test, the carton is pressed between two plates of a testing machine, normally under standard climate conditions. The result, the BCT value, depends on paper grade, flute type, carton dimensions and scoring, and can be estimated from edge crush resistance (ECT), board thickness and carton perimeter. That value determines how high cartons can be stacked and how pallets can be placed on top of one another in the warehouse. Anyone who changes carton dimensions, pack pattern or pallet height must re-check the value.
From practice
The BCT value becomes an issue the moment you change carton dimensions or pack pattern. Taller stacks or flatter cartons increase the load on the bottom layer, and a pallet in the high-bay rack may suddenly carry a load nobody calculated. Have the value confirmed by the carton supplier, and remember that hand holes weaken the carton further. The lab value applies to standard climate and a short test time. Humidity, long storage, pallet overhang and misaligned cartons take a good deal off it, and in the warehouse much less is usually left. I therefore always ask for the value at the planned storage time and calculate with a stacking factor.
BRCGS (Global Standard Food Safety)
Quality & safetyA British food safety standard, recognised by the GFSI like IFS Food and required by many retail chains. Plants are assessed in audits by certification bodies. The standard sets requirements for the HACCP system, hygiene, foreign-body control, traceability, personnel and equipment. For machines, what counts most is cleanability, materials, covers, inspection points for foreign bodies and documentation. Glass and hard plastic are kept in a register at the plant. The publisher revises the standard regularly, so in a project the version valid at the time of the audit applies.
From practice
For machine projects, the requirements for foreign-body control, cleanability, the glass and hard plastic register and documentation count. Involve the quality manager early, ideally as early as the URS. If the auditor first stands in front of the new machine during the walk-round, it is too late to talk about covers. Retrofitting covers, materials or inspection points afterwards is expensive and delays acceptance. Auditors like to look at loose parts, glass and lamps, cavities that cannot be cleaned and cables above open product. Have the supplier give you the materials in the product area and a list of all glass and hard plastic items, and the register is quickly updated.
Brownfield / greenfield
Project management & CAPEXTwo starting situations for an investment project. Greenfield means a new build on undeveloped land with no legacy constraints, where building, utilities and layout are planned freely. Brownfield means a project within an existing operation with existing equipment, interfaces and production pressure. That calls for more planning of conversion windows, temporary workarounds and minimal downtime. Connection to existing utilities, conveyor lines and controls determines effort and sequence there.
From practice
Brownfield projects need a conversion concept that records which plant keeps running, what conversion windows exist, such as weekends or factory shutdowns, and which temporary workarounds bridge the gap. Relocations, temporary conveyor technology and night work often cause the largest share of the costs, more than the new machine. On top of that, existing drawings often differ from what actually stands in the hall. A survey or 3D laser scan before planning costs less than a machine that does not fit through the door. Greenfield is simpler to plan but demands early decisions on utilities, foundations and building interfaces that can hardly be changed later.
Budget quotation
Project management & CAPEXA non-binding price indication for investment planning that is quick to obtain and has a wider range than a binding quotation. It is not reliable for the award. In the CAPEX process it serves as the basis for the approval request. The award then needs binding quotations based on the URS. A budget quotation usually contains a rough description, the basic price of the machine and a list of options, but no binding performance data or deadlines.
From practice
A budget quotation clarifies, for example, whether the line costs closer to 300,000 or to 800,000 euros, and it can be obtained within a few days. It contains no binding performance data and often excludes the periphery, meaning conveyor technology, safety technology and installation. In the approval request, add a contingency to the budget quotation and agree its size with controlling. List ancillary costs such as installation, utilities and training as separate items. Get at least two budget quotations, otherwise you have one number and no range. Ask the supplier what is not included before you write the figure into the request.
Buffer system
Packaging technologyA storage section between two machines that decouples short stoppages. If the cartoner stands for a few minutes, the flow wrapper keeps producing into the buffer, and the buffer empties again as soon as the cartoner runs. Designs are belt buffers, accumulation tables and spiral conveyors. Level sensors report the fill level to the control system, which adjusts the speed of the adjacent machines. Size and position depend on the frequency and duration of stoppages and on the quantity the buffer has to take up. For fresh and chilled goods, the dwell time in the buffer limits the usable size.
From practice
Buffers are the line’s shock absorbers. They absorb short stoppages and keep the bottleneck running, on many lines the filler. Size and position should come from the downtime analysis and not from guesswork. Before any buffer discussion I look at the downtime data first: how often, how long and on which machine. The most common mistake is a buffer in the wrong place that does not protect the bottleneck at all. Depending on the line, the buffer has to protect the bottleneck from starving or from blocking. A spiral conveyor needs height, an accumulation table needs floor space, and both are settled early in the layout. Also check product protection and hygiene. A buffer that is hard to clean becomes a problem at audit.
Burst strength
Quality & safetyThe pressure at which a clamped paper or corrugated board sample ruptures under a hydraulically inflated membrane, given in kPa. The method is called the Mullen test. Burst strength is a characteristic value for resistance to point loading and internal pressure. It was long the main criterion for corrugated board grades, which is why older grade tables still contain burst values. For stacking strength the edge crush test is more informative. For impacts and pointed objects, puncture resistance and the drop test complete the picture.
From practice
Burst strength tells you whether a carton survives handling and the parcel carrier. It does not tell you whether the carton is stackable on a pallet. Many specifications still carry burst values from old grade tables, while the supplier has long since switched to ECT-optimised papers. Then the test certificate and the specification no longer match, and the argument about the supposed deviation starts. Decide by the load case. Assess parcel shipping and heavy single items by burst strength, pallet storage by ECT. And write into the specification which value applies when both are demanded, otherwise you get whatever suits the supplier at the time.
Business case
CommercialThe economic justification for an investment, with investment sum, ongoing costs, expected savings and revenues, assumptions, risks and alternatives including the do-nothing option. Metrics such as payback period, net present value or ROI are derived from these. The do-nothing option describes continued operation of the existing plant without investment and provides the benchmark. Several scenarios are often calculated, for example with different capacity usage or ramp-up curves. The business case is the core of the investment request and is updated as the project changes.
From practice
Most business cases contain assumptions that cause trouble later: capacity usage that is never reached, staff savings nobody implements, a ramp-up curve planned too steeply. Make every assumption explicit and name who is responsible for it. Whoever approves the request should be able to see which two assumptions move the result most. Solid actual data from the existing line, for example from an Efficiency Day, is the best basis. Calculate the do-nothing option honestly, including downtime costs and spare parts risk of the old plant. I like to have a cautious variant calculated as well and see whether the request still holds up.
C
Cable routing
Mechanical engineering & componentsInstallation and protection of electrical and pneumatic lines on machines and lines. This covers cable ducts, cable trays, drag chains for moving axes, cable glands, and the physical separation of the lines for power, signals and data. The separation prevents interference, because motor cables can couple into signal cables. Drag chains carry highly flexible cables designed for this purpose. Requirements include bend radii, strain relief, accessibility, cleanability and protection from mechanical damage.
From practice
Cables at handover points between trades often end up as nobody’s responsibility, and then they lie loose on the floor. Fix the routes in the layout and clarify who supplies them. In wet areas, open, sloped cable trays with wall clearance work better than enclosed ducts, where water and product can collect. For drag chains, watch the bend radius of the cables and keep spare capacity. A cable that has to be pulled in later finds no room in a packed chain and ends up lying next to it. Also clarify who documents the cables after a modification, otherwise the wiring diagram shows something different from the wall.
Calibration management (test equipment)
Quality & safetyThe organised control of all measuring and test equipment used to check quality-relevant characteristics. Each instrument receives an identifier and a status label and is kept in a calibration register with location, measuring range and interval. At defined intervals it is calibrated, that is compared against a reference standard traceable to national standards. An instrument found out of tolerance is blocked, and it is checked whether released products are affected. Calibration determines the deviation, adjustment removes it. Legal verification of instruments used in trade, called Eichung in Germany, is a separate matter under the Measurement and Verification Act. ISO 9001 requires suitable and, where traceability is needed, calibrated measuring resources.
From practice
In an audit the first thing anyone spots is the calliper with an expired label. The real problem lies elsewhere. If calibration finds a deviation, you have to assess everything that was measured and released with that instrument since its last calibration. With a yearly interval that is a lot of product. Equipment that comes with a new machine is just as awkward: test weights for the checkweigher, test pieces for the metal detector, sometimes a torque meter for the closures. It ends up in the control cabinet or with the line leader and appears on no list. At acceptance I have all supplied test equipment handed over with its calibration certificates and enter it in the register straight away. And the fitter’s private calliper from his own toolbox has no business at a measuring point used for release decisions.
Cap sorter
Packaging technologyFeeding device that singulates screw closures or caps from a hopper, orients them correctly and feeds them to the capper via a chute or conveyor. Designs are centrifugal sorters, vibratory sorters and elevator sorters, often with an incline conveyor for refilling from bulk containers. On a centrifugal sorter a rotating disc carries the caps to the edge, where they are lined up in a track and only passed on in the correct orientation. Misoriented caps are rejected and returned to the hopper.
From practice
The cap sorter causes downtime more often than the capper itself. Typical triggers are caps with flash, changeovers with many adjustment points, sorting chutes that jam, and closures damaged because they circulate too long. Ask about sorting output with a margin over line output and about the number of change parts. Take caps from different batches to the FAT, including the poorer ones, because injection moulded parts vary. Clarify how and how often the caps are refilled, because an empty hopper is the most banal stoppage. Hygienically, cap feed is critical. An enclosed design and UV sterilisation of the chute are common for sensitive products.
CAPA
Quality & safetyShort for corrective and preventive action. It refers to the controlled process a company uses to handle deviations, complaints, audit findings and quality incidents. The process runs from the immediate correction that contains the effect, such as blocking stock, through root cause analysis and the corrective action against the cause, to preventing similar failures on other lines. It closes with a check of whether the actions have worked. Each case is documented with an owner, a due date and evidence. The term is most widespread in pharmaceuticals and medical devices. Food safety standards such as IFS Food and BRCGS likewise require corrective actions based on root cause analysis. The 8D report is a widespread format for an individual case.
From practice
A CAPA list tells you a lot about a plant. If nearly every action reads staff retrained, hardly anyone looked for the real cause. And without an effectiveness check nobody knows whether the training achieved anything. Many actions are technical. A sensor is to be retrofitted, a guard modified, a chute redesigned. Items like these land with maintenance or the project team, often with no budget and no date, and get extended again at the next audit. Settle early who pays for them. Before writing the user requirement specification for a replacement line, I always read the CAPA list of the old line. It states fairly precisely what the new machine has to do better, and no supplier knows that list unless you hand it over.
Capital expenditure, meaning spending on long-lived fixed assets, for example a new packaging line or a palletiser. CAPEX is capitalised and depreciated over its useful life, in contrast to ongoing operating costs (OPEX), which appear directly in the result of the year. It is released through an investment request with a budget and a business case. The costs include everything needed up to productive use, so usually periphery, installation, bringing the machine into the hall and commissioning as well.
From practice
The CAPEX process begins long before ordering. First the need is justified, then options are compared, budget quotations obtained, the business case calculated and approval given. Tender, award, execution and acceptance follow. What is often missing is the post-completion review, meaning a look at whether the promised savings were actually achieved. Anyone who measures this plans the next project better. Build the review into the approval request with a date and an owner, otherwise nobody looks after it once the machine is accepted. POWERJO takes on CAPEX projects as project management on demand from needs clarification through to acceptance.
CAPEX request
Project management & CAPEXAn internal decision paper for an investment, submitted to management or group headquarters for approval. The request describes the starting position, objective, chosen solution, cost, benefit, risks, schedule and the alternatives considered. Benefit is usually backed by profitability calculations such as payback period or ROI, and cost by quotations or budget quotations. Companies usually prescribe the structure, often as a form with annexes. Approval releases the budget.
From practice
A request with an unclear benefit stays on the pile, even if the price is right. The word efficiency improvement convinces nobody. A list of the biggest causes of downtime with the hours per year they cost does. Back up the figures with the downtime analysis and a clean quote comparison. Agree the assumptions with controlling beforehand, otherwise the committee takes the request apart over the calculation and not over the content. And write down what happens if the investment is not made. With an old machine that often means: spare parts get scarce, repairs more frequent, and one day the line stands with no plan B.
Capper
Packaging technologyMachine that applies screw, press-on or cork closures to containers. With screw closures, capping heads turn the cap on with a defined torque that is limited by a clutch or servo drive. Press-on closures and corks are pushed in, crown caps are crimped. The caps usually come from a cap sorter. Torque determines function: if it is too low the pack leaks, if it is too high the customer cannot open it. Inline torque testing is part of quality assurance.
From practice
Critical are torque control, cap feed and changeover. Ask whether the machine rejects containers with the wrong torque automatically or merely displays a figure. With screw caps, torque is a quality characteristic: too tight and the customer cannot open it, too loose and the pack leaks. Plastic caps keep losing torque after closing. So measure directly at the capper and once more later in the store. If the cap supplier changes, the torque needed can change too, even with the same datasheet. Test equipment and test interval belong in the quality plan. I have the test method demonstrated by the person who will use it day to day.
CAQ (computer-aided quality)
Digitalisation & AIComputer-aided quality, an umbrella term for software that supports quality management tasks. Typical modules cover inspection planning, incoming goods inspection, in-process inspection with statistical process control, test equipment management, complaint management with 8D reports, supplier evaluation and audit management. The system generates inspection orders from the inspection plans. Measured values are entered by hand or come directly from measuring instruments and inspection systems on the line. Results are evaluated, for example, as control charts or with the indices Cp and Cpk. CAQ runs as standalone software or as part of the MES or ERP and exchanges orders, batches and blocking flags with them.
From practice
In many plants the quality data are scattered across lab computers, the checkweigher and a spreadsheet that only one colleague really understands. A CAQ system brings it together, but only if the measured values flow in automatically. If operators copy values off a display every two hours and type them in, you get pretty charts with suspiciously round numbers. On new machines, check whether the inspection devices on the line can hand over their results through an interface, and put it in the user requirement specification. Watch the return path too. If the CAQ blocks a batch, the ERP has to know before the lorry is loaded. And keep the inspection plans lean. An inspection plan the shift cannot manage still gets filled in, just not with measurements.
Carbon footprint
KPIsThe sum of greenhouse gas emissions caused by a product, a package or a process over its life cycle, stated in CO2 equivalents. For products, ISO 14067 describes the calculation. In packaging, the material and its quantity, the transport volume and the energy consumption of the line count most, for example for compressed air, shrink tunnels and cooling. The figure is calculated per pack or per pallet so that variants can be compared. Optimised pack sizes and full pallets often reduce the footprint more than a change of material.
From practice
On packaging lines the big adjustments sit in material use with film and carton, in the energy for shrink tunnels and compressed air, and in transport. Transport depends on how well the pallet is filled. If more packs fit on the pallet or into the truck, fewer trips are needed. Such a volume optimisation reduces carbon and cost at the same time. It is usually the most convincing starting point for management, because the saving on the invoice convinces even without the climate argument. Take compressed air seriously too. It is expensive electricity, and anyone who leaves leaks in the network pays for them around the clock, weekends included, when nothing is being produced.
Cartoner
Packaging technologyA machine that erects folding cartons from a magazine, fills them with the product and closes them. On horizontal cartoners the product is pushed into the carton from the side, on vertical cartoners it is dropped in from above. Inserts such as leaflets or booklets are fed in before filling and placed in the carton with the product. Closing is done by tucking in the flaps or by gluing with hot melt. Selection depends on format range, changeover time, product infeed and availability.
From practice
On a cartoner, success depends on the product infeed. If the products do not arrive clean, on cycle and correctly oriented, even the best machine produces faults. Clarify the infeed, the inserts and the format range in the Lastenheft, meaning the user requirements specification. Inserts get forgotten until a leaflet arrives folded differently and stops running. With many formats, tool-less changeover with counting scales is worth more than a higher rated speed. I always watch a complete format changeover at acceptance, with a stopwatch and with the operator who will also be standing there at night. The manufacturer’s technician is always faster.
Cartridge heater
Mechanical engineering & componentsA rod-shaped electric heating element that is inserted into a bore and heats the surrounding metal from inside. Inside, a heating wire made of a resistance alloy is embedded in compacted magnesium oxide, which insulates electrically and conducts heat well. A stainless steel sheath encloses the element. High-density cartridge heaters are heavily compacted and designed for high surface loading, and they need a closely toleranced bore. Characteristic values are diameter, length, power, voltage and the position of the unheated zones. Connection is by flexible leads or studs, with a protective sleeve where needed, and some types have a built-in thermocouple. Cartridge heaters are found in sealing jaws, welding bars, moulds and hot melt units.
From practice
When a cartridge heater burns out, the bore is often to blame. If the heater sits loosely in a worn or scaled bore, heat builds up in the sheath and the coil gives up. So when replacing one, take a quick look with the calipers. Heaters that have baked in can often only be driven out, so a through bore is a good idea on new sealing jaws. The second weak point is the lead. It lies against the hot jaw, gets flexed with every movement and eventually breaks where it leaves the sheath. On moving jaws, ask for heaters with protected leads or an angled outlet. The heaters in stock should be exactly the ones that are fitted. Same diameter and same wattage are not enough if the voltage or the unheated zone differs.
Case erector
Packaging technologyA machine that pulls flat-supplied case blanks from a magazine, erects them into cases and closes the bottom with tape or hot melt. Suction cups draw the blank from the magazine and open it up, and a forming station presses the flaps shut. The case is then filled by hand or by a packer. Magazine capacity, format range and trouble-free blank feed determine availability. At the end of the line the case erector is an underrated bottleneck.
From practice
Poor case quality shows up first at the case erector. Damp or warped blanks jam in the magazine, the score lines crack, the bottom does not hold. Before adjusting the machine, check how the blanks are stored and what the specification says. Blanks from a damp corner of the warehouse behave differently from those used in the trial run. When buying, what counts is format range, magazine capacity, changeover time and the closing method, hot melt or tape, not the rated speed in the brochure. With hot melt, the heat-up time of the unit at the start of a shift also counts, and it is often missing from the capacity planning. I ask how long the operator needs to refill the magazine and whether that works while the machine runs. If not, the line stops with every stack.
Case packer
Packaging technologyCollective term for machines that pack individual or grouped products into shipping cartons. By direction of loading there is side-loading, where the group is pushed sideways into the erected carton, top-loading, where it is placed in from above, usually by robot, and bottom-loading. The choice determines product protection, output and format flexibility. Product feed and grouping stand ahead of the packer, a case erector before or within it, and a case sealer after it. With a wrap-around packer, by contrast, the carton is folded around the product group itself.
From practice
The design follows the product. Pouches and soft products are usually loaded from above, stable cartons and bottles are pushed in from the side. When comparing options, look at the product feed, because that is where most faults occur. Ask how many formats the machine handles and how long changeover takes, how carton blanks are stored in the magazine and how far the magazine runs without refilling. A small magazine sounds harmless until an operator on the night shift has to refill every half hour. And have the supplier show what happens when a carton arrives crooked, whether the machine stops or pushes the product against the flap.
Case sealer
Packaging technologyA machine that closes filled cases on top and, where required, on the bottom with tape or hot melt. Side guides and belts carry the case through the machine, flap folders close the flaps, and then a taping head applies the tape or nozzles apply hot melt. Hot melt is more tamper-evident and looks cleaner, while tape is more flexible with changing formats. The choice is a classic TCO trade-off between purchase price, consumption and maintenance.
From practice
Tape or hot melt is rarely a question of price. It depends on the load unit, the climate and whether the cases are reused. Hot melt closes cleanly and tamper-evidently but needs care at the nozzles and filter. Tape is more forgiving when case quality varies. The most common fault in operation is a side guide set wrongly for slightly varying case dimensions, so record change parts and tolerances in the URS. How well the closure holds often shows only at the loading ramp or in the cold store. Try it at acceptance with cold, slightly damp cases, and then pull at the flap yourself. Knives and pressure rollers of the taping heads are wear parts and belong in stock.
Cash flow plan (project spend plan)
Project management & CAPEXThe breakdown over time of the approved project budget into expected payments, usually by month or quarter. It is derived from the payment terms of the purchase orders, meaning down payments, milestone payments and final payments after acceptance, plus in-house work and smaller orders. Unlike the cost plan, which breaks the budget down by item, it is tied to dates. The finance department uses it for liquidity planning, and controlling uses it to compare planned with actual outflows. For projects spanning several financial years, the spend plan shows which part of the CAPEX falls into which year. Commitments are a separate figure, covering services already ordered but not yet invoiced.
From practice
The spend plan usually gets interesting in autumn. That is when controlling asks why so much of the annual budget is left and whether the money has to be carried over into next year. The answer is often the same. Final payments depend on acceptance, and acceptance depends on the punch list. Allow for that from the start and schedule the final instalment on a realistic date instead of the date you wish for. Also ask your suppliers when they intend to send which invoice. Some invoice a milestone payment only weeks later, and your plan is off again. Be wary of the temptation to bring down payments forward in December just to use up the budget. Without an advance payment guarantee your money then sits with the supplier, and the machine is still far from finished.
Cause & effect matrix
Project management & CAPEXAn evaluation tool that links requirements, the causes, with outcomes, the effects, using weightings. It comes from quality methodology and can be transferred to quotation comparison. There it makes decisions traceable and documentable, because a weighted scoring evaluation decides instead of gut feeling. The criteria are weighted, each quotation receives points per criterion, and the sum of weighting times points gives the ranking.
From practice
Ten to fifteen criteria are weighted, ranging from performance and changeover through service and spare parts to references, price and lead time. Each quotation gets points per criterion, and you agree the weighting with production, maintenance and procurement before the first quotation is on the table. Otherwise somebody tweaks the weights in the end until the favourite supplier is in front. The result is documented in a traceable way and helps when the cheapest supplier does not win the award and management asks why. As a check, I always rerun the calculation with different weights. If the ranking flips with small changes, the quotations are too close together for scoring alone.
CE marking
Quality & safetyThe manufacturer’s declaration that the machine complies with the relevant EU requirements, and a prerequisite for placing it on the market. The basis is the risk assessment. The manufacturer draws up the technical documentation and the operating manual, issues the declaration of conformity and affixes the CE mark. Caution is needed with lines. Anyone who links several machines into an overall plant quickly becomes the manufacturer of the whole and must assess the conformity of the linked plant. This can also apply to an operator who links machines from different suppliers itself. Partly completed machinery receives a declaration of incorporation instead of CE marking.
From practice
For line projects, the contract should state who declares conformity of the overall plant: the integrator, a main contractor or the operator itself. If that line is missing, in the end nobody does, and everyone points at everyone else. This includes a risk assessment of the linkage, an evaluation of the interfaces and the safety control system, and a joint operating manual. The assessment must be repeated after major modifications, even if only one machine was replaced. For projects delivered from 2027, the new Machinery Regulation applies. Clarify early which version applies to your project, and discuss doubtful cases with the safety specialist or your lawyer.
Central lubrication system
Mechanical engineering & componentsA system that automatically supplies several lubrication points on a machine with grease or oil from a single pump. It consists of a pump with reservoir, a controller, distributors and lines to the individual lubrication points. In progressive systems, pistons working in sequence within a distributor block deliver the lubricant to the outlets one after another. A blocked outlet stops the whole distributor, which makes faults easy to monitor. Single-line systems use a metering valve at each lubrication point that discharges a fixed quantity every time pressure builds up. There are also single-point lubricators, sealed cartridges that feed individual bearings automatically over weeks or months. Typical lubrication points are bearings, linear guides, chains and cam tracks.
From practice
Automatic lubrication tempts people to stop looking. That is exactly the mistake. Lines get kinked or torn off during modifications, distributors clog, and the reservoir runs empty because refilling is not in any schedule. The bearings then run dry while everyone believes they are being supplied. Ask to be shown how the system reports a fault, and whether the message appears on the HMI or only as a flashing light on the pump. With progressive distributors, a cycle switch belongs in the monitoring. Fill only the approved lubricant, and do it through the fill connection with its filter. With an open lid and a spatula, dirt goes straight into the metering pistons. Anyone adding new lubrication points should first check whether pump and distributors can still cope.
Change parts
Packaging technologyProduct-specific interchangeable parts of a machine, for example guides, forming shoulders, grippers or tooling. They are swapped at changeover and adapt the machine to the size, shape or type of the product. They differ from wear parts, which age independently of the format, in that they are kept as a set per format, often with marking or an RFID chip. At the investment stage it must be clarified what an additional format set costs and what the lead time is. High follow-on costs often hide here.
From practice
Change parts should be clearly marked, assigned to the format via recipe, and stored in a fixed location. RFID identification prevents mix-ups that would otherwise only show up as scrap. When buying, clarify what an additional format set costs and how long it takes to arrive. Also ask whether change parts are included in the spare parts package and whether you may make simple parts yourself. Guides from a 3D printer are realistic today, but only where the part has no product contact or the material is approved for it. Heavy parts need a lifting aid, otherwise every changeover becomes a test for the back. I always include the change parts in the total cost of the machine.
Change parts trolley
Packaging technologyA trolley carrying all the change parts for a product or a machine, with shadow-board layout or holders for each part. It keeps all the parts of a format in one place and so shortens the search at changeover. Trolleys are usually made of stainless steel with steerable wheels, and in food plants they are built so that they can be cleaned. Tools and a data sheet with the format’s settings often travel on the trolley. It counts as the simplest measure against search time and is therefore often the entry point into SMED.
From practice
A change parts trolley per format, labelled and complete, shortens the changeover immediately and needs no investment in the machine. Combined with digital position scales on the adjustment axes and a checklist on the HMI, this is the first step of any SMED implementation. Missing parts show up at the empty slot straight away, ideally on return and not at the next changeover at two in the morning. Cleaned parts go back on the trolley and not onto the hall floor. The trolley has a fixed place that everyone knows, otherwise the shift suddenly looks for the trolley instead of the parts. When buying, also check that it fits through the doors and gets right up to the machine.
Change request
Project management & CAPEXA formalised request for a change to the agreed scope of supply. It originates with the client or the supplier and contains a description of the change, its impact on cost, schedule and performance data, and approval by the client. Change requests are numbered consecutively and kept in a change log that both sides can see. An approved change usually leads to a variation order to the contract. Without approval, the change is not carried out.
From practice
Changes happen on every project. The only question is whether they are documented. A simple form with what, why, cost, schedule and approval prevents disputes at final invoicing. Collect small changes and decide on them together in batches, because every change approved individually by email becomes hard to trace later. The fitter who is asked on site whether the light barrier can sit a bit higher happily says yes, and exactly that shows up later as an item on the invoice. I write every promise made verbally at the machine into a change request on the same day.
Changeover
Packaging technologyConverting a line to a different product or pack format, for example to other pack sizes, containers or packaging materials. This includes swapping the change parts, adjusting the guides, switching recipe and marking, and ramping up to target output. The SMED method separates internal tasks, which need the machine to be stopped, from external ones, which can be prepared while the machine runs. With growing product variety, changeover times become an economic factor. A changeover is to be distinguished from a product change with cleaning, for example an allergen changeover.
From practice
A changeover is measured honestly from the last good part to the first good part at target speed. Anything else flatters the numbers, even if the machine is blinking again after the rebuild. Improvements come from three directions: preparation, technology and organisation. Change parts and packaging materials are staged while the machine is still running. Position indicators and quick-release clamps save steps, and servo adjustment by recipe saves them altogether. A changeover matrix helps to run similar products back to back, and well-drilled teams beat any technology. A changeover assistant on the HMI guides new staff through the steps.
A table showing the changeover effort for every combination of current and following product. The rows usually list the outgoing products and the columns the incoming ones. Each cell contains the changeover time and, where needed, the type of cleaning or the format parts required. A changeover matrix is generally not symmetrical. Switching from a light to a dark variety, or from an allergen-free to an allergen-containing product, is quicker than the other way round, because the reverse direction calls for thorough cleaning. In detailed production scheduling the matrix is used to sequence orders so that the total changeover time stays low. For SMED projects it shows which changeovers take particularly long.
From practice
In many plants the changeover matrix has existed for years, only it lives in the shift supervisor’s head. He knows you do not simply run the allergen-free variety after the nut variant, and he plans the week accordingly. When he is on holiday, production planning schedules by delivery date and is then surprised by half a day of cleaning. So write the matrix down, using measured times from production data acquisition. The target values in the machine supplier’s quotation usually assume a practised fitter with a prepared format parts trolley. In the matrix, keep the conversion time at the machine separate from the cleaning, since different people are often responsible for each. And expect sales to break up the finest sequence with a rush order on Wednesday.
Changeover time
KPIsTime from the last good part of the old order to the first good part of the new one, including start-up losses and not just the pure conversion work. It covers clearing out, change-part exchange, adjusting, cleaning and running in until production is stable. Measured honestly it is usually clearly longer than it feels. A distinction is made between internal changeover elements, when the machine is stopped, and external ones, which can be prepared while the machine is running. For product changes in food production, cleaning and where applicable an allergen changeover are added. The method for shortening it is called SMED.
From practice
Changeover time is the most underestimated capacity reserve. With three changeovers a day at 45 minutes each, over two hours are lost, every day. SMED principles can often cut the time clearly without investment, including external preparation, change parts on a trolley and counting scales instead of trial and error. When buying new, tool-free changeover and stored format recipes belong in the user requirements specification. In food production the time also depends on the order of the products. A changeover matrix that puts products without allergen before those with allergen saves cleaning time without anybody working faster. Time one changeover completely, from the last good part to the first, and hold it against the figure in people’s heads.
ChatGPT
Digitalisation & AIAn AI assistant from the company OpenAI based on large language models, the GPT series. It answers questions, drafts and summarises texts, analyses data and images, and generates program code. It is operated with instructions in natural language, the prompt. It is available as a web application, as an app and via programming interfaces. The answers sound linguistically confident but are not automatically correct, and inputs are transmitted to the provider for processing.
From practice
For project managers it pays off on routine tasks. It puts meeting minutes into shape, checks a chapter of the URS for gaps and sets two quotation texts side by side. Two rules always apply. Never enter confidential customer data into public AI services, and that includes drawings and prices. And always have technical statements checked by a specialist, because the result sounds convincing even when it is wrong. Anonymise what you paste in beforehand, state what the result should look like, and check figures and references to standards against the original source. Otherwise you get a lovely text that is of no use to you.
Checkweigher
Quality & safetyA dynamic scale in the product stream that checks every pack against its target weight. It consists of an infeed belt, a weighing belt with load cell, an outfeed belt and a rejector that removes out-of-tolerance packs from the stream by pusher, flap or air blast. A split into underweight, good and overweight is usual. The readings are evaluated statistically and supply the data for the Prepackaged Goods Regulation (Fertigpackungsverordnung, the German rules on the fill quantity of prepacked goods). The scale is also a source of process data: the fill-level trend can be fed back to the filler so that dosing readjusts.
From practice
The checkweigher watches over compliance with the Prepackaged Goods Regulation and also delivers the data against give-away. What counts is weighing accuracy at line speed, confirmed rejection and a clean evaluation of the averages. The pack must sit entirely on the belt while it is weighed, and at high rates with short packs that gets tight. Draughts and vibration from the neighbouring machine also falsify the readings. I have the accuracy demonstrated at acceptance with test packs at full speed, not at standstill. Anyone using the scale only as a reject station wastes its potential. The trend curve tells you when the filler needs readjusting before scrap occurs.
Child-resistant closure
Quality & safetyA closure or pack that is difficult for young children to open but opens without tools for adults. The effect is tested in panel trials with children and adults: under DIN EN ISO 8317 for reclosable packs, under DIN EN 862 for non-reclosable packs and under DIN EN 14375 for pharmaceuticals. Typical designs are push-and-turn closures, two-component closures with inner and outer cap, and blister packs with a multi-step opening. Child resistance is required for pharmaceuticals, certain household chemicals and plant protection products. The test result applies to the tested combination of container and closure.
From practice
Child-resistant closures demand more from the capping machine than torque. The closure must latch on application without damage to the safety feature, and the torque window is narrower. Two-part caps have to stay properly aligned in the feed, otherwise the inner cap sits crooked and the safety feature does not engage correctly. Switching to a different closure supplier means the child-resistance test must be passed again, because it applies to the specific container and closure combination. I therefore get the torque and application force in writing from the closure supplier up front. Allow weeks in the schedule for panel testing.
Chiller
Production & energyA compact refrigeration unit that cools water or a water and glycol mixture for pumping through pipework to the consumers. Most chillers work on the vapour compression principle with compressor, condenser, expansion valve and evaporator. The condenser rejects the heat to outside air or to a cooling water circuit, so there are air-cooled and water-cooled units. Units with free cooling use outside air directly at low ambient temperatures and relieve the compressor. Characteristic values are cooling capacity, supply and return temperature, flow rate and pressure drop. In packaging lines, chillers supply forming tools of thermoformers, cooling tunnels and hydraulic power units, for example. Fluorinated refrigerants fall under the EU F-gas Regulation.
From practice
Cooling water by customer is quickly written into a quotation and just as quickly forgotten. The existing chiller was sized for the machines that were there at the time, and every new one takes a little more. Before ordering, clarify cooling capacity, supply temperature, flow rate and water quality with the supplier and with building services. Glycol content and water treatment belong on the same list, otherwise the fine cooling channels in the forming tool clog up. If the supply temperature is below the dew point of the hall, uninsulated pipes sweat and drip onto machine and product. A classic is the air-cooled condenser on the roof. It gets dirty over the year, and on the hottest day the chiller trips on high pressure, right in the middle of the season.
CIP / SIP (clean-in-place / sterilise-in-place)
Quality & safetyAutomatic cleaning and sterilisation of the product-contact paths without disassembly, standard in liquid food production and in the pharmaceutical industry. CIP stands for clean in place, SIP for sterilise in place. In CIP the plant is flushed in a circuit with cleaning media, in SIP it is treated with steam or hot water. The cycle usually consists of pre-rinse, caustic, intermediate rinse, acid and final rinse. CIP capability must be designed in, with slope, without dead legs and without spray shadows. Retrofitting it is almost impossible.
From practice
CIP capability must be specified in the URS and the design. That includes pipe slope, dead-leg-free valves, spray balls with adequate coverage and a clean separation of product and cleaning paths. The cleaning cycle of pre-rinse, caustic, intermediate rinse, acid and final rinse costs time and utilities. Shorter cycles noticeably increase net production time, so this is where people like to cut. Then ask what it means for the cleaning result. Validate the cleaning with test methods before the line goes into regular operation, and record times, temperatures and concentrations. Otherwise nobody knows after the first failure what was actually run.
Circuit diagram
Project management & CAPEXElectrical documentation of a machine. It comprises wiring diagrams, terminal diagrams, cable lists, the control cabinet layout, the equipment identification and references to safety functions. The circuit diagram is usually created in a CAE system, and the labelling generally follows the operator’s plant standard. Requirements for the technical documentation of electrical equipment are contained in the standard EN 60204-1 on the electrical equipment of machines. For maintenance the circuit diagram is the most important tool for electrical faults, above all together with the terminal diagram and the signal list.
From practice
Require the circuit diagrams in native CAE format and also as PDF, with equipment labels that can be found again on cables, terminals and devices. A diagram whose numbers are not on the cabinet is worth little at three in the morning. At acceptance I always take a spot check: find a terminal in the diagram, then look in the control cabinet to see whether wire and label match. Changes made during commissioning must be updated with a date. Have the revision status shown on every sheet, so that it is clear which diagram is the valid one. The hand-corrected diagram in the cabinet is common practice, but it must also go into the file, otherwise the next electrician works with yesterday’s status.
Claim management
CommercialThe systematic pursuit or defence of claims for extra cost and time arising from deviations from the contract. Typical causes are change requests from the client, missing preliminary work by other trades, late approvals and hindrances on site. The basis is documentation from day one. Hindrances are notified with date, cause and impact, and changes are priced and instructed as a variation order. Anyone who does not notify and evidence a hindrance can hardly enforce claims later, and that applies in both directions. The rules for this are set out in the contract or in the agreed contract terms.
From practice
The basic rules are quickly told. Notify every deviation in writing, document hindrances with date and impact, have extra costs priced before execution. On the operator side this means bundling change requests and formally instructing them instead of discussing them at the edge of the site. A shout to the fitter to just do it quickly turns into a disputed item later. Site diaries and dated meeting minutes cost little and help more in a dispute than anyone’s memory. A project manager who keeps changes cleanly documented often saves more in the end than they cost, and that holds on both sides of the contract.
Clash detection (3D)
Project management & CAPEXA check of a 3D model for overlaps between machines, pipework, cable trays, steelwork and building elements, or for clearances that fall below agreed values. The software distinguishes hard clashes, where solid bodies intersect, from soft clashes, where space required for maintenance, operation, escape routes or door swing is violated. Checking is done on a combined model built from all parties’ data, exchanged for example as STEP files or in IFC format. For modifications in existing buildings, a 3D laser scan, or point cloud, often provides the basis. Clashes found are tracked in a list with the person responsible and their status. Clash detection in a model is not the same as a robot’s collision detection in operation.
From practice
Suppliers’ models are often simplified, and precisely in the places that will hurt later. The open guard door is missing, or the robot’s swing range, or the space for the change parts trolley. I have such areas explicitly added to the model as solid bodies, otherwise the software finds nothing there. Old halls have sprinkler pipes and ventilation ducts that appear on no drawing. Without a laser scan you find out about them while bringing the machines in. Look at the walkways as well. A gangway you have to squeeze through sideways clashes with nothing and is still useless. And the check is only valid for the data it was run on. If a supplier changes the design afterwards, the model has to go through again.
Claude
Digitalisation & AIAn AI assistant from the company Anthropic that understands and generates text, evaluates documents, structures data and writes program code. As a language model (LLM), Claude works from instructions given in natural language. Through interfaces it can be connected to other tools, so that it can carry out tasks in those tools instead of merely answering. As with any language model, the results have to be checked, since statements can sound plausible without being correct.
From practice
At POWERJO, Claude is the digital co-lead. It researches, creates documents, evaluates tender documents and automates office workflows. Decisions and customer contact remain with the person. The AI prepares, checks and documents, nothing more. Technical outputs are always cross-checked before they end up anywhere a customer reads them. That applies especially to figures and references to standards, because they look right even when they are not. Anyone using it themselves should work the same way and hand over the necessary documents with the task, for example the URS and the schedule, rather than a mere keyword.
Cleaning concept (wet/dry cleaning)
Packaging technologyDefines how a packaging machine is cleaned. Dry cleaning works with brushes, vacuum and cloths, wet cleaning with low or high pressure and foam, through to CIP-capable product paths that are flushed without dismantling. The concept determines ingress protection rating, materials, seals, floor design, drainage and cleaning times. With dry products such as flour, powders or chocolate, water usually stays off limits because moisture brings germs and lumping. The cleaning concept is part of the hygiene requirements in the user requirements specification and the basis for the cleaning plan and hygiene zones.
From practice
The cleaning method must be fixed before purchase, because a machine built for dry cleaning will not survive a hose. Describe cleaning agents, water temperature, pressure and frequency in the user requirements specification and have the manufacturer confirm suitability. Alkaline cleaners attack aluminium, and some seals swell in the wrong agent. Work out the time needed. An hour of cleaning per shift is capacity that is not producing. Parts that come off without tools save more time than any increase in output. Also ask where residual water stays behind after cleaning, for example in hollow sections and corners, because that is where the trouble starts in the next shift.
Cleanroom packaging
Quality & safetyPackaging that is produced or packed in cleanrooms so that particle and germ load stay at a defined low level. It is used in the pharmaceutical and medical device industries and for sensitive foods. The cleanroom class sets how many particles per volume of air are permitted, based on the ISO 14644 series of standards. A cleanroom concept includes filtered air, airlocks for personnel and material, special clothing and a controlled material flow. Packaging materials are often wrapped in several layers, so that the outer layer is removed at the airlock. The packaging machine is one part of this concept.
From practice
Cleanroom packaging means defined air cleanliness, airlocks, clothing and material flow, and the machine is only one part of it. Fix the cleanroom class and the handover point early, and plan in the cleanability of all plant parts. A control cabinet with a fan inside the cleanroom is a classic planning mistake, because the fan stirs up air and particles. It is better to put the cabinet and the drives outside and let only what is necessary pass through the wall. Ask about abrasion too, since belts, sliding guides and the exhaust air of pneumatics generate particles. Also clarify how packaging materials get into the cleanroom. The carton does not simply walk through the door.
Climate testing
Quality & safetyTesting packaging or complete load units under defined temperature and humidity conditions in a climate chamber, to detect loss of strength, warping, adhesive failure or condensation. Tests run at constant conditions or in cycles, for example cold, heat and high humidity in sequence, as transport and storage dictate. The reference is the standard climate of 23 °C and 50 % relative humidity, under DIN EN ISO 187 for paper and corrugated board and under DIN EN ISO 2233 for complete transport packages and unit loads. Before measurement the sample is conditioned until it reaches equilibrium.
From practice
Cases that shine in the test lab under standard climate can fail in cold storage or in a sea container to South East Asia. Simulate the real supply chain. Corrugated board loses a large share of its crush resistance at high humidity, stretch film becomes brittle in the cold, hot melt lets go in the heat. The changeover is the nasty part: push a cold pallet from the cold store onto a warm ramp and within minutes there is condensation on case and label, and self-adhesive labels let go. Define the climate stages together with logistics and get sign-off under the worst-case climate, not the most comfortable one. Standing times on the way count too, in port or at the transhipment point, and the haulier knows them better than production does.
Clockify
Digitalisation & AIA time-tracking tool for teams and freelancers. Hours are logged per project and task and can be analysed by client, project and person. From this the timesheet is produced, which is attached to the invoice and documents billing by effort. It shows the client which person worked how many hours on which task. Compared with the planned effort, the analysis shows where projects deviate from the plan. Accuracy depends on hours being booked promptly and assigned correctly.
From practice
All of POWERJO’s on-demand specialists log their hours in Clockify, per client and project. This gives the client a traceable timesheet for the invoice, and deviations from planned effort show up early and not just at month end. For you as the client this means: ask before the project starts what the timesheet looks like and how often you will receive it. A short interval helps, because then the effort still matches your memory. Also agree which activities count as working time, travel time for example. That spares both sides the discussion about disputed hours when the invoice arrives.
Closure torque
Quality & safetyThe torque with which a screw closure is applied to a container, and the opening torque the consumer must apply later. Both are measured in newton-centimetres. The opening torque after capping is usually lower than the application torque, because gasket and closure settle. On the capper, the application torque is set via magnetic or slip clutches or a servo drive. Too little torque means leakage, too much damages the closure or the thread and makes the pack hard for the consumer to open. Measurement is made with a torque tester on the finished pack.
From practice
Measure the opening torque regularly with a torque tester, long after commissioning as well. Capping clutches wear, and threads and closures vary from batch to batch. Check again after an hour’s storage, because the torque changes as the gasket settles. Agree tolerances with the closure supplier and record them in the packaging material specification and the test plan. When there are complaints about bottles that will not open or that drip, look at the measurement series first. Without it, all you have is opinion. I always ask the closure supplier which container the torque was measured on, because values without that information cannot be compared.
CMMS (maintenance software)
Digitalisation & AISoftware for planning, controlling and documenting maintenance, short for computerised maintenance management system. It is built on an asset hierarchy to which maintenance plans, work orders, spare parts and documents are attached. The CMMS generates due maintenance orders from time intervals or counter readings, records fault reports, books labour time and material consumption and provides indicators such as MTBF and MTTR. Many systems offer a mobile interface for technicians at the machine. A CMMS is either standalone software or a maintenance module of the ERP system. EAM, enterprise asset management, is a related term that also looks at the life cycle and costs of the assets over the years.
From practice
A CMMS is only as good as what the technicians write into it. If every order just says done, after a year you still do not know why the labeller keeps stopping. Keep the feedback simple, but insist on the cause and the parts replaced. On new plant the data transfer tends to be forgotten. The supplier sends the maintenance plan and spare parts list as PDFs, and then an apprentice spends weeks typing. Write into the user requirement specification that both must come as importable spreadsheets, with manufacturer part numbers and intervals. The asset hierarchy should match the equipment identification in the wiring diagrams, so the electrician finds the right component even at night. Break it down to assembly level. Nobody needs individual screws in the CMMS.
Cobb value
Quality & safetyThe water absorption of a paper or board surface in g/m² within a defined time, usually 60 seconds (Cobb60), tested to DIN EN ISO 535. The sample is clamped, loaded with a fixed amount of water, blotted after the time has elapsed and weighed again. The lower the value, the better the surface is sized against moisture. Other test times exist but change how comparable the values are. The value matters for chilled, export and beverage packaging as well as for gluing and printability.
From practice
A low Cobb value protects against softening from condensation in a cold store and during breaks in the cold chain. In return, bonding with dispersion adhesive becomes more difficult, because the adhesive’s water cannot penetrate the surface. If glued joints open up after a paper change, ask about the Cobb value before you suspect the machine. With such complaints I look at paper and adhesive first and at the settings only afterwards. For humid environments the value belongs in the specification with a limit, otherwise every supplier delivers something different. State which side is measured, since the top and bottom of a web can differ.
Cobot
Automation & roboticsA robot that may work alongside people without a separating guard because its force and speed are limited. The collaboration can be safeguarded in four ways: safety-rated monitored stop, hand guiding, speed and separation monitoring, and power and force limiting. It is often used for machine tending and palletising at low outputs. The whole application must be safety-assessed, including gripper and product, not just the robot. ISO 10218 is the basis for this assessment.
From practice
Cobots are suitable for small palletising outputs, machine tending and small-parts handling. Realistically planned, they are a good entry-level automation for small lines. As output grows, the cobot can become the bottleneck, because force limiting makes it slower than an industrial robot behind a fence. The safety assessment looks at the whole application, since a gripper with sharp edges or heavy cartons can injure even with limited force. Often the cobot is combined with laser-scanner zones, fast with no person nearby and slow with a person present. I ask the supplier who signs the risk assessment for the whole cell, because the robot on its own is only partly completed machinery.
Code verification (OCR / OCV)
Quality & safetyAutomatic inspection of applied markings using a camera, lighting and an evaluation unit. OCR reads plain text and outputs the result, OCV compares the presence and quality of an expected text or code against the target value. For barcodes and DataMatrix codes, readability and quality grade are assessed in addition, to ISO/IEC 15416 for linear codes and ISO/IEC 15415 for two-dimensional ones. The inspection point sits directly behind the printer, and faulty packs are rejected. The aim is that no incorrectly or illegibly marked pack reaches the market.
From practice
The inspection is only as good as the link behind it. The target value must come from the same order source as the printer content, otherwise the system checks against itself. Lighting, camera angle and reflections on glossy films determine read quality more than the camera does. Set the inspection scope, the response to errors and the reject confirmation in the URS, and test with real packs. At acceptance, build in faults on purpose, a swapped code, a smeared date, a missing batch number, and watch whether the pack really ends up in the reject bin. Also clarify what happens when the camera fails, because the line should not simply carry on.
Coding and marking
Packaging technologyApplying variable data such as best-before date, batch and time to the product, the packaging and the load unit. Typical technologies are inkjet printing, both continuous inkjet and thermal inkjet, laser marking, thermal transfer printing and label printers with an applicator. A camera or reader then checks that the print is present and legible. Illegible coding is a common reason for complaints and recalls. Camera verification is now standard.
From practice
Coding is where retail requirements and technology collide. The customer wants GS1-128 on the pallet, a best-before date and batch on the outer pack and a readable DataMatrix on the product, and all of it must run automatically through a changeover. Clarify early who maintains the master data and how printer, scale and ERP work together. A reader positioned after the printer stops unreadable labels leaving the plant. Plan the mounting position with care. The print only works on a calm, flat surface, and the operator has to reach the printer to change the ink. Also check what happens when the data connection fails. If the printer carries on with the old date, the goods are wrongly marked before anybody notices. In that case the line should stop or reject the packs.
Coefficient of friction (COF)
Quality & safetyFriction coefficient between two surfaces, for films tested to DIN EN ISO 8295 as static and kinetic friction, film against film or against metal. It is set via slip additives that migrate to the film surface. The coefficient determines how a film runs over the forming shoulder and sealing jaws and how finished packs lie on top of one another. The inside and outside of a film can be set differently, and the value changes with temperature, roll storage time and additive migration.
From practice
Too low a coefficient of friction lets bags slide off the pallet and cartons shift within a layer. Too high brakes the film at the forming shoulder and causes drag marks and poor seals. Fresh rolls and rolls six months old run differently, because the slip additive only reaches the surface gradually. A cold roll from the store also runs differently from one at room temperature. Set a tolerance range and have it certified per batch. Ask for film against metal and film against film separately, because the first figure helps the form-fill-seal machine and the second helps the pallet. Check the coefficient again after any recipe change by the supplier.
Coextrusion
Packaging technologyProcess in which several molten plastics are brought together through a common die into a multilayer film or a multilayer cup, by the blown or cast film method. Each layer has its own task, such as sealing, stability or barrier. Tie layers bond incompatible polymers such as PE and EVOH. Coextruded films are cheaper than laminated composites because one working step falls away, but have limited scope for printing and combining. The layer thicknesses result from the output of the individual extruders and must stay even across the web.
From practice
Coextrusion delivers layer by layer in one pass. Thickness variation in individual layers is not visible on the film, though, and only shows up later as a barrier or sealing problem. Ask for the layer structure with nominal thicknesses and tolerances, and check the cross-section under a microscope in case of complaints. When changing supplier, same structure is no guarantee of the same machine behaviour, because formulations and additives differ. So I always run the new film on the machine before the old supplier is dropped. Coefficient of friction and seal initiation temperature can have shifted even if the data sheet promises the same.
Cold and hot commissioning
Project management & CAPEXTwo consecutive sections of commissioning. Cold commissioning checks drives, sensors, safety circuits and motion sequences without product and packaging materials, including rotation directions, end positions and the emergency-stop chain. In hot commissioning the plant runs with product and packaging materials, and formats, seal parameters, cycle times and the handovers between machines are set. Only after this do the trial run and the performance test follow. Whether a section is complete is established with checklists. The cold phase presupposes a completed loop check.
From practice
The cold phase tends to get shortened because product is ready and everyone wants to see results. That backfires. Mechanical collisions and safety faults are cheaper to find without product, because a collision without product costs a bent bracket, and with product it costs the bracket and the batch. For the hot phase you need enough packaging material of every format and released product of production quality. Lab samples behave differently from line output, and you see it in the seal seam and in how the pack slides. Schedule both phases with owners in the project timeline, and settle who delivers more goods in the hot phase when the stock runs out sooner than expected.
Cold sealing
Packaging technologyA sealing method in which the pack is closed by pressure alone, without heat. The film converter applies a cold seal adhesive in register to the inside of the film, usually only where the seals will later be. This adhesive is cohesive and under pressure bonds only to itself. On the outside, a release lacquer prevents the layers on the reel from sticking together. Cold sealing is used for heat-sensitive products such as chocolate, bars and ice cream, mainly on flow wrappers. Since no heat has to be transferred into the seal, high machine speeds are possible. Cold seal adhesives are available based on natural rubber latex or as synthetic versions. Heat sealing via a sealing layer is the counterpart.
From practice
Cold seal film ages. Over time, and faster in warm storage, the bond strength drops, and the seals then open in the shop rather than in the machine. Keep an eye on the production date of the reels in the film store, and store them cool. The adhesive is only where sealing is supposed to happen. If the print drifts out of register, the jaws press onto bare film next to the adhesive strip, and the seal looks closed but does not hold. A properly set print mark sensor is mandatory here. Check the profile of the sealing jaws as well. Worn serrations and uneven pressure across the width create channels in the seal through which air and moisture get in. Have the film supplier state storage conditions and shelf life in writing. Otherwise a reel that spent too long in a warm hall is your problem.
Collision detection
Automation & roboticsA robot controller function that detects unexpected forces at the axes and stops the motion. To do so, the controller compares motor currents or torques with the values it expects for the programmed path, or evaluates torque sensors in the joints. If the deviation exceeds an adjustable threshold, the robot stops and, depending on the setting, retracts a short distance. The function protects the robot, gripper and plant from damage. Only when implemented as a safety-rated function may it also be used for personal protection. It is to be distinguished from the force and power limiting of collaborative robots.
From practice
Collision detection is often set so sensitively that the robot stops at every jolt. Then the operator turns it off, and the gripper is wrecked at the next crash. The threshold should be set per program section, sensitive when approaching and less sensitive when accelerating with a load. Correct load data and a properly measured gripper in the robot are a prerequisite. Count every trip and show it in the shift report, or the cause stays hidden. For cases where the detection reacts too late, there is a mechanical crash protection at the flange that gives way on impact and trips a switch. It costs little compared with the gripper it saves. Ask whether it is in the quotation.
Commissioning
Project management & CAPEXThe phase between mechanical build and production start. It covers functional testing of the individual components, parameterisation, test runs, linking with the neighbouring equipment and optimisation up to the performance test. Usually the work is divided into cold commissioning without product and hot commissioning with product, followed by the trial run. Operator training and the handover of documentation also belong to commissioning. Project plans regularly underestimate it. Realistic commissioning times and clear responsibilities therefore belong in the URS.
From practice
Plan weeks, not days, for commissioning a linked line. Break it into milestones for individual functions, linking, performance run and operator training. Clarify beforehand who supplies product, packaging materials, utilities and staff, because hardly anything is more expensive than a commissioning engineer waiting for cartons. A short site meeting every morning prevents idle time and shows who needs whom. Expect teething problems at the handovers between machines that each ran cleanly on their own. Commissioning ends with the trial run and the documented performance test, not with the first carton running.
Commissioning plan
Project management & CAPEXA plan that defines the steps, sequence, prerequisites, responsibilities and test criteria for commissioning a machine or line. It starts with checking mechanical completion and proceeds through the loop check (I/O check), direction of rotation checks and testing of the safety functions to cold and hot commissioning. These are followed by commissioning of the individual machines, line integration, trials with product and packaging materials, trial operation and the performance test. For each stage the plan states which utilities, materials and people must be available and when the stage counts as complete. The commissioning plan follows on from the installation sequence plan and usually ends with the SAT or the handover to production.
From practice
In the schedule, commissioning is often one single long bar. That is not enough. By the first trial with product at the latest, the packaging material is missing, or the warehouse only has the old print version. Clarify early who supplies how much product and packaging for the trials and where the rejects go. With food, that quickly adds up to a lot of goods that may not be sold. If several suppliers are involved, one of them has to lead line integration. Otherwise each tests its own machine and nobody checks the signals between the machines. Schedule the safety function tests before the product trials, because no operators from production should work on the line while the guard doors still have open points. And write down when a stage is finished. Without that criterion everything hangs at nearly done.
Complaint management
Quality & safetyA defined process for handling complaints from recording through to closure. Besides customer complaints, it covers supplier complaints and internal complaints between departments. The process starts with recording, including evidence such as photos, samples and batch numbers. Assessment and immediate actions follow, for example blocking affected goods using traceability, then root cause analysis and corrective actions, often in the form of an 8D report. Settling costs and closing the case come last. Evaluation over longer periods reveals recurring faults and feeds into supplier evaluation. The process is usually supported by a CAQ system. ISO 9001 requires the handling of nonconformities and the evaluation of customer feedback.
From practice
The film will not run on the night shift, the crew fights with it until morning, and in the end the reel goes into the skip because the space at the machine is needed. By the next day someone wants to file a complaint, and there is neither a sample nor a reel label. So secure the evidence immediately. The label from the reel or core, a few metres of material, photos of the defect and the machine parameters are usually enough. A box for complaint samples at every line costs next to nothing. On costs, do not expect much. Many terms of delivery limit compensation to the material, and you carry the downtime yourself. That is worth knowing before you order and worth looking at with a lawyer. And evaluate complaints regularly. Sometimes the suppliers with the most cases are not the ones people grumble about loudest in the morning meeting.
Composite film
Packaging technologyMulti-layer packaging material that combines properties, for example sealability (PE), barrier (EVOH, aluminium) and printability (PET). The layers are produced by coextrusion in one operation or are laminated, meaning bonded to one another with adhesive. In printed composites the print often lies between the layers and is protected from abrasion. Driven by regulation, in particular the EU Packaging and Packaging Waste Regulation (PPWR), the trend is towards recyclable mono-materials, which confronts machines with new processing windows.
From practice
A composite film gives you barrier, sealability and printability, but it is hard to recycle, which is why the PPWR puts it under pressure. When switching to mono-material, sealing window, stiffness and running behaviour all change. If the outside is the same plastic as the inside, the film sticks more easily to the sealing jaws, because the outer layer no longer gives any heat protection. Plan the switch as a project with machine trials and not as a purchasing decision, and involve the film supplier early. I insist on trials with a whole reel and not a metre-long sample, because problems in web running and sealing often show up only after a while.
Compressed air leakage
Production & energyUnintended escape of compressed air from the network or from connected machines. Leaks occur mainly at quick couplings, hoses, fittings, maintenance units, valves, cylinder seals and faulty condensate drains. They consume air around the clock, even when nothing is being produced, and so add to the base load of the compressed air supply. Ultrasonic leak detectors, which make the flow noise audible, or leak detection spray are used to locate them. Total leakage of a network can be determined during production-free periods from compressor running times or from the pressure drop with the compressors switched off. Because leakage flow rises with pressure, a higher network pressure also increases the losses.
From practice
In many plants leak detection runs as a campaign. Once a year someone comes round with the ultrasonic detector and hangs a tag on every leak, and six months later the tags are still hanging there. Finding leaks is the easy part. It gets expensive because repairs often need a stoppage and nobody schedules the work. So enter leaks as normal maintenance orders, with priority and due date. Searching is easiest during a break or at the weekend, when the network is under pressure but no blow-off nozzles or valves are working. Many leaks sit in the machines themselves, on hoses in drag chains or on valve terminals. There it helps to shut off the machine’s compressed air automatically during standstill.
Compressed air network
Production & energyA piping system that distributes compressed air from generation to the consumers. It starts downstream of the compressor station with its air treatment and receiver. Distribution lines branch off the main line, and connection lines run from there to the machines. Ring mains supply consumers from two sides and keep the pressure drop low, while branch lines are simpler but react more sensitively to large draw-offs. Take-offs leave the pipe from the top so that no condensate runs into the consumers, and condensate drains sit at low points. Common materials are galvanised steel, stainless steel, aluminium and plastic. Cross-section, length and flow rate determine the pressure drop. ISO 8573-1 describes the purity classes for compressed air.
From practice
Compressed air networks grow with the plant, and rarely to plan. Every new line gets hooked on somewhere until the pressure at the far end of the hall is no longer enough. The usual answer is to turn up the pressure at the compressor for the whole plant. That costs energy every day and raises leakage losses, and nothing is solved. On new lines I have a shut-off valve, a pressure gauge and a flow meter fitted at the transfer point. Then you can see whether the problem lies in the machine or in the network, and you can isolate the line for work without shutting down the neighbours as well. Check the cross-section of the supply line before a large consumer is added. A bottleneck in the last length of pipe cannot be fixed by any compressor in the world.
Compressed air quality (ISO 8573-1)
Production & energyClassification of compressed air according to ISO 8573-1 into purity classes for solid particles, water content and oil content. Packaging machines require conditioned air with filters, dryers and, where necessary, oil-free compression. Air with product contact, such as for blow-off, is subject to significantly higher requirements than pure control air. The class is stated as a sequence of numbers for the three types of contaminant, and a lower number means cleaner air. Water content is usually described by the pressure dew point. Treatment takes place at the compressor and again directly upstream of the machine.
From practice
Poor compressed air shows up as water in the valve island, gummed-up valves and oil on the product. Ask the machine supplier for the required class and compare it with what your network actually supplies, including summer values at high humidity. Dryers and filters belong in the project budget, condensate drainage in the maintenance plan. Treat product-contact air separately. On a walk-round, look into the condensate drains and filter bowls. If you find a cloudy brew there, either the treatment is wrong or nobody takes care of it. When a single machine keeps having trouble, check the last stretch of pipe between the network and the machine before you touch the whole network.
Compressor (compressed air generation)
Production & energyA machine that draws in ambient air and compresses it to network pressure. Screw compressors dominate in industry, with two intermeshing rotors compressing the air continuously. Piston compressors are found more for small volumes or high pressures, turbo compressors for very large flow rates. Oil-injected machines use oil for cooling and sealing, while oil-free machines have no oil in the compression chamber. Control is by load and idle operation or by speed, and a master controller coordinates several compressors. Most of the electrical energy drawn turns into heat, which can be recovered. Dryers, filters and receivers complete the station. ISO 8573-1 describes the achievable compressed air quality.
From practice
Oil-free or oil-lubricated is rarely a purely technical question in food plants. Quality assurance wants to know which class to ISO 8573-1 arrives at the point of product contact, and that depends on air treatment and its maintenance as much as on the compressor itself. So for compressors I always ask for a quotation for the complete station, with dryer, filters and controller. Two speed-controlled compressors without a common controller like to fight each other and both run at part load. Idle time costs electricity without delivering air. Take a look at the compressor room too. If it is hot and dusty in summer, the machines draw in warm, dirty air and trip. And plan for redundancy. If your whole production hangs on a single compressor, you usually discover the downside on the night shift.
Condition monitoring
Automation & roboticsContinuous capture of condition data such as vibration, temperature and current draw of critical components. Characteristic values are formed from the measurements and compared with limits and with the previous trend. If a value deviates from normal behaviour over a longer period, the system raises a warning. Typical measuring points are bearings, gearboxes, motors, pumps and compressors. Condition monitoring is the pragmatic first step before predictive maintenance, which also uses a model to forecast when a failure is to be expected. Even simple trend monitoring makes wear visible early.
From practice
Sensible starting points are heavily loaded drives, bearings at sealing stations, vacuum pumps and compressors. Many sensors already deliver diagnostic data via IO-Link anyway, and the skill lies in setting limits and alarms. A simple trend dashboard with current draw and temperature per unit often reveals wear early enough to move the replacement into a planned shutdown window. Decide beforehand who receives a warning and what they do then. A message that nobody processes is just one more alarm. Only once data and response processes are in place does the step to predictive maintenance pay off. Start with a few measuring points whose failure is really expensive.
Connected load
Production & energyThe sum of the rated power of all loads connected to a machine, a line or a plant. At machine level it is given in the data sheet and on the rating plate, usually in kW or as apparent power in kVA. It forms the basis for sizing the supply cable, protective devices and distribution. The power actually drawn is usually lower, because not all loads run at full load at the same time. Planners account for this with a simultaneity factor. The connected load of an installation is to be distinguished from the grid connection capacity of the plant, which is agreed with the grid operator and limited by the transformer and the connection itself. In projects the consumer list collects the connected load of every machine.
From practice
Connected loads in quotations are cautious figures. The supplier adds up everything in the cabinet and rounds up. If the electrical planner then totals every machine in a new hall, the result is a transformer that will never be fully loaded. The opposite case costs more. Your new line just fits into the sub-distribution board, but the plant is already at the limit of its grid connection, and an upgrade by the grid operator takes time the schedule does not allow for. So at the FAT I have the supplier show me the actual power drawn in production mode, in addition to the figure on the rating plate. Check early how much reserve the main distribution board and the transformer still have. That question belongs in layout planning. In the week before installation it is too late.
Consignment stock
CommercialA procurement model in which the supplier stores its goods directly at the customer’s site but remains the owner until they are drawn. The store sits in the operator’s plant, often as a marked-off area or a rack, and is filled by the supplier. Billing happens only when the part is actually taken out and consumed, so the operator ties up no capital until then. Stock is usually controlled through minimum and maximum quantities, and withdrawals are reported or scanned. The model is common for standard and drawing parts, wear parts and frequently needed components.
From practice
On packaging lines consignment stock is mainly interesting for wear parts and change parts. The parts are within reach, and you do not have to advance any money for them. The small print sits in the contract. Settle how withdrawals are reported, who carries out the stocktaking and when, who is liable if a part is damaged or goes missing, and what happens to the remaining stock when a line is shut down. Also decide who sets the minimum stock. Otherwise the shelf is empty when a sealing jaw fails at night, and nobody feels responsible. And keep access tight: whoever may go to the rack also records what they take out.
Consumer list (utilities list)
Project management & CAPEXA table of all consumers in a machine or line with their demand for energy and utilities. For each consumer it records the electrical connection values and the demand for compressed air, cooling water, steam, vacuum, nitrogen and exhaust air, for compressed air for example volume, pressure and quality class to ISO 8573-1. Connection location and connection size are added. Nominal and peak values are given, together with information on simultaneity. The consumer list is drawn up during basic engineering and updated during detail engineering. It is the basis for sizing the supply through building services, for the connected load and for the utilities connection plan, which shows where the connection points are.
From practice
Suppliers’ connection values are rarely wrong, but often not comparable. One gives the peak, another the average at rated output, a third the sum of all fuses. Simply add them up and you end up with a transformer that is far too large. So ask for nominal consumption and peak demand separately, and for compressed air always together with the pressure the volume refers to. States outside normal production tend to be forgotten. The shrink tunnel draws the most power while heating up, and cleaning needs water in quantities that do not occur in normal operation. Get the list early. Compressors and supply lines have their own lead times, and connecting them often needs a shutdown in the plant. Otherwise the new line stands there finished, waiting for its compressor.
Contactor
Mechanical engineering & componentsAn electromagnetically operated switch that connects and disconnects load circuits such as motors, heaters or transformers. When current flows through the coil, the magnet pulls in the armature and closes the main contacts. If the control voltage drops out, a spring opens them again. Auxiliary contacts serve for control and feedback. Common coil voltages are 24 V DC and 230 V AC. IEC 60947-4-1 assigns contactors to categories by type of load, for example AC-3 for squirrel-cage motors. A contactor differs from a relay in its higher switching capacity and from a motor protection circuit breaker in having no protective function of its own. In safety circuits the switching state is monitored via mirror contacts.
From practice
Contactors switch away quietly for years until the contacts are burnt or one welds shut. Wear depends on the number of operations and on the load. A motor that is jogged under load all day wears out its contactor far faster than one in continuous duty. If a main contact sticks, the drive keeps running although the control has switched off. That is why safety functions of higher categories use two contactors in series, with their mirror contacts wired into a feedback circuit. For a replacement, coil voltage, frame size and auxiliary contacts all count. One with the same rating but an ordinary NC contact instead of a mirror contact appears to work perfectly. The safety function, however, is no longer the one that was validated. And a contactor between inverter and motor should only switch while the inverter is not putting out voltage.
Contingency
Project management & CAPEXA reserve amount shown openly in the investment budget for identified but not yet quantifiable risks and for unforeseen extra costs. The project manager cannot spend it freely. Every use is documented and approved by the client, and the amount moves from the reserve into the relevant cost item. The size depends on the maturity of the planning and the type of project. Brownfield projects usually need more reserve than new builds, because the existing plant holds unknowns. Contingency is distinct from a management reserve, which is held at a higher level outside the project’s cost baseline.
From practice
A reserve hidden within the budget is used up at the first extra. Show it openly and set out in the project manual who releases it. In packaging projects it tends to flow into the same few holes: the interface to existing conveyor technology, additional formats, floor remediation under the old machine, a longer commissioning period. I have the amount derived from the risk register, each risk with its probability and cost impact, and only then look at the total. A flat percentage does not survive the first question from controlling. Whatever is left unspent at the end, show openly in the closing report.
Continuous inkjet (CIJ)
Packaging technologyNon-contact marking method in which a continuous ink jet is broken into droplets, electrostatically charged, deflected and written onto the passing object. Droplets not needed for the print run back into the print head and return to the ink. Used for date, batch and codes on bottles, cans, cups and cartons at high speeds. Inks are available for many surfaces. Solvent consumption and print-head maintenance are operating factors. Unlike thermal inkjet, CIJ prints from a greater distance, an advantage with containers that sway slightly on the belt.
From practice
A CIJ printer is undemanding while running and troublesome when stopped. Clogged nozzles after longer downtime, solvent consumption in warm halls and condensation on chilled bottles are the usual issues. Check ink adhesion on your actual surface, especially on damp containers. The print position must be reproducible at changeover, and a fixed print-head holder with a scale saves arguments. Count ink and solvent as running costs, and have the flushing routine for the weekend explained to you, because a printer that is clogged on Monday holds up the early shift.
Contour check
IntralogisticsA light-curtain or laser gantry that checks the load unit for overhang and maximum height before it enters conveyor technology, an AGV handover or lorry loading. Light curtains detect the outer contour, laser scanners or cameras measure it more precisely. If there is a deviation, the line stops or the pallet is rejected. The check prevents collisions at passageways and is standard on every automatic pallet line. Limits for height and overhang depend on racking, gate and downstream machine.
From practice
The contour check ahead of the palletiser or stretch wrapper stops a shifted layer from blocking the plant or jamming in the racking. A light curtain or camera checks overhang and height. The measurement is the easy part. Responding to a deviation is harder, because you have to define who stops, who corrects and how the pallet is recorded. Without a defined procedure, faulty pallets simply get acknowledged and carry on. At acceptance, test with a deliberately crooked pallet to see whether the plant really stops. Also check whether hanging film or a loose strap can fool the light curtain.
Contract for work vs contract for services
Project management & CAPEXComparison of two contract types under the German Civil Code. Under a contract for work (Werkvertrag) the contractor owes a result, such as the accepted and working plant, and payment normally falls due on acceptance. Defect rights apply, commonly called warranty. Under a contract for services (Dienstvertrag) the contractor owes the activity itself and is paid for effort, for example by the hour or by the day. For external project support the contract type affects liability, the right of instruction and the risk of bogus self-employment (Scheinselbstständigkeit). It must match the practice actually lived. This entry explains the concept, the drafting belongs with a lawyer.
From practice
Under a contract for work you buy a result, namely the running plant, under a contract for services effort, namely an expert’s hours. For interim experts the contract for services is usual, for machine supply it is the contract for work with acceptance. It gets awkward when an expert comes in under a contract for services and is then managed like an employee, with a fixed place in the shift plan and instructions from the foreman. Then paper and practice no longer match. A clear task description, own work equipment and no integration into shift operations help. The contract has to say what actually happens on the shop floor. Discuss it with your lawyer before the first expert starts.
Contractor coordination
Project management & CAPEXCoordination of all work done by external companies’ staff on an operator’s premises. Where employees of several employers work at one location, the German Occupational Safety and Health Act and the accident insurance regulation DGUV Vorschrift 1 require them to cooperate on health and safety. If the activities could endanger each other, a person must be appointed to coordinate the work. Contractor coordination covers induction in the site rules and plant regulations, access control, the issuing of work permits, scheduling the trades in time and space, and protecting the operator’s own workforce while production continues. It is distinct from the SiGeKo, the health and safety coordinator appointed on construction sites under the German Construction Site Ordinance.
From practice
During a modification in a running plant there are soon more companies on site than anyone has on their list. The machine supplier brings a subcontractor for the pipework, who in turn brings a colleague for the insulation. That is why I ask every contractor in advance for the names of all fitters, including those of their subcontractors. Anyone not on the list and not inducted does not get onto the premises. The induction has to be given in a language people understand. A polite nod during a briefing in German does not count. What has proved its worth is a short round at the site every morning, in which each company says where it is working that day. Then you notice in good time that someone is welding up top while someone else is storing film underneath. Tell the shift management who is on site, too. The people on the line usually meet the fitters before the project manager does.
Control cabinet build
Automation & roboticsDesign and manufacture of a machine’s control cabinet to EN 60204-1 and EN 61439. This covers the layout of incoming supply, protection, controls, drive controllers, safety technology and terminals, cooling or air conditioning, cable entry, earthing and labelling. The basis is the circuit diagram, according to which the components are mounted and wired on the mounting plate. Power loss of the components determines the cooling required, and the degree of protection follows the IP code. At the end come a factory test with functional check and the documentation. Plant standards often specify manufacturer, colours, spare space and labelling.
From practice
Control cabinets mostly cause trouble through temperature. The typical picture is the frequency inverter in an unventilated cabinet right next to the shrink tunnel. Ask for a heat dissipation calculation and air conditioning that suits the shop-floor environment. Dust, heat and the way the hall is cleaned belong in that picture. Demand spare space for future expansion and enough free terminals. Make sure the labelling and equipment identification in the cabinet match the circuit diagram, otherwise troubleshooting at night turns into guesswork. Look at the mounting location before you sign. The door has to open during operation, even when the next cabinet already stands beside it. In hygienic design the cabinet belongs outside the wet area, otherwise the cleaning works against the electrics.
Control cabinet cooling
Mechanical engineering & componentsMeasures that remove the heat losses of components from a control cabinet and keep temperature and humidity within permissible limits. The largest heat sources are frequency inverters, servo drives and power supplies. Filter fans exchange cabinet air for ambient air and only work when the hall is cooler than the cabinet. Air-to-air heat exchangers keep the circuits separate, while cooling units with a refrigeration circuit also cool below ambient temperature. Air-to-water heat exchangers transfer the heat to a chilled water circuit. Heaters with a hygrostat prevent condensation at standstill. Sizing is based on power loss, cabinet surface, installation situation and ambient temperature. EN 61439 covers temperature rise verification for switchgear assemblies.
From practice
Sooner or later in summer, many plants have a cabinet door standing open with a pedestal fan in front of it. That cools for a while, but it pulls dust, flour or sugar dust into the cabinet, and the IP rating is gone. Filter fans need clean mats, otherwise they only run for the noise. In wet areas with foam cleaning they have no business at all. With cooling units, keep an eye on condensate. If the setpoint is too low, the cabinet gets damp because the air is cooled below its dew point. A door switch that stops the unit when the door is open is therefore always part of the package. Ask the supplier for the heat balance of the cabinet and the ambient temperature it was designed for. The figure often suits his assembly hall but not a platform right under the hall roof.
Control cabinet reserve
Automation & roboticsDeliberately planned spare capacity in the control cabinet for future expansion. It includes free space on the mounting plate and in the cable duct, free terminals, free inputs and outputs with their slots, and reserves in protection, power supply, incoming feed and cooling. Retrofits such as additional sensors, drives or communication modules can then be carried out without a complete rebuild. The extent and design of the reserve are laid down in the user requirements specification or the plant standard, because without a requirement it turns out tight. It is checked at acceptance on the cabinet itself, since a look at the documents is not enough.
From practice
Anyone who does not write the reserve into the tender gets the tightest cabinet that just meets the standard. I therefore state in the enquiry how much free mounting area, free terminals and digital and analogue channels must remain, plus a thermal reserve. Check this at the FAT. Reserve on paper is often already claimed by change order number three. Besides space, cooling capacity counts. One extra frequency inverter can quickly push a tightly packed cabinet to its thermal limit. Look at the power supply and incoming feed as well, because free terminals help little when there is no power left for the next consumer.
Controls backup
Automation & roboticsA secured, versioned copy of all programmes and parameters of an installation. This includes the PLC project, the safety programme with checksum, the HMI project, the drive parameters, the robot programmes, the vision recipes and the camera settings. Each state carries a date, an author and a reason for the change. The storage is kept apart from the installation, for example on a backed-up server, and the backup is renewed after every change, by hand or with a backup tool. Its aim is restoration after a hardware failure or a faulty change within hours rather than days.
From practice
Often a backup lies somewhere, only not of the current state, not of every component and not tested. Without saved parameters, someone sits at the machine with the manual after an inverter swap and guesses values. Define who backs up after every change, where the backup is kept and who may restore it. The restore should be rehearsed once a year, ideally during a planned shutdown. I have every supplier hand over the state after acceptance and note in the protocol where it is kept. Also check whether the backup can be restored without the supplier’s laptop, because otherwise passwords and programming software exist only there.
Controls migration
Automation & roboticsConverting an existing machine to a new generation of controls because the old one has been discontinued or spare parts are unavailable. The scope ranges from a CPU swap with programme conversion to new safety technology, a new HMI, new drives and new wiring. A programme conversion usually needs rework by hand. The sequence consists of an inventory, conversion or reprogramming, testing and the rebuild in a downtime window, followed by acceptance. Migration raises the question of a substantial modification of the machine and of CE conformity.
From practice
Rarely is a controls migration a straight like-for-like swap. The old programme has grown over years, is hardly documented and is full of special cases known only to the night-shift supervisor. So talk to the people who stand at the machine every day before anyone writes a quotation. Plan a software inventory before quoting, a simulation test before the downtime window, and a fallback plan with the old CPU and its programme state in stock. Have the I/O list rebuilt before anything is wired, because deviations between drawing and cabinet otherwise show up only at start-up. Do not carry over safety technology unchecked. That is usually the point where a migration turns into a retrofit, with a new risk assessment and everything that comes with it.
Conveyor technology
IntralogisticsRoller, chain and belt conveyors that move goods continuously between machines, storage and dispatch. Further designs are accumulation roller conveyors, modular belt conveyors and chain conveyors for pallets. The conveyors connect the individual machines into a line. Buffer design determines line OEE, because a correctly sized buffer decouples faults on individual machines. Design parameters are the conveyed product, speed, accumulation length, cleanability and the handover to neighbouring machines.
From practice
Designing conveyor technology is about product care, accumulation behaviour, cleanability and modularity. Accumulation roller conveyors decouple without pressure on the product, belt conveyors are cheap, modular belts are hygienic. Buffers are sized in seconds of run time. What counts is how long the downstream machine may stop before the upstream machine has to stop. That figure belongs in the user requirements specification. I ask for the buffer time at each handover in a table and hold it against the usual stoppage duration of the downstream machine. Plan the cleaning in from the start, because a belt that cannot be removed never gets properly clean in a hygiene zone.
Conveyor tracking
Automation & roboticsA robot function in which products are picked or placed on the running conveyor belt without the belt stopping. The robot follows the belt motion via an encoder that reports the belt position to the robot controller. Products are detected in front of the working area by a photoelectric sensor or camera and entered with their position into a queue. Within a tracking window bounded by a start and an end limit, the robot moves along with the belt and picks. A calibration between the coordinate system of the belt and that of the robot is a prerequisite.
From practice
Tracking eliminates stoppers and singulation stations and increases output, but requires clean mounting of the encoder and an accurate calibration. Slip between belt and product, for example from condensate or oil, leads to missed picks. A stretched belt or a shifted encoder also moves the hits slowly, until someone finally notices that the products are no longer picked in the middle. Document the hit rate at maximum belt speed at acceptance. I have the test run with a belt stop and restart in the middle of operation as well, because in daily life the belt stands still from time to time and starts up again.
Corona treatment
Packaging technologyA process that raises the surface energy of plastic films by means of an electrical discharge so that printing inks, varnishes and adhesives will adhere. Polyolefins such as PE and PP are non-polar and wet poorly without treatment. A generator applies high-frequency high voltage to an electrode, and the film runs through the gap beneath it over an earthed roller with an insulating cover. The discharge ionises the air in the gap and oxidises the surface of the film. Treatment level is checked with test inks or by contact angle measurement and stated as surface energy in mN/m. Because the effect fades during storage, films are often treated again directly before printing or laminating. The discharge produces ozone, which has to be extracted.
From practice
The corona treater itself usually sits at the film manufacturer. You still feel its effect as soon as your coder or thermal transfer printer prints on PE and the code can be wiped off with a thumb. Then it pays to look in the warehouse. Rolls that spent a long time at the back of the rack have lost part of their treatment, and FIFO is more than a formality here. Also check whether the treated side actually faces the printhead. If the roll arrives with the wrong winding direction, you are printing on the side that was never treated. A set of test inks costs little and settles such questions at goods receipt within minutes. Write the required minimum value into the packaging specification, together with the point in time at which it applies. Otherwise the supplier measures ex works and you measure after months in storage.
Corrugated board
Packaging technologySheet packaging material made of a corrugated paper layer glued between smooth liners. By construction it is divided into single-wall, double-wall and triple-wall board. It is the standard for transport packaging. The liners consist of kraftliner or testliner, the corrugated layer of its own fluting paper. Quality figures such as edge crush test (ECT) and burst strength belong in the packaging material specification, because the stability of a pallet starts with the carton. The board is converted into blanks from which case erectors or wrap-around case packers form shipping cartons and trays.
From practice
Corrugated board is the workhorse of secondary packaging. Flute type, grammage and paper quality determine stacking strength, machinability and price, and the supplier likes to adjust one of these three when the price is under pressure. Damp storage reduces strength significantly, which you notice particularly in cold stores or at the loading ramp in autumn. When changing supplier or quality, always test samples on the case erector. The same FEFCO number does not mean the same running behaviour. Flat sheets, clean scoring and constant thickness only show in a long run, not on the data sheet. Run at least one full pallet in one go before you release.
Corrugated board grade
Packaging technologyShort designation used to classify corrugated board by number of flute layers and strength class, in Germany per DIN 55468-1, for example 1.20 for single-wall or 2.30 for double-wall. The first digit stands for the flute layers, the rest for the strength class. It summarises minimum values such as burst strength, edge crush resistance and puncture resistance and serves as a basis for specification, tender and price comparison. Flute type, paper types and area weight are not covered in detail.
From practice
The grade designation is a minimum requirement and not a description of the material. Two suppliers can meet the same grade with completely different papers and area weights, and the cartons then run differently on the erector and capper. A lower price often comes from one supplier hitting the minimum values narrowly while the other delivers with reserve. In the quotation comparison matrix that looks identical and is not. I therefore ask for the paper combination in every quotation. Alongside the grade, fix the flute type, total area weight and paper combination, and require first samples for a machine trial with every supplier change.
Cp / Cpk
KPIsStatistical indices of how reliably a process produces within tolerance. Cp relates the width of the tolerance band to the spread of the process, more precisely to six standard deviations. Cpk also accounts for the position of the mean and refers to the tolerance limit closest to it. A process with small spread that runs off-centre therefore has a good Cp and a poor Cpk. The machine capability indices Cm and Cmk look at the machine alone over a short period. A Cpk of 1.33 or higher is considered capable and is the basis for acceptance of dosing and filling processes.
From practice
For acceptance of filling and dosing processes, Cpk is calculated from a sample fixed in advance. Write into the contract how large it is and for which product and format the measurement is taken. A Cpk below 1.0 means regular tolerance violations, so reject or give-away. Above 1.33 the process is considered under control. The value depends on the product. Powders, granulates and liquids behave differently, so the check per product group belongs in the acceptance. Measure only once the process has settled, not straight after start-up, otherwise the spread looks worse than it is in continuous running.
CP pallet (chemical-industry pallet)
IntralogisticsWooden pallets standardised by the chemical industry in nine versions (CP1 to CP9) with different dimensions, for example CP1 at 1,000 x 1,200 mm or CP3 at 1,140 x 1,140 mm. They are matched to sacks, drums, octabins and FIBCs and are widely used in the chemical and plastics granulate trade. The types differ in footprint and construction. A CP pallet is not part of the Euro pallet exchange pool. It arrives at the plant with the raw material and is either returned or disposed of by the recipient.
From practice
Anyone sourcing granulate, powder or raw materials from the chemical industry receives CP pallets, and they rarely fit racking and conveyor technology planned for the Euro format. Clarify early which pallet types goods-in, storage and depalletisers can handle, and plan for runner orientation and deck-board spacing. The problem usually shows first at goods-in, when the forks do not fit the entry openings or a deck board gives way. Also include disposal or return in the calculation, because CP pallets do not run in an exchange pool. Otherwise that item appears in no cost sheet, and the disposal firm sends its invoice anyway.
Critical path
Project management & CAPEXThe longest chain of mutually dependent activities in the schedule, from project start to project end. Every day of delay on the critical path is a day of project delay, because these activities have no float. Activities off the path have float and may slip by that amount without touching the end date. The path is determined by network scheduling. Long lead times, for example for control components and special parts, almost always sit on it. Ordering early is cheaper than expediting late. The path can change during the project when activities shift.
From practice
In packaging projects the critical path almost always runs through the lead time of the main machine, the change parts and the release of packaging materials. Assembly on site rarely does. Supplying packaging samples, product samples and format lists early keeps the path short, because without them the supplier can neither design nor order change parts. Check the supplier’s schedule for float. A plan without float is more of a wish. After every schedule change, check whether the path has moved. The activity that still had float yesterday may be the tightest today. Ask which bought-in parts have the longest lead times and when they are ordered. The order date says more than the delivery date.
Cup filler
Packaging technologyFilling and closing machine for pre-formed cups made of plastic or board, usually built as a rotary machine or as a linear machine with an indexing chain. The cups are separated from the stack and moved through the stations: optional decontamination with UV or H2O2, dosing, sealing of the lidding foil, lid application and discharge. Lidding foil means the sealing film that closes the cup at its rim. Depending on the product, dosing is done with pistons or pumps, and for lumpy products with multihead weighers or dosers. Used for dairy products, delicatessen goods, ready meals and cosmetics.
From practice
A cup filler’s output stands or falls on destacking. Cups that have gone oval in storage or transport, or that stick together, cause most of the stoppages. Have cups and lidding foil from the actual supplier run at the FAT, not sample material, which is usually hand-picked. Also check whether the sealing head matches the foil thickness and the cup rim area, and how product splashes in the sealing zone are prevented, because a single drop on the rim makes a leaking seam. And ask which parts are swapped and which are only adjusted when the cup shape changes.
Cycle time
KPIsTime between two finished units, the reciprocal of output. 60 cycles per minute correspond to a cycle time of one second. The slowest station determines the cycle time of the line, so bottleneck analysis means finding that station and relieving it. When designing new lines, rated cycle, continuous output and peak output are distinguished. The rated cycle is the value the machine is designed for, and continuous output is the value it holds in sustained operation with real product. Machine cycle time is to be distinguished from the customer takt, which follows from demand.
From practice
The line’s cycle time is set by the slowest link, usually the filler or the cartoner. All other machines should be able to run faster so that they can catch up after stops, otherwise product backs up at every small halt. When designing new lines, rated cycle, continuous output and peak output must be kept clearly apart. A machine that only reaches its rated cycle for one format has been wrongly specified. Ask the supplier for which format and which packaging material the cycle applies, and have the other formats confirmed one by one. The catalogue cycle likes to stand large on the first page, with the format in the small print.
D
Dancer control
Packaging technologyControl of web tension in films, paper or label webs by means of a movable dancer roller. The web runs in a loop around the roller, which sits on a pivot arm or a slide and is loaded with a defined force, usually by a pneumatic cylinder or a weight. This load sets the web tension. A sensor detects the position of the dancer, and the controller adjusts the brake or drive of the unwinder so that the dancer stays in its middle position. The dancer also buffers web length when the machine accelerates or draws intermittently. Tension control with load cells is a different method, measuring web tension directly. Web guiding, by contrast, corrects the lateral position of the web.
From practice
When the print mark wanders and the bag length varies, people tend to look at the print mark sensor. Often the cause sits a few rollers further upstream, at the dancer. A stiff bearing on the pivot arm, a pressure regulator that every shift turns a little, or a worn position sensor is enough to make the web tension pump. Watch the dancer while the machine is running. Calm in the middle is good. Constant swinging from one end stop to the other means the control cannot keep up. Thin film tolerates less tension than thick film, and too much tension stretches it until print and cut no longer match. So write the cylinder pressure for each film into the recipe, or at least clearly onto the regulator. During maintenance, take the dancer in your hand once. It has to move easily and without jerking.
DAP (Delivered at Place)
CommercialAn Incoterms rule of the International Chamber of Commerce under which the seller makes the goods available at the named place. The seller bears transport cost and transport risk up to there. Risk passes once the goods are on the arriving means of transport at the named place, ready for unloading. Unloading and import clearance with import duties fall to the buyer. For machine deliveries DAP is a common compromise between EXW and the rules under which the seller takes on more. Unloading and bringing the machine into the building still have to be regulated explicitly.
From practice
Under DAP the manufacturer’s delivery obligation ends at the named place, usually in front of the hall. After that the work only starts for you. Unloading with a crane or heavy-duty forklift, bringing the machine in through doors and aisles, and aligning it on the foundation must be agreed separately, often as a distinct line item in the quotation. Also clarify transport insurance up to handover and who bears damage during unloading. Check door height, floor load capacity and access before the lorry sets off. Settle who guides the delivery on site, because the driver does not know your premises. A low-loader stuck in front of the factory gate costs waiting time and nerves.
Data model
Digitalisation & AIA uniform description of which data a machine delivers, what it is called, what unit and meaning it has, and how the data items relate to one another. It is the basis for analysis across several machines. In OPC UA, data models are standardised per industry as Companion Specifications. For packaging machines PackML is widespread, which among other things defines a uniform state model. The Weihenstephan standards describe data for filling and packaging plants. Without a common model every machine has to be connected and translated individually.
From practice
Without a data model, the cause of a stoppage is called error code 17 on machine A, film fault on machine B, and nothing at all on machine C. Require a signal list in the URS with name, unit, cycle and meaning, based on PackML or the Weihenstephan standards. This costs the supplier little and saves you the translation work for every dashboard later. Agree a common catalogue of stoppage reasons right away, so that equal causes get equal names. And make sure units and timestamps are uniform. A speed in revolutions per minute on one machine and per second on another falsifies any analysis.
DataMatrix / GS1 codes
Automation & roboticsMachine-readable codes for identification. 1D barcodes such as the EAN serve retail, and 2D codes such as DataMatrix and QR code serve serialisation and small areas. A GS1 DataMatrix encodes data in fields that are identified by application identifiers, for example GTIN, batch and best-before date. The GS1 Digital Link represents the same data in a web address and so combines retail and consumer information in a single code. With the phase-out of the EAN barcode at the till, the 2D code is foreseeably coming to every packaging line.
From practice
Under the GS1 Sunrise 2027 programme, tills worldwide are to be able to read 2D codes, so the switch from the EAN barcode to a 2D code on the pack is foreseeable. For the line, this means printers with sufficient resolution, camera verification of code quality and a data connection for variable content such as batch and best-before date. Anyone buying coding systems today should require 2D capability and grading to ISO/IEC 15415. Find out whether the system builds the GS1 data structure with its separators correctly by itself or whether the code has to be assembled by hand. The error otherwise only shows when the scanner at the customer cannot separate the fields.
Daywork (time and materials hours)
CommercialBilling of work by actual time spent at previously agreed hourly rates, also called time and materials. Materials, travel time, travel costs and expenses are usually charged in addition, and surcharges apply to overtime, nights, weekends and public holidays. Billing is based on a time sheet stating date, person, hours and the work carried out, countersigned on site by the client. Daywork is common for installation and commissioning outside the agreed scope, for troubleshooting, service and modifications without a clearly defined scope. The client carries the quantity risk. With a fixed price, by contrast, the contractor carries the risk of the effort. For construction work, the German VOB/B conditions cover daywork in a separate section.
From practice
Decide who on your side is allowed to order daywork. Otherwise the shift supervisor asks the fitter whether he could just rebuild the chute quickly, and at the end of the month it turns up on the time sheet. Sign time sheets daily or at least weekly, while you still know who was there and when. A sheet that says eight hours installation helps nobody. Insist that the work is described so that a third party can follow it. Waiting time is a frequent cost driver. If the fitter is waiting for power, compressed air or the scaffolding, the clock is running at your expense. So prepare the site before the people arrive. Agree beforehand how travel time and waiting time are charged. That is often in the small print of the quotation.
Decision paper
Project management & CAPEXA written document that prepares a pending decision so that the responsible committee or manager can decide without lengthy queries. It describes the background and occasion, the open question, the alternatives examined with their cost, schedule impact and risks, and a reasoned recommendation. At the end comes a specific proposed resolution with a deadline. Decision papers are prepared mainly for the steering committee, for approval of a capital expenditure request, for variations and change requests, and for supplier selection. A length of a few pages is usual, with calculations and bid comparisons in the appendix. The decision taken is recorded with its date on the paper itself or in the minutes.
From practice
If you want a decision, make it easy for the committee. Put the question and your recommendation at the very top of the first page, worded so that it can be answered with yes or no. The reasoning comes afterwards. Many papers do it the other way round and hide the recommendation on page seven. Offer genuine alternatives. Any management team spots one good solution next to two obviously unusable ones straight away, and then the discussion turns to your credibility instead of the matter itself. The do-nothing option belongs in there as well, together with its consequences. Write down what a postponement costs, too. If the order goes out a few weeks later, delivery often slips too, and the conversion no longer fits into the planned shutdown window.
Declaration of Conformity
Quality & safetyA legally binding declaration by the manufacturer that the machine meets all applicable EU regulations, and a prerequisite for CE marking. It names the manufacturer, the machine with type and serial number, the directives and harmonised standards applied, the person who compiles the technical file, and place, date and signature of an authorised person. Its basis is the risk assessment. It is not to be confused with the Declaration of Incorporation for partly completed machinery. That carries no CE status and requires the complete machine to be declared conforming only after installation.
From practice
The Declaration of Conformity is not a form the supplier just includes. It is the legal outcome of the risk assessment. Require it in the URS as a condition of acceptance, together with operating instructions in German and the technical documentation. I always compare type and serial number in the declaration with the nameplate, and I check that the standards listed fit the machine and do not come from the template of a completely different one. For lines made up of several machines, it must be clarified who declares overall conformity, the integrator or the operator. This question is easily overlooked. After a rebuild, the old declaration does not automatically stay valid.
Deep learning (machine vision)
Digitalisation & AIA machine-learning method using deep neural networks that learns to recognise objects or classify faults from many labelled example images. The network forms the relevant features itself, so they do not have to be programmed by hand as rules and thresholds. Unlike rule-based machine vision, it copes with natural variation in the shape, colour and position of a product. In return it needs representative training data, and its decisions are not fully explainable. Typical tasks are classification, object detection and anomaly detection at packing and inspection stations.
From practice
Deep learning pays off where classic machine vision fails: with natural products, glossy surfaces and packaging with changing print artwork. The problem is the fault images. There is no shortage of good parts, while the rare faults turn up every few weeks at best. Ask the supplier who collects and labels the images, how retraining works and who approves a change. I also ask to see what the system does with an image it has never seen. For dimensional checks and presence checks, a fixed rule is usually simpler, and it is easier to explain when quality management or an auditor asks questions.
Defeating of safeguards
Quality & safetyThe unauthorised bypassing or disabling of safeguards on machinery. Typical forms are bridged guard door switches, spare actuators fixed with cable ties, magnets on sensors, light barriers taped over, enabling switches tied down and covers removed. The causes often lie in the design. Where operating modes for setting and fault clearing are missing, or restarting after a door has been opened takes too long, people have a reason to get round the safeguard. ISO 14119 therefore requires designers to assess this incentive and to provide countermeasures such as coded actuators or concealed mounting. For the operator, German occupational safety law, including the Ordinance on Industrial Safety and Health (BetrSichV), requires safeguards to be kept effective.
From practice
A spare actuator on a cable tie in the control cabinet says more about the machine than about the operator. As a rule there is a fault behind it that can only be cleared with the door open, or the machine takes minutes to restart after every opening. Then the shift finds a way. A formal warning on its own achieves little while the reason remains. Go to the machine with the operator and have them show you what they need the door open for. Often there is no setting mode at reduced speed with a three-position switch, or a hatch is in the wrong place. With new equipment this belongs in the acceptance test. Have typical faults such as a film break or a toppled cup cleared in front of you, without any tricks. If that cannot be done, the machine is not finished.
Defect classification (A / B / C)
Project management & CAPEXThe grading by severity of defects found at pre-FAT, FAT, SAT or during commissioning. A three-level scheme is widespread. Class A defects prevent proper operation or affect safety, and acceptance is not possible while they are open. B defects impair function, output or quality but still allow operation, and are rectified within an agreed period. Minor issues such as cosmetic flaws or small gaps in the documentation are rated C. The criteria are not standardised and are defined in the contract or the acceptance criteria. Each defect is entered in the punch list with its class, the person responsible and a due date. Acceptance and payments often depend on the class.
From practice
People rarely argue about the defect. They argue about the letter in front of it. At the end of a FAT the supplier tends to see everything as C, while production sees everything as A the moment it gets annoying. That is why I write into the acceptance criteria what we mean by A, B and C, with a few examples from this very machine. Anything that touches safety is A, and that is not up for negotiation. A sensor that triggers a false stop every few hours looks harmless in the report and costs time on every shift. I do not grade that as C. Put a name and a date against every item, otherwise the list looks exactly the same six months later. And tie the final payment to the B items being closed. In my experience that speeds things up more than any email.
Delta robot
Automation & roboticsA parallel-kinematic robot in which three arms hang from drives in the base plate above the product flow and guide the gripper together. Because the heavy drives stay stationary and only light arms move, the design is extremely fast at small payloads. An additional rotary axis in the centre turns the gripper. The delta robot is the standard for top-loading, for example chocolates into blister trays or bars into cartons, and is usually combined with a vision system for position detection.
From practice
Delta robots achieve very high pick rates with light products, but need clean product feeding and good lighting for the vision system. Hygienic designs with IP69K, stainless steel and open construction are usually demanded in the food sector. Costs arise less in the robot than in the gripper, vision, conveyor integration and safety cell, so always compare the whole cell and not the robot price. The working envelope is limited, and the products have to pass through the right window. Draw the layout with the real belt widths and the real product spacings before you fix the frame size.
Depalletiser
Packaging technologyCounterpart to the palletiser at the start of the line. The machine takes pallets loaded with empty cans, jars, carton blanks or other packaging, separates them layer by layer or piece by piece and feeds the products to the line. Depending on the load, vacuum layer grippers, clamp grippers or robots with vision are used. Interlayers placed between the layers during loading and empty pallets are removed and stacked or taken away separately. Singulation and conveying downstream bring the flow to the pace of the line.
From practice
For depalletising, layer pattern, interlayers and product stability decide the technology: vacuum layer grippers for jars and cans, clamp grippers for cartons, robotics with vision for mixed pallets. Handling interlayers and empty pallets is a separate process step with its own space requirement. Anyone who forgets it in the layout ends up with forklifts in the line area later. Look at the pallets that really arrive. Crooked layers and slipped wrap from the supplier’s plant are everyday business, and a machine that only copes with sample pallets keeps stopping in its first month. Before ordering, I have photos of delivery pallets from recent weeks shown to me.
Design approval
Project management & CAPEXFormal approval of the design documents such as drawings, 3D models, bills of materials and wiring diagrams before manufacture and ordering. The operator checks conformity with the URS, plant standards and layout, and the supplier remains responsible for technical correctness. Approval does not shift this responsibility. It is documented with revision status, date and signature, usually on an approval stamp or in an approval record. Common outcomes are approved, approved with comments and not approved. With the design freeze, the approved status is fixed.
From practice
Approval does not mean taking on responsibility. Write into the contract that checking the documents does not limit the supplier’s warranty, and settle the wording with your lawyer. Focus your check on what you know better than the supplier: placement, utilities, operating side, hygiene zones and existing conveyor technology. I draw up a short checklist for this and do not go through every screw. Make your comments directly on the drawing, with the revision status, so that they can be found later and the supplier cannot overlook them. Also set a deadline for the check. An approval package that sits on a desk for weeks becomes your delay in the schedule.
Design freeze
Project management & CAPEXAn agreed point in time from which the design is no longer changed, so that manufacturing, procurement and control programming can build on a fixed baseline. At the freeze, the design status is fixed with a revision status and date. Later changes only run through a formal change request, with an assessment of cost and schedule impact and the client’s consent. The freeze usually coincides with design approval or follows it. It can be staged, for example first for the mechanics and later for the control programme and the operator interface.
From practice
A freeze is quickly declared and rarely lived. After the cut-off date the customer still sends new packaging samples, the supplier swaps a drive because of lead times, and nobody calls it a change. So before the freeze, check that all formats, packaging materials and interfaces have really been sampled. Without samples, the freeze is just a date on paper. Put the date in the schedule and announce it where people see little of the project, in marketing and procurement. Experience says the late wishes come from there. Have the supplier confirm in writing, too, that a substitute type chosen because of lead times counts as a change.
Design review
Project management & CAPEXA formal review of the design status at defined points in time, usually as concept, preliminary and detail reviews. Participants are the supplier and the operator with the specialist departments of maintenance, occupational safety, quality assurance and production. The basis is the 3D model, layout, wiring diagrams and functional description at a named revision status. Functional fulfilment, accessibility, hygiene, safety and maintainability are reviewed. The results are recorded in the minutes as an action list with owners and deadlines. Formal design approval follows afterwards.
From practice
A design review on the 3D model saves steel. This is where you notice that the motor behind the guard cannot be removed, or that the change parts can only be reached with a ladder. On screen that costs a click, on the finished machine a rebuild. So invite operators and maintenance staff as well as the engineers. They also notice that the cleaning hose does not reach the rear corner and that the operating side faces the wrong wall of the hall. Keep every point as a list with a deadline and a name, and check at the next review what was implemented. Anyone who waits until the FAT finds the faults on a machine that is already built.
Detailed scheduling
Digitalisation & AIThe planning level that distributes released production orders to individual lines or machines and sets their sequence, start and finish. It follows rough-cut planning in the ERP system, which matches quantities against capacity by week or day, and plans down to the shift and the hour. Available capacity, shift pattern, changeover times, material availability, staffing and planned maintenance windows are taken into account. In food and packaging plants the sequence often depends on allergens, colours or recipes, which are stored in a changeover matrix. Detailed scheduling runs in a dedicated planning system (APS, advanced planning and scheduling), in the MES or, quite traditionally, on a planning board. The result is an allocation plan for each line.
From practice
Even the neatest planning board usually lasts until the first serious breakdown. If the cartoner stops on Tuesday morning, the plan for the rest of the week is waste paper. Then you find out whether someone can rework it quickly or whether the shift leaders start replanning on their own. Plan with the output the line really achieves on average, not with the nominal output from the data sheet. Otherwise every plan is too ambitious from the start, and the gap shows up on Friday in the late shift. The changeover sequence often achieves more than any software. Light to dark, allergen-free before allergen-containing, every line leader knows that, and it still belongs in a changeover matrix the planner can see. If the entire schedule lives in a spreadsheet on one colleague’s computer, feel free to ask what happens during the holidays.
Detectable plastics
Packaging technologyPlastics for product-contact machine parts that are detected by a metal detector or X-ray inspection because metallic or X-ray-dense additives are mixed in. They are usually coloured blue, since that colour rarely occurs in food and fragments also catch the eye. The base is engineering plastics such as POM, PE or PA, which must also comply with Regulation (EU) No 10/2011 on plastics in food contact. Typical parts are scrapers, guide rails, screws and wipers. Whether a fragment is found depends on its size, its position and the product.
From practice
Abrasion and broken-off corners from scrapers, guide rails and screws end up in the product. A detectable grade means the inspection line finds them. Check, though, whether your detector actually recognises fragments of the relevant size, and include the parts in the test routine. Ask the supplier which test piece was used to prove detectability and in which product. Detectable plastics are mechanically somewhat weaker, so coordinate the design with the design engineer. Blue alone proves nothing. Standard plastics come in blue as well, and no detector will find them.
Die-cutting tool
Packaging technologyA tool for cutting and creasing blanks from card or corrugated board. Cutting rules, scoring rules and ejection rubber are mounted on a base, for flatbed dies usually a wooden board, and a counter die works against the scoring rules. Flatbed dies deliver high dimensional accuracy, rotary dies deliver high speed with larger tolerances. The ejection rubber pushes the blank back out of the knives after the cut. Whether the tool belongs to the customer or the supplier must be settled contractually.
From practice
Whoever pays for the die-cutting tool should also own it, otherwise procurement gets stuck when changing supplier. How the contract words this is best clarified with a lawyer. Record tool number, revision status and storage location in the packaging material specification. After changes to scoring or dimensions, a new approval sample has to run on the machine. A worn cutting rule shows up first as fraying edges and dust in the erector’s magazine, not on the drawing. The ejection rubber ages too and eventually stops pushing the blanks out cleanly. I manage die-cutting tools like machine parts, with a number, and ask regularly where they are right now.
Digital twin
Automation & roboticsA computer model of a machine or line that reproduces its behaviour, so that sequences can be played through before construction or before a rebuild. There are material flow models that represent routes, loading and floor space, and behaviour models of individual machines against which the control program is tested before commissioning, which is called virtual commissioning. The basis is CAD data, cycle times and control data. The more interlinked machines and variants, the sooner the effort pays off. For a single machine it often exceeds the benefit, so a sober cost-benefit case comes first.
From practice
The digital twin makes sense in three cases. First, material flow simulation before layout decisions. Second, virtual commissioning of the control system on complex interlinked lines. Third, comparing variants for rebuilds during ongoing operation. POWERJO uses a material flow model in visTABLE in its Shopfloor Analysis to put numbers on routes, loading and floor space before anyone decides on conveyor technology or AGVs. Count the effort honestly. A model nobody maintains is waste paper after the first rebuild, and the results are only as good as the cycle times you feed in. Ask beforehand who owns the model and whether the supplier hands it over. For a single machine, a proper trial run at FAT is usually enough.
Digital worker guidance
Automation & roboticsA system that guides workers at the workstation step by step through assembly, inspection or packing work. Instructions appear as text, images, video or a 3D view on a screen, tablet or smart glasses, or are projected onto the work surface. The content is selected per order or variant from bills of materials and work plans. Sensors, scanners and screwdrivers report back, so that the next step is only released once the previous one is done. The technology is used in mechanical engineering, manufacturing and the automotive industry, and in the food industry for manual assembly and packing steps. Typical aims are fewer errors, shorter induction and documented processes.
From practice
Worker guidance pays off with many variants, changing staff and manual assembly or packing steps: projection or a screen shows step by step, sensors verify. Its benefit stands or falls on maintaining the work instructions. Without an owner, the system goes out of date after the first product change. Define who changes and releases content and how quickly a change reaches the workstation. Pictures and short videos work better than long texts in mixed-language teams, because they need no translation. Also plan for failure, because if the screen stays dark at night, the shift needs a paper version. I involve the workers before the start, because instructions written past them tend to get ignored.
Direct thermal label
Packaging technologyA label with a heat-sensitive coating that turns black on contact with the print head. It is printed without a ribbon, because the coating contains a colour former and a developer that only react with each other under heat. The label is cheap and simple in the printer, but sensitive to heat, light, friction and plasticisers, and the print fades over time. An additional protective layer on the surface makes it more resistant to abrasion. It suits shipping, weighing and short-term labels, not permanent identification. With thermal transfer printing, by contrast, a ribbon carries the ink onto the label.
From practice
Direct thermal saves ribbon and changeover time but costs legibility. A pallet label that hangs for months in a high-bay warehouse or lies in the sun at the gate is often no longer scannable afterwards. For traceability over the storage period, use thermal transfer. Put a sample on a windowsill in the sun for a week and scan it afterwards, which tells you more than any datasheet. Also look for abrasion-resistant, surface-coated grades and for freedom from questionable colour developers such as bisphenol A, which is restricted in thermal paper in the EU. Ask the label supplier about it explicitly.
Display packaging
Packaging technologySales packaging that serves directly as a presentation surface in retail, from shelf trays and counter displays to floor or pallet displays for promotional goods. It usually consists of printed corrugated or solid board that is die-cut, folded and erected by hand or semi-automatically. The display is filled at the plant and reaches the store on the pallet, where it only has to be set up or opened. It therefore sits between transport packaging and sales packaging and has to serve both purposes. Related is shelf ready packaging, which stands out mainly through quick restocking.
From practice
Displays have short runs, many variants and tight retail deadlines. They are often assembled by hand or semi-automatically, and automation only pays off for recurring base formats. Agree graphics and pallet dimensions with the retail customer before production runs. A display that looks good on the pallet but collapses when unpacked in the store, or that fails on the pallet height of the retailer’s warehouse, costs you the promotion. Allow time for print approval and building a sample, because that is where delays often arise. And settle who sets up the display in the store.
Documentation scope
Project management & CAPEXContractually defined scope of technical documentation to be supplied, listed as a separate annex to the purchase order. It covers the operating manual, declaration of conformity, risk assessment, wiring diagrams, pneumatic diagrams, parts lists, spare and wear parts lists, maintenance instructions, supplier documentation, PLC programme with source code, drive parameters, drawings and layouts. For each document, language, file format, revision status and handover date are specified. A preliminary set for commissioning and a final set as built before acceptance are usual.
From practice
Documentation not specified in the purchase order does not arrive, or arrives late. Set out the language, file formats, number of sets and timing, plus the as built revision status. Ask for PDF and editable formats as well, otherwise you can neither extend the wiring diagrams later nor adapt them to your plant standard. Suppliers like to forget the PLC programme with source code and the drive parameters, until someone asks for them after a replacement. Withhold part of the payment until the documents have been checked. In the Tender Package, the scope belongs in as a separate annex, so that all bidders quote the same thing.
Dosing accuracy
Packaging technologyMeasure of the deviation of the actual fill quantity from the target value, given as standard deviation or as a tolerance band in grams or millilitres for a defined output rate and product. The smaller the spread, the closer the mean can move to the nominal quantity. Under the German Prepackaged Goods Regulation, the Fertigpackungsverordnung, the mean must not fall below the nominal quantity and individual packs must stay within set limits. The spread therefore determines the necessary overfill and with it the product cost per pack. It depends on dosing principle, product properties, output rate and whether a checkweigher corrects the dosing.
From practice
Manufacturer figures for dosing accuracy usually apply to ideal products at medium output. Agree in the functional specification the product, output rate, pack size and the test method used to verify accuracy at FAT and SAT. Your sticky or foaming product shows what the machine can do, not the supplier’s test product. Before ordering, work out what one gram of overfill costs per year at your volumes and raw material price. This often justifies a better dosing system more than any increase in speed. I always run that calculation before the first talk about machine output.
Down payment
CommercialThe first payment on ordering, typically 30 %, with which the manufacturer pre-finances the procurement of materials. As a result the buyer carries the risk that the manufacturer fails to deliver. To protect against insolvency risk, the buyer secures the payment with an advance payment guarantee from the manufacturer’s bank, which is standard practice for six-figure down payments. If the manufacturer does not repay on non-delivery, the guarantor steps in. The guarantee is returned once the performance has been delivered. In the payment plan the down payment sits alongside further instalments tied to delivery, FAT and acceptance.
From practice
For special-purpose machines, 30 per cent down payment, 60 per cent on delivery or FAT and 10 per cent after acceptance is a common structure. Negotiation settles the split. The higher the down payment, the more important the advance payment guarantee, because if the manufacturer becomes insolvent the money is otherwise gone. Check the guarantee for amount, term and return conditions. A guarantee that expires before delivery does not help. Also check whether the down payment can be tied to a milestone with proof, for example approval of the functional specification or the material order. I do not transfer anything until I hold the original guarantee.
Systematic recording and classification of all stoppages by duration, frequency and cause. The basis is a reason code catalogue with fixed cause codes and a recording that can run manually at a terminal, via the machine controller or by production data capture. Following the principle that a few causes cost most of the time, the Pareto analysis is the core of every analysis day. It also shows whether stoppages stem from technology, changeover, material or organisation. Without reliable data, no effective measures can be derived.
From practice
The downtime analysis is the starting point of every efficiency improvement. For two weeks every stop is recorded with duration and reason, then the list is sorted by frequency and duration. Mostly a few causes generate the bulk of the losses, and most of them can be fixed without investment. In the Efficiency Day, we do exactly this in concentrated form, on site, in a single day. The catch lies in the recording: where operators type reasons freely, the same thing ends up four times in four spellings. A short catalogue with fixed reasons solves that. And the operator must see that his entries achieve something, otherwise he soon types nothing but Other.
Downtime cost
KPIsCost of one hour of unplanned line downtime. This includes lost margin, personnel, energy, scrap during restart and, where applicable, contractual penalties with the customer. Whether the lost margin counts in full depends on whether the station is the bottleneck and whether the loss can be made up later. If a non-bottleneck stops while the buffers are full, the line may remain unaffected. The figure puts an amount against decisions on spare parts, maintenance and redundancy.
From practice
Anyone who knows their downtime cost per hour decides faster on spare parts, maintenance contracts and redundancy. Work out the figure honestly once and post it by the line. It ends many arguments about whether a spare motor in stock is too expensive. Calculate separately for the bottleneck and for the other machines, otherwise the figure is too high in one place and too low in the other. Count the time to full speed after the restart too, because the line does not run at full output straight away. I also always ask whether the customer threatens a penalty for late delivery. It appears in no cost centre of the line and still arrives.
Doypack (stand-up pouch)
Packaging technologyFlexible pouch with a stand-up base, often with a resealable zipper or a spout, which stands on the shelf and increasingly replaces solid board and glass. The pouch wall is usually a laminated film, and the base is a sealed-in gusset that makes the pouch stand. It is made on dedicated pouch machines that form, fill and seal film from the reel, or from pre-made pouches on premade pouch systems. There the pouches are picked one by one from a magazine, opened, filled and sealed. Powders, liquids and lumpy products are filled.
From practice
For the line, the doypack is demanding. The pouch must be opened, filled, de-aerated and sealed cleanly, and a zipper or spout brings extra stations. Premade pouch machines are flexible on formats, while form-fill pouch machines that form from the reel are more material-efficient at high volumes. Check the recyclability of the pouch film early, because mono-material doypacks have narrower sealing windows. Product in the zipper is the classic: one grain of powder in the closing track and the pouch never closes properly again. Look at how clean the sealing zone stays after filling during the trial run.
Drawing revision (revision status)
Project management & CAPEXUnambiguous marking of the change status of a drawing or bill of materials by revision index, date and description of change. The index sits in the title block of the drawing and usually counts up as a letter or number. Every change after release gets a new revision, and old versions are marked invalid. Drawing and parts list must carry the same status, otherwise part number and geometry do not match. The revision status links manufacturing, spare parts ordering and documentation. A revision list records every status together with the reason for the change.
From practice
The classic error: the machine is built to revision C, the documentation shows revision B, and years later maintenance orders a spare part from the wrong drawing. Then the shaft does not fit, and nobody knows why. At acceptance, require a drawing set as built with a revision list. Also require that the handwritten changes from commissioning on the wiring diagram are entered within a fixed deadline. At acceptance I check a few components in the machine against the drawing status. If the index is already wrong there, it will not get any better once the machine is in daily operation.
Drive sizing
Mechanical engineering & componentsCalculation and selection of motor, gearbox and drive controller for a motion task. The starting point is the masses to be moved and their moments of inertia, friction and process forces, and the motion profile with distances, speeds, accelerations, cycle time and pauses. From these follow the required torques and speeds. The RMS torque over a cycle determines how hot the motor gets, while the motor must be able to deliver the peak torque for short periods. For servo axes, the ratio of load inertia to motor inertia is also checked, because too high a ratio makes control more difficult. Gearboxes also have to be checked for service factor and permissible radial loads. Reserves for heavier formats or higher speeds belong in the sizing.
From practice
Drives are sized for what is in the user requirement specification. If a request for more cycles or a heavier format comes along later, the drives are often already at their limit, and nobody remembers how tight the calculation was. So I have the sizing reports for the axes handed over with the documentation. It costs the supplier nothing, since the calculation has been done anyway. Things that tend to be forgotten are the friction of product on an accumulation conveyor, the stiff grease in a chilled room and the modest efficiency of a worm gearbox. You will need the figures at the latest when replacing discontinued drives. Without them the new motor gets ordered one size bigger to be on the safe side and then no longer fits the space or overloads the old amplifier.
Drop test
Quality & safetyA test in which a shipping unit is dropped from a defined height onto faces, edges and corners to assess protective performance and packaging integrity. It is standardised among others in DIN EN ISO 2248 and forms part of the ISTA test procedures. Drop height and sequence depend on weight and shipping route. The samples are conditioned beforehand, because corrugated board behaves differently depending on moisture. Damage to the pack material, closure and product is assessed, as is any leakage of the contents.
From practice
The drop test reveals weaknesses that are not visible on paper: insufficient corner cushioning, products that shift inside the carton, closures that pop open on an edge drop. Always test with the production product and production packaging, not hand samples. Anyone shipping via parcel networks should test with realistic drop heights and multiple drops, since a single flat drop says little about the last mile. Also try a carton from a cold store or from damp storage once, because it falls differently from a dry one from the office. Photograph every damage and record which packaging variant was tested, otherwise you start the test again from scratch at the next change of packaging material.
Düsseldorf pallet
IntralogisticsHalf pallet with an 800 x 600 mm footprint, run as an EPAL half pallet in the pooling system. It corresponds to half a Euro pallet and is used mainly in food retail for displays, promotional goods and smaller order quantities, often directly as a sales unit in store without repacking. Two half pallets fit exactly on the area of one Euro pallet. Because of the small footprint, the loaded unit is more prone to tipping than a Euro pallet, so height and load securing need more careful planning.
From practice
Displays on Düsseldorf pallets are popular with retail customers but a special case for the line. Palletisers, stretch wrappers and conveyor technology must handle the small format reliably, and two half pallets on one Euro pallet require precise positioning. Clarify height, weight and stability in store with the customer before the display is fixed. Otherwise a display looks fine on delivery and tips over in the shop at the first knock. Also check whether your warehouse can store half pallets at all or whether they belong on carrier pallets, because otherwise they do not sit securely on the beams.
E
E-commerce packaging
Packaging technologyPackaging for shipping products in online retail. It must withstand the stresses of the parcel network, meaning drops, shocks, pressure and vibration, and protect the product from damage and theft. Designs include shipping cartons and mailers, often with cushioning or close-fitting inserts. Suitability is proven with drop and transport tests according to ISTA procedures. For food, protection against moisture and temperature fluctuation is added, so that quality and safety of the goods are preserved in transit. The pack size acts directly on shipping costs.
From practice
Shipping packaging for e-commerce needs different strengths than retail packaging. Drop and climate tests count rather than shelf appeal, and close-fitting cartons rather than filler material. Automated carton-sizing systems pay off at high shipment volumes, below that a few standard sizes and a clean packing process help. Send trial parcels through the real parcel network and do not rely on the drop test in the laboratory alone, because a carton that passes the test is still handled differently in the sorting centre. Watch the ratio of air to goods in the carton, as you pay for the air too.
Early payment discount
CommercialA price reduction, stated as a percentage of the invoice amount, that the supplier grants if the customer pays within a short period, for example two percent for payment within 14 days. It is agreed on the invoice or in the contract and differs from a discount, which lowers the price regardless of when payment is made. It matters on machine instalments: two percent on an instalment of €500,000 is €10,000. Early payment discount arrangements belong in the commercial negotiation, not in a footnote.
From practice
Early payment discounts on machine deliveries are rare but negotiable, especially on down payments. Weigh it against your financing costs. If two percent is granted for paying a few days earlier, the annualised rate is high, often more than the loan costs you. More important than the discount on investments, though, is the payment structure. A large balance held back until after acceptance protects you better than a small deduction. Also check when the period starts, at receipt of the invoice or at the invoice date. A discount that accounts payable keeps narrowly missing achieves nothing.
Earned value
Project management & CAPEXA method for monitoring progress and cost together. Three quantities are compared: planned value (planned costs up to the reporting date), earned value (planned value of the work actually performed) and actual costs. Earned value minus actual costs gives the cost variance, earned value minus planned value the schedule variance. Formed as ratios instead, they give the cost performance index (CPI) and the schedule performance index (SPI). Values below one indicate overspend or delay. The indices are used to project the completion date and final cost, for instance as an estimate at completion. A work breakdown structure with budget and performance assigned to each work package is a prerequisite.
From practice
Earned value only calculates as well as the progress measurement behind it. With a few large suppliers, that measurement is the real work, because paid milestones are not progress as long as the machine is not running. Define measurable stages for each work package, for example drawing approved, material ordered, pre-assembled, FAT passed, and give each stage a fixed share of the value. The supplier’s feeling that they are nearly done does not count. That way you see early whether spend and performance are drifting apart, and do not find out with the final invoice. For large components, check on site whether the reported status is true.
Edge computing
Digitalisation & AIProcessing of machine data on computers located close to the plant, in the control cabinet or on the line, rather than in a data centre or the cloud. The devices are usually industrial PCs or gateways that read data from controllers and sensors, evaluate it on site and pass on only results or condensed values. Benefits are short response times, smaller data volumes to transmit, continued operation during network outages and better control over sensitive data. Typical tasks are pre-processing, image analysis and anomaly detection. Edge devices usually sit alongside the PLC and do not intervene in machine control.
From practice
Edge devices are installed quickly and then quickly forgotten. No updates, no backups, nobody responsible. After a few years there are dozens of unmaintained computers in the control cabinets, and nobody knows any more what runs on which. So define beforehand who operates the devices and how they are monitored. Ask about the heat in the cabinet, because a computer without airflow will sooner or later stop computing in the summer. Also keep it cleanly separated from the control network. With every edge solution I ask for a list of device, software version and contact person. Edge pays off where images or high-frequency signals are involved.
Edge Crush Test (ECT)
Quality & safetyEdge Crush Test: the force per unit length at which a strip of corrugated board standing on edge buckles under compression, given in kN/m under DIN EN ISO 3037. The load acts along the flutes, just as the case wall carries the load in a stack. ECT is the main value for stacking strength and feeds, together with case perimeter and board thickness and via the McKee formula, into the estimate of box compression strength (BCT). It depends on paper grades, flute type and climate and is stated in the test certificate of the board.
From practice
When pallets sag at the bottom in storage, it’s usually the case, moisture or overhang, rarely the pallet. Have the ECT verified per delivery in the test certificate, not just as a grade specification. The value applies to standard climate. In cold storage or tropical humidity, corrugated board loses considerable crush resistance, and that belongs in the stacking factor. Then there is time: a pallet that stands under load for weeks holds less than the short test value suggests. Handle and ventilation holes, creases and damaged edges also cost strength. The same grade designation can hide a different paper, as long as the minimum values are met.
Edge protection
Packaging technologyAngle profiles made of solid board or plastic that sit against the vertical edges of a load unit. They spread the pressure of strapping and stretch film over a wider area, so that bands and film do not cut into the carton edges. At the same time they stiffen the corners of the stack and protect the cases from crushing. L-shaped profiles the height of the load unit are usual, shorter ones or corner angles where needed. Edge protection is fitted by hand or by applicators on the palletiser or stretch wrapper. It complements load securing by film or strapping.
From practice
Automatic edge-protector applicators on the wrapper pay off at high volumes. If the protectors are fitted by hand, someone will forget them sooner or later in shift operation, and the goods arrive with crushed corners. I always have the transport test check whether edge protection can cut the amount of film. The combination of edge protectors and fewer wraps is often cheaper than more film. Board profiles lose stiffness when damp, so keep them dry in stores and away from the ramp. Also match the profile length to the height of the load unit, otherwise the ends stick out or the top cases are left unprotected.
Efficiency classes (IE3 / IE4)
Mechanical engineering & componentsA classification of electric motors by efficiency, defined in IEC 60034-30-1. The classes range from IE1 for standard efficiency through IE2 for high and IE3 for premium efficiency to IE4 for super premium efficiency. Limit values depend on rated power, number of poles and frequency, and small motors reach lower efficiencies than large ones within the same class. The rating applies to mains operation at the rated point and is shown on the rating plate. In the EU, the minimum class a motor must meet when placed on the market is governed by the Ecodesign Regulation for electric motors and variable speed drives. Frequency inverters have their own IE classes under IEC 61800-9-2.
From practice
Motors with a better efficiency class are not automatically a one-to-one replacement for the old ones. They have less slip and turn slightly faster. On a pump or a fan the new motor then delivers more and eats up part of the saving straight away. When started direct on line, such motors often draw a higher starting current, and the old motor protection circuit breaker may trip on start-up. Check the overall length too. Some motors are longer in the same frame size and no longer fit under the guard. The better class really pays off on motors that run many hours a year under load, such as pumps, fans and compressors. A conveyor drive that stands still a lot between cycles recovers the extra cost much more slowly.
EHEDG (European Hygienic Engineering & Design Group)
Quality & safetyEuropean organisation for hygienic engineering and design (European Hygienic Engineering and Design Group) and de facto standard in this field. It publishes guidelines on materials, surfaces, weld seams, seals and the avoidance of gaps and dead spaces, and certifies components according to a test method for cleanability. EHEDG-compliant components such as valves, pumps and sensors are the safe choice for the user requirements specification in the wet areas of food production. For dry areas a lower effort is often enough.
From practice
EHEDG guidelines cover design details that determine cleanability in everyday operation: weld seam quality, sealing materials, surface roughness, avoidance of gaps and dead spaces. For the tender, a reference to the relevant EHEDG documents and a requirement for certified components in the product area is often enough. The certificate applies to the component, not to the installation. A certified fitting that is welded into the pipeline with a gap or a pocket is still a cleaning problem. At acceptance, a cleanability test with the hygiene team is worthwhile, ideally with the real product.
Electric cylinder
Mechanical engineering & componentsA linear actuator that converts the rotation of an electric motor via a screw drive into the stroke of a piston rod. Its design and dimensions resemble those of a pneumatic cylinder, and many models have mounting dimensions to ISO 15552, so they fit the same attachments. The screw is mostly a ball screw, a roller screw for high forces or a trapezoidal lead screw where self-locking is required. Drive comes from a servo motor or stepper motor, mounted axially behind the cylinder or parallel alongside it with a belt drive. Unlike a pneumatic cylinder, an electric cylinder can move to any position at adjustable speed and force. The piston rod tolerates side loads only to a limited degree, so external guides are needed.
From practice
Anyone replacing pneumatic cylinders with electric cylinders usually calculates with the compressed air saved. The sums are right, but the new cylinder behaves differently. A pneumatic cylinder can push against an end stop all day without getting warm. If an electric cylinder has to hold force continuously, for clamping or pressing, the motor heats up, and the sizing has to cover that. In a power failure it gives way under load unless it has a brake or a self-locking screw. Agree with the supplier how often the screw needs lubricating, and add that to your maintenance plan. The big advantage shows at format changeover. Stroke and force come from the recipe, and nobody has to move sensors or readjust end-position cushioning any more.
Electric pallet truck
IntralogisticsElectrically powered low-lift pallet truck for horizontal pallet transport, as a pedestrian or rider-operated unit. A tiller controls driving and lifting, and on rider units the operator stands on a platform. It raises the pallet only far enough to clear the floor. The unit is the workhorse of the shop floor and often the first candidate for a fleet analysis. That analysis clarifies how many units there really are, how well they are used and what maintenance and batteries cost.
From practice
In a fleet analysis, electric pallet trucks often turn up in larger numbers than planned. Some sit broken in corners, others run routes for which conveyor technology would long since be more economical. Check battery management, statutory UVV inspection status and the usage profile of each unit. On the third shift the batteries are flat and the charging bays are full, and a unit wanders over from the neighbouring area. I therefore always count the charging bays as well. A unit that has stood in the same place for weeks is probably not needed. As a starting point, a list of location, year of manufacture, condition and typical route is enough, plus a photo of the rating plate. It is the basis for any decision on conveyor technology or AGVs.
Electrical inspection (DGUV V3)
Quality & safetyInspection of electrical installations and equipment under DGUV Regulation 3, a German statutory accident prevention regulation, formerly BGV A3. The employer has to have them inspected before first use and then at set intervals, also after modifications or repairs. This is done by a qualified electrician or under an electrician’s direction and supervision. Fixed installations, such as control cabinets or permanently connected machines, are distinguished from portable equipment such as extension leads or power tools. Each inspection covers visual examination, functional testing and measurement, for instance of protective conductor and insulation resistance. The employer sets the intervals from the risk assessment, and the guidance notes give reference values.
From practice
Portable equipment is where you lose track. Cable reels and hand lamps wander round the plant, and some of them simply fail to turn up on inspection day. Think of contractors who bring their own tools as well. Those should be tested before anyone plugs them in on your premises. With fixed installations the problem is planning. The line has to be switched off for the measurements, so the inspection belongs in the shutdown window and not in some gap in the production plan. On machines with frequency converters and other electronics the inspector needs to know what to disconnect before the insulation test. Ask about it before he starts. New machines should also come with the manufacturer’s test report to EN 60204-1. Have it included in the delivery, though it does not cover the supply cable on site.
Electronic batch record (eBR)
Digitalisation & AIThe electronic version of a batch’s manufacturing record, capturing process steps, material additions, process values, test results and deviations. Originating in the pharmaceutical industry and the GMP environment, the eBR replaces the paper batch record there. It is based on an approved master template, the master batch record, which the system uses to guide the operator step by step. Entries, corrections and approvals are logged with user and time stamp in the audit trail and signed electronically. Requirements for such systems are set out in Annex 11 of the EU GMP Guide and, in the USA, in 21 CFR Part 11. The eBR is usually a module of the MES and allows review by exception rather than page by page.
From practice
When switching to an eBR, people like to transfer the paper record page by page into screen forms. Then you have digital paper, and operators click through fields that nobody read before either. Use the changeover to clear things out, and have process values taken straight from the control system instead of being typed in. Allow for the validation effort. Every later change to the master template goes through change control, and that takes time. Also ask what happens when the network or the server goes down. Someone then has to be allowed to continue on paper, and that paper has to be entered properly afterwards. And try out the input device at the line, with gloves and wet fingers. More than one touchscreen has given up at that point.
Electronic cam
Automation & roboticsMotion profile stored in the motion controller as a cam function, giving a servo drive its position as a function of a master axis. The curve consists of support points between which the controller interpolates, so that position, velocity and acceleration run smoothly. A real machine axis or a virtual one can act as the master axis. The electronic cam replaces mechanical cams and cam gears. Profiles can be changed in software, switched by format and adjusted without mechanical conversion. Typical applications are cross cutters, sealing jaws and pick-and-place motions that must run in sync with the product flow.
From practice
Electronic cams turn a changeover into a recipe matter instead of a job for the spanner, provided the profiles are properly parameterised. Require the supplier to run the changeover through recipe parameters and not through a program change by a service technician. Limits are set by acceleration peaks. A profile that looks nicely smoothed on screen can drive the gearbox to its limit or let the motor run hot. Jerk limitation and the thermal load of the drives must be part of the sizing. Also check who is allowed to change the cams. If every operator turns the profile, two shifts run two different machines. A secured copy of the cams in the control backup belongs to the package.
EMC (electromagnetic compatibility)
Mechanical engineering & componentsThe ability of a device or installation to work properly in its electromagnetic environment without unacceptably disturbing other equipment. Emission limits what a device gives off through cables and as radiation, while immunity describes how much it can tolerate itself. In machines, frequency inverters and servo drives cause most interference, and analogue signals, encoders and fieldbuses are the most sensitive. Typical measures are shielded motor cables with large-area shield bonding at both ends, separate routing of power and signal cables, line filters and low-impedance equipotential bonding. In the EU the EMC Directive sets the requirements. For industrial environments the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 for immunity and EN 61000-6-4 for emission apply.
From practice
EMC problems have one nasty habit. They come and go. Sometimes an analogue value jumps, sometimes a drive briefly loses the fieldbus, and in the workshop the removed part works flawlessly. With faults like these I look into the cable duct and at the shield connections first, before anyone starts swapping modules. A classic is the shield twisted into a thin pigtail and landed on a terminal. At high frequencies the shield then delivers only a fraction of its effect. Just as popular is the encoder cable running the full length of the duct right next to the motor cable. In retrofits the trouble often appears only when a new inverter is connected to the old unshielded motor cable. Plan the new cable in from the start. That is cheaper than weeks of fault finding.
Emergency stop
Automation & roboticsSafety function that brings the machine into a safe state, triggered by red mushroom-head buttons on a yellow background. Emergency stop circuits, guard doors and safety zones are defined in the risk assessment and designed to a required PL/SIL, and modifying them after the fact is expensive. According to ISO 13850, the emergency stop is a complementary protective measure and does not replace a safeguard. It stops either immediately by removing the energy or in a controlled way, where the energy is removed only once standstill is reached. Once pressed, the button stays latched, and restart only follows after unlatching and a deliberate reset.
From practice
Emergency stop buttons must be reachable at every operating point, including places operators run to when there is a fault, such as buffers or transfer points. On integrated lines, clarify which machines an emergency stop halts, only its own or the neighbours too. Either can be correct, but it must be stated in the risk assessment and the operating concept. After an emergency stop, restart must only be possible through a deliberate reset. At acceptance, walk the whole line and trigger every emergency stop once. That shows which buttons hang hidden and where the neighbouring machine simply keeps running. Have the emergency stop circuits tested regularly in maintenance too, because a button nobody has pressed for years is an untested component.
Empty container inspection
Packaging technologyA system that checks returnable bottles before filling for residual liquid, foreign bodies, damage and caustic residue. It works fully automatically with camera and high-frequency technology and is normally installed after the bottle washer. Cameras inspect the base, side wall and mouth, and sensors detect residual liquid and caustic residue. Faulty bottles are rejected ahead of the filler, including those with chipped mouths. The empty container inspection is a mandatory part of every returnable line.
From practice
For returnables the inspection is mandatory, for new glass it protects the filler from glass breakage. Returnable bottles come back with things the consumer put inside, from cigarette ends to paint. Watch the reject rate. If it suddenly rises, the cause is usually the returnable supplier or the washer and not the inspection machine. Anyone who turns up the sensitivity to push the rate down just buys a different problem. Ask how the machine is taught and regularly tested with test bottles. An inspection that was calibrated once and has run unobserved since will end up inspecting for show.
Enabling switch
Automation & roboticsA three-position switch for set-up mode that releases movement with a safeguard open only in the middle position. In the first position nothing happens, in the second movement is released, and pressing through to the third position or letting go switches off. The switch is fitted as a hand-held device or on the robot teach pendant and is normally connected to the safety controller through two channels. It permits teaching, set-up and observation inside the cell, usually at reduced speed. It does not replace the emergency stop or the operating mode selector.
From practice
Without an enabling switch nothing moves on a robot or palletiser during teaching, and that is how it should be. It releases motion only while the person deliberately holds it in the middle position. Anyone who lets go or pushes through in panic stops the machine. Every safety professional knows the classic: the switch is fixed with a cable tie or tape so that one hand stays free. That removes the whole protective effect. Look for tape on the pendant when you walk the plant, you find it again and again. Train the operators and explain why the switch is built the way it is. The pendant should also have a fixed place, so nobody has to hunt for it after every shift.
Encoder
Mechanical engineering & componentsA measuring device that detects the position and speed of axes, either incrementally or absolutely. Incremental encoders deliver pulses as they turn and count from a reference position, so the axis has to perform a homing run after switch-on. Absolute encoders know their position even after a power failure: no homing run, faster restart after faults. They come as singleturn and multiturn versions, with a serial interface or fieldbus connection depending on the drive, and work optically or magnetically.
From practice
For changeovers and adjustment axes, absolute encoders are the right choice. The axis knows its position immediately, and recipe changes run without a homing move. On retrofits of older machines, incremental encoders can often be replaced cheaply with absolute encoders, which lays the groundwork for automated format adjustment. In wet areas the weak points are ingress protection rating and the cable routing at the encoder. Have the supplier show you what the machine does when an encoder fails or its cable breaks, and whether the fault message points at the encoder or at the motor. That takes five minutes at acceptance and saves the search on night shift.
End-of-line packaging
Packaging technologyLast section of a production line in which the finished packed products become transport units. Typical stations are case erecting, case packing, sealing, labelling, palletising and securing the pallet, plus conveying, checkweigher and reject removal. The line ends with a dispatch-ready, labelled load unit. End-of-line areas have often grown up manually and therefore often offer high automation potential, because the work is heavy, labour-intensive and easy to standardise. Their capacity must match the primary packaging upstream and the pallet logistics downstream.
From practice
The end of the line, meaning case packer, palletiser and wrapper, is the area where automation in mid-sized manufacturing often pays off fastest. Work there is heavy and needs many people. Check pallet logistics and floor space first, then the technology. A palletiser without a pallet buffer stands idle more often than it runs. Pallet quality counts too, because a warped wooden pallet can stop any palletiser. Ask where the empty pallets come from and how the full ones leave. That is where the plant hangs in the third shift, when the forklift is missing. I draw the routes of forklift and people into the layout before I look at the machines.
Energy audit (EN 16247)
Production & energyA systematic examination of the energy use of a company, site or process, to understand energy flows and to find and evaluate savings opportunities. The requirements are set out in the EN 16247 series, published in Germany as DIN EN 16247. Part 1 sets the general requirements, and further parts cover buildings, processes and transport as well as the competence of energy auditors. An audit comprises a kick-off meeting, data collection, a site visit, analysis, a report and a closing meeting. The report assesses measures by investment and savings. Unlike an energy management system to ISO 50001, an audit is a snapshot and not a continuous process. In Germany the Energy Services Act, known as EDL-G, determines which companies have to carry out an energy audit.
From practice
Audit reports quite often end up in a binder, and the binder in a cupboard. That is often down to the report itself. If the auditor spends a day walking through the plant and then recommends LED lighting, leak detection and new heating pumps, nobody needed an audit to know that. Ask for the large consumers to be logged with measuring equipment for a week, meaning the compressors, the refrigeration plant and the lines with heating zones. Take someone from production along on the site visit who knows when each machine runs and why. And have the measures prepared so that they fit straight into an investment request, with cost, savings and payback period. Then the report stands a chance of turning up again in the next budget.
Energy management (ISO 50001)
Production & energyA systematic approach with which a company records, evaluates and continually improves its use of energy. ISO 50001, published in Germany as DIN EN ISO 50001, sets the framework for an energy management system. The standard follows the PDCA cycle and shares its basic structure with ISO 9001. At its core is the energy review. It identifies the significant energy uses, sets an energy baseline and defines energy performance indicators against which improvement is measured. Energy objectives, action plans, a metering concept, internal audits and the management review complete the system. Accredited bodies certify it. In Germany the Energy Efficiency Act, the Energieeffizienzgesetz, determines which companies must introduce an energy or environmental management system.
From practice
A certificate to ISO 50001 is soon hanging on the wall. Things get harder when someone wants to know how much electricity and compressed air packaging line 3 uses per shift. Many plants have one main meter and then nothing for a long way. Without submeters the indicators remain estimates, and the management review turns into a debate about assumptions. For projects this means that meters for electricity, compressed air, steam and cooling belong in the specification of every new line. During installation they cost little. Retrofitting them needs a shutdown and an electrician who happens to have time. Bring production on board as well. The energy manager sees the consumption, but only the shift knows why the line ran through the weekend.
Energy monitoring
Production & energyContinuous measurement and evaluation of energy consumption for plant, lines or areas, such as electricity, compressed air, steam and cooling, using meters and sensors. The values are related to production volumes and operating states. Energy monitoring is the basis for energy management under ISO 50001, for detecting standby losses and leaks, and for peak-load management. Meters can sit in sub-distributions, at compressors or at individual machines, and the data reach an evaluation system via bus or interface. Consumption only becomes meaningful when related to a reference such as unit count or shift, the specific energy consumption.
From practice
Where energy is lost shows up best during a break, at weekends and during downtime. Then the compressed air escapes through leaks, and heaters hold temperature for nothing. A building meter alone is not enough, so measure per line and relate consumption to machine state. For new machines, require a standby mode and consumption data via the interface. Decide who looks at the values regularly, otherwise the system just collects data. When a new meter goes live, I first look at what it shows on Sunday morning. If the value is low, the plant is switched off properly. A high value gives you the list of suspects immediately.
Engineering change management
Project management & CAPEXA controlled procedure by which technical changes after design approval are requested, assessed, decided, implemented and documented. It starts with a change request (engineering change request, ECR) stating the reason, scope and affected assemblies. After cost, schedule and safety have been assessed, the decision follows as a change order (engineering change order, ECO). Only then do design, procurement, manufacturing and control programming amend their documents, each with a new revision status. A change list tracks every request with its status, cost and schedule impact. Without this process, the CAD model, manufacturing, controls and documentation drift apart.
From practice
Changes get expensive after design approval. That is when marketing turns up with a new format size, the packaging material changes supplier, or a connection has to move a metre to the left. Each of these needs a request with cost and schedule impact, and the client has to decide, not the build team. The quick phone call is the most expensive route, because someone changes a drawing and the control programmer never hears about it. Keep a change list as a contract appendix. Then there is no argument about extras at final invoicing, and at the next rebuild you still know why the machine looks the way it does.
Environmentally friendly packaging
Packaging technologyPackaging that saves material, is recyclable (mono-material instead of composite), uses recycled or renewable raw materials and makes the best possible use of transport volume. The term is not technically defined, and it is measured against criteria such as material input, recyclability and recycled content. Under the EU Packaging and Packaging Waste Regulation (PPWR), recyclability and empty-space limits become mandatory. Packaging changes then often require machine conversions, because thinner films, paper solutions or mono-materials run and seal differently. Recycled material in food contact is subject to additional authorisations.
From practice
Sustainability in packaging is rarely a material swap alone. Less material, a recyclable structure, better volume use and less scrap work together. The line has to cope with the change, which is why production needs to be at the table early and not just once purchasing has placed the order. Paper-based solutions run stiffer and seal differently from plastic film, and thinner films tear more readily. Run real machine trials and count the scrap of the start-up phase. Whatever environmental promise appears on the pack, you should be able to prove it, and the wording is best cleared with a lawyer.
Equipment designation (reference designation)
Automation & roboticsA unique designation for every item of equipment in a plant, that is every motor, sensor, valve, contactor, terminal block and cable. The same designation, abbreviated BMK in German, appears in the circuit diagram, parts lists, PLC and HMI and on a label on the component itself. Today the basis is the IEC 81346 series, while many existing plants still use the older German DIN 40719. The structure follows aspects separated by prefix signs: an equals sign for function or plant section, a plus sign for location and a minus sign for product. Letter codes assign the item to a class, for example M for motors and B for sensors. Many operators define the scheme in a company standard so that plants from different suppliers are labelled consistently.
From practice
Without a specification, every supplier on a line brings its own designation system. Motor M1 then exists several times over, and the maintenance technician searches the wrong conveyor in the middle of the night. So define the scheme in the specification, ideally with the plant and location levels used in your factory. The fault message on the HMI should name the component’s designation. A message that just says infeed sensor is no help to anyone standing in front of a row of identical sensors. At acceptance, look at where the labels are stuck. On a removable cover they end up on the wrong component after the first cleaning, and on the sensor itself they disappear with the first replacement. A label on the bracket or mounting is the better choice. The bracket stays when the sensor is changed.
Erection all risks insurance
CommercialInsurance against unforeseen damage to the plant during erection, commissioning and trial operation, which is the phase of highest risk. It usually runs from unloading on site until acceptance. Transport before that is covered by cargo insurance, injury to persons and damage to third parties by liability insurance. It has to be clarified who takes it out, manufacturer or operator, and whether existing plant in the surrounding area is covered as well. Scope and exclusions are set out in the policy conditions.
From practice
When the machine tips over during positioning, suddenly everybody was standing somewhere else. Up to acceptance, the risk of damage to the plant often sits in a grey area between supplier, operator and haulier. Erection all risks insurance covers a drop during positioning, water damage or mishandling during trial operation. Clarify contractually who takes it out, and have the policy shown to you before the first crane arrives. Also ask whether your existing plant and the building around it are covered, or whether your own insurance steps in, and discuss that with your insurance broker. On large projects the premium is cheaper than a single crane accident.
ERP
Digitalisation & AIEnterprise resource planning, business software that maps a company’s business processes onto a common database. Typical modules are purchasing, materials management, production planning, sales, financial accounting and controlling, often maintenance as well. They rely on master data such as materials, bills of materials, routings, suppliers and customers. In production the ERP system derives material requirements and production orders from customer orders and stock levels. Within the ISA-95 level model it sits at the enterprise level above the MES. ERP tends to plan in days and weeks, while the MES controls and records production close to the line. In investment projects, purchase orders, budget tracking and capitalisation of the asset all run through the ERP system.
From practice
Usually the ERP system only shows up in a project at handover, and by then it is late. The new equipment needs an asset number, equipment master data, maintenance plans and above all material numbers for the spare parts. Without them maintenance cannot order anything at the first breakdown, and the supplier’s technician has already gone home. So ask for the spare parts list early and in a format that can be imported, with the manufacturer’s designation and part number. Allow time for creating the master data. Nobody does that on the side. The same applies to new formats or products. Without a bill of materials and routing in the ERP there is no production order, and without a production order the line can run, but nothing it makes gets booked.
ERP to MES interface
Digitalisation & AIThe data link between ERP and MES through which orders and master data reach production and confirmations flow back into the ERP system. From ERP to MES go production orders with material, quantity, date, bill of materials or recipe, and batch specifications. Coming back are good quantity, rejects, material consumption, batches used, times and order status. Technically the link usually runs via web services or middleware. ISA-95, published internationally as IEC 62264, describes the information to be exchanged. An interface specification defines which data are transferred on which trigger, which system leads for which item and how transmission errors are handled. It is distinct from connecting the machines to the MES, for example via OPC UA or PackML.
From practice
The interface tends to be treated as an IT matter until the line stops. If the ERP system cannot be reached at night and no order arrives in the MES, the line has no batch number or best before date for the printer, and the shift waits. So agree an emergency mode, such as a stock of released orders held in the MES or manual order entry with later posting. Units are a classic. The ERP counts cartons, the MES counts packs, and at the end of the month the stock does not match. I have it written down for every field which system leads and in which unit it is transferred. Test the interface before the SAT with real orders, including the awkward cases such as order cancellation, partial confirmation and reversal. Those come up in operation sooner than anyone expects.
Escalation
Project management & CAPEXOrderly escalation of unresolved conflicts to the next decision-making level, with stages, deadlines and format fixed in the contract. Three stages are usual, from the project manager through the department head to management. A deadline applies to each stage, after which the case is passed on, and the report is made in writing with status and a proposed solution. Escalation is an agreed tool of project control. Problems that have gone round in circles at working level for weeks are often resolved in short order by a phone call between the managing directors. The rule sits in the contract or the project manual and is introduced at the kick-off.
From practice
An escalation rule is only worth something if it was on the table beforehand. Both contracting parties must know it and see the step as an agreed tool, otherwise even the first escalation counts as an attack. The deadlines should fit the schedule. If each stage takes several days and the critical path has hardly any float, the decision comes too late. Enter the contacts at the upper stages by name in the contract, or the search only begins once there is a dispute. Prepare the report on a single sheet, with status, commitments made so far and what you need from the upper level. External project managers use the rule deliberately to break deadlocks without personal conflict, because the demand then comes from the level above and not from the person who sits at the table with the supplier every day.
Estimate at Completion (EAC)
Project management & CAPEXThe expected total cost of the project at completion. It is made up of actual costs, commitments (ordered but not yet paid) and the estimated remaining costs for work not yet placed on order. The forecast is updated regularly, usually at every reporting date, and compared against the approved budget, and the difference is the expected deviation at project end. As a cross-check, a mechanical extrapolation can be made from the cost performance index of earned value. Deviations trigger countermeasures or a request for a budget supplement, and the reasons are given in the project status report.
From practice
The most common self-deception: looking only at the invoices already paid and forgetting the commitments. Because the invoice only arrives next quarter, it does not show up now. Keep the three columns separate, paid, ordered and still to be ordered. At every report, ask what additional work has become necessary on site, for example changes to the conveyor technology, extra safety fencing or overtime during commissioning. Items like these are usually missing from the first forecast. Include variations that are still under discussion as well, with an honest view of whether they will come. Report extra costs only at the end, and you have no options left.
EtherCAT
Automation & roboticsEthernet-based fieldbus with very short cycle times, developed by Beckhoff and now maintained by the EtherCAT Technology Group. The master sends a telegram that passes through all participants. Each participant reads its data on the fly and writes its reply into the same telegram. This keeps cycles short, and distributed clocks keep the axes synchronous. EtherCAT is widespread on highly dynamic packaging machines with many servo axes. As with PROFINET, the machine’s bus world must match the maintenance capability of the plant.
From practice
EtherCAT has the edge on machines with many servo axes and fast control loops. PROFINET fits where Siemens standards and in-house maintenance line up. Mixed landscapes run via gateways but cost engineering effort and diagnostic convenience. That is why I put the preferred control system and bus into the user requirements specification and have any deviation justified. The supplier often has good reasons, but you need serviceability for years to come. Ask about the topology too, because in a plain line structure everything behind a pulled plug drops out. Have the network configuration handed over as a file as well, because the circuit diagram alone is not enough.
EU AI Act
Digitalisation & AIEU Regulation 2024/1689 setting rules for developing and deploying AI systems using a risk-based approach. It distinguishes prohibited practices, high-risk systems, systems with transparency obligations and those with low risk. Its addressees are providers, who place a system on the market, and deployers, who put it to use. AI used as a safety component of machinery can be classed as a high-risk system, triggering requirements for risk management, data quality, documentation, human oversight and conformity assessment. Obligations apply in stages.
From practice
For most applications on the line the obligations are manageable, for instance document search or anomaly detection. Even a quality inspection without a safety function usually needs no more than transparency and training. It gets critical when the AI makes decisions with safety implications or assesses employees. So assess the risk class for each use case separately, and record the purpose, data and responsible person in writing. A bought-in assistant or a camera with built-in evaluation belongs on this list too, because as a deployer you have obligations of your own. If in doubt, take legal advice before the system runs and not after acceptance.
Euro pallet / H1 pallet
IntralogisticsStandardised load carriers. The Euro pallet measures 1,200 x 800 mm and is the usual wooden pallet in the exchange pool. For food and pharma areas there is the H1 hygienic pallet made of plastic, mostly in the same Euro format. Characteristics are dimensional consistency, condition of boards and runners, and load capacity. Exchangeable Euro pallets carry the mark of the pooling system. The variety of load carriers in the plant is a quiet cost driver, because every additional type needs handling, space and administration.
From practice
For automation, pallet quality counts. Broken boards, protruding nails and warped runners cause faults on conveyor technology, palletisers and in the warehouse. A pallet check at goods-in or before the high-bay warehouse saves downtime. H1 pallets are more expensive but dimensionally consistent and hygienic, and often the better choice for internal loops in food plants. Decide who sorts out a damaged exchange pallet and where it goes. Otherwise it runs through the plant again three days later, especially at night when nobody looks closely. Plastic slides differently from wood on roller tracks and at stops, which only shows in a trial run.
EVOH (barrier layer)
Packaging technologyEthylene vinyl alcohol copolymer, a thin interlayer in multilayer films and cups with very good oxygen and aroma barrier properties. EVOH blocks water vapour poorly and itself loses barrier performance in moisture. It is therefore embedded between PE or PP layers that are joined by tie layers. The laminate is often made by coextrusion. This gives polyolefin-based barrier packaging that, at a low EVOH share, can be classified as recyclable mono-material. The oxygen transmission rate (OTR) is stated at a defined temperature and humidity.
From practice
EVOH turns a PE film into a barrier film, but only while the layer stays dry. Moisture in the laminate or moisture contact during hot filling and sterilisation can temporarily degrade the oxygen barrier. Ask the supplier for barrier performance under realistic moisture and do not accept the value measured dry as the answer. In thermoforming the thin layer is stretched along with the film and gets thinner in corners and edges, so check the finished tray and not just the film. I also always ask for the EVOH share, because it helps decide the recyclability classification, and that is better settled before the order than after.
Expansion reserve
Project management & CAPEXReserve deliberately planned at the design stage for future expansion. It includes space in the layout for further machines, spare slots in the control cabinet and controller, power reserve in drives, conveyor technology and utility supply, and free bus addresses and pallet spaces. The reserve is defined for each trade and shown in the documents so that it is not built over later. It avoids costly conversions when capacity or formats grow. Free reserve areas are marked in the layout.
From practice
An expansion reserve costs money upfront and is therefore readily cut. Decide deliberately where future expansions are likely, for example new formats, higher output or an additional packaging step. Plan reserve there and nowhere else. Reserves in the control cabinet, the controller and the cable route are cheap. Hall space, conveyor conversions and utility lines become expensive retrofits. I have the quotation state how many inputs and outputs and how much cabinet space stay free, and I mark in the layout the area that explicitly stays empty. Otherwise a shelf stands there in two years.
Expediting
Project management & CAPEXActive monitoring of progress at the supplier between order placement and delivery, with the aim of holding agreed dates and spotting delays early. The expeditor regularly requests status updates, compares them with the supplier’s schedule and tracks intermediate milestones such as drawing approval, material ordering, start of manufacturing, assembly and FAT. A distinction is made between desk expediting from the office and shop expediting with visits to the supplier’s workshop. Parts with long lead times and sub-suppliers receive particular attention. Expediting is separate from quality inspection at the supplier, although the two are often combined in plant engineering projects. The results feed into milestone trend analysis and the project status report.
From practice
Ask a supplier whether everything is on schedule and the answer tends to be yes, right up until shortly before the delivery date. So ask for evidence. Photos of the build status, order confirmations from sub-suppliers and confirmed dates for long-lead parts tell you more than any green traffic light in a status report. Things often get tight with bought-in components, such as the control cabinet or a robot that arrives later than expected. Go there in person when a lot depends on the date. If there is still no machine frame in the workshop a few weeks before the FAT, you know more than after ten phone calls. Record every promised date in writing, with the date it was given. Otherwise nobody will later remember who promised what and when.
EXW (Ex Works)
CommercialAn Incoterms rule under which the seller makes the goods available for collection at its own works or at another named place. The buyer collects them and bears all costs and risks from there: loading, transport, insurance, export and import clearance, customs duties and unloading. Risk passes once the goods are ready for collection, before they are loaded. The seller handles neither transport nor export clearance. EXW is the rule most convenient for the seller and most demanding for the buyer.
From practice
EXW sounds cheap but shifts effort and risk entirely to the buyer. The buyer arranges freight forwarding, import customs clearance, transport insurance and unloading. For machines from abroad, customs formalities and input VAT questions come on top. To compare quotes, gross up EXW quotes to a DAP basis. Only then are they comparable with domestic quotes. Obtain freight forwarder quotations for this and ask who loads and secures the machine. Load securing and loading damage are easily overlooked. Clear the input VAT questions with your tax advisor before ordering and not after the customs notice arrives.
F
False reject
Digitalisation & AIGood items that are wrongly ejected as defective by an inspection system such as vision, checkweigher or metal detector. Causes are overly tight tolerances, unstable lighting, product variation or insufficient training data. On a metal detector, the product effect, for example with wet or salty goods, can also trigger a false signal. False rejects cost material and rework and undermine operators’ trust in the inspection system. The counterpart is missed faults that run through as good items.
From practice
False rejects are a frequent reason why inspection systems get quietly detuned on the shop floor until they stop finding anything. Measure them separately from genuine rejects by counting how many of the ejected packs were actually fine. Someone has to go through the reject bin for that, and more than once. Agree an acceptable false reject rate with the supplier as an acceptance criterion. Test it with your own product over several batches and not with the sample set. I also have it recorded who may change thresholds, because otherwise every shift ends up detuning the inspection on its own.
FAT (Factory Acceptance Test)
Project management & CAPEXAcceptance test of the machine at the manufacturer’s works before delivery (Factory Acceptance Test). Performance data, functions, safety devices and documentation are checked against the functional specification and the order, following a test plan agreed in advance. A pre-FAT at the supplier often comes first, and after transport the site acceptance test (SAT) and the performance test follow. Acceptance in the contractual sense usually comes at the end of this chain, after installation and commissioning at the operator’s site. Defects found at FAT cost a fraction of what they cost after installation.
From practice
The FAT should take place with the actual product, actual packaging materials and the future operating personnel. With dummy goods and test cartons, any machine runs. The test plan with performance run, changeovers, fault scenarios, safety functions and documentation check is agreed beforehand, not on the morning of the test. Have your operators do the changeovers themselves and trigger a fault on purpose, for example a packaging jam. Defects found go into a punch list with a deadline and a name. Release for shipment is not acceptance, even if the supplier has already booked the lorry. Anyone who just watches at the FAT gives away the cheapest testing opportunity in the whole project.
Fault report (maintenance ticket)
Production & energyA notification to maintenance that a fault, damage or defect exists on a piece of equipment. It is usually entered in the CMMS or in the maintenance module of the ERP system and contains the equipment or assembly, time, fault description, effect on production, priority and the person reporting. The notification leads to a maintenance order to which working time and material are booked. On completion, the cause found and the action taken are reported back, ideally using a damage and cause catalogue. This feedback provides the data for indicators such as MTBF and MTTR and for Pareto analyses. The ticket is to be distinguished from the fault messages on the HMI, which the machine control generates automatically and which belong to alarm management.
From practice
Most tickets read much the same. Machine down, please come. Then they get closed with the word done. Nobody can build a Pareto analysis from data like that, and a year later no one knows why the labeller stopped so often. Make reporting easy, with a QR code on the machine or a tablet at the line, and provide selection lists for fault pattern and cause. Free text on its own never gets analysed. Microstops hardly ever appear in tickets, because the operator clears them himself. They belong in machine data collection. On new equipment it pays to set up the equipment structure in the CMMS before the first fault arrives. Anyone who adds it months later has wasted the ramp-up phase, which is exactly when many faults appear for the first time.
Feasibility study
Project management & CAPEXAssessment carried out before the investment decision as to whether a project is technically feasible, what it will probably cost and what options exist. The usual content is layout options, capacity balance, rough costs with a stated estimating accuracy, risks and a rough timeline. On brownfield projects, a survey of the building and the existing plant is part of it. The result is a basis for decision with a recommendation for the CAPEX request. A small study has a big impact, because it stops detailed planning heading in the wrong direction.
From practice
A feasibility study clarifies, before the budget request, whether the project is viable technically, spatially and economically. The effort of a few days is well spent. That applies especially on brownfield projects, where building height, foundations or utility connections can hold nasty surprises, for instance when the machine fits into the layout but the compressor cannot cope with the extra load. Ask for the assumptions behind the rough costs of each option, otherwise you end up comparing figures that do not mean the same thing. The result is a basis for a decision, and the solution comes later. A no is a useful result too, if it comes early and only cost a few days.
FEFCO
Packaging technologyFédération Européenne des Fabricants de Carton Ondulé, the European federation of corrugated board manufacturers. The FEFCO code is an internationally used numbering system for styles of corrugated board packaging, for example FEFCO 0201 for the classic American-style folding case. The first two digits give the group: 02 stands for folding cases and 03 for telescope-type packs. Folding cartons made from solid board are described by a separate system. In user requirements specifications for case erectors and case sealers, the case style is usually given as a FEFCO code and the dimensions as internal dimensions.
From practice
The FEFCO number says how the case is built and nothing about how good it is. Machinability depends on scoring, basis weight, flute type and tolerances, and these belong in the packaging material specification. A supplier change with the same FEFCO number is a typical cause of sudden faults on a case erector. The same style then sits in the magazine, but the scoring is executed differently or the board is softer. Do not bring a new supplier on board until their case has passed on the running machine. Set minimum values for edge crush resistance so that equivalent can actually be tested. And put flute type and paper grade on the order along with the number.
Fieldbus
Automation & roboticsDigital communication network between the control system, drives, sensors and operator panels, replacing the earlier individual wiring of every signal with a shared cable. Examples are PROFINET, EtherCAT, PROFIBUS or IO-Link at the lowest level. PROFINET and EtherCAT are based on Ethernet, PROFIBUS on an older serial technology. Each participant has an address, and the controller exchanges process data with it in fixed cycles. Diagnostic data comes on top, which helps to narrow down faults at individual participants. Safety functions run either over separate wires or over safety-rated bus protocols.
From practice
Choose the fieldbus based on your maintenance capability. What your electricians know, and what spare parts you hold in-house, is the better standard, even if the supplier prefers another. On lines made up of several machines, the interface list defines which signals run over the bus and which are hard-wired. Emergency stop chains must be implemented as safety circuits. For every machine, ask which diagnostic tools are needed and whether the licence for them is in the scope of supply. At three in the morning a bus diagnosis only helps if somebody can open it. Also have the address list with all participants and station names handed over, otherwise every replacement starts with working out which device is which.
FIFO / FEFO
IntralogisticsTwo rules for the order in which goods are taken out of stock. FIFO stands for first in, first out. Goods stored first are removed first, and the date of receipt is what counts. FEFO stands for first expired, first out. Goods with the earliest use-by or best-before date leave first, regardless of when they were stored. FEFO is common in food and pharmaceutical plants, FIFO for packaging materials, long-life raw materials and spare parts. Both rules need stock records per load unit, usually in a WMS with batch management. Flow racks work on FIFO physically, block storage tends towards LIFO. The two rules give different results as soon as goods with a shorter shelf life arrive after goods with a longer one, for example with returns.
From practice
In the system everything runs on FEFO, at the loading dock on the shortest route. The forklift driver takes the pallet at the front, and in block storage the oldest one just happens to be at the back. If you are serious about FEFO, storage locations have to be assigned so that the right pallet is within reach, and removal should be checked by scanning. Think about packaging materials too. Cold seal films, labels and adhesives also age and run differently on the machine after long storage. For cold seal the storage life is on the data sheet, and the machine often notices before the system does. Also easily forgotten is the part-used reel that goes back to the warehouse without a label after a format change and drifts to the very back. Retail customers add a required remaining shelf life on delivery, which sales knows about and the warehouse often does not.
Fill level inspection
Quality & safetyCheck of the fill level in sealed or open containers without weighing, contactless and in motion. Capacitive sensors, X-ray, high frequency, gamma radiation or cameras are used. The check detects under- and overfilling as well as missing product at high speeds on filling lines for bottles, cans and jars. Limits for minimum and maximum fill level are stored, and containers outside the limits are rejected. The method complements or replaces the checkweigher where that would be too slow or too imprecise.
From practice
Choose the method based on container and product. For glass and clear liquids, camera or high-frequency inspection is often enough, while opaque containers and foam need X-ray or gamma, with the associated radiation protection requirements. Foam and condensation are the classic sources of error, and a misted container throws any camera off. Define how fill level is converted to volume, since the Prepackaged Goods Regulation asks about content and not millimetres. I have the measurement demonstrated with containers that are deliberately underfilled and overfilled, at operating temperature and not in the laboratory.
Fill quantity control (trend control)
Automation & roboticsControl loop in which the checkweigher feeds back the average weight of inspected packs to the doser, which then adjusts the fill quantity automatically. The control acts on the trend, not on individual packs, and the checkweigher rejects single outliers. On multi-lane fillers, the assignment is made per filling station. The aim is a constant fill quantity close to the target value despite variations in product density or temperature. What a pack must contain on average, and how far individual packs may fall below that, is regulated by the German Fertigpackungsverordnung, the ordinance on pre-packed goods. A target set close to the limit saves product but calls for clean control.
From practice
For trend control to work, the checkweigher must be able to assign each pack unambiguously to its filling station. On rotary machines this runs via the valve number, otherwise via sequence and spacing. A common mistake is control that is too aggressive, reacting to every scatter and making the fill quantity oscillate. Dead time adds to it, because between filler and scale sit packs that were filled with the old value. Anyone who ignores that always controls behind reality. Set the control band and step size together with the manufacturer and test the interface at FAT. The scale itself belongs in the test plan too, because with a shifted zero point it leads the filler reliably in the wrong direction.
Filling line
Packaging technologyPlant that fills liquid, pasty or granular products into containers such as cans, bottles, pouches or drums. It usually consists of product supply, filling element, container handling and connected stations such as rinser, capper and labeller. The filling principle depends on the product: volumetric with a piston, by fill level or gravimetric with a load cell. By container type there are can fillers, bottle fillers and drum fillers, used in the food, chemical and pharmaceutical industries. Filling accuracy depends on product, viscosity, temperature and output.
From practice
With filling lines, filling accuracy decides give-away and compliance with the Prepackaged Goods Regulation, the German Fertigpackungsverordnung. At the performance test, have the mean and the standard deviation measured on your own products, not on water. Water flows, does not foam and has no lumps in it. Your sauce has all of that. Also clarify cleaning by CIP, changeover and the connection to capper and labeller before you assess the filler on its own. A filler that doses precisely but needs two hours of cleaning after every changeover no longer pays. And a capper that cannot follow the pace slows the whole line.
Filling machine
Packaging technologyA machine that doses liquid to pasty products into containers. Dosing is volumetric, for example with pistons, gravimetric via load cells, or by flow meter. Filling accuracy determines give-away, and hygienic design determines cleaning times. For sensitive products, filling is aseptic or under clean-room conditions. Designs include in-line and rotary machines. Fill quantity control corrects the dosing based on readings from a checkweigher, and a fill level inspection rejects containers with the wrong fill.
From practice
Criteria to look at are filling accuracy as the standard deviation at target quantity, product changeover and cleaning by CIP, the container format range, drip protection and dosing principle. Volumetric dosers are cheap, gravimetric ones more accurate with varying density, and mass flow meters work hygienically and need little maintenance. At the FAT the original product at operating temperature belongs in the machine, because viscosity affects accuracy. Also have it shown how the nozzle shuts off after filling. Drips and strings on pasty products are a typical nuisance at the container rim and later in the seal.
Film roll change (splicer)
Packaging technologyThe process or device for changing the film roll on a packaging machine. Manually, the machine is stopped and the new web is taped on. Automatic splicers join the end of the web to the start of the new roll while the machine is running or briefly slowed, usually with tape or a seal. If the web stands still during the join, a film accumulator bridges the time and feeds buffered film to the machine. The splice is marked so that the affected packs can be rejected. Roll length and change time determine the losses.
From practice
Calculate how many roll changes occur per shift and how long each takes. With small rolls and high output this is often the single biggest loss on the machine, which an Efficiency Day on the line quickly reveals. An automatic splicer then pays off, but it needs consistent roll quality, clean roll cores and trained staff. Badly wound rolls throw even the best splicer off its stride. You should also clarify what happens to the packs at the splice. If they are not rejected, they end up with the customer. A larger roll diameter or a second unwinder is often a good alternative to an automatic splicer.
Film thickness (micron)
Packaging technologyThickness of a packaging film in micrometres (µm), given for multilayer films as total thickness and as individual layer thicknesses. It affects strength, barrier performance, sealing behaviour, roll length and material cost. At the same roll diameter, a thinner film puts more metres on the roll. Thickness is measured with a gauge at several points across the web, because a tolerance always belongs to the nominal thickness. Reducing thickness (downgauging) cuts cost and material use, but requires adjusted machine settings and re-approval.
From practice
A few fewer micrometres save a lot of money over a year, but the machine notices immediately. Web tension no longer fits, the sealing window narrows, the film wrinkles more. Ask the supplier for the thickness tolerance and the thickness profile across the web, since uneven thickness winds up into ridges and produces telescoping rolls and web-tracking problems. Anyone who buys by weight pays for every micrometre above the nominal thickness. Thinner film always belongs on the line first, as it reacts faster to the heat of the sealing jaws. I spot-check thickness at goods-in with a gauge and compare rolls of the same length and width: if their weights differ, something is wrong.
Fixed guard
Quality & safetyA physical barrier between the hazard point and people, designed as a fixed or movable guard. Fixed covers, casings and fences can be removed only with a tool. Movable guards such as doors and flaps are linked to the control system through an interlock, with guard locking where movements run down. They are to be distinguished from non-separating protective devices such as light curtains, laser scanners or safety mats, which detect an approach but physically stop nothing. Requirements for design and selection are set out in EN ISO 14120, and dimensions of openings and distances in EN ISO 13857.
From practice
Fixed guard fences are cheap and stand up to a lot, but they hinder changeovers and fault clearance. Then doors get bridged permanently, and the fence protects only on paper. Plan access points where operators really have to go, with locked doors and safe restart, instead of fencing everywhere. At acceptance I walk through a changeover once with the maintenance technician and watch where they loosen screws, hold doors open or step over something. That quickly shows where the door is missing. Gaps under the fence and the distance to the conveyor belong in the walk-round as well, because that is where someone reaches in who should not.
Fixed price
CommercialA price agreed for a contractually defined scope that does not change regardless of the contractor’s actual effort. The risk of additional effort therefore lies with the contractor, provided the scope stays the same. It requires a clear description of the scope with a user requirement specification, battery limits, acceptance criteria and a list of what is excluded. Changes in scope are handled through change requests and change orders and paid for separately. With billing by effort or by daywork, by contrast, the client carries the quantity risk. A fixed price with a price escalation clause is only partly fixed. In the purchasing of series parts, fixed price also refers to a unit price that will not be raised for an agreed period.
From practice
What a fixed price is worth depends on the scope description behind it. Every gap in the specification gets filled by the supplier, either with a surcharge now or with a change order later. So read the assumptions in the quotation as carefully as the price. If it says utilities are to be brought up to the machine by the client, that belongs in your budget. Commissioning is where it gets interesting. If product or packaging material is missing, or the line stands because your own conveyors are not yet running, the waiting time usually comes back to you as a change order. A fixed price protects you from the supplier’s effort, not from your own. For small, clearly defined jobs it is convenient. On modifications to existing equipment whose condition nobody really knows, it quickly gets expensive, because the supplier prices in the unknown.
Flap gap (fish-tail)
Packaging technologyThe gap between the two outer flaps of a closed folding case. It should be narrow and even over its whole length. A gap that is too large, uneven or wedge-shaped, known as fish-tail, results from incorrect blank dimensions, a skewed manufacturer’s joint, moisture or unequal flap lengths. The consequences are poor tape adhesion, uneven hot melt bonding and poorer stackability, because the flaps carry no load at the open point. The gap is measured on the closed case, and the permissible tolerance is set in the packaging material specification.
From practice
The flap gap is the first thing to look at when there is trouble at the case sealer. If the flaps gape, there is no contact for hot melt or tape. If they overlap, the machine crushes the case. Measure the gap on several cases from one delivery and compare it with the drawing. It is often the flute grade or unequal flap lengths, not the machine setting. Skewed cases after erection lead the eye on to the manufacturer’s joint. The tolerance belongs in the specification, otherwise you start the discussion from scratch with every complaint. A limit sample that shows both sides what is just acceptable saves a lot of phone calls. Note the humidity in the store when you measure, so that you can later tell whether the weather played a part.
Flexible intermediate bulk container (FIBC)
IntralogisticsFlexible intermediate bulk container, FIBC for short: a large bag of woven polypropylene for bulk goods such as granulate, powder or food raw materials. It usually has four lifting loops and optionally a liner, a fill spout and a discharge spout. Characteristic values are the permissible load, the safety factor (5 to 1 for single use, 6 to 1 for reusable bags) and, for dusts, the electrostatic design (Type A to D). Type A has no protection against discharges, Type B limits propagating brush discharges through a fabric with low breakdown voltage, Type C is earthed and Type D dissipates the charge without earthing.
From practice
FIBCs are the standard on the raw-material side of many lines, and they bring their own problems: poor stability on the pallet, dust escaping during discharge, residue in the liner. Plan discharge stations with a massaging device and dust extraction, and define the bag specification jointly with the raw-material supplier. Mind the lifting arrangement. The bag hangs on its loops, so the hoist and the installation height of the station have to match. For combustible dusts the bag type belongs in the explosion protection concept and is no mere purchasing decision. The wrong type only shows up when somebody reads the label.
Floor loading
Production & energyThe load a hall floor or a storey slab has to carry, compared with its permissible load-bearing capacity. Floor loading as a distributed load is stated in kilonewtons per square metre. Point loads at machine feet and rack uprights also count, as do wheel loads of forklifts and pallet trucks, which act on a small area. Vibrating or impacting machines add dynamic loads. EN 1991-1-1, part of Eurocode 1, gives the imposed loads for building design, while a structural engineer determines the capacity of an existing floor. The basis for the verification is the machine supplier’s foundation plan with weights and foot loads, together with the transport route for bringing the machine in. Heavy machines are given their own foundations where necessary.
From practice
Nobody asks the floor during layout planning. It only comes up when the new machine is to go onto the upper floor of an old building, or a high-bay rack onto a slab that was poured for manual workstations. On paper the distributed load is often fine, but the machine stands on six feet with small pads, and the load concentrates under each foot. Load spreading plates help if the structural engineer approves them. Think about the route there as well. During rigging the machine travels on forklift tines or on skates through corridors and over drain covers, and that route sometimes carries less than the installation site. Get the foot loads from the supplier early and send them to the structural engineer along with the layout. An assessment takes time, and it has no business being on the critical path.
Flow measurement
Automation & roboticsMeasurement of the volume or mass flow of a liquid in a pipe, such as water, oil or juice, to record and control quantity and speed. Two designs dominate in the food industry. The electromagnetic flow meter uses the principle of induction, needs an electrically conductive liquid and has no moving parts in the pipe. A Coriolis meter measures mass flow directly, delivers the density as well and also suits non-conductive media such as oil. Both are available in hygienic designs with clamp connections. In filling, the measurement serves dosing and thus the correct fill quantity per pack.
From practice
In filling, flow measurement replaces weighing and makes fast, clean dosing possible. That only works if the meter suits the product. An electromagnetic meter fails on oil, a Coriolis meter costs more but knows the density. Air bubbles in the product falsify the reading, so the measuring point belongs in a full, calm pipe and not where air gets into the line. Calibration and temperature dependency must go into the test plan. When changing to a product with a different density or viscosity, the recipes need adjusting, otherwise the fill quantity is right on paper only. At acceptance, have the measurement checked against a checkweigher.
Flow rack
IntralogisticsA rack in which load units move by gravity on inclined roller or wheel tracks from the loading side to the picking side. What is stored first is removed first, so the rack works on the FIFO principle by design. Pallet flow racks have brake rollers that limit speed and, on the picking side, a separator that relieves the front pallet of back pressure from the ones behind. For small parts and containers there are carton flow racks, for example to supply material to assembly and packing stations. The counterpart is the push-back rack, which is loaded and unloaded from the same side and therefore works on LIFO. Flow racks make dense use of storage space and keep loading and picking physically apart.
From practice
Pallet flow racks only work with good pallets. A broken bottom board, a different pallet design or an overhanging load, and the pallet stops halfway down the lane. Then comes the interesting part, getting it out again. Nobody should climb into the lane, even if it would be quicker on the night shift. Check with the supplier which pallet types and which orientation the rack has been tested with, and reject other pallets at goods receipt. Heavy and light pallets in the same lane start moving at different speeds. Brake rollers wear and are rarely checked until a pallet hits the front too hard. In deep-freeze storage, ice on the rollers adds to the trouble. For supplying a line with carton blanks or film reels, a short flow rack is still often the simplest solution.
Flow wrap (HFFS)
Packaging technologyHorizontal flow wrapping. A film web is formed into a tube, the product runs in lying flat, then the longitudinal seal and the cross seals are made and the pack is cut off. The product usually reaches the machine on an infeed chain with pushers, and the longitudinal seal is typically a fin seal. Flow wrapping is the standard for bars, baked goods and biscuits, fast, material-efficient and easy to automate. Print mark detection keeps the print in register, and a product control prevents empty packs.
From practice
When buying, what counts is film width, sealing method, format range, infeed and print mark control. Sealing can be hot, cold or ultrasonic, and for crumbly products like biscuits ultrasonic is often the answer, because it copes better with crumbs in the seam. Vulnerable areas are film tracking, web edge control and the cross-seal and cutting station. Then there is the film roll change: with small rolls the machine otherwise stops more often than the brochure suggests. With mono-material films the sealing window narrows, so temperature control and sealing jaw geometry must suit them. I therefore insist on a test with the actual film at FAT, ideally a long run with the real product.
Flow-wrap pack
Packaging technologyA bag made from a film web that is formed into a tube, sealed lengthwise and crosswise, and cut off. Made vertically (VFFS) it suits bulk goods, powder and small parts, made horizontally (HFFS, flow wrap) it suits bars, biscuits, baked goods and non-food piece goods. Variants are flat bags, pillow bags, stand-up pouches and block-bottom bags. The longitudinal seal is made as a fin seal or a lap seal, and the cross seals close bottom and top. On the outside the film carries the print, on the inside lies the sealant layer, so no adhesive is needed. A print mark and its detection keep the print image in the same position on every bag.
From practice
Running behaviour and seal integrity depend on the film. Sealant layer thickness, slip properties and print register must match the machine. Have sample rolls run on the supplier’s machine before the FAT, preferably rolls from the production batch and not a hand-picked sample. At changeover, the forming shoulder and sealing tools are the time-eaters. Anyone running many formats should demand changeover times as a specified value in the tender. Also ask about the film reel change, meaning how long the machine stands when the roll runs out and whether an automatic splice is possible. See also VFFS machine.
Flute types (B, C, E, BC flute)
Packaging technologyDesignation for the flute height and pitch of corrugated board, given as a letter. E flute is the finest of the common types and is used as fine flute for good print quality and small folding cartons. B and C flute are standard for shipping cartons: C is taller and carries more in stacking, B is flatter and prints better. Double-wall grades such as BC or EB combine two flute layers with a middle liner and are used for heavy or high-stacked goods. The flute type determines thickness, rigidity and stacking strength of the blank.
From practice
Switching from B to C flute looks harmless on paper. The blank gets thicker, fewer sheets fit into the same magazine height, and the folding stations are set up for the old thickness. Often the machine then runs only after readjustment, or not at all. It just as easily happens that a supplier short of material quietly delivers the other flute and considers it equivalent. Fix the flute type in the packaging material specification and require it on the delivery note. At goods receipt, measure the thickness of one blank with a calliper, which takes a minute. You should also note the change parts for the magazine and folding stations in the machine recipe.
FMCG
CommercialFast Moving Consumer Goods, fast-turning consumer products such as food, beverages, cosmetics or cleaning products. They usually have low unit prices and high stock turnover and are sold through retail chains. Retailers set the deadlines and packaging requirements. Packing is done in high volumes and at short cycle times, and there are many variants arising from flavours, sizes and promotional packs. Line availability, changeover times and material costs determine the economics here.
From practice
FMCG manufacturers live on speed, volume and retail requirements. Packaging projects must therefore deliver short changeovers, retail compliance and high availability, for example shelf-ready packaging and GS1 labelling without rework. Anyone managing projects here needs to understand listing deadlines and promotional goods. A retail deadline does not move because of a machine. Plan the ramp-up backwards from the delivery date and put the reserve before the deadline. Also check how the line runs at peak times, for example ahead of seasonal goods and promotions, because that is when it is expected to run longest.
FMEA (Failure Mode and Effects Analysis)
Quality & safetyFailure mode and effects analysis, a method for the preventive assessment of possible failures in design (design FMEA) or in the process (process FMEA). A team from design, production, quality and operations rates each failure by severity, occurrence and detection probability. Priorities for actions follow from this, and the actions are recorded with owners and dates. The harmonised AIAG-VDA method replaces the classic risk priority number with an action priority. The FMEA looks at the consequences of failures for product and process and is to be distinguished from the risk assessment for machine safety.
From practice
An FMEA for a complete packaging line quickly becomes a mountain of paper. Focus on critical functions such as seal seam, labelling, checkweigher, rejection and handovers. Use fault data and complaints from existing lines as input, that is the most honest source. For this I put people around the table who have actually run the old line, so not a round of just the project manager and the quality manager. Give every action a name and a date. And make sure the actions land in the user requirements specification and the test planning, otherwise the FMEA stays a document for the auditor.
Folding box board (GC/GD)
Packaging technologyMulti-ply board for folding cartons. Two grades are common: GC (chromo board) made from virgin fibre with a coated surface and a light-coloured back, and GD (duplex board) based on recovered paper with a grey back. Characteristic values are basis weight, thickness, bending stiffness and scorability. Bending stiffness grows much faster with thickness than with weight, and it differs between machine and cross direction. GC is preferred for direct food contact and high-quality print, GD where price counts and a grey back does not matter.
From practice
Switching from GC to GD saves money but costs bending stiffness at the same basis weight. High-speed case erectors thank you with erecting faults and open flaps. So specify basis weight, thickness and stiffness in both directions as well as the grade, and state the grain direction, because blanks with an unfavourable grain direction score and fold badly. With recycled board in food, the question of mineral oil migration also belongs on the table. Have every board change approved on the running machine before purchasing signs the framework contract. After that the price is fixed and the machine is not.
Folding carton
Packaging technologyA die-cut, scored blank made from carton board, glued at the manufacturer’s joint, delivered flat and erected on the line. Common styles are the tuck-end carton, the carton with a hinged lid and the carton with a crash-lock bottom, which locks itself as it is erected. The material is usually folding box board, printed, varnished or laminated. Board quality, scoring, grain direction and climate-controlled storage strongly affect machinability, and many apparent machine problems are really packaging material problems.
From practice
Board quality is a specification issue. Basis weight, scoring, moisture content and storage conditions determine how reliably a case erector erects the blank. Fluctuating supplied quality is among the most common causes of minor stoppages. If blanks go from a cold lorry straight into the magazine in winter, or sat pressed in the stack for a long time, they open less willingly and the shift blames the machine. Agree tolerances with the packaging material supplier and check the glued seam at goods-in, because an open or skewed glue flap stops any erector. I have the FAT run with original blanks from several batches and not with the smooth samples from the machine manufacturer, because those always run.
Food contact compliance
Quality & safetyA requirement for materials and articles in contact with food not to release substances in quantities that endanger health, and not to change the composition, smell or taste of the food unacceptably. In the EU this is regulated by the framework Regulation (EC) 1935/2004, supplemented for plastics by Regulation (EU) 10/2011, together with Regulation (EC) 2023/2006 on good manufacturing practice. In the US the FDA is responsible. On the machine it covers all product-contact parts such as conveyor belts, seals, gripper surfaces, format parts and lubricants. Declarations of compliance for these parts belong in the machine documentation.
From practice
When food contact compliance comes up, most people think of the packaging first. But every part that touches the product is checked: conveyor belts, lubricants, seals, gripper surfaces. Require declarations of compliance for these materials from the supplier, and a list of the H1 lubricants used. Evidence for seals, hoses and wear strips goes missing most often, because they are ordered as small parts. This is often forgotten on retrofits, and then it shows up at the next IFS audit. A spare part from the odds-and-ends box, say a slide rail in an unknown plastic, is a finding as well. Decide who maintains the evidence on site, and replace wear parts only with parts that come with it.
Food-grade lubricant (NSF H1)
Mechanical engineering & componentsLubricants considered safe under incidental product contact in small amounts and registered under NSF H1. H2 lubricants are for areas with no possible contact. ISO 21469 sets out the hygiene requirements for manufacture and handling. Affected components include gearboxes, chains, bearings, guides and pneumatic oilers. The registration applies to the individual product, so H1 is a property of the lubricant and not of the machine. It says nothing about temperature or load capacity, for which the usual characteristics apply, such as viscosity for oils and NLGI class for greases.
From practice
The typical mistake isn’t the wrong oil in the gearbox, but the universal grease in the workshop cartridge that ends up everywhere. Agree a lubricant list per lubrication point with the supplier, reduce the number of grades, and colour-code lubrication points. Check whether gearboxes are supplied with H1 fill from the factory, because that is rarely stated in the quote by default. I also ask about compatibility whenever one grease meets another. Changing grades mixes residues, and not every combination gets along. Keep H1 stock visibly apart from everything else in the store and on the workshop trolley, so nobody reaches for the wrong cartridge.
Force majeure
CommercialUnforeseeable, unavoidable events beyond the control of the contracting parties that can release them from performance obligations. German law uses the term höhere Gewalt. The contract defines which events fall under the clause, what consequences they have, such as extension of time, cost sharing or withdrawal, and how the party affected must give notice. Since the pandemic and supply chain crises it has been an actively negotiated contract clause. The disputes mostly concern the range of events, the distribution of consequences and the point from which the contract may be terminated.
From practice
The contract deals with three points: which events count, which legal consequences follow and which notification duties apply. Supply shortages of components in particular are a bone of contention, because suppliers like to file them under the clause. A supplier invoking a chip shortage as force majeure needs evidence. For an operator affected by it, the schedule needs alternatives. Ask your supplier early about its sub-suppliers and their lead times, then you notice a problem before it arrives as a letter. Also have your lawyer read the clause, because legal consequences and deadlines are legal questions.
Forklift
IntralogisticsIndustrial truck for lifting, stacking and transporting, with electric drive, diesel or gas. Designs include counterbalance trucks, reach trucks and narrow-aisle vehicles, which differ in lift height, aisle width and use indoors or outdoors. Cost drivers are fleet size, share of empty runs, damage and recurring statutory UVV inspections. Every forklift trip that conveyor technology or an AGV can take over lowers cost and accident risk. Drivers need training and a written assignment by the employer.
From practice
In many plants the forklift fleet has grown historically: different manufacturers, unclear use, high damage costs to racking and doors. A fleet analysis with a trip profile shows which routes are driven regularly and which only occasionally. Regular main routes are candidates for conveyor technology or AGVs, the rest stays with forklifts, but with fewer units. Look at the traffic routes too. Where pedestrians and forklifts share the same route, separating them is cheaper than the next accident. Impact protection on rack feet and at doors costs little compared with the repair afterwards. The damage to racking and doors shows where trucks drive without anyone having planned it.
Forklift fleet management system
IntralogisticsSoftware that distributes transport orders across a forklift fleet and its drivers. Orders come from the WMS or ERP or are requested at the line. Through indoor positioning or markers on the floor the system knows the vehicle positions, and a terminal on the forklift shows the driver the next job and takes the confirmation at the destination. Allocation follows priority, distance and vehicle type, and trips are bundled. The system is often the economical preliminary stage to AGV automation: first transparency and order, then automation of the cleaned-up process.
From practice
A forklift fleet management system allocates driving jobs by priority and vehicle position, which means fewer empty runs and no shouting across the floor. It pays off from several forklifts and many orders per hour upward. Beforehand, the route analysis should clarify whether the problem lies in dispatching or in the layout. A system that organises long routes well remains a system for long routes. Talk to the drivers and the works council early, because tracking the vehicles quickly feels like surveillance. And clarify what happens when a driver does not confirm a job or the terminal fails. Without maintained location data the system sends the forklift to places where nothing is standing.
Form-fill-seal machine (FFS)
Packaging technologyA packaging machine that forms a pack from film, fills it and seals it, abbreviated FFS. The pack is therefore made inside the machine from the film reel. Designs include the vertical form-fill-seal machine (VFFS), the horizontal machine known as a flow wrapper (HFFS), and the thermoformer, which draws a tray, fills it and seals it with lidding film. The product reaches the pack through a doser or weigher, under protective gas where needed. Sealing jaws or sealing tools weld the seams or lids. Typical products are snacks, powders or cheese.
From practice
FFS machines are flexible and material-efficient because the pack is formed only inside the machine. Output depends on film, product and doser and not on the brochure. When selecting, look at how quickly the forming shoulder or tooling can be changed and how easy the machine is to clean. Seal inspection belongs on the list, because crumbs or dust in the seam are the classic. Run the FAT with your own films and products, and long enough for variations to show up. A machine that runs on the sample reel says little about your rolls from the third delivery. The test also shows how long the machine takes after a film tear before good packs come out again.
Format list
Project management & CAPEXComplete listing of all products and pack formats a machine is to handle. For each format it contains dimensions, weights, packaging materials, units per pack, required output and volume share. The list fixes the format range, the number and design of change parts and the output design in the quotation, and it is an annex to the URS. It is updated when the product range changes. Where a product runs in several pack sizes or packaging materials, each combination gets a line of its own. The supplier prices exactly this scope and nothing more.
From practice
The format list is the most important single piece of information in an enquiry, and the one most often incomplete. Include even the formats that run only twice a year, and mark the lead format with the largest share. Whatever is not on the list comes later as a change order with new change parts. Before sending an enquiry, I always look into the item master data and talk to production, ideally the shift leader. They know which special item runs once a quarter and which pack only works with manual help. That saves weeks. Also ask about formats planned for the next two or three years, otherwise the format range no longer fits at handover.
Format range
Packaging technologyThe span of pack or product dimensions that a packaging machine can handle with change parts: minimum and maximum length, width, height, diameter, fill quantity and film width. The format range is set out in the functional specification and determines machine size, change part scope and changeover effort. Within the range, the format is changed partly through change parts and partly through adjustable axes, often with servo adjustment by recipe. Formats outside the range require rebuilding or a different machine. The rated output usually applies to a reference format and not to every format.
From practice
Buy the format range you will need over the next few years, not the widest one on the market. A machine that can do everything from the smallest to the largest format runs ideally for none of them. In the tender package, list all formats with volumes, and mark phase-out formats and planned new ones. Then the supplier can see where the machine has to earn its money. The variation of the product itself belongs on the list too, because a naturally varying product uses more of the range than the nominal dimensions suggest. Extreme formats at the edge of the range need to be proven at FAT, since output usually drops there. I have the most-run format and the two edge formats demonstrated and record the output per format in writing.
Forming shoulder
Packaging technologyA change part on vertical form-fill-seal (VFFS) machines that shapes the flat film web over a geometrically calculated surface into a tube around the fill tube. The forming shoulder and fill tube determine pouch width and film tracking, and the film width follows from the tube circumference plus seam allowance. Every pouch width needs its own forming shoulder. Surface finish and geometry affect film tension, wrinkling and friction. Polished parts, mostly in stainless steel, are usual, and their edges and radii must be carefully made because the film slides directly over them.
From practice
Wrinkled longitudinal seams, film tears and print image misregistration often start at the forming shoulder. Behind them are worn edges, a wrong position relative to the fill tube, or a film the shoulder was never designed for. Buy shoulders specified against film type and rated output and not just pouch width. A set of shoulder and fill tube for each pouch width costs money, so clarify early how many widths you really run, and ask about the lead time for a replacement. Treat them as precision parts. They belong in the change parts trolley and not on the machine frame. Check edges and radii regularly for scratches and dents. If a fingertip can feel something, the film feels it too.
Foundation plan
Project management & CAPEXDrawing from the machine supplier giving installation dimensions, static and dynamic loads, anchor points, floor recesses and the requirements for flatness and load-bearing capacity of the building floor. It also shows the position of cable and utility entries in the floor. The foundation plan is the basis for civil preparation works and for checking by a structural engineer or the building department, especially on brownfield projects. For machines with moving masses, such as palletisers, vibration and load introduction are assessed. Depending on the load, the machine stands directly on the floor, on load-spreading plates or on its own foundation.
From practice
Ask for the foundation plan early, not just a few weeks before delivery. Old building floors have ducts, reinforcement in unexpected places or a thin slab over basement rooms. The fall towards the floor drains comes on top, and it has to be allowed for when the machine is levelled. Palletisers, stretch wrappers and checkweighers react to uneven or vibrating floors, the checkweigher with unsteady readings. Have the floor surveyed and uncover what is under the old machine before the new one arrives. And clarify who drills the anchor holes and who closes the floor again afterwards.
Share of units that pass through the process fault-free on the first attempt, without rework. It is sharper than the quality rate, because units that became good only after rework also count against it. With several process steps in series, the product of the individual FPY values gives the yield over the whole chain, the rolled throughput yield. A low FPY shows how much manual work and repetition sits inside the process, even if good goods come out at the end. It is regarded as an honest indicator of process control.
From practice
FPY exposes rework that easily disappears inside OEE, because it is done by hand right at the line and nobody books it. Re-labelled cartons, re-weighed pouches and manually replaced products belong here. If FPY is low while the quality rate looks good, hidden manual work is behind it. It can be tracked via the rejects and the rework stations. Often a simple tally sheet per shift is enough to see the extent, and it costs nothing. Ask the people at the rework station what they correct most often. The answer usually comes faster than any evaluation and is surprisingly often right.
Framework agreement
CommercialAn overarching agreement for recurring procurement. Terms, standards and processes are negotiated once, and individual deliveries or services are triggered later by call-offs or single orders that only settle quantity, date and subject matter. It typically covers prices or hourly rates, liability, confidentiality, payment terms and technical standards. For operators with several plants the framework agreement is the remedy against a proliferation of different machine standards.
From practice
On recurring assignments a framework agreement with a provider of on-demand specialists or with a machine supplier saves negotiating a contract for every project. Terms, liability, confidentiality and billing are settled, and work is called off order by order. Make sure the framework agreement contains no obligation to place orders, otherwise you have committed to volumes you may never need. Have the rates reviewed every year. Define who may place call-offs as well. Otherwise one plant orders from the same provider on the strength of the framework and the others never hear about it. Price escalation and notice periods belong in the framework too.
Freezing tunnel
Packaging technologyA food industry plant for rapid freezing or deep-chilling of products. The product runs on a conveyor belt through an insulated tunnel in which strongly circulated cold air removes the heat. Designs include the linear tunnel with one or more conveyor belts and the spiral freezer, whose belt climbs in a spiral on a small footprint. Cryogenic tunnels work with liquid nitrogen or carbon dioxide instead of cold air. Static plants without a conveyor work in batches. Freezing time depends on product mass, starting temperature and dwell time.
From practice
Freezing tunnels are hungry for energy and space. Sizing by product mass, freezing time and belt loading decides whether the plant fits the line or becomes the bottleneck. Check the defrost cycles, because defrosting costs production time. A tunnel that delivers frozen products in clumps needs a singulator ahead of the packaging line, otherwise it jams at the handover. Also allow for condensation: when cold products enter the warm hall, the film mists up, labels stick less well and seals get damp. Cleaning the interior also raises the question of how long the plant needs afterwards to get back down to temperature.
Frequency inverter (VFD)
Mechanical engineering & componentsAn electronic device that provides stepless control of speed and torque for standard motors by changing the frequency and voltage at the motor. Internally the mains voltage is rectified and turned back into three-phase current of adjustable frequency by an inverter stage. The drive is the standard choice for conveyors and pumps. Soft starting protects mechanics and product, and the energy saving compared with throttling is considerable. Setpoints and run commands come from the control system, via analogue signals or fieldbus. The unit is installed in the control cabinet or mounted close to the motor.
From practice
With frequency inverters you run speeds by recipe, start softly and save energy at partial load. On retrofits they replace pole-changing motors and gearbox stages. Look at ingress protection and mounting location. In the cabinet the inverter is protected, while next to the motor it saves cable but needs a rating for the wet area, and long motor cables call for screened cable and sometimes a filter. Connect the inverter to the control system by fieldbus, so parameters and diagnostic data sit in one place. Ask about braking too, because a motor that brakes often usually needs a braking resistor.
Functional description (software)
Automation & roboticsA document that describes, before programming begins, how the control system of a machine is to work: operating modes, sequence steps, interlocks, responses to faults, signals to neighbouring machines, recipe parameters and the operator interface. The supplier writes it on the basis of the user requirements specification, usually with flow and state diagrams. Behaviour on power loss and restart belongs in it too. It forms the basis for programming, the software FAT and later changes, and is approved by the operator. The user requirements specification describes the need and the program code is the implementation, so the functional description sits between the two.
From practice
Where the functional description is missing, how the machine should behave gets discussed at the control cabinet, at commissioning-day rates. Insist on an approved document before programming starts, one your line leaders have read for sequence steps and fault responses. I never hand it only to purchasing or engineering but also to maintenance, because they have to live with it later. Keep it short, with flow diagrams. Any change after approval is a change request, even a small one. A revision level on every page belongs to that. At acceptance, testing is against this description, not against verbal instructions. Anyone who says it was simply agreed in conversation has nothing to show.
Functional specification
Project management & CAPEXA document in which the supplier describes how and with what it implements the customer’s requirements. It responds to the user requirements specification (Lastenheft), which sets out what the plant must achieve. The functional specification contains the technical solution with functional description, layout, performance data, interfaces and components used, as well as deviations and exclusions compared with the user requirements specification. Depending on the project it is produced with the quotation or after award, and the customer approves it. Once approved it is the binding technical basis of the contract.
From practice
I put the user requirements specification and the functional specification side by side and tick off every requirement individually. That shows what is missing, what is met only in essence, and where there are exclusions or customer-side works you had not planned for. Make sure performance figures come with a reference: for which product, which packaging material and which operating state they apply. Whatever is not in the functional specification comes back later as a variation order. The comparison is tedious, but once you have signed, every variation order costs more. Do not approve the document until everything is clarified, even if the schedule is pressing. By approving it you have made it your own, and the supplier will point to exactly that version in every dispute.
G
Gantry robot
Automation & roboticsA Cartesian axis system in which linear axes in the X, Y and Z directions are mounted on a gantry above the working area, often with a rotary axis added at the gripper. It is built either as a gantry supported on both sides or as a cantilever supported on one side. The axes are usually driven by toothed belts or rack and pinion and scale to large areas and high payloads. Typical applications are layer palletising and order picking. Compared with an articulated-arm robot, the gantry is less flexible but space-efficient above the line, and its paths are easy to calculate.
From practice
Choose a gantry robot when area and load become too large for an articulated arm, for example a cell palletising several lines, or with bulky products. At high cycle rates it quickly becomes sluggish, because long axes carry their mass with them. In an existing plant, look at the building height first. A gantry that does not fit under the crane runway is not an option. Next come the supports, which need floor space and a load-bearing floor. Also ask how you can reach lubrication points, belts and cable chains. Whatever hangs several metres above the line does not maintain itself, and without a lifting platform every replacement turns into a climbing exercise.
Geared motor
Mechanical engineering & componentsA combination of an electric motor and gearbox, the standard drive for conveyor belts and roller conveyors as well as for simple machine movements. The gearbox converts the high motor speed into a low output speed with higher torque. Common designs are helical gearboxes and bevel gearboxes, plus worm gearboxes, which are compact and right-angled but less efficient. The geared motor often runs with a frequency inverter for variable speed. Ratio, output speed and output torque are on the nameplate, and the mounting position determines where the vent and oil level are located.
From practice
Geared motors are wear parts with a long service life if oil changes and loading are correct. Standardise sizes and manufacturers across your lines, then a few spare motors are enough. In hygienic areas, look for smooth housings, ingress protection rating and food-grade gear oils. I have the mounting position written into the datasheet for every geared motor. If it is later installed differently than planned, the oil quantity no longer fits, and the gearbox runs with too little oil or sits in too much. Oil grade, fill quantity and change interval per type also belong in the maintenance list, because that is where maintenance looks first.
Gemba
KPIsJapanese for the actual place where things happen. It means the place where value is created, in production the line. Problems are analysed where they occur and not in the meeting room from reports. The Gemba walk is the round of managers to that place to observe processes and talk to the employees. A Gemba day includes observing over a whole shift, measuring stoppages and times, and talking to operators and maintenance technicians. The observations are then checked against the plant data.
From practice
At the Gemba you see what figures can only hint at. Why the line really stops, how long the operator spends searching for change parts, where material backs up. That is in no MES. An Efficiency Day is therefore a structured Gemba day. You observe over a full shift, log the stoppages, ask operators and maintenance technicians and put the MES data next to it. The actions come from what was seen, not from slides. Go in on the night shift once too, because the same machines often run differently then. Allow enough time. Anyone who leaves after a short walk-round has seen only the good side of the line.
General contractor vs. split contracting
Project management & CAPEXTwo award models for plant projects. With a general contractor, one contracting party carries interface and schedule responsibility for the overall system and awards parts to subcontractors. This costs more at purchase, but the operator has a single point of contact. With split contracting, the operator orders machines, conveyor technology, controls and installation separately. This is cheaper at purchase, but the operator or their project manager carries the integration responsibility and the schedule risk at the interfaces. The choice depends on in-house competence, the number of trades and the willingness to take risk. With split contracting, each supplier’s warranty covers its own scope of supply, and faults at the interfaces are harder to assign.
From practice
With split contracting you take on interfaces, schedule coordination and integration risk. That pays off when an experienced project manager is available in-house, or brought in on demand. Without one, you pay back the saving on purchase during commissioning, when every supplier considers its machine finished and the line still does not run. A general contractor bundles the responsibility, but prices in mark-ups and risk for doing so. Check in the quotation what it delivers itself and what it merely passes on. A middle path is split contracting with an integrator for the control system and conveyor technology who answers for the line function. The contract then has to say so as well.
Gentle product handling
Packaging technologyDesigning infeed, handling and packaging so that sensitive products such as baked goods, chocolate, glass or fresh produce are packed without breakage, abrasion or deformation. Damage arises at drop steps, transfer points, stops and sliding surfaces, from line pressure on conveyors, at high belt speeds and from grippers with too much force or the wrong contact surface. Countermeasures are low drop heights, gentle transfers, adjusted speeds, grippers shaped to the product and zero-pressure accumulation. Handling is judged by the result, for example the breakage rate at the end of the line.
From practice
Product damage is hidden waste. It shows up as a complaint and not as downtime, so hardly anyone in production notices it. When selecting a machine, watch drop heights, transfer points, belt speeds and gripper forces. At FAT, run the most sensitive products and not the undemanding standard format. For that I like to be given the product the plant would rather leave out of the test. Run the samples warm and cold, because baked goods behave differently warm than cold, and so does chocolate. After the run, collect the breakage at the end of the line and weigh it, and you have a number instead of a feeling.
Geometric tolerances (form and position)
Mechanical engineering & componentsTolerances that define permissible deviations in the shape and mutual position of geometric features, independently of the size tolerance. Form tolerances such as straightness, flatness, roundness and cylindricity apply to a single feature. Tolerances of orientation, location and run-out such as parallelism, position, coaxiality or circular run-out relate a feature to a datum identified on the drawing by a capital letter. They are specified in a tolerance frame with symbol and tolerance value, plus the datum letters where a datum applies. The basis is ISO 1101, while ISO 2768 covers general tolerances for features without individual tolerances. In mechanical engineering they matter most for bearing seats and guide surfaces.
From practice
Many drawings carry geometric tolerances simply because the CAD system offers them. That gets expensive. Every tight tolerance costs time in machining and even more in inspection, especially if the supplier needs a coordinate measuring machine for it. Conversely, the callout tends to be missing exactly where it is needed, for example the alignment of two bearing seats in a welded frame. When requesting quotes for machined parts, I therefore go through the drawings with the design engineer and ask what each tight tolerance is for. Quite often it gets deleted afterwards. The same goes for incoming inspection. Measure the features that matter for function, and have the supplier deliver a measurement report for exactly those features.
German Packaging Act (Verpackungsgesetz)
CommercialGerman law that has replaced the Packaging Ordinance since 2019 and regulates producer responsibility for packaging. Manufacturers and first placers on the market of licensing-obliged sales and secondary packaging must register in the LUCID packaging register run by the central agency (Zentrale Stelle) and participate in a dual system. Take-back obligations apply to transport packaging. The law also covers the deposit obligation for certain beverage packaging and requirements for reusable options. The obligations concern placing the filled pack on the market, not building the packaging machine.
From practice
Registration in the packaging register has to be in place before the first pack goes to market. Without it a distribution ban looms, and retail platforms block suppliers. Clarify in the project who the first placer on the market is. For contract filling and private labels this is often not the filler. Put the responsibility into the contract and have the classification checked if in doubt. Transport packaging such as stretch film and pallets is not subject to licensing but is subject to take-back obligations. Keep the reported quantities consistent with the consumption data from production. Anyone who orders film in one quantity and reports a very different one will be asked sooner or later where the rest went.
A German ordinance for the safe provision and use of work equipment. It regulates the risk assessment, inspections before commissioning and recurring inspections, the instruction of employees and the requirements for existing plant. It is addressed to the employer as operator, not to the manufacturer. Whereas CE marking concerns the machine at the time of delivery, the BetrSichV applies over the whole service life, including modifications to the plant. The inspections are carried out by competent persons, and for installations subject to monitoring by approved inspection bodies. The ordinance is made concrete by the Technical Rules for Operational Safety.
From practice
The supplier carries the CE marking, the operator carries the BetrSichV, and for as long as the plant runs. After every retrofit the risk assessment has to be updated, even if all that changed was a new controller or an extra light curtain. Decide who in the company schedules the inspections, otherwise everyone relies on someone else and the deadline passes. Keep the inspection records per plant item and not in one collective folder for the whole site. That saves discussions with the trade association and the insurer when somebody asks questions after an accident. The instruction of employees belongs in there too, with date and signature.
Give-away
KPIsProduct quantity that ends up in the pack above the declared fill weight and is therefore given away. It arises from the spread of the dosing process and a safety margin that avoids underfilling. A worked example: at 0.5 g overfill per 100 g pack and 50 million packs a year, that is 25 tonnes of product. Better dosing, more accurate weighing and control via checkweigher feedback reduce give-away. This often pays for itself faster than an increase in line output. The permitted underfill is regulated in Germany by the Fertigpackungsverordnung, the prepackaging ordinance.
From practice
Give-away results from dosing variability and safety margin. A high standard deviation forces you to set the target weight higher to avoid underfilling, so every pack gives away a little. The approach therefore lies in the dosing technology and in control via the checkweigher. Check whether the set point has stood unchanged and high for years although the machine has long dosed better. That happens because nobody wants to touch the margin. An Efficiency Day calculates the annual value of give-away from raw material price and unit volume, often the fastest business case on a line. With an expensive raw material, fractions of a gram are enough to make the calculation interesting.
Glass and hard plastic register
Quality & safetyA requirement of the IFS Food and BRCGS standards. The register is a list of all glass and hard plastic items near production, with details of location, type, condition and inspection interval, and with regular breakage checks. The aim is to prevent foreign bodies of glass or hard plastic and to know, in case of breakage, which products may be affected. It is relevant when procuring machinery, because sight glasses, lamps and sensor covers must be specified as shatterproof or fitted with splinter protection.
From practice
When buying new machines, auditors ask. They want to know whether the lamps are splinter-protected, the sight glasses are made of polycarbonate or shatterproof glass and the sensor windows are protected. The manufacturer should supply a list of all glass and hard plastic items so that it can be added to the register. These days I ask for this list with the quotation and not at delivery. In the event of breakage, a defined procedure with product hold applies, and this must also be set up for new equipment. Think of the small items such as indicator lamps, displays on the operator panel and camera housings, they are the first to fall through the grid when the list is written.
Glass packaging
Packaging technologyContainers made of glass for food, beverages, medicines and cosmetics, for example bottles, screw-top jars and vials. Glass is gas-tight, flavour-neutral and barely reacts with the contents, withstands hot filling and sterilisation and is recyclable. Drawbacks are weight and fragility, and glass tolerates sudden temperature changes badly. Coloured glass such as brown glass protects light-sensitive products, while clear glass lets light and UV through. Closures are screw caps, crown corks or corks. Typical contents are sauces, jams, beer, wine and spirits.
From practice
Glass requires careful handling. Broken glass means a line stop, cleaning, and a glass check on all packs in the surrounding area. So plan for empty-glass inspection, breakage detection and a documented procedure for glass breakage from the start, because this is standard in IFS and BRCGS audits. Glass against glass is the enemy: on conveyors and in accumulation the bottles rub against each other and become more fragile with every scratch, which is why plastic guides and a clean accumulation concept count. Metal detectors cannot see glass. Pallets of glass are heavy and separated layer by layer with interlayers, so check the floor loading too. On glass lines I ask first to see the glass and hard plastic register.
Glue detection
Packaging technologyA check that adhesive has been applied in the right place and in sufficient quantity before the joint is closed. Typical locations are case erectors, case sealers, folder gluers and labellers. With hotmelt, infrared sensors or thermal cameras detect the warm bead against the cooler substrate. Cold glue can be mixed with a fluorescent additive and inspected under UV light. Vision systems compare position, length and interruptions of beads or dots against a reference image. The control evaluates the result for each pack and rejects faulty ones. Glue detection checks the application only and says nothing about the strength of the finished bond.
From practice
A badly glued case rarely stands out on the line. It comes apart weeks later in the warehouse or at the customer’s. Glue detection is meant to prevent that, but it only sees whether glue is present. How well it holds is another matter. If the hotmelt is too cold, the compression section too short or the case arrives ice cold from an outdoor store in winter, the bead sits in the right place and still bonds poorly. Test the system at acceptance in the simplest way, by deactivating one nozzle on the glue unit and watching whether the pack is really rejected. I also always ask whether the inspection can be switched off and whether that is logged. If the sensor throws out good product because of glue strings, it gets bypassed quickly at night. So add it to the cleaning schedule.
GMP (Good Manufacturing Practice)
Quality & safetyA set of rules for Good Manufacturing Practice in pharma, cosmetics and food production, with documented processes, qualification of equipment and traceability. In the pharmaceutical industry GMP is anchored in law, in other sectors it often serves as a standard or a customer requirement. For machinery, a GMP environment means higher requirements for documentation, materials and qualification. Qualification is divided into installation qualification (IQ), operational qualification (OQ) and performance qualification (PQ), each with a test plan, protocol and approval.
From practice
In a GMP environment the project timeline is extended by qualification steps: URS, DQ for design qualification, FAT, IQ, OQ and PQ, each with protocols and approvals. Machine suppliers must provide material certificates, calibrations and software documentation. The effort is considerable and belongs in the schedule and budget. I therefore plan qualification as a work package of its own with its own owner and not as an appendix to commissioning. Outside pharma, orientation to GMP principles without formal qualification is usually enough. Clarify early which documents the customer or the auditor really wants to see, otherwise you write protocols nobody reads.
Grain direction
Packaging technologyThe direction in which the fibres are predominantly aligned during papermaking, also called machine direction. Paper and board are stiffer in the grain direction and expand more across it when humidity changes. In corrugated board the flutes run across the machine direction. Score lines and folds must be matched to the grain direction, because the material bends and breaks differently depending on direction. The grain direction is defined on the drawing of the blank, for corrugated board through the flute direction. It affects scoring quality, behaviour in the magazine and flatness after a change of climate.
From practice
If the grain direction of a blank is wrong relative to the score, the blank breaks at the score when folded or springs back open after erection. The cartoner then pushes the flaps instead of folding them. For folding cartons the grain direction belongs on the drawing, for corrugated board the flute direction does. Blanks that warp after a weather change in storage are almost always a matter of moisture and grain direction, not a machine fault. Ask the supplier how the blanks lie on the pallet and whether they arrive wrapped in film. Open stacks take up moisture through the edges and curl at the rim. A simple test helps on goods-in. Bend a strip lengthways and across, and in the grain direction it feels clearly stiffer.
Grease (NLGI grade)
Mechanical engineering & componentsA semi-solid lubricant consisting of a base oil held in a thickener, usually with additives against wear and corrosion. The thickener keeps the oil at the lubrication point and releases it gradually during operation. Common thickeners are lithium and lithium complex, calcium sulphonate, aluminium complex and polyurea. Consistency is expressed in NLGI grades from 000 for semi-fluid to 6 for very hard greases. It is based on worked penetration, meaning how deep a standard cone sinks into grease that has been worked. Rolling bearings are mostly lubricated with grade 2 grease, while automatic lubrication systems and small gearboxes often use semi-fluid grease of grade 00 or 000. Besides consistency, base oil viscosity, temperature range and water resistance count.
From practice
Do not mix greases on the off chance. When two incompatible thickeners meet, the mixture can soften and run out of the bearing or harden and stop lubricating altogether. Before switching to a new plant standard grease, ask the manufacturer about compatibility or purge the old grease as far as possible. More does not help more either. An overfilled rolling bearing runs hot because the grease is churned, and the grease then ages faster. The fitter who gives a few extra strokes on every round means well and achieves the opposite. Relubrication quantity and interval belong in the lubrication schedule, and whoever does the greasing should know how much grease one stroke of the gun delivers. H1 grease and standard grease look the same in the cartridge. Mark them in colour and store them apart.
Gripper
Automation & roboticsThe tool on the robot arm that picks up, holds and puts down a product. Common designs are the vacuum gripper with suction cups, the clamp gripper with moving jaws, the needle gripper, which pierces the product with needles, and the form gripper, which adapts to the product contour. The gripper determines process reliability and format flexibility more than the robot itself and is almost always a product-specific special design. Its own weight counts towards the robot payload, as does the weight of the product. It is usually driven pneumatically, less often electrically.
From practice
Grippers are special designs: vacuum for cartons and trays, clamp grippers for sacks, needle grippers for textiles, form grippers for bottles. At changeover the gripper is often the component that must be swapped or adjusted, and automatic gripper changers save time there. Require testing with all products and packaging materials at FAT, including the worst carton quality. A gripper that works with the sample from development does not have to work with the carton from the night shift when that one is damp or dusty. I always ask the supplier about wear parts. Suction cups are one, and they belong on the shelf. Have the drawing and parts list of the gripper handed over as well, so that it can be rebuilt in an emergency.
Gripper changing system (tool changer)
Automation & roboticsInterface at the robot flange through which grippers or tools are changed manually or automatically. It consists of a robot side and a tool side, locks mechanically, usually pneumatically actuated, and passes through compressed air, vacuum, electrical signals and a data bus. The locking must hold even when air pressure drops, or the tool falls off. Automatic changing also requires a docking station and tool coding, with which the control system recognises the coupled tool. For manual changing, a quick-release coupling that can be opened without tools is often enough.
From practice
An automatic gripper changer sounds like flexibility, but it costs cycle time, installation space, payload and money. For two formats a combined gripper is often better. If you do change grippers, watch the repeatability of the coupling, correct-tool recognition in the program, and make sure the vacuum and compressed air feed-throughs stay leak-tight. Leaking couplings are a classic cause of sporadic gripping faults. People then search at the suction cup, at the hose, at the robot, and in the end it was the seal in the changer. The mating surface also gets dirty, and dirt interferes with the locking. Plan the docking station with room and access for the operator, otherwise it ends up where nobody can reach it.
Guard door interlock
Quality & safetyA safety switch with guard locking that monitors a movable guard and keeps the door closed for as long as the machine still presents a hazard. It consists of a switch body on the frame and an actuator on the door. With spring locking, a spring holds the door shut and a solenoid releases it, while with power-to-lock the arrangement is reversed. The door is released only once the machine is at a safe standstill, which is detected either by standstill monitoring or by a delay time longer than the run-down. Selection, mounting and protection against defeat are governed by ISO 14119.
From practice
When operators fit substitute actuators to the switches, malice is rarely the reason. Usually the machine stops at every small intervention, and the door sits exactly where people must go ten times a shift. A reprimand does not help there. Change the operating concept instead, for example with an access point for clearing faults that stops only the affected section. Walk the line and look at the switches. Fresh scratches, a cable tie or a second actuator in the control cabinet show where it hurts. At acceptance, have every door opened once while the machine runs. It must stay shut until the drive has stopped.
Gusseted bag
Packaging technologyA bag shape with folded-in sides that forms a box-like pack when filled. It is typically used for coffee, pet food and bulk goods. The side gussets are formed on the VFFS machine by folding wedges in the forming area, before sealing. Format follows from bag width, gusset depth and bag length. The bag stands stably and stacks well on the shelf and on the pallet. Where the cross seal meets the side gussets, more layers of film lie on top of each other, which places higher demands on sealing. Aroma valve, zip closure or tear-open aid can be added as options.
From practice
On the VFFS machine, gusseted bags need precise film guidance and stable change parts. If the film wanders, the gussets sit crooked and the bags no longer stand straight. For valves on coffee bags or for resealable closures, an applicator is added that limits output. When buying, clarify which bag shapes the machine can run without conversion. Ask about the effort of changing between pillow bag and gusseted bag, because the folding wedges are change parts and have to go with it. Check the seal seam at the crossing points in an endurance run. Where many layers come together, seams become leaky first.
H
H1 oil
Mechanical engineering & componentsLubricating oil registered as NSF H1 and used wherever incidental contact with food cannot be ruled out. H1 oils are available as gear oil, hydraulic oil, chain oil and oil for compressed air lubricators, usually based on medical white oil or synthetic base oils such as polyalphaolefins. As with other industrial oils, viscosity is given in ISO VG grades to ISO 3448, for example ISO VG 46 for hydraulics or ISO VG 220 for gearboxes. The number corresponds to the mid-point kinematic viscosity in mm²/s at 40 °C. Change intervals depend on base oil and load and are stated in the lubricant manufacturer’s data sheet. If an H1 oil is mixed with mineral oil, the fill loses its H1 status.
From practice
For new machines I have it written into the user requirement specification that gearboxes and hydraulics leave the factory filled with H1 oil. Without that sentence, the machine arrives with the gearbox manufacturer’s standard fill and nobody notices. Converting afterwards is tedious. Some mineral oil always stays in the housing, which is why certain lubricant manufacturers recommend a second change after a short running period. Incidentally, the same ISO VG grade does not mean the same oil. A mineral VG 220 and an H1 VG 220 still do not belong in the same gearbox. Label containers, oil cans and filling points with the same colour or number as in the lubrication schedule. A can that holds hydraulic oil today and chain oil tomorrow makes the finest registration worthless.
HACCP
Quality & safetyA mandatory food safety concept, derived from Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Points. It follows the Codex Alimentarius and comprises seven principles, from hazard analysis to documentation. For identified hazards, critical control points (CCPs) are defined, for example metal detection at the end of the line, with limits, monitoring and corrective actions. Machines at CCPs need validated functions and unbroken record-keeping. The hazard analysis is drawn up by a HACCP team of specialists from the plant.
From practice
HACCP becomes concrete at the control points of a machinery project. There the checks must be validated, limits defined and records unbroken. Metal detectors and X-ray need test-piece routines, interlocked rejection and alarming. The checkweigher has its test weights and a traceable rejection too. New equipment must be aligned with the HACCP team before the layout is fixed. A CCP in the wrong place is hard to move later, because it needs space, power and a reject point you can see. Put the reaction to an alarm into the plan as well and define who releases the held product and where it sits until then.
Hall climate (temperature and humidity)
Production & energyThe condition of the air in a production or storage hall, described mainly by temperature and relative humidity and supplemented by air movement and dust load. Hall climate affects people, machines, packaging materials and products. Board and paper absorb moisture and change their stiffness, dry air promotes electrostatic charging of films, and adhesives and labels react to temperature. Hall climate is influenced by weather, building envelope, waste heat from machines and ventilation and air conditioning systems. In Germany, requirements for room temperature at workplaces are set out in the technical rule for workplaces ASR A3.5. For machines and packaging materials, the user requirement specification defines the permissible ranges.
From practice
The FAT takes place at the supplier’s at a comfortable room temperature. In your plant the same machine stands next to the shrink tunnel in August or by the roller door in January, and suddenly it runs differently. Cartons from a cold outside store that go straight to the case erector fog up, go soft and jam in the magazine. Film charges up in dry winter air and clings to every guide. Hotmelt sets too fast in a cold draught and then does not hold. So write the climatic conditions at the installation site into the specification, summer and winter separately. Let packaging materials acclimatise in the hall before processing and plan floor space for that. Air conditioning the hall for the staff often takes care of the machine too, just not the corner right by the door.
Hand-eye calibration
Automation & roboticsProcedure that converts camera coordinates into robot coordinates so a robot can precisely pick objects identified by vision. A distinction is made between cameras mounted on the robot arm (eye-in-hand) and fixed-mounted cameras (eye-to-hand). Calibration is done using a calibration pattern, such as a chessboard plate, captured at several positions. From the images and the associated robot poses, the software calculates the spatial position of the camera relative to the robot. The camera itself is calibrated separately to capture lens distortion and scale. Only both together give pick positions in millimetres.
From practice
Camera-guided robot cells rarely fail because of the camera, but because of the calibration. A slightly shifted camera mount, a new lens or thermal drift, and the pick position is off. Require a documented calibration routine that maintenance staff can run themselves in a few minutes, plus a verification routine with a reference part. Without this routine, every fault becomes a service call to the integrator. At acceptance I have the camera removed on purpose, refitted and recalibrated once. Then you see how long it really takes and whether the instructions are right. The calibration pattern belongs to the delivery and at the cell, not in the commissioning engineer’s drawer. After a crash, too, the check should run before the cell picks parts again.
Handover to production
Project management & CAPEXThe formal handover of an accepted machine from the project team to the line organisation. Responsibility for operation, maintenance, spare parts, documentation and open punch-list items passes to the operator’s area. The handover includes a signed handover record, trained staff, the maintenance plan, spare parts in stock, the complete as-built documentation and a named point of contact for the start-up phase. It is separate from acceptance. Acceptance towards the supplier settles performance and payment, while the handover settles responsibility within the company.
From practice
Between acceptance and handover lies the most delicate phase. The project manager is already thinking about the next project, and production still sees the machine as a building site. Agree a supported start-up period with fixed presence times, so that the operators know whom to ask and when. Hand the punch list over to the line with names and dates. Sign the handover record only when the spare parts are in the store and the maintenance plan is in the maintenance system, not when both have merely been promised. Define who calls the supplier when something goes wrong, at night just as on Monday morning. Without a named person responsible for the equipment, every fault stays stuck with the project, and by then the project has long been disbanded.
Handshake (machine interlocking)
Automation & roboticsSignal exchange between two machines or line sections that coordinates handovers: ready, request, handover in progress, jam, fault. It is implemented via individual wires (hardware handshake) or via a fieldbus with a defined data word. Each signal is normally acknowledged so that both sides know it has arrived. Signals are commonly set up on the closed-circuit principle, where a broken wire is read as the state not ready. The handshake also governs how each machine reacts to a fault on its neighbour. It belongs in the interface list and in the functional description of both machines.
From practice
When machines from two manufacturers come together, the handshake is the classic point of dispute. Each waits for the other’s signal. Before ordering, define which signals are exchanged in what logic, who supplies the connector and who tests the coupling. Simulate fault cases, for example a jam behind the labeller or an emergency stop on the neighbouring machine. A timing diagram in the interface list saves weeks. Insist that both manufacturers couple against a simulator or test box before delivery, otherwise the programs meet for the first time on your site. And agree on timeouts: if a reply fails to come, the machine should report whom it is waiting for instead of just standing still.
HAZOP
Quality & safetyHazard and Operability Study, the systematic examination of a plant for hazards and operability problems. The plant is divided into sections, usually based on the piping and instrumentation diagram. A multidisciplinary team checks each function against guide words such as no, more, less or reverse for deviations, causes, consequences and existing safeguards. A facilitator leads the session and a secretary records the results. The method is described in IEC 61882 and is most widespread in the process industry.
From practice
In packaging technology, a HAZOP pays off wherever media, pressure, temperature or gases are involved, so at shrink tunnels, MAP gas flushing, hot melt, CIP connections and inerting. Get the right people into the room. Operators and maintenance staff know what actually happens when a sensor fails, and that is on no flow diagram. Allow enough time, because one section after the other takes long, and after a long day without a break nobody says anything clever any more. Record the results as actions with owners and feed them into the risk register and the risk assessment.
Health and safety coordinator (SiGeKo)
Quality & safetyA health and safety coordinator under the German construction site ordinance (Baustellenverordnung). The client must appoint a SiGeKo as soon as employees of several employers work on a site. On larger sites a health and safety plan must also be drawn up, describing the hazards that arise when the trades work alongside each other. The SiGeKo coordinates the trades during the planning and execution phases. In planning the coordinator takes the principles of occupational safety into account, in execution the coordinator aligns the work of the firms involved. The SiGeKo also compiles a file for later work on the structure.
From practice
Clear with your health and safety officer whether a machine rebuild in a live shop floor counts as a construction site under the ordinance, before the first outside fitter arrives. Whatever the answer, you need someone to coordinate the trades. An electrician under the platform and a fitter above it, both on the same day, is a classic accident scenario. A joint schedule in which the jobs do not overlap protects more here than any leaflet. Coordination also covers briefing the outside firms on escape routes, restricted areas and contact persons. The site manager and the SiGeKo may be the same person, provided they are qualified.
Heat recovery
Production & energyThe use of heat that arises anyway in a process or plant for another purpose on site. Typical sources are compressors, which turn most of the electrical energy they draw into heat, as well as condensers of refrigeration plants, exhaust air from ovens and dryers and warm waste water. The heat is transferred via plate heat exchangers, run-around coil systems or heat recovery units in ventilation systems. If the temperature level is too low, a heat pump raises it. The heat goes into space heating and domestic hot water or preheats cleaning water and boiler feed water. Economic viability depends largely on whether supply and demand coincide in time and how far apart source and consumer are. Storage tanks bridge differences in timing.
From practice
Compressor waste heat is the textbook case, and many plants still blow it out through the roof. In winter you would like to have it in the hall, in summer nobody wants it. The system has to be designed for that. Compressor cooling must never depend on someone taking the heat, otherwise the compressor trips on overtemperature on a warm day. An emergency cooler or a changeover damper is therefore always part of it. Preheating water for the CIP system or other cleaning processes works well, because the demand is there all year round. Clarify early who operates the system. The heat comes from building services, it is used in production, and when the pump fails nobody feels responsible.
Heat-sealable paper
Packaging technologyPaper with a coating that bonds to itself or to another packaging material under heat and pressure. Sealing layers include water-based polymer dispersions, extrusion-coated plastic layers and heat-seal lacquers, usually on one side only. Depending on the application, barrier coatings are added, for instance against grease or water vapour. Heat-sealable papers replace plastic films in flow wraps and lids, for example, so that the pack can be recovered through the paper recycling stream. How far that works depends on the type and proportion of the coating. Compared with film, paper hardly stretches and is sensitive to moisture. Its sealing window is also narrower. Fibre direction affects folding behaviour and machinability.
From practice
Switching from film to paper sounds like a change of material. At the machine it is more like a small project. Paper barely stretches, it tears or creases at the forming shoulder, and the barrier layer cracks at sharp folds. The sealing station often needs different temperatures and longer dwell times, and the machine not infrequently runs slower than with film. So plan a machine trial with real material from several reels. The sample the paper maker sends is not enough for that. Repeat the trial when the climate in the hall is different. Paper reacts to moisture, and what runs cleanly in dry winter air may cockle in a humid summer. Store a few finished packs for several days as well, then check them again for leaks.
High-bay warehouse
IntralogisticsA pallet warehouse from roughly 12 m in height, served automatically by stacker cranes. The cranes run in narrow aisles, and at the end face conveyor technology or AGVs take over the pallets. At the entrance a pallet inspection checks dimensions, overhang and condition of the pallet. Silo construction is common, in which the racking itself carries the roof and walls. It has its own tax and building-law rules, which need to be clarified in advance. A warehouse management system assigns the locations. The connection to production determines the overall benefit.
From practice
A high-bay warehouse is a construction decision that lasts for decades: fire protection, floor loading, structural design and permits run in parallel with the plant engineering. It pays off through space savings, headcount reduction and stock accuracy. The connection to production with pallet inspection, conveyor technology and WMS interface decides whether the investment saves time day to day or merely shifts the bottleneck. Also clarify how you reach the pallets in an aisle when a stacker crane fails and who is trained for it. Without emergency operation the stock sits there while production waits for its raw materials.
High-speed packaging machine
Packaging technologyA packaging machine for large volumes at a high cycle rate, generally fully automatic. There is no fixed limit above which a machine counts as a high-speed machine, as it depends on the type of pack. The machine consists of an infeed with singulation, a packaging unit and a discharge. It processes flexible packs such as pouches or rigid ones such as bottles and cartons, for example for food, beverages or pharmaceuticals. At high outputs, servo drives, web tracking control and camera inspection are common. Micro-stoppages weigh more heavily on output than on slower machines.
From practice
High speed is only valuable if infeed, packaging materials and the end of line can keep up. Many operators buy capacity they never use, because product separation hits its limit far below rated output. Calculate sustained output over a shift and not the peak figure in the brochure. Micro-stoppages add up quickly at a high cycle rate and appear in no report if nobody counts them. Ask for the rated output per format and for what the machine really achieves with your packaging material. Wear parts must be quickly accessible, because every minute of downtime costs many packs at a high cycle rate. A test of several hours at target output shows more than any promise.
HMI
Automation & roboticsHuman machine interface, the operator interface of the machine, usually a touch panel or panel PC with visualisation, messages and recipes. Typical screens are overview, operating mode selection, manual mode, recipe management, fault messages and user management. Good HMIs tell the operator that a fault exists, where it is and how to fix it. Rights are assigned by user group, for example operator, setter and maintenance. Multilingual support belongs in the user requirements specification from the start.
From practice
A good HMI reduces operating errors and downtime: fault messages in plain language with an image of the fault location, a changeover assistant with a step sequence, recipe management with permissions, language switching for international teams. At the FAT, insist that your own staff operate the machine. That shows whether the interface is self-explanatory or only usable by the programmer. Watch for the small things that annoy in daily use. Buttons that miss with gloves on. A flood of messages in which the one important message disappears. I like to sit beside the operator at FAT and just watch where they hesitate. That is where the fault sits.
Holding brake (motor brake)
Mechanical engineering & componentsA brake on the motor that holds an axis at standstill as soon as the motor is de-energised. It is applied by spring force or permanent magnets and released electrically, on servo motors usually with 24 V DC. A pure holding brake is designed to hold at standstill, not to stop a moving axis. In an emergency stop or power failure it can only withstand a limited number of emergency braking operations specified by the manufacturer. Brake motors on conveyors, by contrast, often have working brakes that may also stop a moving load. The holding brake is needed above all on vertical axes so that the load does not drop. If it forms part of a safety function, it needs safe control and a regular brake test.
From practice
A holding brake rarely fails from too much holding. More often the switching sequence is to blame. If the brake opens before the amplifier has built up torque, the axis drops briefly. Should it close while the motor is still turning, it wears away a bit more lining every time. At acceptance, watch a vertical axis to see whether anything gives way at switch-on and at emergency stop. A centimetre of sag is not a cosmetic flaw, there might be a hand underneath one day. Also ask how the axis can be moved without power if someone is trapped or a part has jammed. Some brakes have a manual release for this, others need an auxiliary supply. Long brake cables with a thin cross-section cost voltage. The brake then only half releases, drags and gets hot.
Hood shrink wrapper
Packaging technologyA machine that pulls a film hood over the pallet and shrinks it with heat. The hood encloses the load on five sides and so also protects it from moisture from above. The hood film is made of polyethylene, which is cut to length, welded at the top, opened out and pulled over the load. It then shrinks in a shrink frame that is heated by gas or electricity. The hood shrink wrapper is more energy-intensive than stretch wrapping, but more stable and weather-resistant, and it suits outdoor storage and beverages.
From practice
Hood shrink wrappers are standard for beverages, building materials and outdoor storage, because the pallet becomes rain-tight and dimensionally stable. Drawbacks are energy demand, film consumption and fire protection requirements, since heat and gas burners need their own fire protection concept. Check whether stretch wrapping with a top sheet is sufficient for your transport chain. Often it is the more economical solution. With heat-sensitive products such as confectionery it pays to ask, because the pallet is briefly exposed to heat during shrinking and leaves the machine warm. Heat-up time and standby consumption belong in the calculation as well, since many plants do not run continuously.
Hot filling
Packaging technologyFilling products at an elevated temperature so that the heat of the product sterilises the container and closure. After closing, the bottle is tipped or rotated so that the hot product also reaches the inside of the closure, followed by a hold time and cooling. Common for juices, teas and sauces in glass and in hot-fillable PET. It is an alternative to aseptic filling that needs less plant investment but more energy and places higher demands on the packaging.
From practice
Hot filling puts a load on the whole line. Containers must withstand the temperature without deforming, labels and adhesives must cope with cooling and condensation, and the closure must withstand the vacuum created on cooling. The cooling section costs space and energy. Cooled bottles arrive wet, and labellers and inkjet coders notice that first. The product also changes volume as it cools, so the fill level varies and can only be judged after cooling. With PET, the bottle’s vacuum panel design needs clarifying before purchase. Ask the container supplier for the permissible filling temperature and hold time, because hot-fillable is not a single value. If the product temperature drops too far during filling, the heat no longer sterilises the closure, so temperature monitoring belongs at the filler.
Hot melt
Packaging technologyA thermoplastic hot-melt adhesive for case and tray bonding. It is melted from granules or blocks in a heated tank and pumped through heated hoses to application heads with nozzles. It sets on cooling, and the open time is short. Common base materials are EVA and polyolefins. It is applied as a bead or as dots. Running costs (consumption per case), stringing and nozzle blockage are the practical issues. Systems with dot application usually need less adhesive than bead application.
From practice
Adhesive cost is a running cost that can be calculated per case from application quantity, adhesive price and unit count. Dot application instead of a bead, the correct temperature and clean nozzles save material and prevent stringing. Adhesive that is too hot chars in the nozzle, adhesive that is too cold wets poorly. I like to check a bond by tearing the case open: if fibres stay stuck to the adhesive, it holds. On case sealers, it is worth looking at glue melters with automatic refilling. Manual refilling is a common cause of downtime on night shifts, and hot adhesive calls for gloves and goggles. If the cases go into cold storage, the temperature range of the adhesive belongs in the enquiry to the adhesive supplier.
HP
Digitalisation & AIManufacturer of computers, notebooks, printers and scanners, whose name goes back to Hewlett-Packard. In offices and plants the devices found most often are workstation PCs, large-format printers for drawings and document scanners. Workstation PCs for CAD applications are fitted with a capable graphics card and plenty of memory. Large-format printers output layouts and drawings to scale on roll paper. Document scanners with an automatic feeder capture stacks of paper quickly and produce image files that become searchable once text recognition is applied.
From practice
For project work, consumer devices are not enough. CAD layouts and large assemblies need a machine with decent graphics performance, otherwise the screen stutters as soon as the whole hall is displayed. A document scanner with a feeder turns the pile of paper supplier documents into searchable PDF files and is therefore the foundation of any digital filing system. Plan for a printer for the large formats too. When a layout is agreed around the table, everyone wants a plan in their hand that they can scribble on. The scanner pays for itself the first time an inspection record or certificate is needed and is on screen within minutes.
HubSpot
Digitalisation & AICRM platform (Customer Relationship Management) for contacts, companies, quotes and communication. It bundles sales, marketing and service in one shared database. The communication with each contact and company is collected in one place, so the history can be read there. Enquiries and quotes are handled as cases to which an owner and a follow-up date are assigned. Forms for the website, appointment booking and email tracking belong to it as well. A CRM is a tool for sales and customer contact and replaces neither the ERP system nor project planning.
From practice
At POWERJO, customer enquiries, appointment bookings and contact history run through HubSpot, including the forms on this website. The benefit for you: whoever enquires does not end up in one person’s inbox. Instead the enquiry becomes a case with an owner and a follow-up date. That way nothing gets lost because a colleague was on holiday or the email sat in the wrong folder. If you introduce a CRM yourself, keep the mandatory fields few. Whatever is annoying to enter stays empty, and sooner or later the database is full of gaps. Also decide who creates new contacts, otherwise the same company with the same contact person appears three times.
Hydraulic power unit
Mechanical engineering & componentsAn assembly that generates and conditions the pressurised oil flow for a hydraulic system. It consists of tank, electric motor, pump, pressure relief valve and filters, plus, depending on the duty, an oil cooler, monitoring of level, temperature and contamination and often a valve manifold for the actuators. Gear pumps are common for simple duties, and axial piston pumps with pressure or flow control for higher power. A hydraulic accumulator can cover peak demand and relieve the pump. In production lines, hydraulics mainly drive presses, balers, lifting tables and clamping devices, wherever high forces are needed in a small space. Depending on their size, accumulators may be subject to periodic inspection under the German Industrial Safety Regulation (BetrSichV).
From practice
Dirt in the oil is the classic cause of hydraulic faults. Valves stick, pumps wear, and then the valve gets replaced while the clogged filter has long been running in bypass. At acceptance, check whether the filter contamination indicators report to the controller or just pop out a button on the filter housing. New oil is not automatically clean. Top up through a filter unit, not with a can and funnel. If the unit stands next to an oven in summer, the cooler has to be sized for that. Hoses age even when the machine stands still. The manufacturing date is on the fitting, and the DGUV, the German statutory accident insurance, publishes recommendations on service life. In food plants, every unit with lines near the product needs H1 oil, because sooner or later every hose drips.
Hygiene station
Production & energyA pass-through installation at the entrance to a production or hygiene area, where people complete defined hygiene steps before entering. Depending on design, these include hand washing, hand disinfection and sole cleaning. A turnstile or barrier releases passage only once the hands are disinfected and the shoe soles cleaned. The station usually follows the changing room, where street clothes are exchanged for work clothing, often on the black and white principle with separate zones. Tools and spare parts enter the area via material locks or defined transfer points. Where hygiene stations are needed and how they must be equipped follows from the plant’s hygiene zoning concept and from standards such as IFS Food or BRCGS.
From practice
For fitters, the hygiene station is often the first surprise on site. Nobody gets through the turnstile with a toolbox and a box of spare parts, and the route via the material lock has not been agreed with anyone. Clarify that with quality assurance before the first day of installation, including the rules on clothing, jewellery and mobile phones. Allow for the time, too. Anyone who switches between workshop and line several times a day loses a few minutes in the station every time, and with a larger installation crew that adds up over the week. In new builds or conversions, look at capacity. At shift change everyone wants through at once, and a station that copes in normal operation turns into a bottleneck.
Hygiene zoning
Quality & safetyDivision of a plant into areas with different hygiene requirements, for example high-risk, basic hygiene and non-production, with rules for the flow of material, personnel and air. The zones are separated structurally, and transitions run through hygiene airlocks with hand washing and a change of clothing and footwear. Air generally flows from the clean to the less clean zone. Tools, cleaning equipment and work clothing are often marked for specific zones. The basis is the hazard analysis under HACCP.
From practice
Zoning determines layout, airlocks and conveyor technology. Cartons must not enter the high-risk area, and staff change clothing. Plan handover points and machine placement around the zones, or the line layout and hygiene concept will collide at the latest audit. Lines that cross a zone boundary are especially delicate. The wall opening must be cleanable, and for maintenance and fault clearance it must be clear who may reach the machine from which side. Also ask about the routes for spare parts and tools, because the technician who arrives with a spanner from the workshop otherwise turns the zone boundary into a line on paper.
Hygienic design
Quality & safetyDesign principles for machines that are easy to clean. These include no dead spaces, no horizontal surfaces, defined radii, suitable materials such as stainless steel, and an ingress protection rating for wet cleaning. Weld seams are made smooth, seals sit without gaps, and threads and cavities are avoided in the product area. Bought-in parts such as motors, bearings and sensors are chosen and arranged so that no dirt can lodge. In the food sector this is not a nice-to-have but a selection criterion, because poor hygienic design costs cleaning time every day.
From practice
Practical checkpoints when reviewing quotes are open frames instead of hollow sections, sloped surfaces, motors set back, enclosed cable routing, stainless steel 1.4301 or 1.4404 in the product area and IP65 to IP69K depending on the cleaning regime. When I receive quotes, I ask for the cleaning times on comparable installations. They are a real cost factor that does not show up in the purchase price, and they quickly show which supplier really designs for hygiene. At a reference plant, look at the places the cleaner touches every day: covers, guides, handovers. There you can see without a brochure how much time a changeover costs.
I
IBScad
Digitalisation & AIA 2D CAD system for plant layouts, site plans and design drawings in mechanical and plant engineering. It works with the drawing formats standard in mechanical engineering, so layouts can be exchanged with suppliers and customers who use other CAD systems. A layout shows machines, conveyor technology, buildings, columns and doors to scale in plan view. Site plans are used to check space requirements, escape routes, operating sides and maintenance areas long before a machine is ordered. For agreeing the installation position, the 2D plan view is usually sufficient.
From practice
At POWERJO, IBScad is the tool for line layouts: machines, conveyor technology, escape routes, operating sides and maintenance areas in one scaled plan. A layout produced ahead of the tender prevents the classic surprises. The column is in the way, the door is too narrow, there is no room to work in front of the control cabinet. Draw in the swing of doors and the opening of guards, and keep the forklift routes clear, otherwise this only shows up during installation. Hall plans from the archive do not always match today’s state, so measure critical spots again. Attach the layout to the tender, then every supplier quotes for the same space.
IFS Food
Quality & safetyA certification standard for food safety and quality, originally developed by the retail sector. It applies to companies that manufacture or process food and is audited by accredited certification bodies. The audit covers the management system, the HACCP concept, hygiene, process control and product control. For machinery, hygienic design, foreign body management, maintenance documentation and the glass register matter most at audit. New plant must fit the site’s existing IFS concept, otherwise non-conformities turn up at the next audit.
From practice
At audit, what counts is what the new machine can do to your site. It puts the certificate at risk faster than people expect. The usual findings are glass inspection windows, cable ties that no detector can find, lubricants without food-grade approval and maintenance work without records. Bring the QA team into the URS and the FAT early, because they know the audit questions better than any design engineer. Have the supplier hand over a documentation package covering everything IFS touches: material certificates, lubricant list, list of glass and hard plastic parts, cleaning instructions. Anyone who asks for this only after delivery usually gets it with gaps.
IIoT
Digitalisation & AIIndustrial Internet of Things: networking machines, sensors and plant with IT systems to continuously capture, transmit and analyse operating and process data. Unlike classic automation, IIoT usually does not control anything but supplies data for monitoring, analysis and maintenance. The data comes from controllers and retrofitted sensors, travels through gateways and protocols such as MQTT or OPC UA to a platform in the plant or in the cloud, and is processed there.
From practice
IIoT rarely fails on the technology, mostly on purpose. Data gets collected without anyone having a question to ask of it. Start with a concrete benefit, for example downtime causes, compressed air consumption or the temperature trend in the sealing tool, and expand only afterwards. Clarify early who is responsible, maintenance or IT. Just as early, settle how the network is separated from the control level and who will maintain the sensors on existing equipment later on. Retrofitted sensors on old machines get knocked out of position or torn off sooner or later, and nobody notices. So plan a check that the readings still match reality.
In-mould labelling (IML)
Packaging technologyA process in which the label is placed in the mould during manufacture of the pack and bonded to the plastic. The plastic film label sits in the mould, usually held electrostatically or by vacuum, and is overmoulded by the plastic during injection moulding. The process also exists in thermoforming. The label thereby becomes part of the wall and is permanently bonded to the pack. IML is often used for yoghurt pots, margarine tubs and ice cream tubs, because decoration and container come from one operation and the print is wipe-resistant.
From practice
IML delivers high-quality, wipe-resistant decoration directly during injection moulding or thermoforming, and there is no labeller in your line. In return the result depends on stable processes at the packaging supplier, because misplaced labels or bubbles only show up on the finished pot. Batch sizes must be sufficient, and changing the design is more expensive than with labels, because printing and cutting are set up for the motif. If the label is made of the same plastic as the pot, that fits well with a mono-material solution. Discuss this early with the supplier, before the pots are printed. Ask for the declaration of compliance covering the whole combination of pot, label and ink.
Incoterms
CommercialStandardised delivery terms from the International Chamber of Commerce that divide between seller and buyer who bears transport, insurance, customs and transfer of risk. Each term has a three-letter code, for example EXW for ex works, DAP for delivered at place and DDP for delivered duty paid. Under EXW the buyer collects the machine at the works gate and bears everything from there. Under DAP the seller delivers to the named place, but the buyer unloads. Under DDP the seller also handles import clearance. Two quotes of the same price can end up far apart if one is calculated EXW and the other DAP. An Incoterms check belongs in every quote comparison.
From practice
For machinery purchases DAP and DDP are the usual terms, and EXW mostly turns up with used machines. POWERJO’s tender package specifies the term so that all suppliers calculate on the same basis. I only weigh quotes against each other once the term is identical everywhere, otherwise apples sit next to oranges. The term alone does not settle it. Unloading, positioning in the hall, transport insurance and packaging should be written into the contract explicitly, because Incoterms do not cover them fully. Rely on the term alone and you end up at the ramp, looking at the low loader and wondering who ordered the crane.
Indexing gearbox (indexer)
Mechanical engineering & componentsA gearbox that converts uniform input rotation into a stepwise output motion with dwell phases. With each revolution of the input shaft the output advances by a fixed angle and then stands still. Common designs are cam indexers with a globoidal or cylindrical cam and a roller turret, and the Geneva drive. Cam indexers are preloaded free of backlash and follow smooth motion laws, while the Geneva drive is simpler but starts and stops with a jerk. Characteristic values are the number of stops, the index angle as the share of input rotation used for motion, and the permissible output torque. Indexers drive rotary tables, rotary machines and transfer conveyors. Servo-driven rotary tables do the same job with freely programmable indexing.
From practice
An indexer is a piece of mechanics you rarely see and even more rarely touch. That is exactly why it gets forgotten when the machine is supposed to run faster. The cycle rate is quickly turned up at the drive motor, but the gearbox was designed for a certain indexing frequency and a certain mass moment of inertia. If the rotary table later gets heavier change parts and a higher speed at the same time, do the calculation first or let the manufacturer do it. Watch for play at the output. If the table wobbles during the dwell, the cam followers or the output bearing are usually worn, and positioning accuracy suffers at every station. Oil level and oil changes are in the lubrication schedule. They still get forgotten, because the gearbox sits deep in the machine base.
Induction sealing
Packaging technologyContactless sealing of container openings with an aluminium seal liner in the closure. After the cap is screwed on, the container passes under an induction head that heats the foil by eddy currents, so that the heat-seal layer fuses to the container rim. The result is a tamper-evident closure sealed against leakage and oxygen. The process is used on plastic and glass containers with screw closures. The cap itself must be plastic, because a metal cap would absorb heat itself.
From practice
Seal quality depends on three things: the distance from the induction head to the closure, closure torque, and cleanliness of the container rim. Too little energy leaves leaks, too much burns the liner or deforms the rim. On changeovers, the head distance must be reproducibly adjustable, ideally with a scale and a recipe and not by feel. A seal looks the same from the outside whether it is good or not. So define a test method, for example peeling the foil and inspecting the seal ring, or a leak test, and record the test intervals in writing. At acceptance I have them show me how the test finds closures that were deliberately fitted crooked.
Industrial pallet
IntralogisticsA pallet in the 1,200 x 1,000 mm format, larger than the Euro pallet at 1,200 x 800 mm and common in beverage, chemical and export logistics. Often a one-way or pooled pallet made of wood or plastic. The length of 1,200 mm stays the same, the width grows by 200 mm, so different layer patterns and carton formats fit the area. CP1 pallets of the chemical industry have the same dimensions. Racking, conveyor technology and pallet inspection have to be designed for the greater width.
From practice
Anyone mixing industrial and Euro pallets needs palletisers, wrappers, conveyor technology and racking that can handle both formats. This is often forgotten in tenders. Define which formats need to run today and in five years, and have the pallet inspection check both formats. The changeover between formats is where it gets difficult. If an operator has to adjust guides by hand, that is skipped sooner or later, and the pallet enters the plant crooked. An automatic format change or a clean separation of the routes is better. Think about lorry loading as well, because the number of pallets per trailer changes with the format.
Inerting
Quality & safetyA process in which oxygen in a pack, container or storage room is displaced by an inert gas, in order to slow oxidation and inhibit the growth of aerobic microorganisms. Nitrogen is used because it takes no part chemically, and carbon dioxide because it also inhibits some germs. In packaging this happens as gas flushing before sealing, for example through the filling tube of a form-fill-seal machine, and leads to a modified atmosphere pack. Typical products are coffee, nuts, snacks and powders. In explosion protection the term means something different, namely filling silos or mills with inert gas.
From practice
Gas is where people like to save money, until the complaint arrives. Calculate the consumption per pack at full output, not at half speed. A leaking seal seam makes the whole flush worthless, and you still pay for the gas. Spot-check the residual oxygen and record it per batch. Ask the supplier as well where the nitrogen is meant to come from: a tank, bottle bundles or a generator. That changes purity, pipe size and running costs. And look at how much air the product brings with it. Powders and loose bulk goods carry oxygen between the particles, and the flush has to drive it out first.
Ingress protection (IP) rating
Quality & safetyA code in accordance with DIN EN 60529 for the protection of enclosures against the ingress of foreign objects and water. The first digit describes protection against solid objects and dust, the second protection against water. IP65 stands for dust-tight and protected against water jets, IP69 for cleaning with high pressure and hot water. The rating says nothing about resistance to cleaning agents. The plant’s actual cleaning regime determines the required rating, and choosing too low means electronics failures after every wet clean.
From practice
The cleaning method decides which IP rating is needed. Where high pressure and foam are used, IP54 components are not enough. Specify in the user requirements specification which areas are wet-cleaned and what IP rating motors, sensors and control cabinets need there. A control cabinet with an air conditioning unit in a wet area is a classic cause of consequential damage. The weakest link usually sits unobtrusively at the edge: a cable gland, a connector, the open cap on a sensor. Seals age too, and cleaning agents attack them. I ask for a list of components with their IP rating per installation location and check whether a hole drilled later has cost the rating somewhere.
Inspection plan
Quality & safetyA document that specifies for a product, a material or a process step which characteristics are inspected. For each characteristic it states target value and tolerance, test method and measuring equipment, frequency and sample size, responsibility, recording and the reaction to a deviation. In packaging lines this covers, for example, fill weight, seal seam and tightness, coding and labels, and the function test of a metal detector or X-ray unit with test pieces. It is based on specifications, the HACCP study, the FMEA and customer requirements. Separate plans cover goods receipt, for example of packaging materials. A test instruction, by contrast, describes in detail how a single test is carried out. Inspection plans are often kept in a CAQ system.
From practice
Inspection plans grow. After every complaint a characteristic is added, and hardly anything is ever removed. At some point the line leader on the night shift is supposed to check more than can be done in an hour, and from then on boxes just get ticked. For every characteristic I ask what happens if the value is out of tolerance. If there is no clear answer, I put the characteristic up for discussion. With a new line it pays to revise the inspection plan together with the plant. What the checkweigher and vision system inspect on every pack does not also need weighing and checking by hand, as long as their function is tested regularly. Schedule the metal detector test at the start of the shift, at fixed intervals and after every format change. Hang the inspection plan where the testing happens. Nobody at the line reads it in the CAQ system.
Installation (mechanical and electrical)
Project management & CAPEXMechanical and electrical assembly of a plant at the operator’s site after delivery. This covers bringing the machines in and aligning them on the foundation or hall floor, connecting assemblies and conveyors, laying cable trays and cables, and connecting power, compressed air, network and other utilities. Commissioning and acceptance follow. Beforehand the access routes, foundations, utility connections, the provision of crane and forklift and the disposal of packaging must be clarified. Who supplies what belongs in the interface list and in the installation sequence plan.
From practice
The building site shows what the user requirements specification did not say. A door is too low, a floor anchor sits exactly under a machine foot, and the compressed air connection ends at the wrong end of the hall. Have the access route proven with dimensions before delivery, including the floor loading along the way. Clarify site rules and working hours, and who runs power, compressed air and network up to which point. Coordination of outside contractors is easily forgotten, and then the fitters stand at the gate making phone calls. Appoint a site supervisor who signs off daily what is finished. That saves a lot of work on the punch list, because nothing first surfaces on the last day.
Installation sequence plan
Project management & CAPEXA plan that sets out the sequence, duration and resources for mechanical and electrical installation on site. It describes the order in which machines are brought in, set down, aligned and anchored, when pipework, cable trays and utility connections follow, and which tasks depend on each other. For each step it lists the personnel needed per trade, lifting equipment such as cranes or forklifts, the areas required for delivery and interim storage, and hold points for inspections. It is based on the layout, the foundation plan and the overall schedule. The installation sequence plan runs up to mechanical completion, after which the commissioning plan takes over. With several suppliers, the client or a general contractor merges their sequences into one plan.
From practice
The first question is trivial and still gets forgotten, namely what has to go into the hall first while the way is still clear. Once the conveyors are in, the big machine no longer reaches its spot, or only after partial dismantling. Ask every supplier for their own sequence and lay the plans side by side. You quickly see that three companies need the same corner on the same Tuesday. Also plan where the material will stand until it is installed. Storage space is tight in a running plant, and crates in an escape route cause trouble with the safety department. Crane times and closed walkways belong in the plan with dates, because production next door wants to keep running. And the electrician can only pull cables once the control cabinets are standing. Sounds obvious, but often it is written down nowhere.
Interface list
Project management & CAPEXA document recording every handover point between trades or suppliers: mechanical, electrical, control-related, utility-related and software-related. For each interface it states who supplies, who connects, where the scope of supply ends and who is responsible. Signal type, protocol, utility parameters and date are added. The list belongs above all to split contracting, where several suppliers build one line. Project disputes almost always arise at unresolved interfaces. The list is aligned with the signal list and the battery limits.
From practice
On lines with several suppliers the interface list is the document that saves the most trouble. For every connection it states who supplies, who connects and who is responsible, whether it concerns mechanics, power, signals, utilities or software. Without it, the handover table, the start signal or the network port is missing during installation, and both sides are sure the other one was responsible. Have both suppliers countersign the list, because what only one side knows is not an interface but an assumption. Go through it before the order is placed and not just during installation. For each handshake, ask who comes to measure first when a signal fault occurs.
Interim project management
Project management & CAPEXExternal project management for the duration of an investment project, when internal capacity or specialist experience is lacking. The external project manager represents the operator’s interests towards the suppliers, from the tender through award and schedule tracking to acceptance and handover to the line. They work on the operator’s behalf and to its instructions, with a defined mandate, a term and an agreed scope of services. The engagement can cover the whole project or individual phases, for example the start-up support.
From practice
Interim project management brings experience into the business for exactly the duration of the project, without hiring and without a headhunter. That only works with a mandate. The project manager needs direct access to the decision-makers, clear budget limits and a fixed interface to purchasing and production. Otherwise they sit in a waiting loop and bill daily rates for meetings where nobody decides. A defined end belongs to it just as much. Whoever looks after the equipment after acceptance must be involved in the project from the start, so that the knowledge does not leave the building with the external person. Also define what must be on the table on the last day, such as documentation and the punch list. Have the contractual set-up checked in advance with purchasing and your lawyer.
Interlayer (tier sheet)
Packaging technologySheet of board, plastic or anti-slip paper placed between pallet layers to increase stability, separate layers or protect delicate products. Typical uses are glass containers, cans or bottles that would slide into one another or damage each other without a separating sheet. The sheets usually match the pallet size and are placed at the palletiser by a suction gripper from an interlayer magazine. Single-use board sheets are disposed of after use, while plastic interlayers can run in a reusable cycle.
From practice
Interlayers cost material, time in the palletising cycle and a magazine on the palletiser. First check whether a different pack pattern, an anti-slip coating or strapping can deliver the same stability. If you need the sheets, plan the magazine for a whole shift so that nobody has to keep topping it up. Automatic feeding needs a check that exactly one sheet is down, because two on top of each other or none at all let the pallet shift in transport. With reusable sheets, take-back comes on top. Who stacks them at the depalletiser and who drives them back to the supplier should be settled beforehand.
Intermittent / continuous motion
Packaging technologyTwo operating modes of packaging machines, distinguished by whether the product or film stands still while it is processed. In intermittent motion the web stops for sealing, cutting or filling and then indexes on by one step. Rotary indexing machines and thermoforming machines with stepwise film advance are typical examples. In continuous motion the web runs without stopping and the tooling moves with it, synchronised to film and product, as on flow wrappers with rotary sealing tools. Continuous machines achieve higher output, while intermittent machines are simpler in design and more format-flexible.
From practice
The choice depends on the required output and on the product. Delicate or hard-to-feed products often run more calmly on intermittent machines, because the transfer happens while stationary. Continuous machines need a synchronised infeed and products that can be reliably spaced. Intermittent mechanics accelerate and brake with every cycle, and the wear on the drives shows it later. Work out what net output your infeed really delivers before you buy a continuous machine that then runs indexed and never earns its premium. With printed film, the print mark detection has to cope with full speed. Try that at acceptance with your own film, not with the manufacturer’s sample reel.
Internal / external dimensions
Packaging technologyCase dimensions are given as internal dimensions in the order length, width, height, as set out in the FEFCO convention. Length and width refer to the opening, and height is the third dimension. The external dimension results from the internal dimension plus material thickness and fold allowances, and it determines the pack pattern, pallet overhang and how much of the pallet volume is used. It can only be measured reliably on the erected case, because filled corrugated cases can also bulge. Confusing internal and external dimensions is a common cause of fit problems.
From practice
The classic problem: the packaging developer calculates with internal dimensions, the logistics planner designs the pallet with the same figures, and the case ends up overhanging. Clarify with every drawing which dimension is meant, and measure the external dimension on the erected sample rather than calculating it. Double-wall board adds several millimetres per wall, which adds up over a pallet layer. Filled cases also bulge, so plan the pallet with the measured size of the filled pack. An overhang costs stacking strength, and the edges suffer in transport. Always state on the order whether internal or external dimensions are meant, so that the supplier does not have to guess.
Interpack
CommercialThe world’s largest trade fair for packaging technology and the process industry, held every three years on the Düsseldorf exhibition grounds. Besides packaging machinery, packaging materials, process technology and suppliers are represented. For investment projects it is a good place to compare machine concepts, suppliers and changeover times directly. Many manufacturers show their machines set up and partly running, so design, accessibility and ease of cleaning can be judged on the real object. The fair does not replace binding quotations. It serves for first contacts and for an overview of the market.
From practice
Every three years Interpack gives you the quickest market overview you will get. Go with your URS and specific questions, not to be dazzled. Which manufacturers supply your format, what changeover times are realistic, what references exist in your industry. Book the important appointments beforehand, otherwise you queue at the stand and end up talking to the wrong person. Ask for the technician instead of the brochure. I like to have changeovers and cleaning access shown on the machine itself, because on slides everything looks equally quick. One day at the fair replaces weeks of research, but not an enquiry and not a reference visit.
Inventor
Digitalisation & AIA 3D CAD system from Autodesk for mechanical engineering with parametric part and assembly design, sheet metal and welded construction, and derivation of manufacturing drawings and bills of materials. Parametric means that dimensions and relationships are stored as parameters, so the model follows when something is changed. Drawings and the bill of materials for production and purchasing come out of the assemblies. For exchange with other CAD systems, neutral formats such as STEP are used, which carry the geometry without the design history.
From practice
Many special-purpose machine builders design in Inventor. As a customer, demand neutral 3D data alongside the drawings, for example in STEP format. Then your own designers or external experts can plan conversions and add-ons without being tied to the supplier’s tool. I also have the bills of materials supplied in editable form and write into the contract that the data is handed over in the state of the machine as delivered. Anyone who raises this only at acceptance may end up with PDF drawings alone, and every later change then starts with redrawing. Check the delivered files at handover by opening the STEP assembly once in your own system.
IO-Link
Automation & roboticsPoint-to-point communication down to the sensor and actuator level, standardised in IEC 61131-9. An IO-Link master connects one device per port using a simple unshielded standard cable up to 20 metres long. Besides the switching signal, sensors transmit diagnostic and parameter data. In practice, sensors can be swapped without readjustment because the master loads the parameters automatically, which noticeably reduces MTTR. The master is connected to the control system through a fieldbus. Actuators such as valve terminals and signal lights can be connected the same way.
From practice
IO-Link pays off on the packaging line mainly for sensors that are frequently swapped or reparameterised. The parameter set sits in the master and a new sensor is written automatically, so no technician with a laptop is needed any more. The user requirements specification should state which sensors must be IO-Link capable and whether the diagnostic data should feed the control system or an MES. Otherwise you buy the capability and never use it. Many optical sensors report contamination as a diagnostic value before they fail. That only helps if the message reaches somebody. Try the real case at acceptance: fit a spare sensor from stock and see whether the line runs again without a laptop.
IQ/OQ/PQ
Quality & safetyA three-stage qualification of plant in regulated environments such as pharma and medical devices, often preceded by design qualification (DQ). Installation qualification (IQ) verifies that the plant is built to specification and drawings, including materials, instruments and documents. Operational qualification (OQ) verifies function in all operating states, including the limits of the operating range and alarms. Performance qualification (PQ) demonstrates performance in the real process over several runs. The basis is approved plans and protocols. The effort is substantial and belongs in the schedule and budget.
From practice
Outside pharma and medical devices, IQ, OQ and PQ are often overdone or not done at all. A lean middle path works: installation verification largely overlaps with the SAT protocol, functional verification with the acceptance criteria from the URS, and performance verification with the performance test. Merge the three documents beforehand and save yourself weeks of paperwork and arguments with the supplier. Give the supplier your templates early, ideally with the enquiry. Otherwise protocols arrive in his format and you rewrite everything. Watch the instruments. Without calibration certificates for the sensors used, any installation check can be challenged.
ISA-95
Digitalisation & AIAn international standard (IEC 62264) for integrating enterprise and production systems. It describes levels from the field level through control and MES up to ERP, and the information exchanged between them, such as production orders, material definitions and results. The level model assigns systems according to their task. Sensors and drives sit at the bottom, the control system works above them, the MES coordinates and documents production, and the ERP plans orders and material. ISA-95 underpins many MES architectures and interface specifications.
From practice
In a project, ISA-95 helps mainly as a common language between IT, automation and production. The levels clarify who is responsible for what, which data goes up and which instructions come down. That helps when, in an MES project, IT talks about orders, automation talks about signals, and both mean the same thing. Draw the level model once with the real systems in your plant. Then it quickly shows where data is maintained twice and where there are gaps. A standard does not replace deciding which KPIs you actually need. And it does not tell you which interface your supplier really delivers.
ISO 9001
Quality & safetyAn international standard for quality management systems. It sets requirements for the system, not for the product, and requires a company to plan, control, document and continually improve its processes in order to reliably meet customer requirements. It is built around the process approach, with risk-based thinking, management responsibility, internal audits and management review. Certification is carried out by an accredited body and confirmed in regular surveillance audits. The certificate proves a controlled system, it says nothing about the quality of an individual delivery.
From practice
Many industrial customers expect suppliers and service providers to have quality management to ISO 9001, often already at the supplier assessment stage. As a buyer, look at the certificate itself. Check that site and scope cover the part of the business that handles your order, and that it is still valid. A certificate replaces neither a supplier audit nor a reference visit, it only says that a controlled system exists. POWERJO is preparing for certification: documented processes for enquiry handling, expert selection, project support and handover. For you, that means traceable, repeatable quality instead of a one-off.
ISO fits
Mechanical engineering & componentsA standardised tolerance system under ISO 286 for shaft-and-bore fits. Tolerance zones are given with a letter for position and a number for grade, for example H7/g6 for a clearance fit, H7/k6 for a transition fit and H7/p6 for an interference fit. The hole-basis system is most commonly used, in which the bore keeps the tolerance zone H and the fit is set through the shaft. Capital letters denote bores, lower-case letters shafts. The smaller the number, the tighter the tolerance. Its counterpart is the shaft-basis system.
From practice
The topic becomes tangible as soon as spare parts and change parts are made again. Anyone having parts manufactured to drawing needs fit and surface-finish specifications, or the shaft will bind or the bearing will creep. Require manufacturing drawings with full tolerances for wear parts. A drawing without tolerances invites trouble, because if nothing is stated, the general tolerance in the title block applies, and that is far too coarse for a bearing seat. For 3D-printed change parts, tolerances need to be assessed differently than for machined parts. Tell the supplier which surfaces get reworked, such as bores for bearings or pins.
K
Kaizen
KPIsJapanese for change for the better. It means a culture of small, continuous improvements made by the employees themselves, as opposed to rare large projects from above. In German it usually goes under the name of the continuous improvement process, KVP for short, and is related to the company suggestion scheme. The procedure often follows the PDCA cycle of plan, do, check and act. Kaizen only works if suggestions are implemented quickly. A full suggestion box without any response ends participation reliably.
From practice
On packaging lines, Kaizen rarely fails for lack of ideas. It fails for lack of capacity to implement them, because the operators’ suggestions land on a list that nobody works through. A fixed weekly slot with maintenance and the line lead has proved itself, in which three small things actually get done, such as a stop, a marking or a changed sequence during changeover. The operator who had the idea should see the result at his own machine. Then the next idea comes by itself. Clarify beforehand who may release small changes, otherwise every marking waits for a signature. For safety topics and changes to the control system, the normal change route applies.
Joint opening event after award of contract, at which a project officially starts. Objectives, scope, roles, communication channels, schedule, escalation rules and the first steps are discussed. Participants are the client, the supplier, all trades involved and the affected departments of the operator. The result is minutes with decisions, owners and open points. A good kick-off with all trades saves weeks later, because this is where the project climate is set.
From practice
A good kick-off takes half a day and clarifies three things: who decides what, which dates are fixed, and what counts as done. Production, maintenance, quality, procurement and the supplier sit at one table once, before the first drawing exists. I send out the agenda and the URS beforehand, so that nobody turns up unprepared and everyone knows why they are needed. Skip the kick-off, and you will clarify the same things later in escalation meetings, with the schedule slipping. Invite the people who will have to live with the result, meaning operators and shift leaders. They have no authority to decide, but they know what otherwise goes wrong on the line.
Kraftliner / testliner
Packaging technologyThe facing papers of corrugated board, which are glued as smooth outer and inner layers onto the fluted medium. Kraftliner is made mainly from virgin pulp and offers high strength and moisture resistance. Testliner is made from recovered paper and is cheaper but less strong. The choice of facings largely determines edge crush resistance, burst strength, printability and behaviour in humid environments. The basis weight of the facings is stated in grams per square metre. Corrugated board with two facings and one fluting is called single wall.
From practice
For chilled and export packaging, use kraftliner outer facings. For dry domestic distribution, testliner is usually sufficient. Suppliers are happy to quietly swap the facing grade for a cheaper one if only the corrugated board grade is named in the framework agreement. So specify the paper composition, the facing basis weight and the minimum ECT value, and spot-check on goods-in. Damp cold stores are a case of their own, because corrugated board quickly loses stiffness there. For new cases, have the board construction written into the specification and not just the grade name, since the same name can hide different papers.
L
Label inspection
Quality & safetyInline check that the correct label is present, correctly positioned and undamaged. Methods range from simple presence sensors, through barcode scanners for identity verification, to camera systems that assess position, skew, wrinkles and print. The inspection point sits after the labeller, and faulty packs are rejected. The check serves labelling law, traceability and customer requirements. Batch and date printing is checked as well with code verification where needed.
From practice
Start with the question of which fault is really costly: the wrong label with a recall, the missing one with a complaint, or the crooked one that only hurts appearance. A barcode scanner after the labeller prevents the recall at low cost. Camera systems for position and wrinkling are more elaborate and need tolerances agreed with the customer, otherwise you generate false rejects. I would only choose the camera when the scanner is no longer enough. Check the setpoint at changeover, because otherwise the label for format A is mercilessly checked against the setpoint for format B. And clarify in advance who releases after a false alarm.
Label material (facestock)
Packaging technologyThe facestock of a self-adhesive label, which determines printability, appearance and durability. Common materials are paper (coated, uncoated or thermal for direct thermal printing), PP film for clarity and moisture resistance, PE film for flexible squeeze bottles and PET for temperature and chemical resistance. Paper is usually cheaper, while film is more tear-resistant and copes better with moisture. Together with the adhesive and the liner, the facestock forms the label laminate. Thickness, stiffness and surface decide how well the label dispenses and how it conforms to a curve.
From practice
Every material has its use and its limits. Paper labels go soft and tear in cold storage, PP labels shrink on warm bottles, PE labels stretch during dispensing. Thermal paper fades with heat and light, and you notice at the latest when the barcode stops scanning after a few weeks. So test the label on the actual container under real conditions: wet, cold, after weeks. On tight radii a label that is too stiff lifts at the edges. Anyone changing the material has to adjust the dispensing edge, liner take-up, print head temperature and ribbon of the thermal transfer printer at the same time. Otherwise the labeller runs unsteadily afterwards.
Labeller
Packaging technologyA machine that applies labels to containers or packs. Depending on the process, it handles self-adhesive labels from a liner, wet-glue labels from a magazine, or roll-fed labels that are cut from the reel and applied with hot melt. Labels on a liner pass over a dispensing edge, while wet-glue and roll-fed machines mostly sit on fast beverage lines, often on a rotary machine. The main requirements are accuracy, short changeover times and label inspection, meaning the correct type, correct position and a readable code. For changing data such as a batch number there are print-and-apply systems that print the label inside the machine.
From practice
When comparing machines, look at what the machine does with your actual container and not at the brochure value. Ask for the labelling accuracy in millimetres and have the roll change during operation shown to you, for example with a double unwinder. Camera-based label inspection should catch the wrong type and an offset label. Common causes of faults are static charge that makes labels dispense badly, rolls with the wrong winding direction or the wrong type, and containers that vary within their tolerance. If the bottles arrive from the filler wet or misted, even the best machine struggles. On roll-fed beverage lines, glue application and film quality decide the result.
Laminating
Packaging technologyBonding two or more webs of plastic film, paper or aluminium over their full area into a laminate. This is done with laminating adhesive, which may be solvent-based or solvent-free, or by extrusion lamination, where a molten layer joins the webs. It allows properties to be combined, for example a printed outer layer, a barrier layer and a seal layer. Laminating adhesives need a curing time after lamination before the laminate may be processed or run on the machine. Laminates are harder to recycle than mono-material.
From practice
The typical weak point of laminated structures is delamination. The layers come apart, usually at seal seams, at folds or after hot filling. Causes are too little curing time at the manufacturer, moisture or components from the printing inks. Ask for data on laminate bond strength and for food-contact approval of the adhesive. With solvent-based adhesives ask about residual solvent, because odour on the film ends up in the product. Freshly laminated rolls going straight from the lorry onto the machine are a warning sign. I always ask the film supplier how long a roll was stored before it left the plant. That belongs in the specification and not in the gut feeling of the dispatcher.
Large Language Model (LLM)
Digitalisation & AIAn AI model trained on large volumes of text that can understand and generate language. It continuously calculates which piece of text is most likely to come next and builds its answers from that. In an industrial context it is used to search documentation, explain fault messages, summarise shift reports or draft maintenance instructions. It gives plausible, not guaranteed correct, answers and does not replace deterministic control. Connected to a company’s own documents, it can cite sources. It is run as a cloud service or locally in the company’s own data centre.
From practice
An LLM is useful when it can access your documents and cites its sources. Without that connection it invents convincing but wrong spare-part numbers, and they look just as believable on the screen as the right ones. Clarify before use what data the model may see, where it runs and who checks the answers. Design data and customer documents do not belong in a public service without asking first. I start with tasks where a mistake is cheap, so search and summarising, and not with changing machine parameters. Give your staff a clear brief on what the tool is meant for and what it is not.
Laser marking system
Packaging technologyA coding system that marks surfaces with a laser beam. Depending on the laser source, CO2, fibre or UV, and on the material, the mark is created by colour change, removal of a top layer or engraving. A scanner steers the beam over the product, and the data come from the line or printer controller. The mark needs no consumables such as ink or solvent, is durable and hard to forge, but depends on material and contrast. Fume extraction and laser safety measures are required. Lasers are used on glass, PET, board, film and labels.
From practice
A laser can only mark what reacts to it. On some films and inks the contrast stays weak, and only a laser-reactive field in the print design helps. Have all packaging materials sampled beforehand, including the variants from the second source. Extraction is mandatory and often forgotten, as is the protective enclosure matching the laser class. When switching from an inkjet printer, weigh the saved consumables against the higher investment. Also clarify how the laser switches off when the conveyor stops and who maintains the extraction filters. The enclosure doors should be interlocked, because a door that can be left open will be left open sooner or later.
Layer palletiser
Packaging technologyA palletiser that first builds a complete layer on a layer forming table and then transfers it to the pallet as a whole. To do this, packs are turned where necessary, pushed together into rows and compacted according to the layer pattern. The layer is then pushed onto a transfer apron, which retracts from underneath and sets it down on the pallet. Depending on the design, the pallet then drops by one layer height or the transfer rises. A separate module inserts tier sheets. Layer palletisers come with high-level or low-level infeed and reach high outputs with uniform packs. Palletiser is the generic term. A robot palletiser places packs individually or in small groups. It is more flexible with changing patterns, but usually slower.
From practice
A layer palletiser handles a lot, as long as the packs cooperate. The tricky moment is when the finished layer moves from the table onto the pallet. Slippery shrink packs or a layer pattern without proper interlocking come apart at that point, and the line stands until someone straightens the layer by hand. Ask before ordering who will be allowed to create new layer patterns later. If only the supplier can do it via remote access, every new item number costs you an invoice and a few days of waiting. People also tend to underestimate everything around it. An empty pallet magazine, a tier sheet dispenser and the conveyor run to the stretch wrapper all need space. And broken pallets from the exchange pool stop the line just as effectively as a defect in the palletiser itself.
Layer pattern
IntralogisticsThe arrangement of packs within a pallet layer, usually shown as a drawing: position, orientation and count per layer, and the sequence of layers. With interlocked stacking the layers are offset against each other, with column stacking the packs lie exactly on top of one another. The load unit results from layer pattern and number of layers. Space use on the pallet, load-unit stability and the palletiser‘s programming all depend on the layer pattern. Each format has its own layer pattern, and with interlocked stacking two patterns usually alternate from layer to layer.
From practice
Have the palletiser supplier draw the layer patterns for every format and get them signed off by logistics and the customer beforehand. Retail chains have their own requirements on pallet height, overhang and number of layers. An interlocked pattern is more stable, a column pattern is gentler on the packs. Both have consequences for the wrapper and for transport. If a layer pattern changes after commissioning, it costs programming effort and usually new gripper tooling. Also ask how the plant deals with an incomplete layer at the end of an order, because the last pallet of an order is rarely full. Pack dimensions vary in practice, so sign-off should be done with real samples and not just on screen.
Layer picker
IntralogisticsA robot or gantry that picks whole pallet layers and transfers them onto mixed pallets. The gripper takes up the complete layer by clamping surfaces, forks or vacuum, supported by slip sheets and pallet magazines. Layer weight determines the sizing of gripper and robot. It is used for customers who order assorted pallets rather than single-SKU pallets. The source pallets stand ready sorted by item, and the target pallet is assembled per order. Single cartons are handled by other systems, such as pick-and-place.
From practice
Layer picking pays off with many mixed pallets built from whole layers, while for single cases other systems are more suitable. The stability of the layers, slip sheets and gripping technology for different case qualities are the difficult parts. A layer that holds on the source pallet sometimes comes loose when gripped, especially once the film is off. Check your order structure with real numbers before comparing technology. That includes how often whole layers are ordered and how often just a few cartons. Only then do you know whether a layer picker or a system for single cartons fits. Insist on a trial with your real cartons and pallets before you order.
Layout planning
Project management & CAPEXThe spatial arrangement of machines, conveyor technology, routes and buffers, usually as a 2D drawing in CAD and, for complex lines, as a 3D model. Material flow, operating sides, maintenance access, escape routes and the handover points between trades are fixed in it. It takes account of building columns, utility connections and hygiene zones. A good layout shortens transport distances, provides maintenance access and keeps escape routes clear. It is the basis of the feasibility study, the tender and the rigging plan. Layout mistakes are the most expensive to fix later.
From practice
Machines are the easy part of a layout. What lies between them is harder: buffers, access, pallet spaces, routes for material and people, cleaning and maintenance. Plan a day’s movements into the 2D layout, not just the machine outlines. Draw in where the change-part trolley stands during a changeover, where the forklift stops with the empty pallet and how the maintenance fitter reaches the motor. Go through the layout with a shift leader and a forklift driver before it is frozen, because they know the routes that appear on no plan. A layout that crosses forklift routes or hinders changeovers costs time every day, for years.
Lead time
CommercialThe time from order to delivery. For special-purpose machinery it covers design, manufacture, bought-in parts, assembly at the manufacturer’s works and factory acceptance, and it is often many months long, while for individual components it fluctuates strongly. What counts is the event from which the clock runs: the order, the order clarification or the release of the drawings. Long lead times are secured early, for example by reserving a production slot with an LOI, by naming critical components and by applying penalty clauses with judgement.
From practice
A quote shows a lead time, and what is often meant is: from order clarification. That takes a while if samples, format list and drawings are missing, and meanwhile the supplier’s clock is not running. Write into the contract when the period starts and what you have to supply by then, and keep to those dates yourself. Otherwise the supplier points at you the first time something is late. Also ask about lead times for change parts and critical spares, because they later decide how long a stoppage lasts. A motor is found quickly, a special gripper is not. Put the same question for bought-in items such as the control system and drives, since the machine can only be delivered as fast as the slowest of them.
Leak test
Quality & safetyA test method to demonstrate that a sealed pack has no leaks. Offline methods are the vacuum chamber with water bath, where rising air bubbles indicate a leak, dye penetration and pressure decay measurement. Inline, the deformation or height of the pack under vacuum or pressure is measured, and for packs under protective gas a trace-gas measurement is added. Burst and peel tests are added to assess the seal seam. Test scope and detection limit depend on product, shelf life and customer requirements.
From practice
Most leaks do not originate at the machine but from product in the seal seam, film wrinkles or damaged pack-material edges. A sample taken once an hour at the water bath finds systematic faults but not sporadic ones. If leak complaints are an issue, check the feed, the dosing and the seam area first, before investing in an inline test. You then have to manage its reject rate, and it only tells you that something is wrong, not why. Look at the seam under good light and with a magnifier, you can usually see the cause. Define who tests, how it is documented and what happens to the batch when a value goes out of range.
Leasing vs. buying
CommercialTwo ways of procuring a machine, set side by side. With a purchase the plant is paid for, belongs to the operator and is depreciated over its useful life. With leasing the lessor remains the owner, the operator pays instalments for the use and, depending on the contract, returns the plant at the end, buys it or extends. Leasing preserves cash and can relieve the balance sheet, while buying is usually cheaper over the machine’s life and creates ownership. How both affect tax and accounts depends on the individual case and on the contract design, and has to be worked out with the tax adviser.
From practice
Leasing gets an investment going without a large cash outflow, but costs more over the term. Buying pays off with long-lived machines that simply keep running after depreciation. Many packaging machines do that if they are maintained properly. Run the numbers with your tax adviser before you commit, because the tax treatment can look quite different depending on the type of contract. Settle in the lease who bears maintenance, spare parts and retrofits. After a few years a control system replacement is often due, and by then it should be clear who pays for it and what happens to the modification on return. Nobody likes rebuilding a machine that belongs to someone else, so settle it before you sign.
Lessons learned
Project management & CAPEXA structured review after project completion covering what went well, what must never happen again and what becomes standard. It is run as a workshop with the people involved in the project, on larger projects also along the way at milestones. The results are recorded in writing and carried over into templates, checklists and URS building blocks for the next project. It is the cheapest consulting there is, provided the findings end up there and not in a filing cabinet.
From practice
Lessons learned only work if they happen shortly after the project and are honest. As blame they are useless, as a list for the next project they are very good. Write down what was missing from the URS, which interface was underestimated and which supplier kept its promises. If the knowledge is only collected after half a year, nobody remembers the reason for the late rebuild. Two pages are enough. File them in the project folder and read them out at the next kick-off, and they are worth more than any debrief meeting. Enter the points into the checklist straight away, otherwise it stays with good intentions.
Letter of Intent (LOI)
CommercialA statement of intent ahead of the actual order. In it the buyer declares that it wants to place an order, and thereby secures a production slot with the manufacturer, for example, without concluding the full contract. A Letter of Intent is usually not legally binding in substance. Whatever is meant to be binding, such as cost coverage on cancellation or the start of design work, must be agreed explicitly. It usually refers to a specific quote and names a deadline by which the order is to follow.
From practice
If internal approval is still running but design work is meant to start, an LOI helps. The supplier gets planning certainty, and you get your delivery slot, which is scarce when other customers compete for the same production dates. Before signing I always ask what it will cost me if the project falls through after all. Write that in explicitly, for example cost coverage on cancellation and which stage of design is then paid for. Draft the LOI with procurement or a lawyer, because one that is too loose achieves nothing and one that is too strict is already a contract. Give it an expiry date as well. An LOI without one is still hanging on the project when the plans have long changed.
Level sensor
Mechanical engineering & componentsA sensor that detects the level in a vessel or hopper, either as a point level at a fixed height or continuously over the full height. Point levels are mostly detected by capacitive sensors or vibrating level switches. For continuous measurement, ultrasonic and radar sensors measure the transit time of a signal to the surface, hydrostatic sensors measure the pressure of the liquid column at the bottom of the vessel and guided wave radar works along a rod or cable in the medium. Bulk solids such as granules or powder and stacks in magazines are also monitored with diffuse sensors and laser distance sensors. The choice depends on medium, foam, dust, vapour, build-up and cleaning. In filling machines, the level in the buffer tank controls the product feed.
From practice
Foam, vapour and build-up throw level sensors off, and a filler has plenty of all three. Over a foaming product an ultrasonic sensor either loses its echo or measures the top of the foam, and vapour above hot product changes the speed of sound and with it the reading. On capacitive point level switches a film of product clings to the tip, and the sensor reports full although the vessel emptied a while ago. At acceptance, insist on a test with real product, after cleaning and with warm product as well. Water is no substitute for cream. Think about hygiene too. A sensor that reaches into the vessel from above goes through the cleaning cycle with it, and its process connection must be every bit as hygienic as the rest of the tank.
Light curtain
Automation & roboticsNon-contact safeguard consisting of an emitter and a receiver that span a curtain of light beams. If a person breaks the curtain, the hazardous motion stops safely. The light curtain replaces separating guard doors at infeed and outfeed points. Depending on its resolution, it protects fingers, hands or the body. Its design follows from the risk assessment. The safety distance to the hazard point follows ISO 13855 and depends on the stopping time of the machine, the resolution and the direction of approach. Against stepping behind, meaning standing between the light curtain and the hazard point, an additional measure is needed.
From practice
Light curtains guard handover points on palletisers and conveyor technology, where material must pass through but people must not. With muting, the protective field is briefly bridged for the pallet. Incorrectly positioned muting sensors are one of the most common causes of nuisance stops and of tampering by operators. Plan the pass-through together with the safety specialist, not just the electrician. Pay attention to the mounting as well. A light curtain knocked out of line by a forklift will, at best, announce itself through nuisance stops. Ask for sturdy brackets and impact protection. Build the regular test with a test rod through the whole protective field into the maintenance plan. It takes minutes.
Lighting (machine vision)
Digitalisation & AITargeted illumination of the inspection object in a vision system so that the relevant features are imaged with high contrast and reproducibly. Front lighting comes from the camera side, back lighting from behind and shows the contour, and dark field brings out scratches and edges. Dome lighting gives diffuse light for glossy, curved surfaces, and structured light projects patterns to obtain height information. The lighting is usually strobed and set to a defined wavelength so that motion blur and stray light have little influence. Lighting determines success more often than the camera or the software.
From practice
Most vision problems in operation are lighting problems. Stray light from an open hall door, aged LEDs, dirty diffusers, glossy films. Require an enclosed lighting cabinet or at least stray-light shielding, strobed lighting and a reference test with a test sample at the start of each shift. LEDs get dimmer over the years without anyone noticing, until the reject station suddenly misbehaves. Plan a regular check of the brightness for that reason. I insist that the inspection station is designed with your product and your packaging materials, not with the integrator’s sample carton.
Line clearance
Quality & safetyA documented check before the start of a job that the line and its surroundings are free of product, packaging materials, labels and documents from the previous job, and that the correct materials are staged. It includes emptying magazines, chutes, buffers and feed points, checking labels and printed codes against the job, and resetting counters. The check is recorded on a checklist per line and signed off by a second person. Originating in the pharma industry, it is increasingly standard in food and cosmetics plants to prevent mix-ups and mislabelling.
From practice
Most mislabelling comes from leftover stock. A partial roll left on the labeller from the day before, blanks in the magazine, caps in the chute, and the wrong print ends up on the wrong goods. Line clearance only works with a checklist per machine, clear areas for leftover material and sign-off by a second person. The printer belongs on that list. A best-before date from the last job goes unnoticed until the retailer rings. When buying a machine, make sure magazines, chutes and buffers are fully visible and can be emptied completely, otherwise the check becomes a formality. Build the time for it into the changeover, or it gets cut short on night shift.
Line compensation
Packaging technologyA design principle for linked lines in which the pacing machine, usually the filler, runs at rated output while the machines upstream and downstream have somewhat more capacity. Buffers between the machines collect product after a stoppage. Because the neighbouring machines are faster than the pacing machine, the buffers empty again after a stoppage and the pacing machine never has to stop. The capacity profile of the line forms a V, with the pacing machine at its slowest point. Speed control based on buffer fill level adjusts the machines accordingly.
From practice
Buy every machine at the same rated output and you have no line compensation. Then any stop anywhere stops the whole line, and the filler stands idle although nothing is wrong with it. The buffers need floor space and a control system that adjusts speed to fill level. Both belong in the layout early, because adding them later is tight and expensive. The filler is the pacemaker, and the rest follow it with headroom to spare. At the performance test, have it demonstrated that the line really works its buffers down again after a stop. If it runs flat out all the time, that reserve is missing from the design. Write the capacities of all machines in one table, and you will see before ordering where the V is missing.
Line integration
Automation & roboticsOverall coordination of all machines on a line. This includes speed control, where usually a lead machine sets the pace, buffer management, start and stop cascades and joint operation. It is implemented in a line control system or a higher-level controller that talks to the machine controls through defined interfaces. The integrator carries responsibility for how everything works together. When packages are awarded individually to separate suppliers, this is the most critical interface in the project, because each supplier delivers only a machine and nobody delivers the line.
From practice
The work in line integration lies in the interfaces: signals between machines, buffers, speed control, a shared operating concept, and the question of who stops on a fault. Clarify the interface list before machines are ordered, and name someone responsible for the whole line. Without that person, every supplier points at another at acceptance. I have the sequence of start-up, stop, fault and run-out drawn as a diagram before programming, because contradictions show up there that a list never reveals. Also ask for a line test with all machines running together, if possible with product, before the first supplier leaves site.
Line lead
Production & energyThe person responsible for a packaging line during a shift. They coordinate operators, changeovers, materials and faults, and are the first point of contact for maintenance and quality. In practice they assign the operators to the machines on the line, call maintenance when a fault occurs and record downtime and scrap in the shift report. Deviations from the plan go to the shift or production management. Often they are an experienced operator of the line themselves. Titles and authority differ from plant to plant.
From practice
A good line lead delivers more output than some investments, if they have time for the line instead of paperwork. Involve line leads early in the URS, the FAT and commissioning, not just for the training. They know the faults that appear in no report, and they will be the ones running the new plant on shift afterwards. At the FAT, let them carry out the changeovers themselves instead of watching the supplier demonstrate them. Anyone who cannot get a changeover done briskly there will certainly not manage it at three in the morning. Ask, too, which routines on the old line exist only in somebody’s head before they retire with that person.
Line management system
Digitalisation & AISoftware that runs the machines of a packaging or filling line as one unit. It distributes order data and format settings to the individual machine controls, triggers the format change, collects states and fault messages and shows the line status in one place. The line management system therefore sits between the machine controls and the MES. A SCADA system visualises and operates plant at signal level, an MES plans and documents production across the whole factory, and the line management system coordinates a single line. The boundaries are fluid, and many vendors offer it as an extension of their MES or SCADA. PackML or the Weihenstephan Standards often serve as the interface to the machines, transmitted via OPC UA, for example.
From practice
Start the format change for the whole line with one click, that is how line management systems like to be sold. It only works if every single machine actually masters the interface. If it is not in every purchase order, it comes later as a variation order, and from each supplier separately. Clarify early who keeps the signal list for the whole line and who answers in the end for everything starting up together. Format numbers are a fine classic. The filler knows the format as 12, the cartoner as 7, and the palletiser works with a name. Somewhere you need a mapping table, and someone has to maintain it for every new item. At acceptance, also test what happens when the line management system fails. The machines should then be able to carry on locally, otherwise one server stops the whole line.
Line-side material supply
Production & energySupplying a line with raw materials, packaging materials and packaging aids in the quantity needed and at the right time at the defined place. The material comes from the warehouse or straight from goods receipt, either as full pallets or picked per order in small load carriers. Common methods are supply per order, kanban with replenishment based on consumption, tugger trains or milk runs on fixed routes, and automatic supply by AGVs or conveyors. Staging areas or flow racks are provided at the line. Line supply also covers the return route for empties and remaining quantities. Material supply is closely linked to detailed scheduling and traceability, because batches and remaining quantities must be recorded correctly at every order change.
From practice
Pallets of blanks, film reels and labels need more space at the line than the layout usually allows. So they end up in the aisle, and the forklift reverses between the operators. Work out how many pallets stand at the line per order and how often they are replenished, and draw those areas in before the layout is frozen. Changeovers show whether supply works. In the good case the material for the next order is ready when the last carton has gone through. Otherwise the whole line waits for the forklift. In changeover analyses I always ask about this waiting time, because it tends to be booked as changeover time and nobody looks for the cause. Remaining quantities need a fixed route back to the warehouse, with batch and quantity. If not, they pile up behind the machine, and one day someone runs the wrong film.
Line staffing
Production & energyThe number and qualification of people a line needs per shift to run. This includes line leaders, machine operators, packers and material handlers, and depending on the organisation also relief operators for breaks and quality inspectors. Line staffing depends on the degree of automation and on how often the line is changed over and how often it stops. Magazine capacity also counts, as do manual tasks such as changing label and film reels or taking samples. It is usually stated as people per shift or as labour hours per production unit and feeds into unit costs and workforce planning. In automation investments, the planned reduction in line staffing is often a substantial part of the economic justification.
From practice
On the supplier’s layout a single little figure stands at the line. In operation it turns into three, because one fills the blank magazine, one fetches film reels and one empties the reject bin at the checkweigher. The machine runs automatically, but it is still supplied by hand. So at the FAT, ask how long the magazines last and who refills them. Have the operation demonstrated for an hour and count the hand movements. In the business case, look at the breaks. If the line runs through, it needs relief cover, and that appears in no calculation. Think about the night shift as well. If the experienced line leader only works the early shift, staffing at night is the same on paper but not in practice.
Linear guide
Mechanical engineering & componentsA machine element for straight-line motion, usually a profile rail guide with a ball or roller recirculating carriage, less commonly a shaft guide. The carriage runs on the bolted rail, and the rolling elements recirculate inside the carriage and carry loads in several directions. Important parameters are load rating, accuracy class, preload and calculated service life. Preload removes the play from the guide but raises friction. In packaging machines, linear guides carry gantry axes, format adjustments, lifting units and pushers.
From practice
Linear guides die from dirt and lack of lubrication, not from load. In wet or dusty areas, wipers, covers and central lubrication matter more than a higher load rating. At the design review, check accessibility of the grease nipples and make sure guides don’t sit under zones where product can fall. Stiff format adjustments are almost always dirty guides. Before anyone turns at the drive, push the carriage by hand and feel whether it runs evenly. Rough spots or jerking point to wear or foreign bodies. Ask the supplier for the lubrication interval and the grease per guide, and whether carriages can be exchanged individually.
Load cell
Packaging technologySensor that converts a weight force into an electrical signal, usually via strain gauges on a spring element. The spring element deforms minimally under load, the gauges change their resistance as a result, and a bridge circuit turns this into a voltage signal that an amplifier evaluates. Common designs are the bending beam, the shear beam and the platform cell. Load cells are built into checkweighers, multihead weighers and gravimetric dosers. Characteristic parameters are rated load, accuracy class, protection rating and suitability for legal-for-trade applications. Electromagnetic force restoration load cells achieve higher resolution for dynamic weighing.
From practice
Load cells rarely fail on their own, but often because of their surroundings. These include vibration from neighbouring machines, draughts from ventilation systems, compressed-air blasts and full-jet cleaning hoses. Plan a decoupled mounting location and protect the cell mechanically against overload during changeovers, because a hammer blow or a change part set down on the platform can throw it off for good. Product residue under the weighing platform and a tightly stretched connecting cable also falsify the reading. Calibration intervals and test weights belong in the maintenance plan, otherwise the legal-for-trade scale eventually becomes just a display. At acceptance I like to put a test weight on, take it off again and check that the zero comes back.
Load securing
IntralogisticsMeasures that secure a load unit for transport so that the goods stay on the pallet during braking, cornering and vibration. Stretch wrappers, shrink hooders and strapping are usual, together with anti-slip interlayers. The film holds the layers together and ties them to the pallet. Film consumption per pallet is measurable and affects cost. Pre-stretch and wrap programme determine how much film ends up on the pallet. Rules for securing the load on the vehicle are laid down in the VDI 2700 series of guidelines.
From practice
Load securing starts on the pallet: pack pattern, slip sheets, stretch force and, where needed, strapping decide whether the goods arrive intact. Check pallet stability with a simple tilt test or transport trial before cutting back on film. If you reduce film thickness, you must reset the pre-stretch and the number of wraps, and align the load unit with the carrier. After a format change the wrap programme and pallet height often no longer match, because nobody carried the recipe over. Badly wrapped pallets usually give way first at the upper layers and at the corners. Complaints about shifted goods show most honestly whether the securing is enough.
Load unit
IntralogisticsThe transport-ready unit of load carrier, goods and securing, usually the wrapped pallet. It consists of the goods in their outer packaging, the layers according to the layer pattern, the load carrier and the securing by stretch film, shrink hood or strapping. Dimensions, weight and stability determine storage, transport and cost. Limits are set by racking, lorry, forklift and retail customer. The load unit usually carries a pallet label with content and identification number, which is scanned at the customer’s goods-in.
From practice
The load unit is the interface to the carrier, warehouse and retail customers: height for racking and the lorry, weight for the forklift, overhang for aisle width. Define the load unit before packaging development. Many projects optimise the case and only later find that the pallet does not fit the racking. In the first conversation I therefore ask for the largest pallet that the most demanding customer will still accept, and calculate backwards. Then it is settled how high the stack goes before anybody touches a carton drawing. Include the return of empty pallets and interlayers in the calculation too, as it is easily forgotten.
Loop check
Project management & CAPEXA systematic check of every signal path between a field device and the control system before commissioning. The sensor is operated, the signal checked in the PLC and on the HMI, the actuator driven, and wiring and addressing cross-checked against the wiring diagram and I/O list. For analogue signals, measuring range, scaling and unit are included, for drives the rotation direction and release signal. The result is a signed-off checklist for each input and output. Before the functional tests of cold commissioning, the loop check has to be complete.
From practice
Without a complete loop check, commissioning starts with troubleshooting instead of functional testing. Swapped sensor pairs, wrong addresses and wrong rotation directions cost days if they are only found once in automatic operation. A sensor only counts as being on the right input when someone operates it at the machine while a second person watches the screen. I have the list signed off jointly by the supplier and the plant electrician. After that the electrician knows every terminal, and that pays off when something does not run at night. Safety circuits such as e-stop and guard doors are checked separately and with a protocol.
LOTO (lockout-tagout)
Quality & safetyLockout-tagout: isolating and tagging all energy sources before maintenance work, with each person involved attaching their own lock. The sequence is shutting down, isolating from all energy sources, securing with lock and tag, releasing stored energy and verifying that the machine is de-energised. The energies include electricity, compressed air, hydraulics, spring accumulators and raised loads. The term comes from the English-speaking world, and in Germany the equivalent is isolating and securing against restart. Machines must be designed to be LOTO-capable, meaning with lockable isolation points, and this belongs in the URS.
From practice
LOTO is so tricky on packaging lines because machines sit close together and energy comes from several sources. Electricity, compressed air, hydraulics, stored energy in springs or raised loads. A procedure per machine, lockable main switches and compressed-air shut-offs belong in the URS, and so do bleed valves that really release the pressure. One lock per person and a multi-lock hasp for several fitters cost little and save a lot of argument. At acceptance I walk through the plant once with a lock and try whether everything can really be locked off. On retrofits, check whether new energy sources were added without updating the procedure.
Low-temperature packaging
Packaging technologyPackaging designed for chilled and frozen temperatures, mainly for perishable food whose shelf life depends on the cold chain. Common materials are films of polyethylene, polypropylene or PET and laminates with aluminium foil, which act as a barrier against moisture and oxygen, sometimes with a coating. The materials must stay tough at low temperatures, otherwise the pack becomes brittle and breaks. Seals and adhesives also have to hold in the cold. Designs include pouches, trays and cartons, for portions as well as whole pieces.
From practice
For frozen products, films and adhesives must still seal and bond at deep-freeze temperature. Condensation when packing cold products is a classic cause of leaking seals and slipping labels. Climate control in the packing area and material testing under real conditions are therefore part of the job, with the real film, the real label and the product at storage temperature. Polypropylene can turn brittle in the cold, so have the cold suitability of the film grade confirmed. Check the route from the freezer to the machine as well. If goods thaw in between and refreeze, the label ends up on a damp pack.
Lubrication schedule
Mechanical engineering & componentsA document that defines all lubrication points of a machine with lubricant, quantity, interval and method. The lubrication schedule is part of the operating instructions and usually contains an overview drawing with numbered lubrication points and an accompanying table. For each point it states the lubricant designation or specification, for food machinery including whether H1 grade is required, the relubrication or fill quantity, the interval in operating hours or calendar time and the method, such as grease gun, oil change or automatic lubrication system. In the plant, the schedule is transferred into the maintenance plan or the CMMS so that the tasks appear as work orders. Colour markings at the lubrication points link the schedule to the machine.
From practice
Many lubrication schedules stay in the binder. They sit in the operating manual, are written in the manufacturer’s language and name a grease nobody in the plant has heard of. Before acceptance I therefore ask the supplier for the schedule as an editable spreadsheet, so it can go into the maintenance system without retyping. Compare the lubricants with what you already keep in stock. Nobody needs a new grease for every new machine, and each extra type raises the chance that the wrong cartridge ends up in the grease gun. Check whether the intervals suit your shift pattern too. If the schedule says weekly, ask how many shifts the manufacturer assumed. In three-shift operation a week adds up to several times the running hours.
M
Indices for the short-term capability of a machine, meaning its ability to produce a characteristic within tolerance under constant conditions. The study uses a sample of consecutively produced parts, frequently 50, with one operator, one material batch and no readjustment. Cm relates the tolerance width to six times the standard deviation. Cmk also takes the position of the mean into account and divides the smaller distance to a tolerance limit by three times the standard deviation. Process capability Cp / Cpk is a separate concept, covering a longer period that includes batch changes and ambient conditions. ISO 22514-3 describes the procedure, and the required minimum values are set by the customer or the plant standard.
From practice
You will usually be shown the Cmk at the FAT, and it almost always looks good. No surprise, since the machine has just been set up and is run by the supplier’s best fitter. Insist that the sample is produced with your product and your packaging material. Check the measuring equipment too. If the scale itself scatters or has too coarse a resolution, its error ends up in the calculated spread, and the index says little about the machine. A measurement system analysis beforehand saves you that argument. Besides the cover sheet with the green number, ask for the individual values. Do not be surprised if the Cpk turns out lower in production later. That is when changing batches, several shifts and a summer in the hall come into play.
Machine data collection / production data collection (MDC/PDC)
Digitalisation & AIMachine data collection (MDC) automatically captures states, quantities, faults and cycle times directly from the controller. Production data collection (PDC) adds organisational data such as order, personnel, material batches and manually recorded downtime reasons. The machine data arrives through controller interfaces or additional sensors, while the production data is entered at a terminal, tablet or scanner. Together they form the data basis for OEE, downtime analysis and traceability. Usually both come together in an MES or in dedicated collection software.
From practice
The technical capture is the smaller part. Quality stands or falls with how downtime reasons are assigned. If operators have to choose from fifty reasons at every stop, they pick the first one in the list. Limit the list to a few clearly distinct reasons and let short stops be assigned automatically. Feed the analysis back to the shift, otherwise data discipline drops within weeks. At acceptance I look at what is in the system after a shift change. That shows whether stops are really given a reason or whether everything ends up under Other. Anyone who cannot hit the operator terminal with gloves on will not enter anything anyway.
Machine frame
Mechanical engineering & componentsThe base structure of a machine that carries assemblies and drives and transfers forces into the floor. Frames are built as welded constructions in carbon or stainless steel or as bolted aluminium profile systems. Requirements are stiffness, good vibration behaviour, accurate mounting faces and accessibility. Packaging machines often use balcony construction, with the drives behind a wall and the product area in front left open. Hygienic areas add sloping surfaces, open profiles and floor clearance. The frame stands on height-adjustable feet that are levelled during alignment and anchored to the floor where needed. On welded frames, the mounting faces for bearings and guides are machined after welding.
From practice
The frame is an easy place to save money, because it has no rating plate and takes up one line in the quotation. You will notice later. If the frame vibrates, sensors drift out of adjustment, bolts work loose and the machine gets louder the faster it runs. Food plants add cleaning to the list. Hollow sections that are not sealed by welding take in water and release it for a long time, sometimes with a smell. Ask the supplier whether tubes are seal-welded or open and rinsable. Take a look at the feet too. A frame on a tiled floor with a fall to the drains needs levelling feet with enough travel, and the lock nuts must be tightened after alignment. Otherwise the machine is out of level after the first session with the pressure washer.
Machine hour rate
CommercialA cost rate stating what one hour of running time on a machine costs. It is calculated from the machine-related costs of a year divided by the planned running time in hours. The costs include imputed depreciation, usually based on replacement value, imputed interest on the capital tied up, space costs, energy, maintenance, and tools and consumables. Depending on the costing scheme, labour is either kept separate as direct labour or included in the rate. The rate is used for costing, for comparing investment alternatives and in make-or-buy decisions. If the machine runs less than planned, the fixed costs are spread over fewer hours. It differs from the cost per unit, which also takes the output per hour into account.
From practice
People like to argue at length about the costs in the numerator, yet the real assumption sits in the denominator. If controlling has calculated with three shifts and the line runs on two, the rate is too low and every calculation based on it looks better than it is. So ask about the planned hours before you take a rate into a business case. With investments the hourly rate can also mislead. A new, faster line usually has a higher rate than the old one. That is no argument against it. Compare the cost per unit, meaning the cost per pack, because the new line turns out more packs in the same hour. For make-or-buy decisions on change parts, take an honest look at your own workshop. The milling machine there often stands idle more than it runs, and with realistic hours your own production is no longer as cheap as it looked.
Machine trial (preliminary test)
Project management & CAPEXA test on a supplier’s machine or an existing plant using the customer’s original product and packaging materials, carried out to prove the feasibility of a packaging task before ordering or before design freeze. Depending on the task, it checks the machinability of the packaging materials, seal quality, gentle product handling, format range and achievable output. The trial usually takes place in the manufacturer’s test centre. Parameters, results and anything unusual are recorded in a trial report, and samples are retained. The FAT accepts a finished machine, whereas the machine trial confirms a principle or a process. Trials are often charged separately and credited in part or in full when the order is placed.
From practice
Send packaging material from current production to the trial, not hand-made samples from the sample department. The film from the sample book always runs. Your product should arrive the way it arrives at the line, with the temperature, humidity and shape it has in production. Chocolate at room temperature in a test centre behaves differently from chocolate straight out of the cooling tunnel. I prefer to go to these trials with someone from the line who handles the product every day. That person notices things a project engineer overlooks. Have every parameter written into the report and film the critical points. Watch the speed. A trial at half output proves that it works at half output. Also take samples home that you can later lay next to the samples from the FAT.
Machinery Directive / Machinery Regulation
Quality & safetyThe EU framework for machine safety when machines are placed on the market. The Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC (Maschinenrichtlinie), transposed in Germany through the 9th ProdSV, is being replaced by the Machinery Regulation (EU) 2023/1230 (Maschinenverordnung), which applies from 20 January 2027. As a regulation, it applies directly in all member states. New elements include requirements on cybersecurity, on machinery with self-evolving behaviour and on digital instructions for use, plus stricter conformity assessment for certain high-risk machinery. For projects with delivery from 2027 onward, it belongs in the URS now.
From practice
Under the Machinery Regulation, new rules apply from 2027, including on cybersecurity and digital instructions for use. For your project this means: clarify with the supplier under which legal basis the machine is placed on the market, and get that confirmed in writing. What counts is the date of placing on the market, not the date of the order. If delivery slips past the cut-off date, the legal basis changes, and with it the documents and evidence. For substantial modifications to existing machines, you yourself become the manufacturer, with all the duties that brings. Operators like to overlook that when rebuilding. Involve your safety officer before the rebuild order goes out.
Maintenance contract
CommercialA contract for agreed service provision on a plant, with defined response times, availability and prices. Depending on its design it covers preventive maintenance to a schedule, inspections, fault clearance, remote support and the supply of spare parts. The commitments are often written up as a service level agreement. The main questions are on-site versus remote response time, spare parts availability, price escalation and the consequences if the terms are not met.
From practice
A maintenance contract pays off for machines whose failure is costly and for which you have no in-house specialist knowledge. Look at the content: whether wear parts are included, whether remote support is available and how quickly a technician is actually at the machine, at night and at weekends too. Clarify what response time means in concrete terms. Sometimes someone merely picks up the phone, and the technician arrives at the machine the next day. I always have the consequences of non-compliance written into the quote. Then compare the contract cost against the downtime cost of one shift. The decision is then usually clear.
Maintenance plan
Project management & CAPEXAn overview of all maintenance tasks on a machine with interval, duration, qualification required, parts needed and lubricants. The manufacturer supplies the plan with the machine, and the operator adapts it to its shift patterns and product. It is stored in the maintenance system and supplemented with experience values, statutory inspections and results from condition monitoring. Intervals are based on operating hours, calendar time or cycle counts. Lubrication points and lubricants are often also listed in a separate lubrication plan.
From practice
Manufacturer intervals are starting values, not the truth. The manufacturer knows neither your shift patterns nor your product, and a dusty product loads bearings and guideways differently from a clean one. Transfer the plan into your system before handover. During the first year, review every maintenance task for effort and findings, and adjust the intervals afterwards, upwards as well as downwards. A task that never finds anything may become less frequent, and one that finds something every time comes round more often. Statutory inspections are excluded from this. A classic failing is the maintenance that cannot take place in the shutdown window because the parts are missing. So ask for the parts list with the plan and put the wear parts in stock before the date arrives.
Maintenance strategy
Production & energyThe basic decision on how and when a plant maintains its equipment. DIN 31051 divides maintenance into servicing, inspection, repair and improvement, and EN 13306 defines the terminology. In corrective maintenance, repairs are made only after a failure. Preventive maintenance replaces parts at fixed intervals or after a set number of cycles. Condition-based maintenance acts on readings from inspection or condition monitoring, while predictive maintenance forecasts the time of failure from data. TPM involves operators through autonomous maintenance. As a rule the strategy is chosen per machine or assembly according to criticality, meaning failure consequences, spare parts availability, cost and safety.
From practice
One strategy for the whole plant sounds tidy and almost never fits. The geared motor on the infeed conveyor, which can be swapped from stock in half an hour, can safely run until it fails. On the other hand, the filler that sets the pace of the whole line as its bottleneck deserves fixed intervals and regular inspection. That is why I first rank equipment by the consequences of failure, before anyone talks about intervals. Predictive maintenance sells well at every trade fair. It only pays off where a failure really hurts and the measurement reliably tells you something about wear. And servicing needs feedback. A maintenance plan that ticks off tasks but never records what was found learns nothing.
Make or buy
Project management & CAPEXThe decision whether a service or component is provided or manufactured in-house or bought in. In machine and plant building this concerns, for example, change parts, control panel building, software or complete assemblies. For an operator running a capital project, it is often about engineering, installation, line integration and project management. The comparison covers cost, ideally as total cost over the service life in the sense of TCO, as well as capacity, know-how, schedule, quality, dependence on the supplier and protection of in-house knowledge. Typical tools are a cost comparison, should-cost analysis and a utility analysis. A make or buy decision is not final and is reassessed when capacities or prices change.
From practice
In-house hours are happily treated as free, because the people are there anyway. That changes once they are tied up in the project. Then they are missing from maintenance, and breakdowns on the other lines pile up. So cost your own work at an honest hourly rate and include whatever is left undone in that time. When you link up a line yourself, there is a second point. Whoever combines machines into an assembly usually takes on the manufacturer’s obligations for that assembly, including the risk assessment and CE marking. You have to be able and willing to do that. For change parts and spare parts, having them copied by the machine shop round the corner is often cheaper. Check beforehand whether drawings exist and whether you are allowed to copy the parts. And the machine supplier’s warranty should still stand afterwards.
Manufacturer’s joint (glue flap)
Packaging technologyA flap of a folding case that joins the blank into a sleeve at the carton manufacturer. The joint is made by gluing, stitching or taping. The position (inside or outside), width and bonding of the manufacturer’s joint affect the squareness of the case, the usable internal dimensions and its behaviour in the magazine of the case erector. The sleeve is delivered laid flat and is only erected at the machine. On a regular slotted container to FEFCO 0201, the joint sits at one edge of the sleeve, and its position and width belong on the drawing.
From practice
A skewed manufacturer’s joint gives a case with a parallelogram cross-section that jams in the erector and tips over on the pallet. Check the sleeve dimensions diagonally on goods-in, not just length and width. Internal glue flaps reduce the clear internal dimension and cause trouble with tightly fitting products. Stitched joints are usually unwelcome in food plants, because metal staples are a foreign-body risk. Specify the design in the specification. When there is a complaint, what counts is how many cases on the pallet are affected. A single skewed case is bad luck, a pallet full of them is a production fault at the supplier.
MAP (modified atmosphere packaging)
Packaging technologyPackaging under modified atmosphere. The air in the pack is replaced by a defined gas mixture of CO2, N2 and, where required, O2 in order to extend shelf life. The exchange is done by flushing with gas, or by evacuating and then gassing, for example in thermoforming machines and tray sealers. The pack needs a film with sufficient gas barrier and a tight seal. Residual oxygen measurement and seal integrity are the critical process controls, and a leaking seal makes even the best atmosphere worthless.
From practice
Protective gas extends shelf life, but only in a tight pack. Residual oxygen has to be measured by spot checks, and leaking seals devalue the whole batch. A common cause of leaks is product in the seal, such as crumbs, fat or sauce at the edge. When buying the machine, look at gas consumption, flushing times and the integration of a leak test. Over the machine’s lifetime the gas costs are a noticeable item, and consumption depends on how cleanly the machine is set up. Also check who calibrates the residual oxygen analyser and where the readings are recorded. Without records the measurement is worthless in a complaint.
Master data
Digitalisation & AIBasic data that rarely change and are shared by many transactions and systems. They include the material master with item number, dimensions, weights and packaging data, plus bills of materials, routings, recipes, suppliers, customers and equipment. Transaction data such as orders, postings or measured values always refer to master data. Master data are usually created in the ERP system and passed on from there to the MES, warehouse management, label printing and machine controls. For packaging lines the most relevant items are the GTIN, packing pattern, pallet factor, layer pattern and format and recipe parameters. An error in the master data repeats itself in every system that takes them over and in every order built on them.
From practice
New items tend to arrive at the last minute, and the master data are then created by someone who has never seen the line. If the pallet factor in the system is wrong, the palletiser dutifully builds the wrong packing pattern, and the pallet label is wrong as well. When purchasing switches to a thinner film, the old packaging weight often stays in the master data, and the checkweigher calculates with the wrong tare. So on projects I ask early on who maintains which master data, who approves them and which values go straight to the machines. I rarely get a clear answer the first time. Settle this at the latest when the format list for a new line is drawn up. The same dimensions and weights turn up there again, just in a different file and at a different revision.
Material flow
IntralogisticsThe path taken by raw materials, packaging materials, semi-finished and finished goods through the plant, including transport, buffering and storage. It is shown as a layout with the flows drawn in, for example as a spaghetti diagram, or within a value stream analysis. A transparent material flow shows how many kilometres forklifts and staff cover each year and which routes are worth serving with conveyors or an AGV. That is exactly what a Shopfloor Analysis measures. Characteristic figures are route lengths, transport volumes, stock levels and waiting times.
From practice
Material flow is about routes, stock levels and waiting times between goods-in, production, packaging and dispatch. A routing analysis makes it measurable. Clean layouts with short routes for packaging materials and finished goods often achieve more than any amount of automation. For this, follow a forklift for one shift and draw in the routes. Often the packaging material sits at the far end of the hall because that was where there was room during planning. Ride along on the third shift as well, because at night the flow looks different from the day. Count how often the same pallet is touched before it leaves the plant.
Measurement system analysis (MSA)
Quality & safetyA procedure for checking whether a measurement system is fit for a given measuring task. It comprises instrument, fixture, operator, measuring method and environment. The analysis looks at bias, linearity, stability over time, repeatability for one operator and reproducibility between several operators. Variation is usually expressed as a share of the characteristic’s tolerance. Common studies are a test against a reference standard, a study with several operators and parts, and one for automatic systems. Pass or fail inspections need separate methods for attribute data. Guidance is given in the AIAG MSA reference manual and in VDA Volume 5 of the German automotive industry. Without such an analysis, capability figures such as Cp / Cpk carry little meaning.
From practice
Before you argue with the supplier about a Cpk, agree what you are measuring with. Otherwise you end up discussing the scales rather than the machine. A simple trial is enough to start with. Ten packs, three people from different shifts, and each measures every pack twice without knowing the others’ readings. If the results are far apart, the measurement system has a problem, however expensive the instrument was. Often the method is to blame. One person squeezes the calliper hard on the carton, another only lightly, and both believe they are precise. So write the measuring instruction in a way that a new colleague on the night shift applies it exactly the same. Take care with destructive tests such as seal strength or opening torque. The same part cannot be measured twice, which calls for adapted methods and someone who knows them.
Mechanical cam (cam gear)
Mechanical engineering & componentsA mechanism in which a disc with a shaped contour or groove drives an output through a follower roller according to a fixed law of motion. The cam turns at constant speed with the main shaft, and a roller lever or tappet follows it to produce a stroke, a swivel movement or a dwell. Designs include the plate cam with external contour and spring return, the groove cam that guides the roller positively, the barrel cam and the conjugate cam with two rollers. Many older and high-speed packaging machines are driven by a main camshaft that carries all the cams and keeps every movement mechanically synchronised. The motion profile is machined into the contour and can only be changed by replacing the cam. An electronic cam reproduces the same principle in drive software.
From practice
Cam mechanisms have a poor reputation they do not entirely deserve. A well designed cam runs at the same rhythm for many years, with no parameters, no software and no encoders to fail. The price is rigidity. Every new format with a different stroke needs a newly machined cam, and that takes time. With used machines and retrofits it therefore pays to look closely at the cam tracks. Worn spots or pitting show where the roller is hammering. Often it lifts off at high speed because the return spring has weakened, or a seized roller slides instead of rolling. Cam followers are wear parts and belong in the stores. If the old cam is to be replaced by a servo, ask who is going to measure the motion profile first. The cam drawing is missing surprisingly often.
MES (manufacturing execution system)
Automation & roboticsManufacturing execution system, in German a Produktionsleitsystem. It schedules orders, captures operating and machine data, and delivers OEE analyses and batch traceability. In the ISA-95 model it sits at level 3, between the ERP above it and the controls and control systems below. Orders from the ERP are scheduled in detail and passed to the lines, while quantities, downtimes and quality data flow back. Connecting new machines to the MES, with an interface list, belongs in every tender.
From practice
An MES only pays off once the lines deliver clean data: downtime reasons, quantities, formats, batches. Many companies buy the software first and then find the machines do not provide usable signals. The better route is to measure on two lines first, manually or with simple downtime capture, draw conclusions, and then define the MES requirement, with an interface list in the user requirements specification. I ask who maintains the master data before any MES discussion. Articles, formats, bills of materials and fault reasons change all the time, and an MES with outdated master data produces figures nobody believes. Plan the upkeep with names and a time budget, not on the side.
Metal detector / X-ray inspection
Quality & safetyInline systems for foreign-body detection. Metal detectors work inductively: a coil system generates an alternating field, and metal pieces in the product disturb it and trigger a signal. They find ferrous metals, non-ferrous metals and stainless steel, with stainless steel the hardest to detect. X-ray systems measure the absorption of radiation and detect parts denser than the product, so metal, glass, stone, bone and dense plastics, and check completeness as a side benefit. Neither system detects light foreign bodies such as wood, hair or cardboard reliably. They are often a HACCP control point with validated rejection.
From practice
Metal detector or X-ray is not a matter of belief but depends on the product and packaging. Aluminium laminate or metallised film blinds a metal detector, leaving X-ray as the only option. X-ray also finds glass, stone and dense plastics, but costs more to buy and run. Wet, salty or warm products disturb a metal detector through the product effect, which costs sensitivity, and you only notice it in a trial run with your real product. Put the unit as late in the line as possible, after the last point where anything can still get in. For IFS and BRCGS, documented test-piece trials and rejection with confirmation count. An alarm the line does not react to helps nobody on night shift.
Micro-stops
KPIsShort stoppages of a few minutes at most that the operator clears immediately and that never appear on any fault list. Typical triggers are jams in the infeed, varying packaging material quality, dirty or wrongly set sensors and brief fault messages from the controller. In the Six Big Losses model they count as speed losses and feed into the performance rate of OEE. Added up, they are often the biggest source of output loss on a line, because they accumulate over every hour and every shift.
From practice
Micro-stops can only be identified by measurement. Either the controller records every stop automatically, or you have a tally sheet kept at the line for a week. The causes mostly lie in the infeed, the packaging material quality and the sensors. Ten stops of 40 seconds an hour are almost seven minutes of downtime in every hour, and not one of them shows up on the fault list. The treacherous part is that the operator clears them so routinely that he hardly notices them any more. Ask him anyway where he intervenes most often. If the controller counts the stops, have the evaluation split by stop location and not just the total. Most of these stops can be fixed without any investment.
Migration (food contact)
Quality & safetyThe transfer of substances from the packaging material or another article in food contact into the food. A distinction is made between overall migration and the specific migration of individual substances. The EU Framework Regulation (EC) No 1935/2004 and, for plastics, Regulation (EU) No 10/2011 set overall migration limits and specific migration limits (SML). Testing uses food simulants for aqueous, acidic, alcoholic and fatty foods under defined time and temperature conditions. Besides deliberately used substances, those present unintentionally, such as breakdown products, are also assessed.
From practice
The film supplier’s migration test applies to their test conditions, not automatically to your product, your filling temperature and your shelf life. Check whether the simulant, contact time and temperature in the declaration of compliance cover your application, especially for fatty products and hot filling. If the pack is later heated in a microwave or oven, that needs its own assessment. Printing inks and adhesives on the outside can transfer to the inside through set-off in the reel, and that also needs assessing. If the supplier changes the film recipe, the ink or the adhesive, the old test no longer applies. Have him commit in the framework contract to reporting such changes beforehand.
Milestone payment
Project management & CAPEXA payment scheme in which the price of a plant is paid in instalments tied to project progress instead of in one sum. In machine building the usual pattern is a deposit on order, an instalment on passing the FAT or on delivery, and a balance after the SAT or acceptance. Milestones and percentages are fixed in the contract. Each milestone needs a verifiable criterion, for example a signed protocol. Often the deposit is backed by an advance payment guarantee. The final instalment is the customer’s strongest means of pressure for a clean acceptance and, for the manufacturer, often the part on which the profit depends.
From practice
The supplier has to pre-finance material and bought-in parts, and you want to keep some pressure on until the plant runs at your site. A milestone payment brings both together. The argument almost always comes over the final share. If it is too small, the punch list becomes a sideshow for the supplier. A payment on delivery also means paying for a machine that has not yet packed a single product in your plant. Write the criteria so that nothing is open to interpretation: a passed FAT with a signed protocol, not roughly finished. And have the deposit covered by a guarantee. Get the wording checked by your lawyer.
Milestone trend analysis (MTA)
Project management & CAPEXA graphical method for tracking schedules. At each reporting date the currently expected date of each milestone is plotted in a chart, with the reporting dates on one axis and the expected milestone dates on the other. Horizontal lines mean stable planning, rising lines show slippage, falling lines show the date moving forward. The milestone trend analysis (MTA) makes trends visible before a milestone is actually missed. It supplements the schedule and the project status report and does not replace either.
From practice
The MTA lives on honest forecasts. This pattern is typical: the delivery date stays flat for months and then jumps by weeks shortly before delivery. That means nobody followed up, they just copied the date forward. Ask the supplier for the facts behind the date, such as drawing status, order date for long-lead items and start of sub-assembly. A date that only moves when you ask says something too. Run the MTA in the project status report and not just in the scheduling tool, so that the steering committee sees the lines. Show the curves to the supplier as well, and the talk is about drawing status instead of blame.
Milk run
IntralogisticsA timed supply round on a fixed schedule with defined stopping points and defined quantities. In operation, a vehicle, for example a tugger train, a tractor with trailers or a forklift, calls at the stations in a fixed sequence, delivers material and takes empties back. The principle smooths internal traffic and replaces single trips on request. A timetable fixes when each station is supplied and which empties are collected. It requires clean staging logistics at the stations, with fixed locations and containers.
From practice
The milk run replaces a forklift that runs on request with a fixed route on a fixed cycle, for example packaging materials to the lines and empties and waste back every 30 minutes. It works when staging locations are defined and quantities match the cycle. A routing analysis shows beforehand whether the route is even worthwhile. With three lines within 50 metres of each other, a tugger train is often overkill. I also look at what happens when a line needs something urgent after the round has passed. If there is no rule for that, somebody soon sets off on their own with the forklift again, and the milk run has only added cost.
Miro
Digitalisation & AIDigital whiteboard for real-time collaborative work. Sketches, sticky notes, diagrams, process flows and workshops are created independently of location in the browser, on a canvas without page limits. Several participants work on the same board at the same time, see each other’s input immediately and can also add images such as photos or layouts. Typical uses are workshops, process capture, brainstorming and decision overviews where the participants sit in different places.
From practice
POWERJO uses Miro for layout workshops, process capture and decision overviews. Everyone involved sees the same picture, even when the plant, head office and supplier are in three different locations. A photo of the shop floor plus sticky notes is often the fastest route to a shared understanding. In process capture one person writes while the production staff talk, and the group corrects as it goes. That saves the follow-up query after the meeting. Set up a structure before the workshop, for example columns for current state, problems and actions, otherwise it ends in sticky-note chaos. Transfer the decisions into minutes after the meeting, because hardly anyone reads a board full of sticky notes afterwards.
Mixed pallet
IntralogisticsA pallet carrying different articles shipped together, as opposed to a single-article pallet. Mixed pallets are built during order picking for store or customer orders, either layer by layer with a layer picker, each layer holding one article, or case by case. Pallets mixed by layer are also called rainbow pallets. They are built by hand or automatically by robots that calculate the stacking sequence from the weight, dimensions and compression strength of the cases. Heavy and compression-resistant cases go at the bottom, fragile ones on top. Each mixed pallet receives a pallet label with an SSCC, and the contents are often transmitted in an electronic despatch advice. The load is usually secured with stretch film or a stretch hood.
From practice
Cases are usually designed for the single-article pallet, with column or interlocked stacking and a BCT value to match. On a mixed pallet the same case suddenly sits over a gap or on two different neighbours and gives way. The complaint then arrives from the retailer’s distribution centre. With automated mixed palletising, the first thing I ask about is master data. If dimensions and weights in the system are wrong, the robot builds leaning towers, and does so very reliably. Have new articles measured and weighed before start-up. For hand-built pallets, a simple packing instruction with a picture at the picking line helps. Otherwise the heavy drinks cases end up on top of the crisps sooner or later. Plan the wrapping as well. A mixed pallet with steps in height holds less well with the same wrapping parameters than a flat one.
Mode selection
Automation & roboticsSwitching a machine between operating modes such as automatic, setup or manual via a lockable selector switch or an access authorisation. Each operating mode has its own safety concept. In setup mode, movements are only permitted with an enabling switch or in jog mode and at reduced speed, and guards are partly bridged. The Machinery Directive requires that the selected mode takes precedence over all other control functions, with the exception of the emergency stop.
From practice
Setup mode is the most dangerous state of a plant because guards are partly bridged. Set rules for who gets the key and where it is kept, because a key that stays permanently in the switch defeats the whole concept. For a robot, setup mode allows a reduced speed of no more than 250 mm/s at the tool. Make sure switching modes is not possible in the middle of a motion. At acceptance I try out what happens when the mode is switched while the plant is running, and whether it then starts again by itself. It should stand still and wait for a deliberate acknowledgement of the new mode.
Model drift
Digitalisation & AIDeclining accuracy of an AI model in operation because the real-world data moves away from the training data, for example through new packaging material, different lighting, worn tooling or changed recipes. A distinction is made between data drift, where the input data changes, and concept drift, where the relationship between input and desired result shifts. Without monitoring, drift goes unnoticed until reject rates or false alarms rise. Countermeasures are monitoring of results and regular retraining.
From practice
An AI model is not a test instrument that you calibrate once and then leave alone. Define metrics that are monitored continuously, such as rejection rate, share of uncertain decisions and false rejects. Take regular samples and have people assess them, because that is the only way to notice whether the model is still right. Define who decides when drift occurs and how retraining gets approved. Otherwise every setter turns the thresholds until the line runs again, and eventually nobody knows what was originally set. Tell the person who looks after the model in advance when packaging material or lighting is changed.
Modular belt conveyor
IntralogisticsA conveyor whose belt consists of hinged plastic modules. The modules, usually made of POM, PP or PE, are laid in a staggered pattern and held together by rods. Sprockets on the drive shaft engage positively with the underside of the belt, so a modular belt needs neither pretension nor tracking adjustment. On the return side it hangs in a catenary sag that absorbs changes in length caused by temperature. Belts are available with closed or open surfaces, with flights and side guards, and in designs for curves. Damaged modules can be replaced individually. Modular belt conveyors are used in wet areas, in cooling and freezing tunnels and wherever thorough cleaning is required.
From practice
A modular belt forgives a lot, but not everything. The rods gradually work their way out sideways once their retention has worn, and a broken piece of module can end up in the product. That is why the food industry likes to use detectable plastics that the metal detector will find. When choosing a belt, look at the hinges. Dirt collects there, and open designs are far easier to clean than closed ones. At transfers, small or tall products like to topple over. Finger transfer plates or dead plates help, but they have to match the belt type. Keep modules and rods of exactly the installed type in stock. Series from different manufacturers look alike and still do not fit together.
Mono-material
Packaging technologyPackaging material made from a single polymer family, for example pure PE or PP, so that the pack achieves genuine recyclability. Laminates can also count as mono-material if all layers come from the same polymer family and only small amounts of other substances are present. Barrier and strength, which are otherwise supplied by layers of PA or EVOH, then have to be achieved in a different way. The processing challenge is a narrower temperature window for sealing than with conventional laminates. Existing machines often need adapted sealing tools and control technology.
From practice
Mono-material is the response to the recycling requirements of the PPWR, the EU packaging regulation, but it brings changes to the process. PE or PP mono-films seal within narrower temperature windows, run differently over the forming shoulder and often need adapted sealing tools. Always test new films on the actual machine at rated output, not just in the lab. Factor the changeover costs into the material switch. Ask the film supplier whether the film stays within the window when the thickness varies, because with narrow windows every variation shows. Whoever optimises the sealing parameters for the sample reel alone will have scrap again on the next delivery.
Motor protection circuit breaker
Mechanical engineering & componentsA device that switches a motor on and off and protects it against overload and short circuit. It contains a thermal or electronic overload release, which is set to the rated current of the motor, and a magnetic short-circuit release. On overload it trips with a current-dependent delay so that the starting current does not cause a trip, and on short circuit it trips instantly. Many devices also detect the loss of a phase. It is operated by hand, and auxiliary contacts report its state to the control system. For switching from the control system, the breaker is combined with a contactor to form a motor starter. Alternatively, fuse, contactor and overload relay perform the same tasks separately. Requirements are covered by the IEC 60947 series.
From practice
If a motor protection circuit breaker trips more often, sooner or later someone turns the setting up. After that all is quiet until the winding burns out. The trip is usually a symptom. Behind it there is a stiff chain, a dry bearing or a conveyor starting up against a backlog. At acceptance I have the supplier show me that the set values match the rating plates, and I put them into the documentation. If a motor with a different rating is fitted later, the breaker has to be adjusted as well, and that is easily forgotten. On motors fed by a frequency inverter, the inverter or a thermistor in the winding takes over motor protection. The breaker upstream then only sees the input current of the inverter and is set accordingly. Wiring the auxiliary contacts to the control system costs little. The fault message then tells you straight away which drive has tripped.
MQTT
Digitalisation & AILightweight messaging protocol based on the publish-subscribe principle: data sources publish values to topics at a broker, and interested systems subscribe to them. Topics are arranged hierarchically, for example by plant, line, machine and measured value. MQTT decouples sender and receiver, works with low bandwidth and is widely used in IIoT applications. For each message one of three delivery levels can be chosen, from at most once to exactly once. The Sparkplug extension also defines data structure and state messages.
From practice
MQTT is simple, and that is exactly why topic names and units quickly get out of hand. One machine reports in degrees, the next in tenths of a degree, and everyone looking at the dashboard wonders about the curve. So define a topic structure and a data model before the first machine starts sending, and decide who may create new topics. Otherwise there will soon be three spellings for the same temperature. Also check whether the broker runs redundantly and who operates it, because if it fails, every dashboard goes blank. MQTT is not intended for hard real-time or safety functions. Fieldbus and safety networks remain responsible for those, and the specification should say so.
MS Office
Digitalisation & AIMicrosoft’s office software suite with Word for text, Excel for spreadsheets, PowerPoint for presentations and Outlook for email and calendar. Industrial companies use it as the standard for documents, analyses and communication. In project business it is where specifications, quote comparisons, schedules, budget lists and minutes are produced. Decision papers are mostly built in PowerPoint, while appointments and correspondence run through Outlook. The file formats are so widespread that documents can be exchanged between customer, supplier and consultant without detours.
From practice
Excel is still found everywhere in project business, for budgets and schedules as much as for format lists. What matters more than the tool is discipline: one file, one version, one owner. As soon as the same list circulates in three emails with three file names, everyone calculates with different numbers. Keep the file in a shared location and send only the link to it, so nobody works on an old copy. Also name one person who enters changes, even if everyone may read along. POWERJO delivers tender documents and format lists as editable Office files so you can keep working on them yourself.
Average operating time between two failures, determined as operating time divided by the number of failures. It is a measure of the reliability of a repairable plant or assembly. Together with MTTR it determines technical availability, which can be calculated as MTBF divided by the sum of MTBF and MTTR. The value depends on what is counted as a failure. Wear parts that are replaced on schedule are poorly described by a single average, because their probability of failure rises with time.
From practice
Manufacturers like to quote MTBF as a catalogue figure. In operation it is only as good as the downtime capture. You have to define whether micro-stops count or only faults lasting over five minutes. Fix the definition before the performance test, including whether operating time is counted in calendar hours or running hours, otherwise you are comparing two figures that have nothing to do with each other. For maintenance, MTBF per assembly is more interesting than the line-level figure, because it shows where spare parts and maintenance intervals really belong. I always ask the supplier on what data his value is based, field failures or a calculation from component data.
Average repair duration per failure, determined as the sum of repair times divided by the number of failures. It is a measure of maintainability and spare parts availability. Depending on the definition, fault finding, procurement of the spare part, repair and restart are included, so the delimitation must be settled in advance. Good accessibility, clear diagnostics on the HMI and spare parts on site often lower MTTR more than any reliability improvement raises MTBF. Together with MTBF it determines technical availability.
From practice
MTTR often has more influence on availability than fault frequency. A fault that takes 40 minutes because the spare part sits in the central warehouse, or only one colleague knows the machine, costs more than ten micro-stops. The adjustments are spares held at the line, good fault messages on the HMI, trained operators and remote support from the manufacturer. At acceptance, ask once about the fault that would take longest, and have the maintenance technician show how he finds and clears it. For the line, what counts is the time until the machine runs again, which includes the service technician’s journey. If the circuit diagram first has to be fetched from the office, you already know your MTTR.
Multi-carrier system
Automation & roboticsTransport system based on linear motors in which individual carriers (movers) on a track are independently accelerated, positioned and grouped. The track consists of motor modules with coils, while the movers mostly carry permanent magnets and have no drive of their own. A position measuring system guides each mover individually and the controller coordinates the motions. The system replaces chain and indexing conveyors in packaging machines, handles singulation and buffering, switches formats by software and reduces mechanical change parts.
From practice
Multi-carrier systems show their strength with many formats and small batch sizes, not on a single-product high-speed line. Pay attention to hygiene, meaning gap dimensions and cleaning of the track, to the number of movers as a potential bottleneck, to wear on the running rollers, and to dependency on the control system manufacturer. Ask for references with your product and have the behaviour during power loss and restart explained to you. Ask as well how a defective mover is replaced and how long the line stands for it. That answer says a lot about how well the supplier knows the system in operation.
Multihead weigher
Packaging technologyA dosing system with many weigh pans, whose computer selects from the partial quantities the combination that comes closest to the target weight. The product is spread over the weigh heads by a distribution cone and vibratory feeders, and each head weighs its partial quantity individually. The selected heads discharge into the packaging machine, for example a vertical form-fill-seal machine. The multihead weigher is standard for snacks, confectionery and frozen food and minimises overfill, known as give-away, at high output.
From practice
On piece-form and free-flowing products the multihead weigher keeps give-away to a minimum, provided product infeed and vibratory feeders are set up correctly. Losses come from sticky products, incorrect filling of the pre-hoppers and too few heads for the required accuracy. At the performance test I always demand the real product, taken from the batch that arrives in daily operation. Put the target accuracy in the contract and not the catalogue figures. Ask about cleaning as well. Sticky or greasy products build up on the pans, and if cleaning only works with tools and plenty of time, it gets cut short during the shift.
Multipack
Packaging technologyA sales unit made up of several individual products that are packed together and sold as one unit. Common forms are film bundles, carton clips, trays with shrink or stretch film, and outer cases. Bundling is done on collation packers, which group the individual packs and wrap them. Retail requirements determine appearance, opening behaviour and coding, and the multipack usually carries its own barcode and its own article number. It is not the same as a transport outer, since the consumer buys it from the shelf.
From practice
Multipacks mean additional formats for the collation packer, labelling and palletising. Keep the number of variants small and check whether one packer can run several bundle sizes without a tool change. Labelling with the multipack’s own EAN rather than the individual pack’s is a common mistake with new launches, and it often shows up only at the till at the retailer. Make sure that only the right code can be read at the scanning point if the individual packs in the bundle carry their own barcode. In palletising, film bundles behave differently from cases and tend to slip, which belongs in the pack trial.
Muting
Automation & roboticsControlled, automatic bridging of a safeguard so that material can pass through but people cannot, classically at in-feed and out-feed points for pallets on robot cells. The control system recognises the material through additional muting sensors that must respond in a defined sequence and within a time limit. Only then is the protective field bridged for the pass-through, and it becomes active again afterwards. An indicator lamp usually shows the bridged state. Poorly engineered muting is one of the most common safety weaknesses found at acceptance.
From practice
Muting bridges a light curtain so pallets or cases can pass without stopping the plant, which makes it a safety-critical point. Incorrect sensor arrangement can let a person in behind the pallet. Insist on a muting design engineered to standard, check it at acceptance, and watch for frequent nuisance stops. They are a sign of poorly set sensors and not of excessive safety. At acceptance, try what happens when a pallet stops in the pass-through or someone walks in behind the load. And ask for the time window of the bridging, because windows that are too long invite people to cheat the system.
N
Network segmentation (OT)
Digitalisation & AIDividing the production network into separate zones such as machines, lines, control systems and the boundary with IT, with controlled crossings through firewalls or routers. IEC 62443 describes these zones and their connections as zones and conduits. The aim is that an incident in one area does not reach the whole of production, and that remote access is controlled. Implementation uses VLANs, firewalls and often a DMZ between the office network and the production network.
From practice
Plant networks that have grown organically are often one single flat network in which the office printer talks to the safety PLC. Segmentation does not have to be expensive. Usually a cell firewall per line, a transition network to IT and documented remote-maintenance access that the plant releases will do. With every new machine I ask for a network diagram and a list of the connections required. Suppliers who want everything left open are a warning sign. Insist that remote access is active only on request and with your approval, and have the IP address ranges named in advance, otherwise there is an argument with IT on the day of commissioning.
Nextcloud
Digitalisation & AIOpen-source software for file storage, synchronisation and collaboration, run on your own server or with a provider of your choice. It is an alternative to US cloud services: the operator decides on the storage location, for example a server in Europe, and the data stays under your own control. Files are synchronised between users’ devices, and permissions can be controlled by folder. Anyone who runs the software themselves is also responsible for updates, backups and access rights.
From practice
POWERJO stores project data in a Nextcloud, that is CVs, drawings and quotations. For customers with strict data-residency requirements this is an argument in its favour: the storage location is known, permissions can be controlled by folder and by project, and revoked again once a project ends. Clarify at the start of a project who gets which access, and withdraw it at the end. Otherwise people still have access years later to layouts they stopped working on long ago. Also ask about backups. A storage system without a tested restore is just a server with hope. If you run it yourself, also clarify who in the company installs the updates.
Notice of concern
Project management & CAPEXA written notice from the contractor to the client raising concerns about the intended method of execution, the client’s specifications, materials or components supplied by the client, or preliminary work by other contractors. It states the facts, the reasons and the possible consequences, such as defects, safety risks or reduced performance, and should be given before the affected work starts wherever possible. The German construction contract terms VOB/B provide for it explicitly, and German contract law for works gives the contractor a comparable duty to check and advise. In this way the notice allocates responsibility for the consequences of a specification clearly. It is distinct from the notice of obstruction, which reports a disruption to progress.
From practice
Typical cases in plant engineering are quickly listed. The customer specifies a film that the supplier knows runs poorly on its machine. In another case the hall floor lacks the flatness stated in the specification. Or another supplier’s conveyor arrives at a height that does not match the transfer point. As the client, it is best to read such a notice like a free expert opinion. Then decide deliberately, and in writing, whether you stick to your specification. Some suppliers send notices of concern about anything and everything, especially towards the end of a project. That is usually cover for later discussions about defects. Go through each one anyway, because a genuine concern likes to hide among the precautionary ones. How far liability and warranty shift as a result of a notice depends on the contract and the individual case. If in doubt, clarify that with a lawyer.
Notice of obstruction
Project management & CAPEXA written notice from the contractor to the client stating that the contractor is prevented from performing the work as agreed. Causes usually lie within the client’s sphere, for example missing preliminary work by other trades, utilities not provided, outstanding approvals, late drawings or an inaccessible installation area. The notice describes the obstruction, its cause and the foreseeable consequences for schedule and cost. It is often a precondition for the contractor later claiming an extension of time or additional costs. The German construction contract terms VOB/B cover it explicitly, and machine and plant engineering contracts contain comparable clauses. It is distinct from the notice of concern and from a variation claim.
From practice
On site it looks like this. The fitters arrive on the agreed day, but the foundation is not finished, the old machine is still standing and compressed air will only be available next week. An experienced supplier writes a notice of obstruction that same day. As the client, you should not just file it and forget it. Reply in writing and clarify whether the obstruction really lies within your sphere. Record as well when it ends. A site diary with dates and photos helps both sides more than anyone’s memory. It gets dangerous at the end of the project, when a pile of these notices comes back as a variation claim. Set out form and deadlines for such notices in the contract. And if it comes to a dispute, have the situation checked by a lawyer before you make any concessions.
Notion
Digitalisation & AIDigital workspace for knowledge, documentation and databases in which pages, wikis and structured tables come together in a single tool. Pages can be nested and linked to one another, so that a searchable reference builds up. Notion suits project documentation, logbooks, checklists and internal handbooks, for example decision records or acceptance checklists. For released documents with a revision status, a document management system such as Paperless is the better fit.
From practice
At POWERJO, Notion is the logbook: what was decided, what went well, what went badly. For customer projects we recommend the same principle. One place for decisions and lessons learned means they do not have to be relearned on the next project. Write the entry while the project is still running. After acceptance nobody remembers why the more expensive drive was chosen. Keep the entries short, with date, decision, reason and the people involved. Agree on a fixed template. If everyone writes in their own format, the logbook turns into a box of loose notes in which nobody finds anything.
O
Obsolescence
CommercialComponents, above all of the control technology, are discontinued by the manufacturer and remain available only to a limited extent. This affects PLCs, operator panels and frequency inverters, for example. The manufacturer names a date up to which orders are still accepted, the last buy, and often a period of repair and spare parts service follows. Obsolescence management means monitoring discontinuation notices and taking last-buy decisions. Retrofits are planned before a failure forces the decision.
From practice
After many years the mechanics of a packaging line are still running, but the control system has long been outdated. The PLC, operator panel or inverter is no longer manufactured, and the spare part is only available second-hand. Keep program backups and documentation, otherwise even a matching replacement cannot be loaded. When buying, I always ask for the product lifetime of the electrical components and have the makers of the main components named. Check the manufacturers’ discontinuation notices for your most important parts once a year. A planned retrofit of the control system is cheaper than an unplanned stoppage without a spare part, and it can be put into a shutdown window.
A metric for the production efficiency of a plant: OEE = availability × performance rate × quality rate. It comes from the TPM concept and sums up the losses from downtime, reduced speed and rejects in one figure. An OEE of 60% means that 40% of planned capacity is lost. When comparing, the reference time has to be clarified. It can be shift time, planned production time or calendar time, so OEE values from different sources are rarely directly comparable.
From practice
OEE is only useful if everyone in the plant uses the same method of calculation. What counts as planned time, what counts as downtime, which rated output applies. Otherwise two lines compare apples with pears, and the discussion is about the calculation instead of the losses. On an Efficiency Day we calculate it honestly once, and the figure is often well below what management assumes. More than the number itself, the three factors count. Availability, performance rate and quality rate each point to different adjustments. I distrust an OEE that arrives on the table without downtime reasons, because then nobody knows where to start.
Offline programming
Automation & roboticsCreation of robot programs on a computer in a simulation model of the cell instead of via a teach pendant on the running plant. The basis is CAD data of the robot, gripper, product and cell. In the simulation, paths are planned, reach and collisions are checked and the cycle time is estimated, after which the program is transferred to the controller. Because model and reality never match exactly, tool point and base have to be measured in at the cell, and small corrections on site remain normal. This saves downtime for new products and layer patterns and is a genuine availability argument where changeovers are frequent.
From practice
Offline programming saves downtime. Palletising patterns or robot paths are created and simulated on a computer while the line keeps running. Clarify whether you get the software and the rights to create new pack patterns yourself. Anyone who has to call the manufacturer for every new format pays more over the years than the licence would have cost. On palletisers there is often a pattern assistant right at the operator panel, and then no offline software is needed for new pack patterns. I still ask what happens if the licence or the computer fails, and where the project is backed up. A robot program that exists only on the commissioning engineer’s laptop does not belong in the plant.
On-site management
Project management & CAPEXCoordination of all trades on site during installation and commissioning. Tasks are schedule control, safety, coordination of the interfaces between suppliers, preparation of acceptances and enforcement of the site rules. On-site management keeps the installation schedule, allocates crane, forklift, power and storage areas, logs defects and outstanding items and reports to the project management. It works on site and, on brownfield projects, in agreement with ongoing production.
From practice
With several suppliers on site at once, on-site management decides matters over weeks. The same questions come up every day: who gets the crane when, who gets the electrician, who gets the forklift. A short meeting with all fitters in the morning saves more time than any schedule, because that is where it emerges that two firms want to work in the same corner. Bringing in a temporary site manager who is on site daily and logs outstanding items immediately usually costs less than a week’s delay on a line that produces five-figure sums per shift. Add a daily list of open points with names and dates that everyone can see.
OPC UA
Automation & roboticsVendor-neutral communication standard for machine data, standardised in the IEC 62541 series, the common language between controllers, MES and the cloud. A machine provides its data as an OPC UA server, and clients such as an MES or energy monitoring read it or write values. Besides the values themselves, OPC UA transmits their meaning in a data model, that is names, units and structure. Connections are secured with certificates and can be encrypted. Buyers should require OPC UA interfaces with a defined data model, for example following PackML, which defines the state model and data points of a packaging machine.
From practice
OPC UA is the vendor-neutral language between machines and IT, for example for MES, energy monitoring and analytics. Require an OPC UA server with a documented data model in the user requirements specification, ideally following PackML. Without this agreement, manufacturers often deliver proprietary interfaces that become expensive to connect later. Also write down which data you actually need, with name, unit and sampling time, otherwise you end up with a server that offers everything and nothing useful. At FAT, have a client read the data live, using a tool that does not come from the machine manufacturer. Do not rely on the statement that the interface is available. Available and switched on are two different things, and sometimes switching it on needs a licence that costs extra.
Open items list
Project management & CAPEXA continuously maintained list of the tasks and clarifications still open in a project. Each item receives a sequential number, a short description, a responsible person, a due date and a status. Priority, date raised and the meeting in which it came up are often added. In German practice the list is known as LOP, short for Liste offener Punkte. It accompanies the project from planning to handover and is reviewed in every project meeting. Closed items remain on the list with their completion date and are at most hidden, so that the history can be traced. The punch list, which records remaining defects at acceptance, is a different document, as is the risk register, which captures possible future problems.
From practice
An open items list rarely dies from too few entries. Usually it grows to a few hundred lines and nobody reads it any more. Make sure every item has a name and a date. A company is not a responsible person, and until further notice is not a due date. In meetings I only go through the items that are due or overdue, and everyone reads the rest beforehand. An item is closed only when the person who raised it agrees. Otherwise supposedly settled topics suddenly resurface during commissioning. Keep a single list for the whole project. If electrical, mechanical and civil works each maintain their own list, exactly the items that sit at the interfaces fall through the cracks.
Operating manual
Quality & safetyA mandatory part of every machine delivery, supplied by the manufacturer in the language of the country of use. The operating manual describes the intended use, operation, changeover, cleaning, maintenance, fault clearance and the residual risks that remain after the risk assessment. It belongs to the compulsory documents for CE conformity. The spare parts list, circuit diagrams and the manufacturers’ documents for bought-in parts usually come in addition. The quality and completeness of the documentation should be defined in the contract as an acceptance criterion, since claims raised after final payment go nowhere.
From practice
Require the operating manual in German, structured by operation, changeover, maintenance, fault clearance and spare parts. Ideal is a spare parts list with the manufacturer designations of bought-in parts, because nobody orders a sensor at three in the morning with the machine builder’s internal item number. Have an advance copy delivered at the FAT and review it before shipment, preferably together with the maintenance technician who will work with it later. Missing documentation, or documentation only in English, is an acceptance defect. Anyone who chases it only after final payment waits a long time. So have the contract state that complete documentation is a condition of acceptance, and settle the wording with your lawyer.
Operator training
Project management & CAPEXContractually agreed instruction of operators, setters and maintenance staff in operation, changeover, fault clearance, cleaning and maintenance of the new machine. Scope, attendees, timing, language, documents and proof are set out in the contract. Instructing personnel is also an operator obligation under German workplace safety regulations (Betriebssicherheitsverordnung). Training is usually split by target group, because operators, setters and maintenance staff need different depth.
From practice
Training given during the hectic commissioning phase rarely sticks. Split it up: basics before delivery at the supplier’s site or at the FAT, hands-on practice on the running machine after the ramp-up phase, and maintenance training separately with wiring diagrams and drive parameterisation. Name a line owner per shift who receives in-depth training. Secure the right to refresher training if staff change in the first year. I also insist on training documents in the language of the staff and on an attendance list, otherwise nobody knows in a year who learned what.
OPEX (operating expenditure)
Project management & CAPEXOperating expenditure, the running costs of operating a plant as opposed to the one-off investment expenditure (CAPEX). It includes energy, compressed air, wear parts, change parts, maintenance and labour. These costs arise every year and are added up over the planned service life in the economic calculation. They belong in every investment comparison, because the cheapest machine to buy is rarely the cheapest to run. Together with the purchase cost they make up the total cost over the service life, known as total cost of ownership, see TCO.
From practice
You pay the purchase price once and the running costs every day. Over the life of a packaging machine they add up to a sum that can keep pace with the purchase price. Anyone who only lines up quoted prices has seen the start of the calculation. I therefore have consumption figures for power and compressed air per operating hour written into the quotation, plus the wear parts with service life and price. It is one sheet of paper, but it rarely turns up unasked. Then calculate with your own energy prices and shift pattern, not the figures from the brochure. Also ask what a service engineer costs per call-out before you need one.
Order picking
IntralogisticsAssembling orders from stock. Manually it runs on the person-to-goods principle, semi-automated with pick-by-light or goods-to-person workstations, robot-assisted with grippers and image processing. The order supplies the lines, the warehouse management system the storage locations. Mixed-pallet picking is one of the most demanding automation tasks, because packs of different sizes and weights have to be assembled into a stable load unit. Typical figures are time per line and error rate.
From practice
In packaging plants, picking mostly concerns dispatching mixed pallets and supplying packaging material to the line. Both often run on a forklift and a shout across the floor. An Efficiency Day quickly shows how many kilometres and how much search time lie behind that. Before automation comes into play, fixed staging locations, clear kanban quantities and clean stock records in the system help. Fixed locations need a floor marking, otherwise everybody puts things down wherever there is room. I first check whether the system stock matches the shelf. If it does not, every picker keeps searching, and no robot turns that into order.
OT security
Automation & roboticsIT security for production plant, meaning protection of controllers, drives and networks against unauthorised access and malware. Measures are network segmentation, access control, patch concepts and data backup, and the IEC 62443 series describes requirements and methods. Unlike office IT, availability and operational safety of the plant come first, updates cannot simply be installed overnight, and controllers often run unchanged for many years. Depending on the machine and the operator, the new EU Machinery Regulation and NIS2 place requirements on manufacturers (security by design) and operators. These belong in the user requirements specification.
From practice
The Machinery Regulation and NIS2 place requirements on the cybersecurity of machines and operators. Your lawyer and your IT manager should clarify whether your company falls under NIS2. For packaging lines this means: authorise remote-maintenance access in a controlled way, separate the control network from the office network, assign user rights on the HMI, and back up the programs. Ask the supplier how remote maintenance technically works and who has access, and set it down in the maintenance contract. Typical gaps are default passwords on the panel and a USB stick that travels from machine to machine. Both can be checked quickly at acceptance.
A delivery reliability metric that requires two conditions to be met at the same time. On time means within the promised date or delivery window. In full means complete, with the ordered quantity and every line item. The rate shows what share of deliveries in a given period met both conditions. Depending on the agreement it is counted per order, per order line or per quantity, and these give noticeably different results. It also has to be clear whether the customer’s requested date or the confirmed date applies. Some customers go further and include correct shipping documents and goods free of defects. In food retail, OTIF is frequently part of supplier evaluation.
From practice
The catch is usually in the in full part. A lorry can be in the yard on time, and if a single pallet is missing, the whole delivery counts as a miss. Inside the plant, the problem often ends up at the packaging line. If it fails during the night before loading, the lorry leaves half empty, and on Monday sales wants to know why the figure has collapsed. I like to apply the same yardstick to suppliers in a project. A machine that arrives on time but without its format parts or documentation has not been delivered as far as I am concerned. Have every crate checked against the packing list at goods receipt on site, and record shortages in writing. Otherwise you will be arguing weeks later about whether a part never arrived or is lying somewhere in the hall.
Output
KPIsThe quantity of good product made per unit of time, stated for example in units per minute or pallets per shift. A distinction is made between nominal output from the brochure, guaranteed continuous output with real product, and peak output for short periods. Gross counts every cycle of the machine, net only the good quantity after reject removal. In a quotation comparison, only the guaranteed continuous output with a defined product and format belongs in the contract, tied to an acceptance criterion and a fixed measuring period.
From practice
Brochure figures usually refer to the lightest format and to packaging materials as they arrive only in the ideal case. Put output into the URS, the user requirement specification or Lastenheft, as guaranteed continuous output with your real product, a named format and a fixed run time, for example 120 cycles per minute over eight hours at format X. Also clarify whether gross or net is meant. A supplier who runs 120 cycles and rejects a share of them has kept to the number and still delivered too few good packs. I have the measurement demonstrated at acceptance with my own product, not with the supplier’s test material.
Fundamental refurbishment of an existing machine with the aim of restoring its original performance level. The machine is largely dismantled, wear and ageing parts such as bearings, seals, belts and hoses are replaced, drives, pneumatics and guideways are reworked, and the mechanics are readjusted. A final test run demonstrates the performance. Unlike a retrofit, the control system and function stay unchanged, and the goal is availability rather than modernisation. An overhaul can take place at the manufacturer’s works or at the operator’s site.
From practice
An overhaul pays off when the frame and mechanics are good and the spare parts are still available. If the control system is the problem, you are looking at a retrofit, not an overhaul. Check beforehand which assemblies are actually worn. A downtime analysis often shows that a handful of assemblies cause most of the faults, and then you replace selectively instead of touching the whole machine. Clarify with the manufacturer whether the overhaul happens at their works or at your site. At their works you miss the machine in production, on site the fitters get in your way. Plan the downtime window realistically and with contingency, because dismantling almost always turns up something that was not on the list.
Overload clutch (torque limiter)
Mechanical engineering & componentsA clutch that limits or interrupts the power flow when a set torque is exceeded, protecting drive and mechanics from damage in the event of a jam or collision. In a slip clutch, springs press friction linings together, and these slip on overload while still transmitting torque. Detent types work with balls or rollers in recesses, which are pushed out on overload and largely disconnect the drive. Depending on the design, they re-engage automatically, synchronous types only at the same angular position, or have to be reset by hand. When the clutch trips, a switching ring actuates a limit switch or proximity switch so that the control system shuts down. The tripping torque is set by the spring preload.
From practice
If a slip clutch slips more often, sooner or later someone tightens the nut. From then on it is a rigid connection with a friction lining, and at the next jam something more expensive breaks. So at acceptance I ask how the tripping torque has been set, and have the setting marked with paint and documented. Clutches that never slip for years can seize and then fail to release when it matters. An inspection interval in the maintenance plan helps here. Machines with mechanical cams need a synchronous re-engaging clutch. Otherwise, after a trip the motion timing no longer matches and tools meet where they were never meant to meet. Check too that the switch on the clutch is actually wired to the control system. Otherwise the motor cheerfully keeps running after the trip.
Oxygen transmission rate (OTR)
Quality & safetyOxygen Transmission Rate: the amount of oxygen that diffuses through a film or package per unit area and day, given in cm³/(m²·d·bar) at defined temperature and humidity. A barrier value for products that spoil through oxidation, as well as for modified atmosphere (MAP) and vacuum packs. The value applies to a given film thickness, and the thicker the layer, the lower the permeability. High barriers are formed by layers of EVOH, polyamide or aluminium, combined in laminates. It is measured on flat film, not on the finished pack.
From practice
For modified atmosphere packs, shelf life depends heavily on OTR, but only if the seal seam and residual oxygen play along. A high-barrier film is no use if the seal leaks or gassing leaves too much residual oxygen. Note that EVOH and PA barriers deteriorate at high humidity. Demand measured values under real storage conditions and check the oxygen level in the pack over shelf life. The data sheet applies to flat film. Creases at folds and edges, especially in metallised layers, make the barrier of the finished pack worse. Ask the supplier whether he has measured this on folded samples.
P
Pack pattern (pallet pattern)
IntralogisticsArrangement of cases or containers per layer on the pallet, including the layer bond, number of layers and orientation of the packs. With interlocking the layers are offset, with column stacking they lie exactly on top of one another. The pattern determines stability, volume use and palletising output. It is calculated with palletising software that takes overhang, height and weight into account. In the palletiser the pack pattern is stored as a programme, one for each format. The layer pattern is the drawn representation of a single layer.
From practice
An interlocked pack pattern with staggered layers is more stable, a column stack carries more load. Calculate pack patterns with software rather than working them out on a table, and check overhang, the box compression strength of the cartons and retailer requirements. Every new pattern must be taught on the palletiser and validated in a transport test. I therefore ask for a photo of the finished pallet and the wrapping parameters for every pattern. A pattern that only holds with hand adjustments is no good for the night shift. Also ask for some reserve in pallet height, because carton dimensions vary from batch to batch. A lot fits on paper that tips over on the line after the third layer.
Package integrity
Quality & safetyThe ability of a pack to protect its contents from damage, contamination and environmental influences from filling until consumption. A pack is intact when it is tight, has no holes, cracks or open seal areas and withstands the mechanical loads. This depends on the material and its thickness, on the construction and sealing of the pack, and on the storage and transport conditions. Testing is destructive or non-destructive, for example in a water bath, with vacuum or by inline leak testing. In the food industry a damaged or contaminated pack leads to spoilage and can be a health risk for consumers.
From practice
Whether a pack is tight or not is decided by the seal seam, the material and the handling after sealing. A water bath and a vacuum test suit spot checks, while inline leak testing checks every pack. Set inspection intervals and write down what happens when a pack fails, that is stop the line, block the last packs, look for the cause. If fault rates rise, react at once. Usually a contaminated sealing tool or a changed film is behind it. After a film change an extra leak test is worthwhile, because the first seams of a new batch show early whether the settings and the new film suit each other.
Packaging
Packaging technologyEnclosure of a product with four functions: protection from transport and environmental influences, preserving product quality, information on contents, origin and labelling, and marketing on the shelf. It is made of packaging material, shaped into a pack such as a bag, bottle or carton, and completed by packaging aids such as a closure or adhesive tape. A distinction is made between primary packaging on the product, secondary packaging such as the outer carton and tray, and tertiary packaging such as the pallet and load unit. German packaging law, the Verpackungsgesetz, by contrast distinguishes sales, outer and transport packaging.
From practice
For line planning the chain matters more than the definition. Every packaging level needs its own machine, its own format list and its own packaging material supplier. Changes to the primary packaging travel through the whole chain, one millimetre more bag length all the way to the layer pattern on the pallet, where suddenly the overhang no longer fits. That is why the packaging material specification belongs in phase two of the project, before a machine is selected. Whoever writes it only after the order ends up rebuilding the machine afterwards. Talk to the packaging supplier early, because their tolerances are your machine’s tolerances.
Packaging licensing scheme participation
CommercialAn obligation under the German Packaging Act (Verpackungsgesetz) to conclude a contract with a dual system for sales and secondary packaging that typically ends up as waste with the private end consumer, and to report the quantities placed on the market by material fraction. The dual system organises collection and recovery of this packaging and finances it from the participation fees. Material fractions are, for example, glass, paper and cardboard, plastics, metals and composites. The fees depend on material and quantity and take recyclability into account. Participation is a precondition for placing the packaging on the market.
From practice
Packaging licensing scheme participation is often dismissed as admin, yet it is a real cost factor. Material type, weight and recyclability determine the fee per tonne, so every packaging change directly affects licensing costs. Factor these costs into material decisions, for example when switching from composite to mono-material. Make sure the reported quantities match the piece count and packaging weight from production, because audits start exactly there. Put purchasing, production and the environmental officer around one table for this. Often the data sits in different departments, and nobody has ever laid it side by side.
Packaging material approval (first-sample approval)
Quality & safetyFormal approval of a new or changed packaging material before series use. First samples from series tooling are checked against drawing and specification, for example dimensions, tolerances, material thickness, scoring, grain direction, sealability and print quality. Added to this are a trial run on the line, the conformity documents and a retained approval sample as a reference. Approval is given jointly by quality assurance, production and purchasing. It protects against output loss, downtime and complaints caused by unnoticed changes to the packaging material.
From practice
Most start-up problems after a packaging material change happen because the sample was never run on the machine. Insist on an approval run with production material, over at least one reel or pallet quantity, and keep a signed and dated approval sample on file. A hand-made sample almost always runs, the series later does not. A limit sample showing what is only just acceptable saves a lot of time in a dispute. A change of sub-supplier for board or film also triggers a new approval, otherwise you have no reference. Oblige the supplier to report changes to paper, film, adhesive or tooling beforehand.
Packaging material / pack / packaging aid
Packaging technologyA terminology system of packaging technology according to DIN 55405, the German standard on packaging terms. The packaging material, German Packstoff, is the raw material, for example corrugated board, PE film or glass. The pack, German Packmittel, is the product made from it that encloses the goods, for example a case, pouch or bottle. The packaging aid, German Packhilfsmittel, is used for closing, securing or labelling, for example tape, strapping, labels or adhesive. Together they make up the packaging. The terms are the basis for specifications, bills of materials and approvals.
From practice
The distinction sounds academic but is useful on a project. Packs and packaging aids have different suppliers, approval processes and cost centres, and the line depends on both. Tape, hot melt and labels are often forgotten in the URS, leaving no specification at acceptance for half of the faults that occur. Keep a complete list of packaging materials per product, including the packaging aids and their specifications. The consumption of tape and hot melt per case only becomes visible in operation, so add it after the ramp-up. One line per article with supplier, article number, dimensions and approval status is enough as long as it is up to date. It also helps when a supplier changes, because you can see what else is affected.
Packaging material specification
Packaging technologyA technical document that sets out the requirements for a packaging material: material, construction, dimensions with tolerances, basis weight, seal layer, friction values, reel construction with core, diameter, winding direction and print registration mark, print artwork and test methods. It is prepared by the packer or in agreement with the packer and serves as the reference for the supplier. It is the basis for supplier contracts, incoming goods inspection and the machine manufacturer’s performance commitment. Changes are managed through a revision of the specification and not by word of mouth.
From practice
Without a packaging material specification, nobody is responsible when faults occur. The machine manufacturer points to the film, the film supplier points to the machine. Draw up the specification before ordering, together with both parties, with tolerances the machine can actually handle. Changes to the packaging material, even for cost reasons, must go through a change approval with a machine trial and not through a note on the purchase order. Add an approved sample and ask for the manufacturer’s inspection record of the critical dimensions with every delivery. Also define who maintains the specification and which version applies. In a dispute you otherwise get three versions on the table, and each side holds its own to be the valid one.
Packaging technology
Packaging technologyUmbrella term for the machines, materials and processes that turn a product from filled goods into a shippable load unit. It covers dosing and filling, forming and closing the primary pack, labelling, grouping, cartoning, palletising and load securing, linked by conveying and inspection technology. A line usually consists of machines from several manufacturers. In investment projects it is rarely the individual machine that decides the outcome but the linkage: changeover times, buffer sizing and interfaces determine line output, not the brochure figure of the fastest station.
From practice
Mechanical engineering, materials science, logistics and retail requirements all meet in packaging technology. Hardly any investment touches so many departments at once. Projects rarely fail on the machine. What usually goes missing is coordination between production, purchasing, quality and sales. Anyone who buys a line made up of machines from several manufacturers soon has one more supplier who was not responsible when something goes wrong. An interface list and clear battery limits, meaning the exact boundaries of each supplier’s scope, spare you the discussion after acceptance. Experience at this interface is why interim project managers are so often in demand here.
PackML
Automation & roboticsA standardised state model for packaging machines with uniform data structures, described in the technical report ISA-TR88.00.02 from the ISA-88 series of standards. The machine moves through defined states such as Idle, Execute, Held, Stopped and Aborted, which are changed by commands such as Start, Hold, Stop and Abort. Operating modes such as production, maintenance and manual are added, together with fixed data points for counters, setpoints and downtime causes. This lets a higher-level system address and evaluate machines from different manufacturers in the same way. PackML does not define how the data is transmitted.
From practice
On paper some machines have PackML, but inside the controller sits a cut-down version with a data block only the manufacturer understands. So write into the user requirements specification which states, operating modes and data you want. At acceptance, have someone walk you through every state, including Hold and Abort, and check that the downtime reasons arrive properly coded. Only then can you compare one line with another, and the MES does not have to be connected afresh for each machine. Ask for PackML from the start and it costs the manufacturer little. If it comes afterwards, you pay for a rebuild of the controls. I ask about it first on every new packaging machine.
Pallet changer
IntralogisticsA device that exchanges full pallets for empty ones at a palletising station so that the line can keep stacking without interruption. It consists of a magazine for empty pallets, a changeover position and a discharge conveyor for the full pallet. The term is also used for pallet transfer machines that move the load, either whole or layer by layer, from one pallet to another, for example from wood to a hygiene pallet (H1) at the entrance to a hygiene area, or from single-use to Euro pallet. Automatic versions replace manual work with the forklift and hand pallet truck.
From practice
An automatic pallet changer at the palletiser prevents the most common stoppage at the end of the line. The pallet is full and the forklift is not there. Alternatives are a palletiser with two positions or a roller conveyor buffer for two to three pallets. Which solution fits depends on cycle rate and forklift availability, and a downtime analysis at the line end supplies the figures. Ask the supplier how long the change takes and whether the machine keeps producing during that time or collects products in a buffer. A changer that briefly stops the line every time only moves the problem. When transferring from wood to hygiene pallets, the wooden pallets stay in front of the lock, and everyone on the shift should know that.
Pallet dispenser (pallet magazine)
Packaging technologyA device at the end of a packaging line for storing and singulating empty pallets, which are fed automatically to the palletiser. A stack is set down, the bottom pallet is released and lowered onto the conveyor while the rest of the stack is held. Capacity, acceptable pallet quality and pallet types determine run time without forklift intervention and fault frequency. The magazine is loaded with stacks by forklift or pallet truck and is usually a separate module in front of the palletiser.
From practice
Pallet dispensers are small things that bring the palletiser to a standstill. The culprits are broken boards, protruding nails, warped pallets or mixed pallet types in the stack. Agree with purchasing on which pallet quality is delivered, and add an inspection station beforehand if pooled pallets are used. Dispenser capacity should cover at least one hour of run time, so that the forklift driver does not become the pacemaker. Also check the space for replenishment. If the forklift has to cross the packing zone to refill the magazine, trouble with personnel safety is guaranteed. Access from outside or a separate route avoids that.
Pallet factor
IntralogisticsThe number of sales units or cases per pallet. It results from the layer pattern, meaning the arrangement of the units in one layer, multiplied by the number of layers. The factor is limited by the footprint of the pallet and the permitted overall height, and by the weight and stacking strength of the lower layers. Transport cost per unit, storage space requirement and the number of pallet changes per shift all depend on the pallet factor. That is why it appears as a figure in enquiries for palletisers and packaging lines. It should not be confused with the stacking factor, which describes the safety reserve for stacking loads.
From practice
Work out the pallet factor early. If a case becomes two centimetres wider, it can cost a whole row per layer and lower the factor noticeably. Logistics only notices once the freight quote is on the table. Conversely, a higher factor with a more stable layer pattern is often the cheapest gain in the whole project, because it saves journeys, storage positions and pallet changes. Also check that the pallet height suits the lorry and the rack bay, since one more layer is no use if it does not fit into the bay. State both the current and the target factor in the enquiry. If the figures are missing, every bidder calculates with their own layer pattern, and the quotes cannot be compared.
Pallet inspection
IntralogisticsAutomatic checking of pallets for dimensional accuracy and damage, either as an empty pallet before the palletiser or as a loaded pallet before the high-bay warehouse. Sensors such as light curtains, laser scanners or cameras measure the outer dimensions, the overhang of the load and visible damage like broken boards and runners. A scale can also check the weight against the target value. Pallets outside tolerance are diverted from the flow or stopped before the racking. The reason is that damaged load carriers can block the conveyors and the stacker crane, and a load can fall from the racking.
From practice
A damaged pallet blocks the equipment or topples in the racking, and both like to happen at night. For pooled reusable pallets, automatic inspection pays off from medium volumes upward, because exchange pallets arrive in very varied condition. With single-use pallets, incoming inspection at the supplier is usually enough, provided the specification has been agreed and is written into the order. Also define where the rejected pallet goes and who takes it off at night, otherwise the line stands because of one single pallet. Do not set the limits too tight either: an inspection that keeps triggering falsely will be disconnected sooner or later.
Pallet label (GS1-128 / SSCC)
IntralogisticsA label that identifies a pallet clearly as a shipping unit. In its GS1-128 barcode it carries the number of the shipping unit, the SSCC, and, depending on the agreement, item number, quantity, batch and best-before date. The SSCC has 18 digits and consists of an extension digit, the sender’s company prefix, a serial number and a check digit. Plain text with the same data is printed on the label as well. Usually the recipient receives the SSCC in advance as an electronic dispatch advice and scans it at goods-in. The label is printed and applied at the line end, usually by a print-and-apply labeller and less often by hand.
From practice
Retailers reject pallets whose label is missing or unreadable, and you often only hear about it with the complaint. A labeller at the line end, with a reader to verify the print and a link to the WMS, belongs on the line from medium volumes upward. The label sits on stretch film that is shiny and creased, and that is where some scanners at the ramp give up. Clarify with your largest customers where the label should go and on how many sides, two being the usual. I also ask to see how the numbering carries on after a controller failure or a software change. Nobody on the line notices a duplicate SSCC, but the customer’s goods-in system does at once.
Pallet overhang
IntralogisticsCases projecting beyond the footprint of the pallet. Overhang removes support from the lower case layers, which significantly reduces stacking strength. It also causes edge damage in handling, problems in conveyors and racking, and complaints from retailers. Underhang, by contrast, wastes loading area and reduces the stability of the load. How much overhang is permitted is set by the customer or the haulier. It arises from an unsuitable pack pattern, from tolerances on the case, from layers that have slipped or from bulging cases.
From practice
Overhang costs stacking strength and cases, underhang costs freight space. Both happen when the case outer dimensions and the pack pattern do not match. Recheck the pack pattern with every case change, since double-wall board grades and moisture change the outer dimension. Filled cases also bulge, so measure on the full case and not on the empty blank. Retailers check overhang and height at goods-in and reject pallets. A contour check before the stretch wrapper catches outliers but does not replace proper planning. Agree with the customer how much overhang is still accepted before the first pallet comes back.
Pallet position (pallet slot)
IntralogisticsA defined position for a pallet, for example in the palletising cell as a pickup or changeover position, in the warehouse or at a staging point. Within a palletising cell there are positions for empty pallets, for the pallet being built and for finished pallets waiting for removal. Whether the positions are marked on the floor or arranged on a roller conveyor depends on the plant. The number of pallet positions determines how long the line can run without forklift intervention and is therefore a criterion in the tender. In the warehouse, a pallet position is a storage location in the rack or in block storage that is managed in the warehouse management system.
From practice
Pallet positions are the quiet reserve of every layout. Empty pallets, full pallets, layer pads, film and rejects all need floor space and clear routes. Anyone who plans the layout around the machine alone ends up putting pallets in the traffic path later. Budget for at least the positions for one shift without removal at each line end, plus space for change parts and cleaning equipment. The forklift also needs room to manoeuvre, and that room does not belong to a pallet position. Draw the floor markings into the layout from the start and keep to them after the move. After half a year the empty pallets will otherwise stand exactly where the escape routes should be.
Pallet truck
IntralogisticsA hand-operated industrial truck for lifting and moving pallets. The lift is by a hand pump with hydraulics, while steering and pulling are done by the tiller. It raises the pallet only far enough to clear the floor. The pallet truck is cheap to buy and has therefore multiplied unchecked in many plants. A stock check with count, condition and inspection status under the German DGUV accident-prevention rules is the simplest way into a Shopfloor Analysis. Its electrically powered relative is the electric pallet truck.
From practice
Pallet trucks appear in no investment appraisal and still cost money: inspections, repairs, accidents, space. In the Shopfloor Analysis we count them too, because every manual pallet movement points to missing conveyor technology or an awkward layout. They usually stand where the last user finished, and with luck the next person finds them again. A rule such as pallet trucks only with an inspection sticker and a fixed parking spot is a simple first step towards order. On a walk-round you quickly see which units have stood unused for weeks. Units with an expired or missing sticker belong out of circulation at once, otherwise the next colleague uses them anyway.
Palletiser
Packaging technologyA machine that stacks cases, trays or sacks layer by layer onto pallets, either conventionally as a layer palletiser or as a robot cell. The layer palletiser forms a whole layer from several packs and sets it down in one move, whereas the robot picks individually or in small groups. Selection criteria are output, layer patterns, number of pallet positions, footprint and safety concept. The surrounding equipment includes pallet dispenser, layer pads and stretch wrapper. A frequently underestimated tender topic with many hidden costs.
From practice
Which technology fits, whether robot, gantry or layer palletiser, follows from the requirement profile: cases per minute, number of formats, pack patterns with layer pads, available floor space, staffing. A robot is flexible, a layer palletiser is fast, a cobot is affordable at low cycle rates. Have the pattern and stability demonstrated with your own cases, as this is the most common point of dispute at acceptance. I always have a finished pallet driven to the warehouse once, through the stretch wrapper and with the forklift, and not just left standing at the conveyor. Only there does it show whether the pattern holds. Also check how quickly an operator can reach the pallet during a fault. The longer the way through doors and safety fences, the longer every minor fault lasts.
Paperless (document management)
Digitalisation & AIPaperless-ngx is an open-source document management system that makes scanned and digital documents searchable through text recognition (OCR), tags them automatically, and files them by correspondent, document type and date. Incoming files are picked up from an intake folder, the text is read out and the document is given tags. Thanks to the text recognition, the search covers the content and not just the file name. How long records must be kept is governed by commercial and tax law, not by the software.
From practice
Invoices, delivery notes, contracts: at POWERJO, everything lands in Paperless and is found again in seconds. The same approach is worthwhile for project departments too. Acceptance records, certificates and supplier documents are immediately at hand during an audit, instead of sitting in three folders and a mailbox. The filing only works with discipline. Scan a document when it arrives and not weeks later. Fix a small number of document types and stick to them, otherwise the tag list keeps growing until nobody can oversee it. Clarify with your tax adviser which paper originals you have to keep after scanning.
Pareto analysis
KPIsAn evaluation based on the Pareto principle, also called the 80/20 rule: a few causes produce the majority of the effect. Applied to losses, it ranks downtime, reject causes or transport routes by frequency or duration and shows where a single measure has the biggest effect. It is shown as a Pareto chart with bars sorted in descending order and a line for the cumulative share. The split of 80 to 20 is an empirical value and rarely fits exactly. What comes out depends on whether the ranking is by count or by total duration.
From practice
On packaging lines, a Pareto analysis of downtime almost always shows the same picture. A few causes produce a large share of the losses. Rank by total duration, not by count, because a rare but long stoppage is often more important than many micro-stops. Look at the biggest bar in the chart first. If it is called Other, the recording is not good enough yet, and you should first sharpen the reason code catalogue. The result is the priority list for the coming weeks. Repeat the evaluation after the first measures, and you will see whether the big bar has really become smaller.
Partly completed machinery
Quality & safetyAn assembly that is almost a machine but cannot perform a specific application on its own and only gets its function once built into a machine or plant, for example a robot without an application. The manufacturer supplies it not with a declaration of conformity and CE marking but with a declaration of incorporation and assembly instructions. Within the declaration of incorporation, the manufacturer names the basic health and safety requirements of the Machinery Directive that have been applied and met and states that putting into service is permitted only once the complete machine has been declared conforming. Whoever builds it in takes on conformity responsibility for the whole.
From practice
Partly completed machinery such as robots without grippers or conveyors without a control system must not be operated on its own. Whoever integrates it into a line becomes the manufacturer of the complete machine and carries the CE responsibility. Many projects underestimate that until someone asks for the declaration of conformity for the line. Clarify early who takes on this role, the integrator or you yourself. Have the declaration of incorporation and the assembly instructions supplied with it, and actually read the assembly instructions. They contain the conditions under which the machine may be built in, for example on guards and ranges of movement. The layout has to stick to them.
Passivation (stainless steel)
Mechanical engineering & componentsA chemical post-treatment of stainless steel in which the protective chromium oxide layer on the surface is deliberately built up or restored. Stainless steel forms this passive layer in air on its own, but welding, grinding or iron particles from contaminated tools disturb it. Before passivation, heat tint and the chromium-depleted zone beneath it are removed by pickling, usually with mixtures of nitric and hydrofluoric acid applied as a pickling bath or paste. Passivation itself uses oxidising acids such as nitric or citric acid, followed by thorough rinsing with clean water. For pipework and vessels in food and pharmaceutical plants, pickling and passivation are normally part of completing the installation.
From practice
Rust on stainless steel is often foreign rust. Someone deburred an edge with the angle grinder that had just been used on a steel beam, or cleaned the weld with an ordinary steel brush. The embedded iron particles rust, and from the outside it looks as if the stainless steel were poor quality. Put it in the site rules that only stainless steel tools are used on stainless steel, and check during installation that this actually happens. For pipework built on site, get written confirmation of whether and how it was pickled and passivated. Pickling paste is no toy. It usually contains hydrofluoric acid, needs protective equipment, and the rinse water must not simply go down the drain. Work with pickling paste therefore belongs in the work permit system.
Path planning
Automation & roboticsDefining the path a robot tool travels between points, including speed, acceleration and motion type. Point-to-point moves are fast but do not follow the path exactly, because the axes drive straight to the target angle and the tool describes a curve on the way. Linear and circular moves keep the path of the tool centre point but load the axes more heavily. Blending intermediate points avoids stops and saves cycle time. The path is taught on the robot or planned offline and checked for collisions with the cell, gripper and product. Singularities and axis limits restrict the possible paths.
From practice
Cycle time losses are often not in the gripping time but in poorly planned paths: too many exact intermediate points, unnecessary lift heights, returning by the same route. Have blending radii and acceleration ramps set up properly, but not right at the limit, because you pay for it later in gearbox wear and vibration at the gripper. For pick-and-place, it pays to look at the sequence of the placement positions. Also check that the load data of gripper and product are correct in the robot. If the payload is wrong, it calculates with the wrong masses, and the motion becomes less smooth or wear increases. A gripper that has become heavier after a modification often shows up first at the gearbox.
Payback period
CommercialThe period in which the savings or additional revenue from an investment cover its acquisition cost. In the simple, static calculation the investment sum is divided by the annual return from savings and additional revenue. The dynamic variant discounts the returns and so takes account of the time value of money. As the simplest metric for investment decisions, the payback period is often part of the investment request. It says nothing about the time afterwards, that is service life, residual value and operating costs, and it does not assess the risk of the assumed savings.
From practice
Many companies require a payback of under three years. Packaging machines run for 15 years or more, though, and a short deadline then mainly rewards the cheap offer. Supplement payback with TCO and risk. A machine with a four-year payback and half the operating costs beats the cheaper offer in the long run. Calculate with documented savings and not with brochure values. Also ask the supplier which assumptions its savings figure rests on. Find out where the saving comes from, whether output, scrap, staff or downtime, and who actually delivers it in operation. A saving nobody books pays back nothing.
Payload
Automation & roboticsMaximum mass a robot may move at the flange, including gripper, cables, sensors and workpiece. The rated payload applies only for a defined centre-of-gravity offset. If the centre of gravity sits further out or the moment of inertia is high, the permissible payload drops according to the manufacturer’s payload diagram. The payload at the flange has to be distinguished from the additional load mounted on the arm or shoulder, such as valves or cable packages. Load data comprising mass, centre of gravity and moment of inertia are stored in the robot controller and enter path planning and collision detection.
From practice
A classic design error: the calculation uses the weight of the product, and the gripper with valves, hoses and camera is added later. Then the robot runs at its limit, accuracy suffers and the gears age faster. Ask for the payload diagram for your gripper length, because the permissible load moves with the centre of gravity. On palletisers there is the further point that a gripper holding several cartons at once carries more and pushes the centre of gravity further out. Plan in reserve for the next format and a heavier gripper. Enter the load data, with mass and centre of gravity, into the robot controller. Wrong values distort the collision detection, which then trips too early or too late.
Payment term
CommercialThe period between invoicing and the due date within which the customer has to pay. It starts, depending on the contract, with the invoice date or with receipt of the invoice. On machine supplies it is negotiated together with the milestone plan, which sets out at which event what share of the order value falls due, for example down payment, delivery or acceptance. Combined with an early payment discount, the payment term is a genuine liquidity tool for both sides and a negotiating point often given away alongside the plain price.
From practice
Payment terms on machine supplies are a matter of negotiation and depend on the milestone structure. Tie payments to events you can verify, such as delivery, SAT or proof of performance, and not to calendar dates. A calendar date keeps running even when the machine is not. Make sure each milestone is described in the contract so that both sides understand the same thing by it. Otherwise you argue about the invoice before the machine is standing. For assignments of on-demand specialists, monthly invoicing with a payment term of a few weeks is usual. That is easy to plan on both sides.
Peak load (peak load management)
Production & energyThe highest power demand of a plant within a billing period. For customers with interval metering, the German meter records the average power for each quarter of an hour. As a rule, the highest quarter-hour value in the year sets the demand charge in the grid fees, so a single peak affects costs for the whole year. Peak load management lowers these peaks. A load management system monitors the running quarter-hour average and, when an overshoot threatens, briefly switches off or throttles deferrable loads such as refrigeration or heating. Further means are staggered start-up of large consumers, storage and on-site generation. Connected load, by contrast, only describes the installed power.
From practice
Expensive peaks rarely arise in normal operation. They come on Monday morning, when all lines start up together after the weekend and the compressors refill the empty network. A quarter of an hour is enough, and the bill carries it around for a year. With new machines, look at the heating power. Sealing jaws, shrink tunnels and hotmelt units draw considerably more while heating up than in operation. So besides the rated power, I always ask the supplier whether the heating zones can be switched on with a time offset in the control system. That costs him a few lines of code. Talk to production about the start-up sequence after the weekend as well. Sometimes a plan on the wall is all the load management you need.
Peel film (peelable lidding film)
Packaging technologyA lidding or closure film with a seal layer that, after sealing, can be peeled back off the mating material in a controlled way, without tearing. Peel force is stated in newtons per 15 mm strip width. Systems are distinguished by where the separation occurs: within the seal layer, within the laminate or at the interface. Peel films are used as lids on trays and cups, for example for cheese, sausage or ready meals. The mating material has to suit the seal layer, otherwise no defined peel force can be set.
From practice
Peelability is a balancing act. If the seam is too strong, the consumer tears the tray open. If it is too weak, the pack opens on the shelf or in transit. Peel force depends on the tray, lidding film, sealing temperature and dwell time. Check it after storage and not just fresh off the machine, since it can change over time. For retailer complaints, only a documented peel-force specification with a tolerance band helps. Also ask how the seam behaves in the cold and in the warm, when the pack sits in the chilled cabinet and later lies in the customer’s car. A pull tab on the lidding film makes opening easier and belongs on the drawing.
Penalty clause (liquidated damages)
CommercialA contractually agreed payment for non-performance or late performance, also called a contractual penalty. It is typical for schedule slippage, as a percentage of the order value for each week of delay up to a cap, or for a missed performance guarantee. Its main effect is preventive: a supplier with a penalty clause in the contract prioritises the project differently. Whether and how high it can validly be agreed is governed by the contract and by statutory rules, and the wording is settled with a lawyer.
From practice
A penalty for schedule slippage appears in many contracts and only works if the milestones are unambiguous. Write down which event counts as delay, for example delivery from the works or a passed factory acceptance. Define just as clearly what you have to contribute yourself. Otherwise the supplier points at late samples or missing approvals and works out the delay against you. A penalty clause is no substitute for project management. Anyone who reviews the schedule with the supplier every month rarely needs to invoke it. And whoever does invoke it usually has a project that was already running off course. Have procurement or a lawyer draft the clause, since amount and cap are negotiable.
Performance bond
CommercialA guarantee from a bank or credit insurer by which the contractor secures proper performance of its contractual obligations. Depending on the wording, it covers the client’s claims for non-performance or delay, such as the extra cost of having the work completed by others, contractual penalties or damages. Its amount is agreed as a share of the contract value. It is provided on conclusion of the contract and usually runs until acceptance. After acceptance it is often exchanged for a warranty bond, which secures claims for defects until the limitation period ends. An advance payment guarantee, by contrast, only secures repayment of the down payment. In German construction the VOB/B conditions govern such security, in machine building the individual contract does.
From practice
What the bond covers is decided by its wording alone. The heading tells you little. Have someone check whether contractual penalties, defects before acceptance and repayment of overpayments are included. When it is exchanged after acceptance, keep to a simple order. First the new bond arrives in original, then you return the old one. Do it the other way round and you may be without security for a while. Think about the effect on the bidder list as well. Smaller special machine builders have limited guarantee facilities, and a large bond ties up room they need for other orders. Some would rather not bid at all. So ask in the enquiry whether the supplier can provide the required bond. Best agree the exact wording with your lawyer.
Performance rate
KPIsThe ratio of actual speed to rated speed during run time. It is calculated as the ideal cycle time multiplied by the number of units produced, divided by the run time. Losses through reduced speed, minor stoppages and idling show up in it, and it is the second factor of OEE. Minor stoppages under about five minutes are almost always underestimated without automatic data capture, because the operator clears them without reporting them. The reference is the rated speed of the machine, so it must be settled in advance which one applies.
From practice
Performance rate reveals what downtime lists do not show. The line is running, but slower than planned, because of micro-stops, reduced speed after a fault, or because somebody throttled the machine out of caution. Compare actual output per shift with rated output, and ask the operators for which format or packaging material they prefer to run slower. That usually has a reason. There is often more potential here than in availability, and the fix costs nothing but adjustment and training. Look at the display on the night shift for this. The speed there is sometimes set to a value that was once safe and was never touched again.
Performance test
Project management & CAPEXFormal proof of the contractually promised performance figures over a defined period, with defined products and formats, for example several shifts at rated output with an agreed minimum value for availability. The measurement method, excluded periods and consequences of not meeting the target (rework, penalty, price reduction) must be defined before the contract is signed. Excluded periods are stoppages not attributable to the supplier, such as missing product or packaging materials. The performance test follows commissioning and the trial run and is often a precondition for acceptance and final payment.
From practice
The performance test is the moment the URS meets reality. Fix beforehand how long it runs, at least a full shift, better several days. Also settle the products and formats, who operates, how stoppages are attributed and from when the test counts as passed. A stop because the packaging material is out of tolerance is not a machine fault, a stop because the ejector jams certainly is. That must be settled in advance. Without these rules, every stop gets argued over, and acceptance drags on for months. Record counter readings and fault logs jointly, ideally signed by both sides.
Permit to work
Project management & CAPEXWritten permission from the plant operator for a specific hazardous job, issued before the work starts. Typical cases are hot work such as welding and abrasive cutting outside designated areas, entry into vessels and confined spaces, work in potentially explosive atmospheres, opening lines that carry hazardous media and work at height. The permit names the location, the task, the period and the persons responsible and specifies the protective measures, for example isolation under LOTO, gas testing, a fire watch or barriers. It is signed by the issuer and the contractor and formally handed back once the work is complete. The basis is the risk assessment, the rules of the German accident insurers and often conditions set by the property insurer.
From practice
Monday morning, the fitters are waiting at the gate, and the only person allowed to sign permits is stuck in a meeting. More than one site has started like that. Clarify beforehand who issues permits and who stands in for that person. And settle how early a request has to come in. Contractors should know the procedure before they travel, not learn about it at the gatehouse. In food plants, cardboard, film reels and dust are often closer to the welding point than anyone would like. That is why the fire watch is no formality. If a fire detector is switched off for the job, the permit has to say who switches it back on. Otherwise exactly that gets left undone on a Friday afternoon. As a rule, one permit covers one job in one place. Anyone who moves on from welding at the conveyor to the tank needs a new one.
PET (polyester)
Packaging technologyPolyethylene terephthalate, a polyester with high strength, clarity and temperature resistance. As biaxially oriented film, BOPET, it serves as the carrier layer in laminates and lidding films. As amorphous APET it is the material for thermoformed trays, while bottles are made from preforms by stretch blow moulding. Crystalline CPET is used for ovenable trays. PET is readily recyclable with an established recycling loop. It can only be sealed via an additional seal layer or a sealing lacquer. Its oxygen and aroma barrier is better than that of PE and PP, while PET blocks water vapour less well.
From practice
PET trays are stiff and clear but cannot be closed without a seal layer. Tray and lidding film must be approved as a system, otherwise the seam peels uncontrollably. For recycled content, known as rPET, in food contact, require evidence of an approved recycling process. PET withstands heat better than PE, but thermoforming and shrink behaviour are sensitive to material changes. Every new recipe belongs in a trial run. With clear trays, product residue in the seal is visible at once, which makes the check at the conveyor easier. For chilled goods, clarify with the supplier whether the tray needs an anti-fog finish, because condensation on the lid hides the product.
Photoelectric sensor
Automation & roboticsAn optoelectronic sensor for presence and position detection. Through-beam sensors use a separate emitter and receiver, retro-reflective sensors use a reflector, and diffuse sensors evaluate the light reflected from the object itself. Diffuse sensors with background suppression measure the distance and ignore everything behind it, and retro-reflective sensors with a polarising filter cope better with shiny objects. The sensors serve control purposes such as jam detection, counting and triggering, and not personal protection. Light curtains are required for that.
From practice
A large share of micro-stops on packaging lines comes down to dirty, misaligned or wrongly chosen photoelectric sensors. On an Efficiency Day at the line, this is usually the first thing to show up. Shiny film, transparent bottles and white cases can fool simple diffuse sensors. Use background suppression or through-beam sensors at critical points, mount sensors securely and reproducibly, with a stop rather than a slotted hole, and add cleaning to the shift schedule. For film, a reflector with a polarising filter helps, for clear bottles often only a sensor made for transparent objects does. Mark the setting, for example with a paint pen on the screw, so you can see when somebody has been at it. A similar-looking sensor with different optics can react very differently to the same product.
Pick-and-place
Automation & roboticsAutomated picking and placing of individual products, for example bars into trays or pouches into cartons. Delta robots, SCARA robots or articulated-arm robots are normally used, picking the product up with a suction cup or gripper. The products arrive on a conveyor, a camera detects their position, and the robot controller picks them by conveyor tracking without stopping the belt. Delta robots are particularly fast and suit light products, while articulated arms handle larger loads and more varied movements. In the line, pick-and-place stands where products are brought from a loose or moving stream into a fixed arrangement, replacing manual loading.
From practice
The robot is rarely the problem. Performance depends on product infeed and image recognition. If products arrive skewed, stuck together or lying on top of each other, even the fastest delta robot picks at thin air. So test with exactly those products and not with the neat samples from the sales meeting. Ask how full the belt was when the quoted cycle rate was measured. Also clarify what happens to products that the camera sees but the robot cannot pick. You need a reject path or a return loop, otherwise the belt fills up sooner or later. Gripper changes for new formats should take minutes, not shifts.
PID controller
Mechanical engineering & componentsA controller that calculates a manipulated variable from the deviation between setpoint and actual value by combining three terms. The proportional term responds in proportion to the current deviation, and the integral term adds up the deviation over time and so removes any steady-state error. With the derivative term the controller responds to the rate of change and damps overshoot. A PI controller without derivative action is often sufficient. It is implemented as a function block in the PLC or as a compact device. In packaging machines it typically controls the temperature of sealing tools, web tension and the level in buffer tanks. The parameters are set during commissioning, and many devices offer auto-tuning.
From practice
PID controllers get tuned once during commissioning and are left alone until something starts to oscillate. Then somebody turns the parameters until things calm down and does not write down what was there before. Have the values for each control loop handed over in the documentation and include them in the control system backup. Auto-tuning is handy, but it produces values for the conditions under which it ran. A sealing jaw tuned while idling behaves differently with cold film at full speed. At acceptance, therefore, try a restart after a break and a format change, and watch how long the temperature takes to get back inside its window. When a loop oscillates, the controller is not always to blame. Often the sensor is badly placed or the actuator is oversized.
Piston filler
Packaging technologyA volumetric doser for liquid to pasty products. A piston draws a defined volume from the supply tank through a valve and pushes it through the fill tube into the pack. The fill volume is set via the piston stroke and is freely programmable on servo versions. With adapted valves, the piston filler also suits particulate products. Typical uses are sauces, creams, dressings and jams. Dosing accuracy depends on viscosity, temperature and the air content of the product.
From practice
Piston fillers are forgiving but sensitive to air pockets in the product. Air in the cylinder means underfilling and spitting. Watch for product infeed with adequate head pressure and for venting. For product changeovers, the disassembly time of pistons and valves counts, so ask about tool-less disassembly and CIP capability. Seals on pistons and valves are wear parts and belong in the spare parts stock with a replacement interval. Have the dosing accuracy demonstrated with your own product, not with water. I also have it measured at product temperature, because a dressing from the cold store fills differently from the same dressing at room temperature.
PL / SIL
Automation & roboticsClassification of the reliability of safety functions. The performance level runs from PL a to e and is defined in ISO 13849-1, the safety integrity level from SIL 1 to 3 in IEC 62061. Roughly, PL d corresponds to SIL 2 and PL e to SIL 3. The required level results from the risk assessment. It is reached by the whole safety function made up of sensor, logic and actuator, and depends on the architecture, the failure probability of the components, the diagnostic coverage and the measures against common cause failures.
From practice
The data sheet of a light barrier states a PL. What counts on the machine is the PL of the whole safety function, meaning sensor, logic and shut-off together. The required level comes from the risk assessment and not from the catalogue. At acceptance, have the validation of the safety functions shown to you. It belongs to the technical documentation, together with the calculation of the level achieved for each function. Take a few samples, for example the guard door and the emergency stop, and see whether there is proof behind them or only assertions. After a rebuild the assessment goes back on the table, because the old proof only applies to the old state.
Plain bearing
Mechanical engineering & componentsA bearing in which shaft and bearing shell slide on each other without rolling elements in between. The load is carried over a surface, whereas a rolling bearing carries it at points or along lines. Common designs are oil-impregnated sintered bronze bushes, rolled composite bushes with a PTFE sliding layer, polymer bearings for dry running and hydrodynamic bearings, in which a load-bearing lubricating film builds up during operation. Plain bearings tolerate shock loads, run quietly and need little installation space. They wear during start-up and under poor lubrication, and the bearing clearance is usually larger than in a rolling bearing. In packaging machines they are found mainly in joints, swivel arms, format adjustments and guide bushes.
From practice
Nobody looks at plain bushes until a joint starts rattling and the format adjustment no longer returns cleanly to position. Then the shaft often gets replaced, although the cheap bush was the actual wear part. Clarify which bushes need lubrication and which are meant to run dry. A polymer bush that someone greases with the best of intentions collects dust and sugar residue and runs worse than before. Pressing a bush in closes its bore up slightly, and the design allows for that. If the housing bore is already worn oversize, the new bush will sit loose as well. Have the bushes entered in the spare parts list with dimensions and material. Otherwise all it says there is an item number, and the stores search by guesswork.
Planetary gearbox
Mechanical engineering & componentsA gearbox in which several planet gears run around a central sun gear while meshing with an outer ring gear. The planet gears sit on a planet carrier, which usually forms the output. Because the load is shared between several tooth meshes, the gearbox transmits high torque in a small space, and input and output lie on the same axis. For higher ratios, two or more stages are placed in series. In packaging machines planetary gearboxes are mainly fitted to servo motors as low-backlash precision gearboxes with a torsional backlash of a few arc minutes. Characteristic values are ratio, rated output torque, torsional backlash, torsional stiffness and permissible radial load on the output. The motor is usually attached by means of a clamping hub.
From practice
Little ever happens to the planetary gearbox itself. Trouble is more likely to come from the connection to the motor. The clamping hub needs the correct tightening torque, and whether a motor shaft with a key may go into the hub is stated in the gearbox manufacturer’s instructions, not in the fitter’s memory. If the shaft slips in the hub, the axis loses its position, and the fault tends to be looked for in the amplifier first. Look at the forces on the output as well. A toothed belt pulley that sits far out from the bearing and is tensioned hard loads the output bearing more than the catalogue allows. If you keep spares, pay attention to the exact ratio and the right motor adapter. A gearbox with a ratio of 7 is not much help if the machine is parameterised for 10.
Plant standard
Project management & CAPEXSpecification set by the operator that prescribes technical standards to suppliers of new machines. It names preferred manufacturers for controls, drives, sensors and pneumatics and covers control cabinet layout, colour scheme, equipment labelling, documentation format and hygiene requirements. Typically it consists of a rules section and an appendix listing approved makes, and it is attached to the enquiry and referred to in the order. The aim is uniform spare parts, training and maintenance across all machines in the plant. By contrast, the equipment-level plant standard is narrower and fixes only makes and series.
From practice
A plant standard only works if it is part of the tender and the supplier has to name every deviation in the quote. Otherwise it sits on the intranet and nobody reads it. Keep it lean and up to date. If it demands components that no longer exist, you get variation orders and arguments about substitute types. Bear in mind that a supplier rarely masters someone else’s control platform as well as their own, and that costs commissioning time. Before awarding, I therefore ask whether the supplier has already built plant on the platform you require. A column for deviations with reasons in the quote also makes the comparison easier.
Plant standard (equipment)
Project management & CAPEXBinding specification from an operator on which makes and series of drives, controls, switchgear, sensors, pneumatics and equipment labelling are to be used in new plant. In most cases it is a manufacturer list with a type overview, sometimes with added requirements for software standards and libraries. It applies to new plant and major conversions and is attached to the enquiry. The aim is a uniform spare parts store, familiar operator interfaces and less training effort for maintenance. Deviations are approved in writing by the operator. The Werksnorm, the wider plant standard, adds rules on colour scheme and documentation.
From practice
Without a plant standard, every supplier offers their own house brands. After three projects, maintenance has three control-system worlds and a store full of one-off parts. Attach the standard to the enquiry and require the bidder to name any deviations explicitly. The quote comparison then shows at once who sticks to it and who merely claims that a make is equivalent. If you do not have a standard, a single page with the most important components is enough to start. The suppliers fill the gaps, and you keep the decision. A standard that nobody maintains is waste paper again after two years, though.
Plant standardisation
Project management & CAPEXStandardisation of machine modules, controls and interfaces across several lines or plants to reduce variants, spare parts diversity and training effort. It affects mechanics, control systems and software equally, for example conveyor modules, tray packers, labellers or palletisers built to uniform principles. The basis is a library of approved modules and components with a version status, to which new projects refer. Where a standard exists, the URS only needs to state the deviations. Items that are typically unified include controller make, drive ranges, sensors and the operator interface.
From practice
When standardisation fails, it is rarely down to the technology. Usually it is unclear who decides what the standard is and who may deviate from it. Without a maintained library of approved modules with version numbers, the standard gets lost in special solutions after two projects. A small committee of engineering, maintenance and procurement that manages the standard saves more over the equipment’s lifetime than any individual negotiation. Deviations are allowed, but only with a reason and an entry in the library. Give the standard to the suppliers with the enquiry, so it is in the quotation and not first in the dispute after the order. See also plant standard and component standard.
Plastic pallet
IntralogisticsA pallet made from HDPE or PP, injection-moulded or thermoformed, in Euro and industrial sizes as well as special formats. Designs include versions with runners or feet and with open or closed decks, for hygiene areas usually with smooth surfaces that are easy to clean. Advantages are consistent dimensions and weight, hygienic cleanability, no splinters, nails or moisture absorption, and no ISPM-15 treatment for export. Disadvantages are higher price, lower stiffness under racking load and limited repairability.
From practice
In hygiene zones and automated warehouses, plastic pallets are superior thanks to their dimensional consistency. Wooden pallets with proud nail heads and warped runners are a common cause of faults at the stacker crane. Watch the load capacity figures. Static, dynamic and in racking they differ significantly, and lightweight versions can sag in flow racking. Plastic pallets are not an exchange item, so secure the pool against loss. Without booking or a deposit they vanish at the customer and turn up at a neighbouring company some day. Check how the pallet can be cleaned too, because ribs and cavities underneath can trap dirt.
PLC
Automation & roboticsA programmable logic controller, which processes sensor signals and drives actuators according to a user programme. It works cyclically: read inputs, execute the programme, write outputs. Its hardware consists of a CPU, input and output modules and the connection to a fieldbus or network. The programming languages are standardised in IEC 61131-3. Compact units, modular systems and PC-based soft PLCs exist, also with functions for axes and robots. In German mechanical engineering, controllers from Siemens (S7/TIA), Rockwell, B&R and Beckhoff are widely used. The PLC platform belongs in the user requirements specification, because maintenance and spare parts depend on it.
From practice
At the enquiry stage I ask which controller will be installed, because that decides who can look after the plant later. A standard controller, as is usual in Germany, is quickly mastered by your maintenance team or a service provider from the region. An exotic system is often in good hands only at the manufacturer itself. Require the source code, or at least backups, access credentials and the documentation of the signal allocation, meaning which sensor is wired to which input. Without these documents you depend on the supplier for every small thing and pay for every hour the supplier spends on site. The licence for the programming software belongs on the list too, otherwise you hold the programme but cannot open it.
Pneumatic cylinder
Mechanical engineering & componentsA linear compressed-air actuator for lifting and clamping movements, single- or double-acting, with end-position cushioning and magnetic sensors for position sensing. Standardised designs are profile and tie-rod cylinders per ISO 15552 and round cylinders per ISO 6432. In packaging machines they drive stoppers, pushers, grippers and pressing movements. A spring returns the piston in a single-acting cylinder, while a double-acting one is pressurised in both directions. Speed is set with flow control valves, and a magnet on the piston switches the sensors.
From practice
Cylinders are cheap. Their air consumption is not. On new equipment, check whether frequent movements would run better electrically: servo axes are adjustable and provide diagnostics. Where pneumatics stay, watch for end-position cushioning, correctly set flow restrictors and sensing of both end positions. A cylinder without a sensor is a classic cause of unexplained micro-stops. Even with one, the signal is only as good as the sensor’s position, and a sensor tends to slip a little in its groove after a modification. For vertical movements, clarify what happens when the pressure drops, whether the cylinder holds or sinks. That belongs in the risk assessment. In hygienic design, use stainless steel versions with smooth surfaces.
Pneumatics
Mechanical engineering & componentsDrive and control technology using compressed air. Cylinders, grippers and valves produce fast, simple movements on packaging machines. A compressor compresses the air, treatment and distribution carry it through lines and service units to the consumers, and valves control direction and flow. The components are cheap to buy and expensive to run, because generating compressed air takes a lot of energy and leaks cause losses. Pneumatic movements mostly run between two mechanical end positions, and intermediate positions are costly to achieve.
From practice
Compressed air is clearly more expensive than electricity in an electric drive, measured per unit of useful work. Leaks on older machines are therefore an invisible ongoing loss, which you hear best during a break when the hall is quiet. Check consumption and leaks during an Efficiency Day and replace continuous movements with servo drives. Also specify the air quality for food contact, with filter and dryer. Ask the supplier for the air consumption of the machine and have a shut-off valve fitted, so the machine can be separated from the network at weekends. A plant that produces nothing should not lose any air either.
Poka-yoke
KPIsTechnical measures that make errors impossible rather than just detecting them. The approach comes from the Toyota production system and goes back to Shigeo Shingo. A change part fits only in the correct position, a plug only in the correct socket. A distinction is made between solutions that prevent the error and those that report it immediately or stop the machine. Examples are coding on change parts, sensors that detect the wrong blank, and stops with a single possible position. The cheapest quality assurance is the kind that makes inspection unnecessary.
From practice
Poka-yoke on packaging lines is often simple. Change parts with coding that only fit one way, coloured markings at setting positions, sensors that detect the wrong blank. These small solutions prevent the most expensive mistakes, such as the wrong film on the product or the wrong label. Collect the faults from the downtime analysis and ask of each one how it can be made impossible. A classic is the change-part set that is built symmetrically and therefore also fits the wrong way round. Add a lug on one side and the problem is gone. Often a pressed-in pin or a different hole spacing is enough too. An instruction to the operator to be more careful is not poka-yoke, it is a wish.
Polyamide (PA, nylon)
Packaging technologyA plastic with high toughness, puncture resistance and good aroma and oxygen barrier, very good thermoformability and temperature resistance. As a layer in PA/PE laminates, polyamide is standard for vacuum and thermoformed packs of meat, cheese and sausage. The laminates are coextruded or laminated, and the PE side serves as the seal layer. As oriented film, BOPA, PA is used in thin laminates with high puncture resistance. The drawback is moisture: PA absorbs water, which reduces its barrier performance, and it makes the laminate harder to recycle.
From practice
PA/PE laminates are the reason thermoformed meat packs are so tough. They are also the reason these packs score poorly against the minimum standard for recyclability. Anyone switching to PE mono-material loses draw depth and puncture resistance and has to re-tune the change parts and process parameters of the thermoformer. Budget weeks for trial runs, not days, and bring the film supplier in early. Ask about reel storage too, because PA takes up moisture and then behaves differently. With every switch I first look at the product with the sharpest edges, with meat that means bones, because the thinner film gives way there first.
Polyethylene (LDPE / HDPE)
Packaging technologyThe most widely used packaging plastic, a semi-crystalline polyolefin that is lighter than water. LDPE (low density) is soft, stretchy and easily sealable, typical for pouches, shrink film and seal layers in laminates. LLDPE is the basis of stretch film. HDPE (high density) is stiffer, stronger and more opaque, and is found in bottles, canisters, caps and thin carrier bags. Films are mostly made by blown film extrusion, often as multilayer coextrusions. PE has low water-vapour permeability but a poor oxygen barrier, and it softens at comparatively low temperatures.
From practice
PE is forgiving in processing, but it cannot take heat. Hot filling and sterilisation are beyond the material, and that is where PP or PET come in. With films, look at the formulation. Slip and anti-block additives change the friction coefficient and the sealing behaviour, and a supplier change to the same PE rarely means the same running behaviour. Because the soft film stretches, it reacts to excessive web tension: the print image drifts and the film gets thinner. For mono-material packs, PE with an EVOH barrier is a common alternative to PA/PE laminates. Plan separate trials for it, because the film runs differently from the laminate it replaces.
Polypropylene (PP / BOPP)
Packaging technologyA semi-crystalline polyolefin that is stiffer and more heat-resistant than PE, and therefore suitable for hot filling and microwave use. Biaxially oriented film (BOPP) is clear, glossy and tear-resistant and is the standard for flow-wrap and label films. It is often supplied with coextruded seal layers, because BOPP on its own seals poorly. Metallised and opaque versions are also common. Unoriented cast PP (CPP) serves as a seal layer in laminates. Pots, trays and closures are injection-moulded or thermoformed. Weaknesses are brittleness in the cold and a limited oxygen barrier.
From practice
BOPP runs fast and cleanly on flow wrappers when seal layer, friction coefficient and thickness match the machine. Anyone changing the film should reset the sealing temperature window and web tracking and not trust the values of the old roll. On frozen goods, PP becomes brittle below zero, so cracks at the seal seam or fold are not a machine fault. Ask the supplier for a grade made for deep freeze before you go looking at the machine. For pots and trays in hot-fill or microwave use, PP is usually the more economical choice over PET. Run the trays through a hot-fill trial, because distortion shows up in operation and not on the data sheet.
Power and force limiting (PFL)
Quality & safetyAn operating mode of human-robot collaboration in which contact between robot and person is permitted because forces and pressures are limited. Alongside it stand safety-rated monitored stop, hand guiding, and speed and separation monitoring. ISO/TS 15066 sets out the biomechanical limit values per body region, for clamping and for impact contact, and rests on pain thresholds. Compliance is checked on the real application with a force and pressure measuring device, not derived only from robot data, because gripper, workpiece and motion determine the contact force.
From practice
A cobot is not automatically safe. The gripper, workpiece and application determine whether the limits are met. A pointed gripper or a heavy part breaks any force measurement, and the pinch points between robot and machine edge are usually not on anyone’s radar at first. Have the collision forces measured and recorded at the actual contact points, usually at reduced speed, which then sets the cycle time. Ask the supplier which body regions he considered in the design, because head and face are particularly sensitive. Often a guard with a laser scanner is more productive than a slow-creeping cobot.
PPWR (EU Packaging and Packaging Waste Regulation)
Quality & safetyThe EU’s Packaging and Packaging Waste Regulation (Regulation (EU) 2025/40), in force since February 2025 and applicable from August 2026. It replaces the earlier Packaging Directive and applies directly in the member states. It sets phased requirements on recyclability, recycled content, empty space and labelling of packaging, plus substance restrictions and rules on reuse. Manufacturers, fillers, importers and distributors of packaging are affected. For manufacturing operations, every packaging change means checking formats, packaging materials and machines.
From practice
The PPWR requires recyclable packaging, recycled content and less empty space, with deadlines from 2030. For machine operators this means material switches such as mono-material and thinner films, and changed case dimensions. Mono films often seal differently from the old laminate, and the sealing window can get narrower. Recycled content in film tends to vary in thickness and friction, and the machine notices that first. Check now which of your packaging is affected and whether your machines can process the new materials. Run machine trials with the new material before you order film in series. With every new purchase, ask about the range of materials the machine handles, and not the format range alone.
An inspection of a machine at the supplier’s site before the official FAT. This is either an internal trial run in which the supplier checks whether the machine is ready for FAT, or a preliminary check attended by the customer. Typical checks cover completeness against the requirements specification, basic functions, safety devices, accessibility and documentation, often still without a performance run. A pre-FAT is not an acceptance in the contractual sense and is generally not linked to payments. The outcome is a list of points to be worked off before the FAT. Only at the FAT are the agreed acceptance criteria formally demonstrated. Pre-FATs are most useful for special-purpose machines and integrated lines, since changes are still cheap at this stage.
From practice
The flights to the FAT are booked, and the machine is not finished yet. People travel anyway, and on site the FAT turns into a pre-FAT with a long list of defects, but nobody calls it that. So before every FAT I ask the supplier to send me the record of their internal pre-FAT. If it is missing or full of open items, I would rather postpone the trip than stand around next to the machine for two days. When you attend the pre-FAT yourself, take someone from maintenance and an experienced operator with you. They will see at once whether the format parts can be reached, whether the control panel hangs at a sensible height and where you scrape your hands during cleaning. At this stage a change like that costs a few hours in the workshop. After the SAT it becomes a variation order.
Pre-stretch
Packaging technologyStretching of the stretch film between two rollers of the wrapping unit running at different speeds, before the film is laid onto the pallet. The second roller runs faster than the first, and the speed ratio sets the stretch ratio. Pre-stretch is given as a percentage. Stretched film is longer and thinner and develops restoring forces that hold the load together, so film consumption per pallet falls for the same holding force. The pre-stretch gearbox either works with a fixed ratio or can be adjusted through its own drive. It sits in the film carriage of the stretch wrapper.
From practice
Film cost per pallet depends almost more on pre-stretch than on the film price. A cheaper reel achieves little if it stretches worse on your machine. Standard is a motorised pre-stretch gearbox with a constant stretch ratio, but the film must match the set stretch. Too much and it tears, too little and you waste film. To check that the machine really stretches as displayed, draw two lines ten centimetres apart on the film before the rollers and measure them again afterwards. Dirty or worn rollers slip, and then the display shows a value the film never sees. In film trials, weigh the film per pallet, check holding force and load security, and fix stretch and number of wraps as a standard. Otherwise the night shift turns the stretch down because the film keeps tearing, and nobody finds out.
Predictive maintenance
Automation & roboticsA maintenance strategy in which work is carried out when the actual condition of a component calls for it, and not at a fixed interval. It is based on measured data such as vibration at bearings and gearboxes, temperatures and motor currents. Condition monitoring, which records the condition and reports when limits are exceeded, has to be distinguished from genuine prediction, which estimates the remaining service life from a data history. The starting point is usually condition monitoring. Prediction needs data from several failures and operating states and pays off first on expensive, critical assemblies. It also differs from reactive maintenance after a failure and from preventive maintenance on a fixed schedule.
From practice
Before anyone screws sensors onto motors, the equipment list should be right. Maintenance plans, a spare parts stock and honest downtime recording come on top. Without them you get pretty curves and no better maintenance. The data from motors and bearings is usually good. It gets harder afterwards, because somebody has to receive the warning and decide on the maintenance date, and the spare part should be in the store. Without that chain it stays a dashboard. Start with the assemblies whose failure costs most, usually the drives on the filler and the palletiser. Limits set too tight trigger false alarms at night, and by the third alarm without a finding nobody looks any more.
Preform
Packaging technologyAn injection-moulded PET blank with a finished thread, from which the bottle is formed in the stretch-blow moulder. The machine heats the preform, stretches it with a stretch rod and blows it up with compressed air in the blow mould. Neck and thread stay unchanged in the process. In the two-stage process the preform is moulded separately and stored, in the one-stage process blowing follows directly after injection. Weight and design of the preform determine bottle quality, wall thickness distribution and material cost. Neck and thread must match the closure.
From practice
Lighter preforms save material, but they make the bottle more sensitive at the filler, at the capper and on the pallet. Every preform change is a line trial. That means blow profile, top-load test and behaviour in the labeller. Source closure and preform from a matched supplier pair, otherwise thread problems are hard to trace back to a cause. Also ask how the preform arrives and how it is stored. Dust and scratches on the surface show up later as faults on the bottle, and a change of batch can shift the heating behaviour although nothing has changed on paper. When you change preform supplier, keep retained samples of the old batch for comparison.
Prepackaged Goods Regulation (Fertigpackungsverordnung)
Quality & safetyRegulates permissible fill quantity deviations and inspection duties for prepackaged goods under German law. It is based on the average-quantity principle. The packs must contain at least the stated nominal quantity on average, and individual packs may fall short of it only by a permissible minus tolerance. In practice this is implemented through calibratable checkweighers with documented sampling or 100% inspection. The data from them also serves as the basis for give-away management and accrues practically for free. Compliance is supervised by the calibration authority.
From practice
For the line, the regulation means calibratable checkweighers, documented sampling or 100% inspection, traceable rejection of faulty packs and retention of the inspection data. The average-quantity rule allows small minus deviations on individual packs as long as the average is correct. Anyone who uses this margin noticeably reduces give-away. The precondition is dosing with low variability, otherwise the target value has to stay high. Ask the supplier for the variability with your product and not the one from the brochure. A fill control based on the trend keeps the average stable. Settle doubtful points of interpretation with the calibration authority, not over a beer at the pub.
Pressure-sensitive adhesive (PSA)
Packaging technologyA permanently tacky adhesive on self-adhesive labels and tapes that bonds through applied pressure alone, without heat or solvents. Common types are acrylic dispersions (ageing-resistant, food-suitable) and rubber hot-melts (high initial tack). Distinctions are drawn between permanent, removable and freezer-grade formulations. Characteristic values are adhesion, meaning the bond to the substrate, cohesion as the internal strength of the adhesive layer, and initial tack. Full bond strength builds up only over some time after application.
From practice
Labels that fall off in cold storage or shift on wet bottles are almost always an adhesive issue. Standard acrylic adheres poorly at low temperatures, and low-surface-energy substrates like PE need specialty adhesives. Clarify substrate, application temperature and service temperature separately, because an adhesive that grips cleanly at the dispensing point is still far from holding in cold storage. A label that is stacked or chilled straight after application has not yet reached its final bond, either. For direct food contact, the adhesive must be listed in the label’s declaration of compliance, not just the facestock.
Pressure sensor
Mechanical engineering & componentsA sensor that detects pressure and converts it into an electrical signal, usually as a 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 V analogue signal or digitally via IO-Link. The sensing element, often a diaphragm with strain gauges or a ceramic measuring cell, deforms under pressure, and the electronics convert the deformation into a measuring signal. A distinction is made between gauge pressure relative to ambient, absolute pressure relative to vacuum and differential pressure between two ports. Electronic pressure switches have switching outputs, often in addition to the analogue signal. Food plants use flush diaphragms in hygienic process connections so that no product can lodge there. Typical measuring points are compressed air supply, vacuum circuits, hydraulics and pump outlets.
From practice
Pressure sensors rarely fail on their own. More often they die from pressure peaks nobody had on their radar. A hydraulic valve switches hard, the pressure shoots far beyond the measuring range for a few milliseconds, and a few weeks later the zero point starts to drift. So besides the measuring range, ask about overload pressure and burst pressure, and fit a snubber in front of the sensor on hydraulic systems. In hygienic areas the flush diaphragm is delicate. A screwdriver used to scrape off deposits is all it takes to ruin the sensor. With absolute pressure sensors in a vacuum circuit, check that the HMI shows the right unit. At normal air pressure, minus 0.8 bar gauge and 200 mbar absolute are roughly the same thing, but they look very different on the screen.
Price escalation clause
CommercialA contract clause that links the agreed price to changes in particular costs, such as materials, energy or wages. The price is split into a fixed portion and one or more variable portions. Each variable portion is tied to an index, for example a producer price index for steel or copper from the German Federal Statistical Office. Adjustment follows a formula comparing the index value at the reference date with the value at the base date. The clause names the indices precisely, the base and reference dates, where applicable a threshold below which no adjustment is made, and a cap. Such clauses are common with long delivery times and in framework agreements. In Germany their validity is governed by the Price Clauses Act and the law on standard business terms.
From practice
Suppliers with long delivery times want protection against rising material prices, and that is understandable. Check carefully what the escalation applies to. A good deal of the money in a special purpose machine goes into design, software, installation and commissioning, and none of that follows the steel index. I accept escalation only on the share that really is material, and only in both directions. If the index falls, the price falls too. The reference date in the clause should be the contractual delivery date, not the actual one. Otherwise a supplier who delivers late even profits from the delay. Have the calculation presented with the index values at every adjustment and check the figures yourself. If you put such a clause into your own purchasing conditions, have a lawyer look over it.
Price labeller (weigh-price labeller)
Packaging technologyA combination of scale, printer and labeller that weighs variable-weight products such as meat, cheese or fruit, calculates the price from weight and unit price, and applies the label. The pack runs over a weighing belt, the scale usually determines the weight on the move, and the label is printed and applied from above, from below or from the side. Scales used in trade are subject to legal metrology rules and must therefore be approved for verification. Depending on the retailer’s specification, the label carries weight, price, unit price, dates and barcode. The prices come from the article master data.
From practice
Approval for legal-for-trade use, label layout to the retailer’s specification and the link to the article master data are the core points when buying. Check the output with your real product mix, and check the infeed as well. Misaligned packs cost more output than the scale itself does. I always ask who maintains the prices and how they get into the machine. With promotional prices and price changes a clean data transfer matters, and manual entry at the panel is a classic source of errors. Also ask how the weighing belt is cleaned, because residues of meat juice or cheese affect the weighing. Plan for the roll changes, because at high output the roll is empty sooner than you think.
Primary packaging
Packaging technologyThe packaging in direct contact with the product, for example a pouch, bottle, cup, can or blister. It protects the product against environmental influences and mechanical stress and carries the product information. For food and pharma, specific requirements apply to conformity, migration and hygiene, and for food the framework Regulation (EC) No 1935/2004 governs contact with materials. The primary packaging determines which machine packs the product. Distinction: secondary packaging groups several primary packs together, and tertiary packaging forms the load unit.
From practice
With the primary packaging you fix machine type, shelf life and recyclability in one go. Any change, whether thinner film, a new barrier or a different format, belongs on the machine before purchasing switches over. The typical trap looks like this: the packaging material supplier changes the specification slightly, sealing gets worse, and for weeks the fault is hunted for on the machine. Agree with the supplier that every change is reported beforehand, including raw material, plant and additives. Ask for batch certificates and keep samples from every delivery. If sealing suddenly gets worse, compare the old and new roll first and only then turn the settings.
Print-and-apply
Packaging technologyA labelling system that prints labels with variable data immediately before application, usually by thermal transfer or direct thermal printing, and then applies them to a case, pallet or product. In thermal transfer a ribbon carries the ink onto the label, in direct thermal printing heat-sensitive material changes colour without a ribbon. Application is by stamp, blow-air, swing arm or roller, depending on label size, surface and position of the adhesive side. Standard for shipping labels, batch marking and pallet labels with GS1-128. A scanner often checks readability and content after application.
From practice
Most of the time consumables are to blame when a print-and-apply system fails. Label rolls release badly from the liner, the ribbon does not suit the label material, the print head is dirty. Fix the label material and ribbon and source both from a single supplier. Check how fast the roll change is and whether a second unit is needed as redundancy. At pallet level the whole line otherwise stands when the label is missing. Dust from corrugated board and condensation on cold cases spoil adhesion, and a case that reaches the applicator crooked or too early gets its label in the wrong place. Label position and readability belong in the acceptance test, scanner included.
Print mark detection
Automation & roboticsSensor-based detection of a mark printed on printed film, usually by a contrast or colour sensor, to synchronise film feed, cutting and sealing with the print image. The mark is a small rectangle printed together with the artwork that stands out in colour from its background. Its position is compared with the setpoint, and the control system corrects the pull length so that every pack carries the print image at the same position. The sensor sits in the web ahead of cutting and sealing, for example on a flow wrapper. Without a print mark, cutting is done to a fixed length.
From practice
If the print image drifts, the control system is rarely to blame. Usually it is the film and the sensor: a mark with too little contrast, a mark too close to the web edge, varying repeat length between rolls, dirty sensor optics. Film flutter in front of the sensor throws it off as well. Agree mark position, size and colour with the film supplier and put them into the packaging material specification. At roll changeover the mark must sit in the same position, splice included. You should also find out whether the machine stops or carries on cutting to a fixed length when it loses the mark. Carrying on produces scrap without anyone noticing.
Product grouping
Packaging technologyForming groups with a defined count and arrangement from a continuous product flow, for example ahead of a case packer, wrap-around packer, shrink packer or palletiser. Usually a lane divider first splits the flow into several lanes. The products are then spaced, counted and pushed together into the finished group, and turned if required. Mechanical solutions such as a timing screw or stop fingers are tied to the format. Servo-driven belts and multi-carrier systems with independently driven carriers offer more flexibility. Products arriving in random order are picked into groups by delta robots. Singulation, meaning the creation of a defined gap between individual products, is one sub-step of this.
From practice
If the micro stops at the end of the line keep piling up, take a look at the grouping. This is where products arrive after travelling with gaps and under back pressure, and the outfeed demands an exactly counted group. Soft bags shingle over each other under pressure, slim bottles topple when turned, and smooth cartons keep sliding although the stop finger closed long ago. Run the grouping at the FAT with real product, and in its least favourable condition. Goods coming out of chilled storage with condensation behave differently from dry samples taken from the warehouse. Clarify in advance how the machine deals with an incomplete group. A clean reject path is better than an operator who tops up missing products by hand and reaches into the danger zone while doing it.
Product infeed
Packaging technologyThe complete set of equipment that transfers products from the process or from containers to the packaging machine in the correct orientation, singulated and at the right rate. It includes conveyor belts, incline conveyors, vibratory chutes, distributors, orientation stations and robots. Typical tasks are singulating, orienting, timing and merging several lanes into one. The infeed limits the achievable net output of the machine and affects gentle product handling. It is often the most demanding part of the line. Sensors report gaps and jams to the control system so that the packaging machine does not run empty.
From practice
The packaging machine is rarely the problem, the infeed almost always is. Products arrive in surges, lie the wrong way, stick together or are too warm. Describe in the user requirements specification how the product actually arrives, with temperature, rate, orientation and variation. Make the manufacturer share responsibility for the infeed, otherwise everyone points at someone else. A test with real product at the manufacturer’s works belongs to the compulsory programme. Watch for operators who keep helping by hand, straightening products or clearing jams. That is a sure sign the infeed cannot carry the cycle rate, even if the machine reaches its output on paper.
Production line
Automation & roboticsA sequence of machines and plant that makes a product from raw material to a dispatch-ready unit, linked by conveyor technology, buffers and a common control system. In the food industry it covers the supply of raw materials, processing by grinding, mixing, cooking or baking, packing by filling or wrapping, labelling with a label and best-before date, and transport to storage and dispatch. Processing depends on the product: a juice line contains a juice press and filters, a biscuit line ovens and conveyor belts. The packing section is called the packaging line.
From practice
A line is only as good as how it is interlinked. Buffers, speed control and a shared operating concept decide the overall availability. Without buffers the availabilities of the individual machines multiply, so two machines at 90 per cent each give only 81 per cent on paper. A fast single machine therefore achieves little if everything behind it stands still. When expanding, identify the bottleneck first, then invest. Name one person responsible for the whole line as well, otherwise every supplier only optimises their own machine. And check at layout stage whether maintenance staff can reach every machine. A line that looks tight and tidy on the plan is often the one where nobody can swap anything later.
Production order
Digitalisation & AIAn internal order instructing production to make a specific material in a defined quantity by a defined date. It is usually created in the ERP system from a customer order or from requirements planning and takes the bill of materials and routing from the master data. Once released, it goes to the shop floor, in many plants via the MES, which assigns it to a line, passes it on to the machines and records the confirmations. Confirmed quantities include good output, scrap, times, material consumption and batches. Depending on the system it is also called a manufacturing order or process order. It differs from a customer order in that it controls internal production rather than delivery to the customer.
From practice
In the ERP system the production order looks tidy. At the line it often hangs as a printout on the control cabinet, and the shift types item, batch and best-before date by hand into the coder and the labeller. One transposed digit in the date and a whole pallet goes for rework, or in the worse case into a recall. When you plan a new line, decide early how the order reaches the machine and which data flow automatically to coding and labelling. That belongs in the interface list, not in commissioning. The second classic is the confirmation. If scrap is estimated at the end of the shift instead of counted, the stock in the ERP soon stops matching the stock in the warehouse. Sooner or later purchasing orders film based on figures that have nothing to do with the shelves.
PROFINET
Automation & roboticsAn Ethernet-based fieldbus standard for communication between the controller, drives, sensors and valve terminals, widely used in the Siemens world and supported by many other manufacturers. The controller acts as IO controller and the field devices as IO devices, which are addressed by their device name. A cycle-synchronous variant exists for motion tasks. The PROFIsafe safety profile carries safety-related signals over the same cable. Networks can be built as a line, star or ring. Its predecessor is the serial PROFIBUS. The fieldbus landscape of the existing plant belongs in the user requirements specification for new machines, because gateways cost money and patience.
From practice
In Germany PROFINET is so common that you rarely run into a dead end with suppliers and spare parts. It becomes a problem only when nobody knows any more how the network is built. I therefore ask for a list of device names, IP addresses and network topology on new installations. When a node is replaced, the new device must receive exactly the name the controller expects, otherwise it stays silent. If the controller is replaced years later, this list is worth its weight in gold. For third-party devices such as scales or printers, ask whether PROFINET is really needed or a simple I/O coupling will do. Every additional network device has to be configured and documented, and sooner or later replaced.
Project charter (one-page project brief)
Project management & CAPEXA one-page short description of a project with goal, trigger, scope of supply, budget range, dates, project manager and client. It is drawn up before approval and serves as the shared starting point for the investment request, the user requirements specification and the kick-off. Exclusions, assumptions, expected benefit and rough risks are often added. Changes to goal or scope are tracked in the charter so that it remains the single current version. In project management methodology it corresponds roughly to the project charter.
From practice
The charter forces you to say what the goal is and what it explicitly is not. A common mistake is a charter that describes only the technology and names no measurable benefit. Then the plant and head office argue later about whether the project was a success, and both are right because nothing measurable is on paper. Write down which figure is supposed to change and by how much, for example output or staffing per shift. Keep it to one page and state exclusions and assumptions. Assumptions such as a promised hall area or an existing compressed air connection are the first to be forgotten. Have the client and production management sign it before you request quotes.
Project manager
Project management & CAPEXThe person responsible for the goal, schedule, budget and quality of an investment project. They plan the project, direct suppliers and trades, lead the project team, report to the client and the steering committee, and escalate when decisions are missing. Besides leadership, communication and organisation, they need technical understanding of the plant and a clear mandate. The mandate defines what they can decide themselves, where they get support and which decisions stay with the client. If internal capacity or experience is lacking, the role can be filled externally, see interim project management.
From practice
Most projects do not fail on the technology but on a missing mandate. A project manager with no budget or decision-making authority becomes a minute-taker: they collect wishes, carry them upwards and wait. Set the mandate down in writing, with the escalation route and cover. It should also say who may give instructions to the supplier, because otherwise the line suddenly has three bosses. On packaging projects the project manager must think machine, packaging material and production together. Anyone who knows only one side misses the interfaces, and those get expensive later. If internal time or experience is lacking, interim project management can take over the role.
Project schedule
Project management & CAPEXThe time structure of a project with activities, durations, dependencies and milestones, usually shown as a bar chart. It is derived from the work breakdown structure by assigning duration and predecessors to each work package. The critical path is the chain of activities whose delay pushes the end of the project back directly. Buffers and management attention belong there. Activities off the critical path have float that can be used up without moving the end date. The approved plan is frozen as a baseline, and the running plan shows the deviation. Shifts in milestone dates can be followed in a milestone trend analysis.
From practice
A usable project schedule contains your own obligations to cooperate alongside the supplier dates: samples, approvals, civil works, utility connections and staff for FAT and SAT. Many delays originate on the operator’s side and still get blamed on the supplier. Update the schedule weekly and keep buffers free before Christmas and the works holidays, because then both you and the supplier are short of people. Report slippage immediately, including the unpleasant kind. Put the approval of samples and layout into the plan as milestones of their own, because the supplier tends to wait a long time for exactly those. For every supplier schedule I ask what it needs from the operator’s side and by when, because that is where the hidden delays sit.
Project status report
Project management & CAPEXA regular report from the project manager to the client and the steering committee, usually monthly. It contains a RAG (red-amber-green) status for schedule, cost, scope and quality, the milestones reached, the cost forecast, the biggest risks, open decisions and the next steps. The cost forecast gives the expected final cost, the estimate at completion, and not just the amount spent so far. Details are attached as appendices such as the risk register and the open points list. A good report fits on one page and states clearly which decision is needed from the client.
From practice
Status lights that are always green eventually go unread. Set amber as soon as a forecast turns, and not just once the date has actually been missed. Separate facts such as a milestone reached or an invoice checked from assessments, otherwise the steering committee ends up debating moods. On the cost line show the expected final cost instead of the spend to date, which says little about the end. State what you need from the client, with a date: a decision, a budget, a staffing commitment. A report with no ask is just a record. I look first at the line with the open decisions, and if nothing stands there, I read the rest with suspicion.
Proximity switch (inductive / capacitive)
Mechanical engineering & componentsA non-contact sensor that detects the presence of an object within its sensing range and outputs a switching signal. Inductive proximity switches generate a high-frequency alternating field and respond to metal that damps this field. Their rated sensing distance refers to steel and is smaller for aluminium, brass or stainless steel, except with factor 1 sensors. Capacitive proximity switches evaluate a change in an electric field and also detect plastic, cardboard, granules or liquids, in some cases through a container wall. Common designs are threaded cylindrical housings and rectangular housings, each for flush or non-flush mounting. Outputs are PNP or NPN, normally open or normally closed, increasingly with IO-Link. The relevant standard is IEC 60947-5-2.
From practice
Before you replace a proximity switch, check whether it is actually faulty. Often only the distance has changed because the bracket took a knock or the lock nut came loose. An inductive sensor that was set up on a steel part and is now supposed to detect stainless steel switches later or not at all. Capacitive sensors react to moisture and product build-up. A film of water after wet cleaning can trigger them if the sensitivity is set too fine. Decide plant-wide which housing styles, thread sizes and connectors you use, otherwise countless variants pile up in the stores. Watch PNP versus NPN as well. A sensor with the wrong output looks no different in the storage bin. You only find out at the machine, when it does nothing.
Punch list
Project management & CAPEXA list of the defects and remaining work that are open at acceptance. Each item has a description, an owner, a deadline and an assessment of whether it blocks acceptance. Where applicable, an amount is retained until the item is closed. It is drawn up at acceptance, attached to the acceptance protocol and updated until final acceptance. The assessment often follows a defect classification. Run with discipline it is the tool for actually finishing a project, while without discipline it grows into a never-ending building site.
From practice
There is hardly a more important document between SAT and final acceptance. Every open point needs an owner, a date and an assessment of whether it blocks acceptance. I always keep the list myself. If the supplier keeps it, the supplier’s version is the one that counts in the end. Tick off completed points only once you have seen the result on the machine. Tie the final payment to the list, and to the status you have confirmed. Points that stay open for a long time are, experience shows, never completed once there is no pressure left. When the fitter is already at the next customer, the spare part for a minor matter is suddenly no longer urgent.
Puncture resistance
Quality & safetyEnergy absorbed by a pyramid-shaped test probe when puncturing a corrugated board sample, given in joules per DIN EN ISO 3036. The value describes resistance to impact from edges, corners and pointed objects during transport. It is especially relevant for heavy or angular pack contents. Multi-wall boards and liners of virgin fibre generally reach higher values than single-wall boards with recycled liners. For stacking strength, the edge crush test is more informative, and burst strength is more informative for internal pressure.
From practice
High puncture resistance is needed when metal parts, bottles or equipment with corners travel in corrugated board, or when cartons knock against each other in parcel networks. Switching from virgin-fibre to recycled linerboard often lowers this value noticeably without the ECT dropping significantly. The transport damage then shows up weeks later, and nobody connects it with the paper change. When materials change, therefore carry out puncture and burst testing alongside ECT. For angular contents, write the minimum value into the packaging specification and have the supplier’s test certificate confirm that the value is actually measured. Knowing only weight and ECT says nothing yet about the corner of the product.
Purchase order
CommercialA binding declaration by the buyer to the supplier to obtain a defined scope under set conditions. It contains the order number, the scope with reference to the quotation and a particular revision of the user requirement specification, quantity, price, delivery date, delivery address, Incoterms, payment terms and purchasing conditions. The supplier confirms it with an order confirmation. If the two differ, it has to be clarified which version applies. Within the ERP system the purchase order usually follows a purchase requisition from the requesting department, and goods receipt and invoice are later matched against it. In companies with a CAPEX process, a purchase order for an investment requires prior approval of the capital expenditure request.
From practice
Machines are often negotiated for weeks, and in the end the purchase order refers to the original quotation. Whatever was agreed in the negotiation minutes may then appear nowhere. So list every document in the order, with its revision and an order of precedence in case they contradict each other. Then read the order confirmation. Really read it, line by line. It likes to contain an expected rather than a binding date, a reference to the supplier’s own terms of delivery or an item that has suddenly become optional. Object in writing and straight away. And order nothing before the investment has been approved. The supplier will be delighted with the early order, the controller rather less so.
Q
Quality rate
KPIsShare of good output in total production over a run time. Losses arise from rejects, rework and start-up losses after changeovers. The quality rate is the third factor of OEE. On packaging lines it mainly covers packs ejected at the checkweigher, metal detector and vision system. Not every ejected pack is actually bad. Good product ejected wrongly is called pseudo-reject and pulls the rate down. Rejects can be classified by cause into machine, packaging material and product.
From practice
The quality rate in OEE captures rejects and rework. On packaging lines these are mostly packs ejected at the checkweigher, at the metal detector or in the vision system. Assign a cause to every reject: machine, packaging material or product. Without that split you cannot say whether the machine, the supplier or upstream production is the problem, and in the end all three argue. Also look at how many of the ejected packs are in truth good. A look into the reject bin tells you more about that than any rate. Even a wrongly set detector produces rejects that neither machine nor supplier can do anything about.
Quotation comparison matrix
Project management & CAPEXA tabular comparison of several quotations against the requirements of the URS. The rows cover performance, scope of supply, exclusions, price, operating costs, deadlines and references, the columns the bidders. All quotations are normalised to the same scope by adding missing items at an assessed value. Evaluation can be purely descriptive or use weighting and points, in which case it becomes a cause and effect matrix. The matrix is updated until the award is decided.
From practice
Without a matrix, you compare quotation texts that every manufacturer structures differently, and in the end the one who writes most nicely wins. With a matrix, exclusions become visible: missing change parts, factory assembly instead of delivery to site, no training. The small print behind the word optional costs money later. Enter missing items with your own assessed value, and the cheapest bidder often lands in the middle. This template is exactly part of the Tender Package, and it is yours for future projects. Run queries to the bidders in writing and enter the answers in the matrix, so the decision stays traceable later.
R
R-ratings for industrial flooring
Quality & safetySlip-resistance classes R9 to R13 to DIN 51130 for workrooms and work areas with increased slip risk. Measured on an inclined plane: a floor sample wetted with test oil is tilted until the test person slips, and the greater the angle, the higher the class. The angles range from 6 to 10 degrees for R9 to over 35 degrees for R13. R9 to R10 apply to dry areas, R11 to R12 to damp production and wet areas, and R13 to oil- and grease-laden zones. For profiled coverings, the displacement volume V4 to V10 is added, stating how much space for liquid remains below the walking surface.
From practice
More slip resistance means more cleaning effort. R13 belongs only where oil, grease or moisture genuinely occur. For most packaging areas R11 to R12 is the better balance of safety, cleanability and cost. Fix the R-class per zone as early as the layout stage, because a floor roughened or recoated later means downtime and is expensive. Think about the transitions too. Where a smooth area meets a rough one, the truck brakes and the cleaning trolley struggles. And slip resistance does not last forever. Wear and a film of grease left by cleaning take something off it, so a floor that was R12 at acceptance may have less after a few years.
A method for assigning roles to tasks, shown as a matrix with the tasks in the rows and the people involved in the columns. For each task every participant gets one letter: Responsible does the work, Accountable answers for the result and decides, Consulted is asked before the decision, Informed is told afterwards. Accountable may be assigned only once per task. The matrix prevents the situation in which everyone felt responsible and nobody was, especially at the seams between operator, supplier and integrator.
From practice
On packaging projects a RACI matrix mainly clarifies who decides. Production wants throughput, quality wants hygiene, purchasing wants price and maintenance wants spare parts. Without clear ownership every question goes to a meeting, and in the end the person who stays longest in the room decides. One page is enough, agreed at the kick-off: who writes the user requirements specification, who signs off the layout, who runs acceptance and who is merely informed. Check that every row has exactly one A. If there are two, they argue, and if there is none, everyone waits for someone else. Too many Cs are a warning sign too, because then every decision drags on.
Ramp-up curve
KPIsPlanned progression of the performance of a new or modified plant from first production up to rated output. The curve sets target values per week or per milestone, usually for output, availability and rejects. It reflects the learning phase of machine, operators and packaging materials, during which the plant does not yet run at full performance. A realistic ramp-up curve with milestones belongs in the contract. The assumption of full output from the first day of production is unrealistic and puts the assessment of the whole project at risk.
From practice
Ask for the curve before the order is placed, not after the kick-off. It sets what output, availability and rejects should be in each week, and shows early whether the project is on track. Write the measurement method into the contract at the same time, otherwise the supplier reads a different figure from you. The machine is rarely what holds back the ramp-up. Packaging materials vary, the operators have no routine yet, and the interface to the peripherals sticks. Plan training and operator support into the first weeks, night shift included. And clarify who stays reachable at the supplier until the end of the curve.
Ramp-up management
Project management & CAPEXPlanning and control of the period between the first production order on a new or modified line and the point at which it reaches its target output. It follows on from technical commissioning and concerns organisation, personnel and materials. Ramp-up management includes a planned start-up curve with targets for output and OEE, support from supplier personnel on all shifts, operator training, the availability of spare parts, a daily downtime analysis and working through the open points list. The ramp-up counts as complete once the agreed criteria have been met and the line has been handed over to production. Closely related is the ramp-up phase, which tends to describe the period, whereas ramp-up management refers to the activity.
From practice
The supplier’s commissioning engineer goes home after the SAT, and the line runs on the early shift. On the night shift it stands still. That is no coincidence, because during the day there was always someone around who knew where to press. So negotiate shift support for the first weeks together with the purchase order, while you still have something to negotiate with. And bring sales into the planning. They have often already promised volumes based on nameplate output rather than on the start-up curve. A short daily round at the line covering the most frequent stoppage reasons from the previous day does more than any weekly report. Format changes and new articles only come in once the main format runs steadily.
Ramp-up phase
Project management & CAPEXThe run-up of a new line from commissioning to planned series output. It begins after successful commissioning and ends when the production figures are stable at the target level, for example output, quality rate and availability. Typical disturbances are bottlenecks, variation in packaging materials and raw materials, operator errors and parameters not yet optimised. The progress is shown in a ramp-up curve that plots actual output against plan.
From practice
Plan the ramp-up as its own project phase with milestones, an escalation path and a daily look at the OEE, not as an add-on to acceptance. Keep supplier personnel available during the first weeks of production. A service engineer who can only come the day after tomorrow is too late in this phase. Collect all faults in a single list, each with an owner and a date, otherwise every shift has its own truth. Anyone who mixes the ramp-up with ongoing production never finds the cause of a fault, because several parameters keep shifting at once. So change only one setting per shift where possible, and write down what you changed.
Rated output vs. net output
Packaging technologyRated output is the maximum cycle rate per minute a machine is mechanically designed for. Net output is the good output actually achieved over a period, after deducting stops, changeovers, reel changes and rejects. Between the two lie the factors of OEE, which are availability, performance and quality rate. Rated output is a figure under ideal conditions, while net output depends on the product, the packaging material and the format mix. For the investment case and the performance test, net output at line level is what counts.
From practice
Brochures quote rated output, lines deliver net output. In planning the gap is often set too small. Ask the manufacturer for the output with your product, your packaging material and your format mix, and define in the functional specification how and over what duration it is measured. A short measurement at the best moment says little about a shift with reel changes, changeovers and breaks. Anyone who uses rated output as the planning basis under-sizes buffers and staffing. On new projects I calculate backwards, from the number of good packs a shift has to deliver to the cycle rate the machine has to hold in daily operation. Only then do I see whether the machine fits the task.
Reactive power compensation
Production & energyA method of reducing the reactive power a plant draws from the grid. Motors and transformers need reactive power for their magnetic field. It oscillates between grid and load, does no work and still loads cables and transformers. The ratio of active power to apparent power is called the power factor. Capacitors supply the reactive power locally. A distinction is made between individual compensation at the load, group compensation and central compensation at the main distribution board, where a controller switches capacitor stages in as required. Where frequency inverters generate harmonics, detuned systems with reactors are used to prevent resonance. If the power factor falls below the agreed value, the grid operator charges for the reactive energy.
From practice
The compensation unit usually hangs in a corner of the main distribution board, and hardly anyone remembers when it was last checked. Capacitors age, stages fail, and one day reactive energy appears on the electricity bill. A glance at the controller often shows that it no longer reaches its target value. Extensions are where it gets interesting. If a new line with lots of inverters comes in, an old system without detuning reactors can go into resonance. Then capacitors run hot and fuses blow. The search starts at the new machine, although the cause sits in the main distribution board. Have the power quality measured and the compensation checked before larger investments. At low load at night and at weekends the controller should switch stages off. Fixed capacitors do not, and the supply tips over into capacitive.
Rear-entry protection (anti-hide-behind protection)
Quality & safetyA measure against a person remaining unnoticed between a safeguard and the danger point. If someone can pass a light curtain and then stand behind it without being detected, the machine must not restart on its own. Restart takes place only after a deliberate reset from a position with a view of the whole danger zone. Possible solutions are additional beams, pressure-sensitive mats, laser scanners with a protective field, or a reset button mounted outside with a clear view. The problem arises mainly in large cells with a danger zone that a person can walk into.
From practice
Rear-entry protection is often forgotten in layouts because the space behind the light curtain looks tight on paper. In practice, operators stand there to reload packaging materials or to clean, and they will tell you so if you ask where they stand. I check every safeguard by asking whether someone can stand behind it and who sees them when it is reset. The reset button must sit outside the danger zone and give a view of the whole area. At acceptance, walk behind the light curtain yourself once, before the line is started. If you can stand there and resetting still works, the safeguard is not finished.
Reason code catalogue
Digitalisation & AIA standardised list of reasons used to record downtime and losses in production data collection and the MES and to evaluate them in OEE. The reasons form a tree. Its top level separates, for example, planned stops, technical faults, material shortages, organisational causes and quality problems, followed below by machines and assemblies down to the individual cause. Each reason has a unique code and is assigned to an OEE loss category, that is availability, performance or quality. Technical faults are often taken over automatically from the controller’s fault messages, while the operator selects organisational reasons at the terminal. A catalogue that is uniform across the plant makes lines and sites comparable.
From practice
In every downtime analysis I look first at the bar labelled other. If it is the longest, either the catalogue is no good or nobody has explained to people what it is for. Reasons such as general fault only describe the symptom and help nobody. A useful reason is one from which someone can derive a task. Keep a clean distinction between a machine that has a fault itself, one that is waiting for material and one that is blocked by a backlog downstream. Otherwise the cartoner collects the palletiser’s faults and gets maintenance on its back for them. Do not change the catalogue every week, or you can no longer compare one month with the last. And do not let every line invent its own list if you want to put plants side by side later.
Recipe management
Automation & roboticsManagement of product- or format-related parameter sets for a machine, meaning speeds, temperatures, positions, tolerances and camera jobs, in the controller, in the HMI or centrally in the MES. Recipes are created, released, versioned and loaded at changeover. Changes are possible only with the appropriate permission and remain traceable, for example through a change log with user, time and previous value. Recipes have to be kept apart from machine parameters such as axis limits or scalings, which do not change at format changeover. The released recipe serves as a reference against which the actual value can be checked.
From practice
The classic is the setter who maintains their own recipe, and after the shift change the machine runs differently. Lock recipe changes at operator level, set up a release process and keep the recipes in one place that is backed up regularly. A change should leave a name, a date and the old value behind, otherwise you later look for the culprit instead of the cause. On lines with several machines, a changeover should load all recipes at the same time, and the system should report when a parameter deviates from the released state. Try this at acceptance. Change a value, reload the recipe and wait to see whether the message comes. If not, you know why the machine runs differently after the late shift.
Recyclability
Quality & safetyProperty of a packaging to be processed into high-quality recyclate within the collection, sorting and recovery system actually in place. It says only that recycling is possible, not that it actually happens. Criteria under the minimum standard of the German central agency (Zentrale Stelle): sortability, separability of components, existing recovery infrastructure, and no disruptive substances such as black pigments, unsuitable labels or barrier layers in critical quantity. Laminates and mixed materials mostly score worse than mono-material.
From practice
Recyclability is decided in the detail. A label that is too large, a carbon black the sorting sensor cannot detect, an aluminium layer or a lid in a different material all spoil the rating. Have new packaging assessed early against the current minimum standard, before tools and print artwork are finalised. After that every change costs money and time. Retail customers increasingly demand proof. A supplier’s recyclable claim without a catalogue-based assessment is not a basis for anything. Ask about adhesives and printing inks too, as they help decide whether a label or sleeve comes off cleanly in reprocessing. Record which version of the standard the assessment applies to.
Recycled content (PCR)
Packaging technologyThe share of recycled plastic in a package, usually stated as a share by mass. A distinction is made between post-consumer recyclate (PCR, from household collections) and post-industrial recyclate from production waste. In food contact, recyclate is only permitted from approved recycling processes under Regulation (EU) 2022/1616. Recyclate varies more in colour, odour and processing behaviour than virgin material, because its source material changes. It is used in bottles, films and transport packaging, mostly blended with virgin material. Proof is provided by supplier declarations and certificates.
From practice
Recyclate is not virgin material with a different label. Yellowing, odour, melt behaviour and specks vary from batch to batch, and stretch film with recyclate tears earlier at the same pre-stretch. Demand minimum values for the relevant properties and batch certificates. Run the machine trial over several rolls and not on a single sample roll, because the variation only shows up over a sequence. For food contact, the supplier must prove the approved process. In transport packaging, recyclate is less problematic and usually the easiest place to start. Agree between purchasing and production that the quota in the contract is also what the machine can handle.
Reference site visit
CommercialA visit to a running installation of the supplier’s at another operator’s site during the quotation phase. The aim is to check technology, availability, service and collaboration under real production conditions, and to hear the operator’s own experience. The reference should be comparable in product, output and age of the installation. The supplier arranges the contact, and the visit requires the consent of the host operator. Inspected are the machine in operation, the operator interface, accessibility for cleaning and maintenance, and the handling of faults.
From practice
Sales will gladly show you the showcase installation. Insist on a comparable machine that has been running for a few years. Talk there to the line leader and the maintenance technician without the supplier present. Ask what stops most often, how quickly service arrives, how commissioning went and what the operator would do differently today. Bring your own maintenance technician, who sees things that never catch purchasing’s eye. On a reference visit I like to look at the spare parts store next to the line, which tells you more than any glossy brochure. A reference visit is worth more in a quotation comparison than any presentation.
Regular slotted container (FEFCO 0201)
Packaging technologyStandard shipping carton to FEFCO 0201, known in English as regular slotted container. The carton is made from a corrugated blank with four side walls, bottom flaps and top flaps, and a manufacturer’s joint holds the side walls together, usually glued or stitched. It is delivered flat, formed at the case erector and closed with tape or hot melt. The longer flaps are about half the carton width and meet in the middle when closed. Dimensions are given as length, width and height, as a rule as inside dimensions.
From practice
The 0201 is machine-friendly, inexpensive and available in almost any size, which is why it runs on most case erectors and case sealers. Watch the flap gap, the butt joint in the middle, and the quality of the creases. A carton whose flaps do not close flush gets crooked gluing, and crooked gluing turns into unstable pallets. Ask your carton supplier about the dimensional tolerance before you release a new size. Even a carton at nominal size can hang up in the erector if the blank does not separate cleanly from the stack. A trial run with carton from the current delivery beats any data sheet.
Reject removal
Packaging technologyTechnology that actively removes faulty products from the product flow, for example by pusher, compressed air nozzle, flap or diverter. It follows an inspection such as a metal detector, X-ray inspection, checkweigher or vision system and sorts the product into a collection bin. The control must track the position of the faulty product up to the reject point so that the right item is hit. At HACCP control points reject removal must be verified, with acknowledgement and an interlocked collection bin. Detection without secure removal is worthless.
From practice
Reject removal has to suit the speed and the product. A pusher suits stable cartons, compressed air suits light pouches, a flap suits delicate goods. Test the verification at acceptance yourself. With every test-piece check, removal must be demonstrable, and the collection bin must be interlocked or monitored. Also try the case where the product arrives just ahead of the reject point or the line runs faster than at design. And ask who empties the bin. Full reject bins that nobody empties are a classic audit finding. At acceptance I like to fill the bin on purpose and see whether the line reports it.
Relocation (machine move)
Project management & CAPEXMoving an existing machine or line to another site. The process comprises condition documentation, dismantling, packing and transport, rebuild, commissioning and renewed acceptance. Legally, the CE status of the machine, possible substantial modifications and the operator’s duties at the new site must be checked. Technically, mains voltage, frequency, utility parameters and access routes at the destination must be matched against the machine. It is often sensible to plan a retrofit or an overhaul at the same time.
From practice
Almost always underestimated are the dismantling documentation and the controls. Photograph and label every cable and every handover point before anything is disconnected, and back up PLC programmes, drive parameters and recipes. I run the machine once beforehand and film it, so that afterwards it is clear how it ran. Then there is no argument about whether it already had problems before. Also clarify who prepares foundation, utilities and access route at the new site, and do it before the first lorry is loaded. Check beforehand whether mains voltage, frequency, compressed air and regulations at the destination match. A move is a good opportunity to replace worn assemblies. Do it only with a clearly defined scope, otherwise it turns into a retrofit with no budget.
Remote maintenance
Automation & roboticsAccess by the manufacturer or integrator to the machine control system via a secured connection. Technically it usually runs through an industrial router or gateway at the machine, which sets up an encrypted tunnel (VPN) to the service centre. Faults can then be analysed, parameters checked and software loaded without a technician travelling to site. This speeds up fault clearance considerably and saves service visits. Access must run only through approved, logged channels, for example with a key switch at the machine or a VPN released by the operator. See also OT security.
From practice
Agree in the contract when remote maintenance is used, who authorises it, what is logged and whether software changes must be documented. Access runs via a solution the operator controls: firewall, VPN with authorisation, key switch on the machine. I also have it confirmed that every access is announced beforehand and that a secured copy of the program exists afterwards. Otherwise changed software suddenly sits in the control system and nobody knows by whom. Clarify as well who at the manufacturer may connect at all. Remote maintenance does not replace a service contract, but it cuts response times and travel costs significantly. A fault with a mechanical cause still needs somebody on site.
Repeatability
Automation & roboticsThe spread with which a robot reaches a previously visited position again under the same conditions, given as a value in millimetres per ISO 9283. It is measured by approaching the same position repeatedly under a defined load and speed. Absolute accuracy has to be distinguished from it, meaning the deviation between the programmed and the actually reached position, which is significantly larger. It depends among other things on the dimensional tolerances of the robot and on calibration. For taught points repeatability counts, for points from CAD data or camera coordinates it is absolute accuracy.
From practice
You only reach the repeatability from the data sheet under the test conditions, meaning taught points, a warmed-up machine and correct load data. As soon as positions are calculated from CAD data or camera coordinates, absolute accuracy counts, and that can be many times worse. For camera-guided processes, plan for a calibration. Ask the supplier with which load and speed the value was measured. And a highly accurate robot is no help if the product shifts by millimetres in the tray or the suction cup gives way. At acceptance, have one position approached several times with a dial gauge and see for yourself how large the spread really is.
Request for quotation (RFQ)
CommercialA request to one or more suppliers to submit a quotation for a described scope. An RFQ contains the scope description or user requirement specification, quantities, dates, delivery terms under Incoterms, the quotation deadline and the purchasing conditions, and for larger projects a prescribed quotation structure. It places no obligation on the party making the request. A tender is a particularly structured RFQ to several suppliers based on a user requirement specification, with defined evaluation criteria and usually a quotation comparison matrix. Budget quotations, by contrast, are non-binding price indications for investment planning and do not replace an RFQ for the award. Sometimes an RFI, a request for information, comes first to sound out the market.
From practice
The vaguer the enquiry, the more colourful the quotations. Ask simply for a palletiser for cartons and you get a different scope of supply from every bidder and no comparable price. So prescribe a price table broken down into machine, change parts, conveyors, installation, commissioning, training, documentation and spare parts. Set a deadline for questions and send every answer to all bidders. Otherwise one of them has a head start and you are comparing apples with oranges again. Also ask about the things that only hurt later, such as whether delivery time runs from the order or from design approval, which payment schedule applies and which guarantees the supplier can provide. And give the supplier enough time. An enquiry for a special purpose machine that has to be answered within a week gets a quotation from the standard kit with plenty of assumptions.
Reserve space planning
Project management & CAPEXDeliberately keeping areas free in the layout for future machines, conveyors or infrastructure. The reserve is planned where expansion is expected, for example at the end of the line for additional packaging formats or pallet positions. Planning also covers access, utility connections and the load-bearing capacity of the floor, so that the area can be used later without rebuilding. The reserve increases flexibility for expansion and growth in formats. How large it is depends on the growth plan and the conditions in the hall, and there is no fixed percentage.
From practice
Reserve space disappears quickly under pallets and stillages. Mark the area on the floor and carry it in the layout as a no-go area, otherwise everyone uses it as storage after a short while. Plan the reserve where the line realistically grows. End-of-line packaging and palletising tend to grow more often than the process upstream, because every new format and every new retail customer arrives there. The utility connections belong at the reserve area too, meaning power, compressed air and data. Otherwise the expansion later turns into a construction site. Also think of the way to it. The nicest reserve area is useless if the forklift cannot get there or a hall column stands right in the way.
Residual oxygen measurement
Quality & safetyMeasurement of the oxygen content in the headspace of a modified atmosphere pack, usually with a needle probe and septum sticker on a handheld meter, or inline via optical sensors. Needle measurement destroys the pack, so it suits spot checks. The value confirms whether gas flushing and sealing achieved the intended atmosphere and is the basis for shelf-life determination on MAP products. It depends on timing, because porous products still release gas or take up oxygen after sealing until an equilibrium is reached.
From practice
High residual oxygen often comes from too short a flush time at increased output, blocked gas nozzles or a leaking pack. Measure at the start of the shift, after every changeover and at fixed intervals, and log gas consumption alongside it. Also define how long after sealing you measure, otherwise you compare values that cannot be compared. The septum sticker belongs on a spot without wrinkles, otherwise the needle draws in air from outside. If the oxygen value rises while gas consumption stays the same, it is almost always the machine or the seal, not the gas.
Residual risk
Quality & safetyThe risk that remains on a machine after all protective measures have been applied. Under ISO 12100 the manufacturer reduces risks in a fixed order of priority. Inherently safe design comes first, followed by safeguarding and complementary protective measures, and finally information for use. What remains after these steps is the residual risk. It has to be evaluated in the risk assessment and judged adequately reduced. The manufacturer describes it in the operating instructions and marks it on the machine with warnings. Warnings in the instructions must not replace feasible design measures. The operating company carries the residual risks into its workplace risk assessment and addresses them, for instance through staff instruction and personal protective equipment.
From practice
The residual hazards chapter in the operating instructions is often one page of sentences that would fit any machine. Crushing hazard at moving parts, caution hot surface. No shift supervisor can work with that. Ask for a list giving each residual risk with its location on the machine, the task involved and the intended measure, for example hot sealing jaws during a format change with gloves required and a cooling time. Put this list into the user requirement specification as part of the scope of supply, otherwise you will not get it. With it, the workplace risk assessment and staff instruction can be written in concrete terms. Pay particular attention to transfer points between two suppliers. Each has assessed its own machine, nobody has looked at the gap in between, and that is exactly where someone reaches into the conveyor.
Retention of title
CommercialA contractual provision under which the delivered machine remains the manufacturer’s property until paid in full. With simple retention of title this applies only to the goods themselves. Extended retention of title continues in whatever is made from the goods or obtained when they are resold. With machines, retention of title conflicts in practice with installation and commissioning, because the machine is connected to the foundation, utilities and neighbouring plant. Rules on attachment and commingling and on security rights therefore belong in the contract and not just in the dispute.
From practice
By the time of the final instalment the machine has long been installed, interlinked and in operation. Removing it would be costly for both sides, so in practice retention of title is more a means of pressure than a plan. Many contracts agree an extended retention of title with clear rules for the case of payment default, and a distinction from existing plant. Retention of title must not obstruct commissioning and use. Make sure the machine cannot be locked by software or remotely in a dispute over a final instalment. Securities held by a bank or leasing company can also collide with the retention. That is a matter for your lawyer.
Retrieval-Augmented Generation (RAG)
Digitalisation & AIA method in which a language model searches a company’s own document collection, such as operating manuals, fault history and maintenance records, for relevant passages before answering, and builds the answer from them. For this the documents are split into sections and stored in an index so that the passages matching a question can be found. The model itself stays unchanged and the knowledge sits in the documents. Answers can be backed with source references, and the documents can be updated continuously without retraining the model.
From practice
RAG is only as good as the documents behind it. If manuals exist as poor scans, outdated revisions or drawings without text, the system finds nothing or finds outdated information. Tables and wiring diagrams easily break when they are split into text sections. Document upkeep therefore comes before the AI project, with current versions, a clean structure and clear ownership. Test with real questions from the night shift and check whether the cited source actually contains the answer. Clear out what no longer applies as well. The manual for the state before the rebuild is just as valid to the system as the new one.
Modernisation of an existing plant instead of buying new. Typical are a new control system, new drives or new safety technology in the existing machine bed, while frame and mechanics are reused. A retrofit is often the more economical option when the mechanics are sound. Unlike an overhaul, a retrofit goes beyond restoring the old condition and brings the machine up to a newer technical standard. A substantial modification can require a new conformity assessment and CE marking under the Machinery Directive. The party doing the conversion then takes on the manufacturer’s duties.
From practice
A retrofit pays off when the mechanics are sound and the electrics and safety technology are the problem. If it is the machine bed itself, even the nicest new PLC will not help. Check beforehand the availability of spare parts for the components that stay, the format requirements for the coming years and the hygiene requirements. And note: with substantial modifications you become the manufacturer in the legal sense. Under the Machinery Directive, which is being replaced by the Machinery Regulation, risk assessment and CE conformity must then be produced afresh. That belongs in the budget and the schedule, not in a footnote. Clarify early whether this is done internally or by the party doing the conversion. Whether a modification is substantial is best judged by a safety specialist, not by purchasing.
RFID
Automation & roboticsRadio-based identification without line of sight. A transponder on the object carries an identifier and, depending on type, a small writable memory. An antenna on a read/write device reads it out and passes the data to the controller. Passive transponders have no battery of their own and draw their energy from the field of the reader. Depending on the frequency band, for example 13.56 MHz in the high-frequency band or 860 to 960 MHz in the UHF band, range and behaviour near metal and liquids differ. RFID is used to recognise change parts, to track containers and for access permissions at the HMI. Compared with optical codes it is less sensitive to dirt.
From practice
On packaging lines RFID makes most sense for change parts and load carriers. The machine notices by itself when somebody has fitted the wrong change part, and the warehouse knows where each pallet is. For marking individual products the barcode usually stays cheaper. The range on the data sheet applies to free air. If the transponder sits on metal or the environment is damp, things look quite different. This is where you quickly see whether a solution holds up. So run the test with the real change part at the real station. Also ask whether the transponder withstands cleaning agents and operating temperatures, and who replaces it when it has been torn off.
Rigging (machine move-in)
Project management & CAPEXTransporting a machine or plant from the delivery point to its final location. Rigging planning settles door sizes, routes through the building, floor loading, crane runway or lifting equipment, the degree of disassembly and the sequence of assemblies. Lifting equipment includes overhead cranes, mobile cranes, forklifts and machinery skates, and for oversized assemblies in exceptional cases an opened wall of the hall. The planning answers whether the machine will fit through doors and stairs and between existing plant at all, and which assemblies are put back together on site. Its basis is the transport dimensions and weights per assembly from the supplier and an installation plan in the layout.
From practice
Measure doors, ceiling heights and bends along the route yourself, with running production in mind. The drawing does not show what is in the way today, such as pallets or a pipe bridge under the ceiling. Among the usual surprises are floor loading under the crane vehicle, palletisers that can only be positioned with an overhead crane, and existing lines that have to move aside for a day. That means a weekend and a special shift. I have the supplier give me transport dimensions and weights per assembly in writing before I commit to an installation date. If an assembly only gets in with a crane and a closed hall road, the arrangement with neighbouring departments and the safety officer belongs in the plan too.
Rinser
Packaging technologyA machine that removes dust, particles and residues from containers immediately before filling, using water, air or ionised air. In a water rinser the containers are inverted, sprayed inside and left to drain. An air rinser blows the container out and extracts the dust, and ionisation releases particles held by static charge. For new glass and new PET an air rinser is usually used, because it works without water, saves treatment and keeps the bottle dry for labelling. The rinser sits ahead of the filler, often as a block with filler and capper.
From practice
For new glass and PET, dry cleaning is often sufficient. It saves water, treatment and drying. Cans often pass through a rinser too, because they arrive dusty from the pallet store. With a water rinser, residual water stays in the bottle if the drip time is too short, and that does not belong in the product. Nozzles scale up, and the rinse water must have the quality the product can tolerate. Check rinse time, drip time and the variety of container formats. A rinser that needs resetting for every format costs more time than it saves in cleaning. Air rinsers need clean filters and an extraction that really takes the dust out of the room.
Risk assessment
Quality & safetySystematic identification and evaluation of all hazards of a machine over its entire lifecycle, the mandatory basis of every CE marking and every safety design (PL/SIL). ISO 12100 describes the procedure. First the limits of the machine are set, then hazards are identified, the risk is estimated and evaluated and, where needed, reduced, in the order of inherently safe design, technical safeguards and user information. The whole is repeated until the residual risk is acceptable. It must be reviewed anew for retrofits and for line integrations.
From practice
CE conformity stands or falls with the risk assessment. It must start before the design, not after the build. Ask the supplier to show you the risk assessment and review it with your safety officer, above all the operating modes such as setting, cleaning and fault clearance. That is where accidents happen, not in automatic mode. I read the table of operating modes first and look for the person with the spanner in it. Where the residual risk is down to a single note in the operating instructions, it pays to ask questions. In line integrations the interface is often missing, because each supplier looked only at their own machine.
Risk assessment (workplace) (Gefährdungsbeurteilung)
Quality & safetyAn operator’s duty under the German Occupational Health and Safety Act to identify and assess hazards at the workplace and to derive measures, also for existing plant and after modifications. For this, work areas and activities are recorded, hazards are assessed, measures are defined and their effectiveness is checked. Technical measures take priority over organisational and personal protective measures. The result is documented and updated when changes occur. Not to be confused with the manufacturer’s risk assessment, the two complement each other.
From practice
After commissioning new equipment, the operator must update the workplace risk assessment for the affected jobs: operation, changeover, cleaning, fault clearance, maintenance. The basis is the operating manual and the residual risks from the manufacturer’s risk assessment. In practice it helps to invite the safety officer to the SAT, then observations and documents are on the table together. Look above all at the tasks that rarely occur, such as fault clearance with the line running or cleaning behind guards. That is where it gets dangerous, and the operating manual describes these tasks most briefly. Involve the operators, they know how the machine is really operated.
Risk register
Project management & CAPEXA living list of project risks. For each risk it records a description, likelihood, effect on schedule, cost or quality, a countermeasure, an owner and a status. Likelihood and effect give a rating by which the risks are sorted in a matrix. The register is reviewed regularly, about monthly, with the project team. It works as an early-warning system and not as a filing exercise. Risks with a financial effect feed into the contingency, the budget reserve. It is not the same as the risk assessment under the Machinery Directive, which evaluates hazards on the machine and not project risks.
From practice
At its core the risk register is a simple table. It records what could endanger the project, how likely that is, how costly it would be and what you do about it beforehand. Typical entries on packaging projects are a late packaging material approval, insufficient hall height, an overloaded supplier or change parts that are missing at the FAT. Go through the list every month with the team and strike what is done. Rate a risk again after its countermeasure, otherwise it stays red although it has long been under control. Give every entry a name, otherwise it belongs to everyone and so to nobody. Anyone who does this has fewer surprises. And they have an answer ready when the steering committee asks what could go wrong.
Robot cell
Automation & roboticsA self-contained working area for a robot with guarding, controls, infeed and outfeed. Protective measures include fencing, interlocked doors or light curtains, emergency stop and a reset point outside the danger zone. The robot arm is normally supplied as partly completed machinery with a declaration of incorporation. Only the cell as a whole is assessed by the integrator, CE-marked and integrated into the line. ISO 10218-2 describes the safety requirements for robot systems and their integration. The basis is the risk assessment of the entire cell, including the interventions for loading and format changeover.
From practice
Allow more floor space in the layout than the robot itself needs. Fencing, safety distances and the routes for changeovers and pallet exchange come on top. Draw doors, material airlocks and sightlines for the operators in from the start, otherwise every intervention becomes a detour. The reset button belongs at a point from which the whole cell can be seen, otherwise people acknowledge without looking. On palletising cells, pallet exchange without a cell stop determines the real availability. At acceptance, have someone show how an operator takes out a full pallet while the robot keeps working on the other.
ROI
KPIsRatio of return to capital employed. To be distinguished from it is the payback time, the time needed to earn back the investment, which in projects often stands next to it as a metric. For automation, all effects must go into the calculation, such as labour, OEE, give-away, quality and accidents, together with all costs such as integration, training and maintenance. If one side is missing, the ROI is just window dressing. The basis is verifiable figures from the downtime analysis and the real material prices.
From practice
ROI on packaging investments is often calculated too optimistically. It contains labour savings that cannot be realised because the same people are needed elsewhere, output the line never reaches, and forgotten running costs. Calculate conservatively, with verifiable figures from the downtime analysis and the real material prices. An honestly calculated payback of three years convinces management and the bank more than a polished 18 months that nobody can hold after a year. Besides the ideal case, I always calculate a case in which the line ramps up more slowly than planned. It hurts, but it is the figure that turns out right later.
Roller conveyor
IntralogisticsConveyor technology made of driven or non-driven rollers for cartons and pallets. Non-driven roller tracks work by gravity or by hand, while driven rollers are moved individually by motorised rollers or together by chains or round belts. Accumulation roller conveyors with zone control divide the line into sections that stop and pass on the load individually, so that buffering takes place without line pressure. Important design parameters are roller pitch, roller diameter and load capacity. Roller conveyors link the machines at the line end and in dispatch and usually form the basic structure of the plant there.
From practice
Accumulation roller conveyors with zone control buffer without product pressure and save energy, because only the zones with goods on them are running. Watch the roller pitch, which must suit the shortest carton length, as well as curve radii and the handovers between two lines, where cartons like to jam. Plan the cleaning underneath the conveyor right from the start. Film scraps and carton dust collect there and wind themselves around the rollers. For pallets, chain conveyors are often more heavy-duty than rollers, but that depends on pallet quality. Any roller track copes badly with broken boards. Soft carton bottoms and pouches belong more on a belt conveyor.
Rolling bearing
Mechanical engineering & componentsA bearing in which rolling elements roll between an inner and an outer ring and guide a shaft with low friction. Rolling elements can be balls, cylindrical rollers, tapered rollers, barrel rollers or needles, and a cage keeps them apart. The deep groove ball bearing is the most common design and takes radial and limited axial loads. Angular contact ball bearings and tapered roller bearings carry combined loads and are usually fitted in pairs. The basic rating life is calculated to ISO 281 from the dynamic load rating and the load. Boundary dimensions are standardised and the basic designation is the same across manufacturers, so bearings can be swapped by their number. The suffixes for seals, internal clearance or cage, however, vary from one manufacturer to another.
From practice
Few rolling bearings die of old age. Mounting, dirt and water kill them more often. During high-pressure cleaning, water is forced past the seals into the bearing and washes the grease out. So write into the cleaning instructions that the jet stays away from bearing points. When fitting, some people drive the bearing onto the shaft with a hammer via the outer ring. The force then goes through the balls, and the raceway is dented before the bearing has ever turned. Always order spares with the full designation including suffixes. A bearing with standard grease has no business in a machine that calls for H1 grease. Noisy bearings usually still give you some time. Once one gets hot, not so much.
Rotary machine
Packaging technologyA design of machines for filling, capping and labelling in which containers run on a rotating carousel through several identical processing stations and are processed continuously. An infeed starwheel takes the containers from the conveyor, and an outfeed starwheel releases them again. The number of stations, meaning filling valves or capping heads, determines output at a given speed. Its counterpart is the linear machine with stationary or indexed containers. Media such as product, compressed air or vacuum reach the rotating carousel through a rotary distributor.
From practice
The output of a rotary machine scales with the number of stations, but every station is a potential source of error. A faulty filling valve worsens the checkweigher statistics without the machine stopping. Require that the checkweigher is assigned to each valve and each head and that the result feeds back into trend control. Changeover affects infeed and outfeed starwheels, guide rails and height adjustment. With every quotation I count the setting points before I believe a changeover time. Where something can only be set with tools and experience, the changeover quickly becomes a job for the whole shift. Also ask about the seals at the rotary distributor. They are wear parts and belong in the spare parts set.
Route analysis
IntralogisticsRecording and evaluation of all transport and walking routes in the layout over a period. It is based on observation, counting, forklift data or tracking data. Results are shown as a route diagram on the layout plan, called a spaghetti diagram in the lean context, and as a from-to matrix that shows how often goods are moved between which points. The evaluation reveals detours, crossings and unnecessary trips. It forms the basis of every intralogistics optimisation and every business case for an AGV.
From practice
Route analysis records all internal transport movements over a period: who moves what, where, how often and with which equipment. The result in kilometres and hours per year suddenly makes intralogistics tangible and shows whether an AGV, a tugger train or a changed layout is the answer. I like to start with a shift of observation before I evaluate any data, because no forklift log shows that the driver takes a detour every time because goods are standing in the way. Measure a normal week and not the exceptional one, such as a stocktake or a rebuild. This analysis is exactly the core of the intralogistics Shopfloor Analysis.
Runnability
Packaging technologyThe property of a packaging material that allows it to be processed on a packaging machine without faults and at the intended output. It depends on dimensional accuracy, stiffness, friction coefficients, flatness, moisture, sealability and winding quality of the reel. Runnability always refers to the combination of material and machine, so a material may run on one machine and not on another. For the proof, several reels or batches are run so that the variation within a delivery becomes visible. It is secured through the packaging material specification, trial runs and approval of the material on the specific machine.
From practice
A packaging material that meets every value in the lab can still fail on the machine. Film that is too smooth slips at the feed, board that is too stiff cracks at the crease, board that is too damp curls in the magazine. Have every new packaging material and every supplier change approved under production conditions, and document the results. Run the trial under night-shift conditions too, with a cold hall and full speed, and not just on a pleasant Wednesday morning. Purchasing savings on packaging materials are quickly eaten up on the line when the machine stops. Agree with purchasing that no packaging material goes onto an order without approval.
S
Safe Torque Off (STO)
Automation & roboticsA safe drive function to IEC 61800-5-2 in which the drive signal to the power semiconductors in the frequency inverter or servo amplifier is safely interrupted, so that the motor can no longer generate torque. The function is usually dual-channel and corresponds to an uncontrolled stop of stop category 0 to EN 60204-1. STO does not disconnect the mains supply and does not actively brake, so the drive coasts down if no brake engages. Where a controlled braking phase is needed first, SS1 is used, a safe stop followed by STO. STO prevents unexpected start-up, but it does not replace isolation for work on the power electronics.
From practice
STO saves contactors in the motor circuit, plus space and wiring. The drive is only switched torque-free, though, and not braked. Hanging loads fall without a mechanical brake, and a coasting drive may keep moving for seconds. For guard doors, SS1 is therefore often the right choice, meaning brake safely first and then STO. At acceptance, measure the coasting time yourself, once with full load and with a stopwatch. Also check whether the inverter is actually certified for the function, because not every budget drive comes with that. And remember that STO is not isolation. Anyone working on the power electronics switches off the main switch and secures it against being switched on again.
Safety controller (safety PLC)
Automation & roboticsA controller, or part of a controller, that processes safety-related functions such as emergency stop, guard door monitoring, light curtains and safe speed to PL or SIL. Unlike a safety relay it is programmable rather than hard-wired. It consists of an input section, a logic section and an output section, usually built internally in two channels that monitor each other. The safety programme runs separately from the standard programme, and a checksum identifies its state. Sensors and drives are connected via terminals or a safe bus system such as PROFIsafe. Designs range from the compact safety controller to a safety CPU within the standard controller.
From practice
On a line with many guarded areas the safety PLC pays off. It shows which door is open or which emergency stop was pressed, and it logs trips. The maintenance technician no longer has to look for the contact that stopped the machine at every door switch. Changes to the safety programme may only be made by competent persons, and every change needs fresh validation. Clarify who holds the password. Require the safety programme including checksum and test protocol as part of the documentation. Note the state after acceptance. Then you can see straight away later whether somebody has changed something.
Safety distance (ISO 13855)
Quality & safetyThe minimum distance between a non-contact safeguard such as a light curtain, laser scanner or safety mat and the hazard point. It is meant to make sure the machine has stopped before a person reaches the hazard point. EN ISO 13855 calculates it from the approach speed, the total stopping time and an allowance for the resolution of the safeguard. The stopping time includes the response time of the safeguard, that of the safety controller and the braking time of the drives. Whether the approach is at right angles or parallel to the detection zone changes the calculation. Reaching round or behind the safeguard must be ruled out.
From practice
On projects the distance is often planned too tight, because the layout planner sees only the space and not the stopping time. Then the light curtain has to move back, the operator can no longer reach the machine, or a finer-resolution curtain is needed. Both cost money and often show up late. I have the stopping time named early and ask whether it was measured or estimated. Worn brakes and changed drive parameters lengthen it. Clarify time and distance before the layout freeze, and have the calculation documented in the test report. A stopping time measurement belongs in the acceptance, otherwise the value exists only on paper.
Safety laser scanner
Automation & roboticsSafety sensor that scans its surroundings in one plane with a laser beam and a rotating mirror and evaluates the transit time of the reflected light. It monitors configurable protective and warning fields on the floor, standard on AGVs/AMRs and on fenceless cells. A warning field slows the machine, a protective field stops it. Several field sets can be stored and switched according to operating state or travel speed. The field geometry is part of the safety validation. For the protection of persons, only scanners built as safety components to IEC 61496-3 come into question.
From practice
Safety laser scanners replace fences where people need to enter the area regularly, for example at pallet-change stations. They allow warning and protective fields with speed reduction. Limits are set by dirt, dust and reflections from film, which cause false trips. Plan cleaning intervals and document the protective-field configuration in the risk assessment. That includes who may change the fields. A field that somebody quickly shrinks because it is annoying makes the whole safety assessment worthless. Protect the configuration with a password and documentation, and at acceptance check with a test object that the field responds where it should. Count the stopping time of the machine into the distance, otherwise the scanner stops on time and the machine too late.
Safety validation
Quality & safetyProof that every safety function of a machine is implemented and works as the risk assessment specifies. The checks cover hardware architecture, software, wiring, parameters and response times. They are supplemented by functional tests with deliberately induced faults, such as a wire break or a cross-connection. The result is always compared with the defined specification of the respective safety function. EN ISO 13849-2 describes the procedure. Validation is part of the conformity evidence before CE marking and is recorded in a test report.
From practice
Validation is often reduced to clicking through the guard doors. There is more to check. Every safety function has to respond in every operating mode, including wire break, cross-connection and power failure. The parameters in the safety PLC must match the documentation, and the checksum belongs in the log. That way it can be shown later that the same program is still running after a software swap. Get the validation handed over with a checklist and signature before operators go near the equipment, rather than at acceptance. Also ask about changes made after the validation. A delay time adjusted afterwards turns the report into scrap paper.
Safety zone concept
Automation & roboticsDefinition of which areas of a plant with robots or driverless transport systems are monitored by safeguards and how the plant reacts to an entry. Safety laser scanners and light curtains detect the approach, and the plant is slowed down or stopped. Graded zones with a warning field and a protective field are common. The distances depend on approach speed and run-down time, and the calculation is described in ISO 13855. A good concept balances ergonomics and productivity, because zones that are too large slow the plant down and zones that are too small endanger people. The basis is the risk assessment.
From practice
Define the zone concept together with operators and maintenance before the safeguards are ordered. A scanner that has to be moved later costs time and a new acceptance. Go through every zone with the routines that really occur, meaning pallet exchange, fault clearance and cleaning. Where people have to acknowledge several times per shift, the system will soon be defeated, and then the best concept is of no use. Dust, film residues and reflective surfaces in front of the scanner cause false trips, and those quickly ruin acceptance on the line. Also ask how the protective fields are switched over during a pallet exchange and whether that switchover is itself carried out safely. In Germany the basis is DGUV rule 100-500, the chapter on industrial robots.
Site acceptance test, the acceptance test after installation at the operator’s site under real production conditions, with real product, real personnel and a real environment. It follows installation and commissioning and is the counterpart to the FAT at the supplier’s works. The contractually promised performance data, the function of the interfaces to the neighbouring machines, the safety functions and the documentation are checked. Results are recorded in the acceptance protocol, and open items go on the punch list. Depending on the contract, a passed SAT is tied to the final payment and the start of the warranty period.
From practice
The SAT is acceptance at your plant, under your conditions and with your people. It rarely fails because of the machine. Usually something around it is missing: the product is not available, the packaging materials are not released, the interface to the neighbouring machine is still open. Prepare the SAT like a production shift, with material supply and staff for the whole shift. Run the most difficult packaging material and the most delicate product from your range as well. Any machine runs with the easy case. Agree beforehand which measurements count, who takes them and what counts as passed, otherwise the discussion only starts during the acceptance. Record the result in the protocol, together with the punch list.
SCADA
Automation & roboticsThe control-system level above the individual machine controllers, the abbreviation standing for supervisory control and data acquisition. A SCADA system visualises and operates entire lines or plants, captures data, reports and archives alarms and stores trends. It communicates with the controllers (PLCs) through drivers or standard interfaces such as OPC UA and passes data on to the IT level. This makes it the link between the machine level and the MES or ERP. It differs from the HMI, which operates a single machine on site, by its view across several machines, and from the MES by its emphasis on plant states rather than orders and production data.
From practice
A SCADA system shows fill levels, faults and output of several lines at a glance. In many packaging plants a line HMI with an overarching display is enough. A full SCADA system pays off with many lines or when process technology sits upstream. Clarify where the data is kept and who may access what, otherwise you end up with a system only the integrator understands. Let the people who look at the screens at night help design them. And ask who will look after updates and backups in future. Also decide who gets which alarm and who acknowledges it, otherwise the alarm list turns into wallpaper.
SCARA robot
Automation & roboticsA four-axis horizontal articulated-arm robot, the name standing for selective compliance assembly robot arm. Two rotary axes move the arm in the plane, a linear axis moves vertically up and down, and a fourth axis turns the tool about the vertical. The arm is stiff vertically and compliant in the plane, hence the name. It works fast and precisely in the plane and suits assembly and handling tasks with limited space. SCARA robots sit between the delta robot, which is designed for speed, and the six-axis robot, which is designed for flexibility.
From practice
On flat tasks a SCARA usually cuts a good figure on cycle time, for example placing lids or loading small products into trays. It reaches its limits as soon as a product has to be tilted or the stroke gets longer. Draw the working envelope with your largest format and do not forget the area directly around the base, which the arm cannot reach. Work out the payload with gripper, hoses and suction cups, not with the product alone. Also check the stroke of the vertical axis against the tallest pack and the deepest tray. Only then decide whether the cheaper SCARA is enough instead of an articulated arm. Anyone who plans too tightly here ends up ordering the articulated arm anyway.
Scope creep
Project management & CAPEXGradual expansion of project scope through many small, often unpaid extra requests without a formal change decision, for example another format, an additional reject station or more sensors. Each individual item looks harmless. Taken together they burden budget and schedule and overstretch the supplier. Unlike a formally approved change request, scope creep is neither assessed, approved nor documented. The remedy is a fixed change procedure that records, assesses and decides every deviation from the user requirements specification.
From practice
Scope creep usually starts at the edges. During a walk-round on the line the production manager wishes for something, the fitter agrees cheerfully, and nobody writes it down. Later procurement and the supplier argue over the invoice. Keep a wish list, assess every point by benefit, cost and schedule impact, and decide as a batch. Ask the supplier to accept commitments on site only in writing through the change request process. That is not pedantry. The fitter means well but has neither the costs nor the schedule consequences in mind. Whatever does not go through the process does not get built. Your own people also have to learn to hand in wishes to you and not at the machine.
Scoring
Packaging technologyLinear pre-creasing in card or corrugated board that allows clean folding without cracking the outer liner. It is created during die-cutting with score lines pressed against a scoring groove, or on the corrugator with scoring wheels. Score width and depth must match the material thickness. The grain direction of the material also affects the tendency to crack. Faulty scoring leads to cracks, panels standing proud and inaccurate carton dimensions. When the carton is erected on the machine, the quality of the scoring shows immediately, because the crease line decides where and how the carton bends.
From practice
On the machine a carton either folds cleanly or fights back, and the scoring decides which. Too shallow a score gives springing panels and skewed cartons, too deep tears the outer liner. For complaints about erection faults, check scoring quality and the moisture of the blanks first, before you adjust the machine. Blanks that are too dry crack sooner, damp ones go soft and do not hold the crease. In such a case I have blanks from several pallets brought to me and fold them by hand. Then you see whether they all misbehave alike. Fix score width and depth with the supplier in the specification and clarify how the cutting die is checked for wear.
Scrap rate
KPIsThe share of units that fail to meet quality requirements and can no longer be used, relative to the total quantity produced. It is usually expressed as a percentage and based on unit count, weight or value. Which basis applies has to be defined, because with items of different weight or cost each basis gives a different picture. Rework does not count as scrap, since the faulty units are still used after correction. Packaging operations distinguish between product scrap, meaning rejected goods, and packaging material scrap, meaning film and blanks that are lost. The quality rate in OEE and first pass yield are closely related, and both also treat rework as a loss.
From practice
The scrap rate reported by the machine control usually looks better than reality. It counts what the reject station throws out. Whatever the operator takes off the belt by hand during start-up, after a film change or after a fault never shows up in any statistic. Often the most honest counter in the plant is the bin next to the machine. So compare the consumption of film or blanks against the good output now and then. If the gap is large, you know where to look. For new equipment, agree before acceptance from which point scrap counts. Suppliers like to leave out the first few minutes after start-up, and then the performance test looks better than everyday production later on. Also check how much of it is false rejects, meaning good product thrown out only because a sensor is set too tight.
Screening system
Packaging technologyA machine that separates bulk goods by particle size or frees them of foreign bodies and lumps. One or more screen surfaces made of mesh or perforated plate hold back coarse material and let fine material through. Common designs are vibratory screens, tumbler screens and rotary screens, which spread the product over the screen by vibration or rotary motion. The mesh size depends on the product and the target particle size. Ahead of dosing and filling, the screening system serves as a check screen for powders, granulates and pellets and removes contamination. The oversize is discharged and collected.
From practice
Ahead of filling or dosing, screening systems protect against foreign objects and lumps, and they are part of the HACCP concept at many plants. Watch for screen integrity checks for breakage, cleanability and documentation of the inspections. A torn mesh lets through exactly what the screen is there to stop. The first thing I look at on a screening system is the oversize. What stays there says a lot about the raw material and the supplier. Damp or greasy powders block the mesh quickly, and then a different screen or a cleaning device is needed. Define who inspects the screen at what interval and where the inspection is signed off.
Screw feeder
Packaging technologyA volumetric dosing system for powders and fine bulk goods. At the outlet of the storage hopper, a dosing screw conveys a defined volume per revolution. The quantity is controlled via rotation angle or run time, often combined with a check-weighing correction. Screw geometry, pitch and agitator are matched to the product’s flow behaviour. For sticky or bridging products there are coreless helical screws. So that the powder does not trickle on after the stop, the screw is reversed or the outlet is closed with a flap. Typical products are flour, spices and milk powder.
From practice
Powders change their bulk density with moisture, hopper fill level and compaction. A volumetric screw feeder therefore will not consistently hit the target weight without feedback from the checkweigher. Keep the hopper fill level constant and address dust extraction at the filling point, otherwise the seal seam suffers. Strongly bridging products need an agitator and trials at the manufacturer’s before ordering. Also ask how the screw is cleaned at a product change. If it has to be removed for that, it takes time, and at an allergen changeover every corner in the hopper counts. Have a cleaning run demonstrated and add the time to the changeover time.
Seal seam
Packaging technologyThe thermally or ultrasonically formed join between the layers of packaging material. A distinction is made between longitudinal and cross seams, and on flow-wrapped bags also between fin seal and lap seal. Integrity determines shelf life and the complaint rate, and the parameters are temperature, pressure and time. Depending on the film, the seam is permanently welded or can be reopened as a peel seal. Product caught in the seal seam, such as crumbs or powder, is one of the most common causes of leaks. Ultrasonic sealing is more tolerant here. The seam is tested for strength by tensile test, for leaks by leak test and for fine channels by dye penetration.
From practice
Integrity and shelf life hang on the seal seam, and it is one of the most common sources of complaints. Control seal temperature, pressure and time as a recipe per film, check seams regularly with a leak test, and watch for product in the seam. A contaminated sealing tool produces hundreds of leaking packs before anyone notices. After every film or roll change, check the seams of the first packs before the machine goes to full speed. Have operators tear open seams by hand during the shift as well. With a fully welded seam, the good outcome is that the film tears next to the seam and not the seam itself. That is a simple test any operator can do.
Sealant layer
Packaging technologyThe innermost layer of a packaging film or lidding, which forms a seal seam with itself or with the counter-material under heat and pressure. In multilayer films it is a separate layer that is coextruded or laminated on, while outer layers of PET, PA or paper provide strength and printability. Common materials are PE, CPP, ionomers or heat-seal lacquers. Thickness and formulation determine the sealing temperature window, hot-tack strength (strength of the still warm seam), peelability and tolerance to product residue in the seam. Weld seals stay permanently bonded, peel seals can be opened in a controlled way.
From practice
Most leaking packs originate in the sealant layer and not at the machine. Sometimes the layer is too thin, sometimes tray and lidding film do not match, or fat and crumbs sit in the seam. Ask for a wide sealing window. That way faulty seams do not follow at once when the jaws run a little hotter or colder now and then. Always have the sealant layer and counter-material released as a pair, because changing only one side can tip the whole seam. The same applies when the film supplier changes the formulation and it simply arrives as a new batch. I have changes reported to me in writing and run the first reel through a sealing trial before it goes into production.
Sealing jaws
Packaging technologyHeated or cooled tool pairs that press film or packaging material together under pressure to create the seal seam. Heating is by cartridge heaters, and the temperature is controlled by a sensor in the tool. Designs are smooth, serrated or with a contour profile, with a cutting knife for cross-seals. Material, non-stick coating, heating-zone control and parallelism determine seal quality and service life. With constant heat the jaws are permanently at temperature, with impulse sealing they are heated only at the moment of sealing. Sealing jaws are format-dependent and are among the wear parts.
From practice
Uneven seal seams almost always have mechanical causes: jaws that are not parallel, worn coating, product residue in the serration, or a temperature sensor that is not measuring where the seal is made. Have the jaws set with test film and the result documented. Keep a spare set ready. Never clean the coating with a scraper or knife, otherwise the film sticks to the jaw in the next shift. For products that like to get into the seam, seam cleaning or extraction ahead of the sealing station pays off. Have the jaw temperature checked with an independent measuring device too, because the display on the control only shows what the sensor in the tool reports.
Sealing parameters
Packaging technologyThe three variables in heat sealing: sealing tool temperature, seal time (dwell time) and seal pressure. They must be matched to the packaging material, sealant layer and machine output. The usable process window is the combination in which the seam is tight and sufficiently strong without damaging the packaging material. It is determined with seal curves that show seam strength over temperature. The sealant layer of the film determines the temperature at which it starts to weld. What the display shows is the temperature at the tool, and in the sealing plane it is usually lower.
From practice
As output increases, seal time falls, and many plants compensate with higher temperature until the packaging material shrinks or the barrier layer suffers. Determine the process window for every film with seal curves and store the parameters in the format recipe. Every film change means new trials, even with the same supplier. With a new film I always ask to see the seal curve before I talk about machine speed. Operators must not change released parameters without documentation. Otherwise, after the next recipe change, someone stands at the machine and does not know which value was the good one.
Seals (O-ring / shaft seal)
Mechanical engineering & componentsMachine elements that seal joints between components against the passage of fluids and dirt. The O-ring is a ring with a circular cross-section that is compressed in a groove and seals mainly statically between stationary parts, for example on flanges and covers. It is designated by inside diameter times cross-section, plus the material. ISO 3601 covers dimensions and groove design. The radial shaft seal to DIN 3760 seals rotating shafts, usually on gearboxes and bearings. A spring-loaded sealing lip runs on the shaft and keeps the oil in, and an additional dust lip keeps dirt out. Common materials are NBR, FKM and EPDM, and for the food industry they come in grades compliant for food contact.
From practice
With O-rings, a lot depends on the material. EPDM does not tolerate mineral oil and swells, while NBR copes poorly with ozone and hot steam over time. Anyone who simply takes a ring of the right size from the drawer will have a leak a few weeks later and look for the cause in the wrong place. Ask the machine supplier for a seal list with size, material and hardness, and label the storage bins to match. With shaft seals, the shaft comes into it as well. If the lip runs in a worn groove, a new seal will not help much. Fit it slightly offset if the housing allows, or press on a repair sleeve. Never push a new seal dry over keyways and sharp edges either. The lip gets damaged faster than you would think.
Seamer
Packaging technologyMachine that joins the lid to the can body tightly by a double seam. Can body and lid are clamped and rotated, and seaming rolls roll the edges of lid and body into each other in two operations. The first roll forms the hook engagement, the second presses the seam tight, and a sealing compound in the lid fills the remaining gaps. Seam quality determines the tightness and shelf life of the can. Measured values include seam height, seam thickness and overlap, where necessary on a cross-section through the seam. Seamers usually run behind the filler.
From practice
Double seam inspection, meaning seam height, seam thickness and overlap, is a mandatory check and belongs in the quality plan with interval and measuring equipment specified. Wear on the seaming rolls shows up first in the measurements and only much later in visible defects. Regular measurement prevents entire batches of leaking cans. The overlap can only be seen on a cross-section through the seam, so somebody must be able to cut cans open and measure them. Define who measures and what happens at a limit value, and repeat the check after every format change. Replace seaming rolls by the manufacturer’s instructions or operating hours, not when somebody finally sees something.
Secondary packaging
Packaging technologyThe packaging level that groups several primary packs together, for example the case around the bags or the tray around the bottles. It serves handling, presentation at the point of sale and protection in transport. Common forms are folding carton, corrugated case, wrap-around case, tray with shrink film and display. Secondary packaging is usually produced at the end of the line by the cartoner, case packer or shrink wrapper. It is distinguished from primary packaging, which is in direct contact with the product, and from tertiary packaging, meaning the pallet with its load securing.
From practice
Secondary packaging is often where most can be gained, because case dimensions, flute type, pack pattern and pallet loading interlock. A few millimetres on the case often add another layer to the pallet and mean fewer lorry loads a year. Always check changes against retailer requirements, the box compression strength, BCT for short, and your machines’ format ranges. When a case changes, I therefore calculate with the pallet first and only then with the single case. What saves money on the case sometimes costs money at the machine, when the new dimension falls outside the format range or new change parts have to be made.
Self-adhesive label
Packaging technologyA label on a liner that is peeled off in the labeller and applied to the product, case or pallet. It consists of the face material of paper or film, the pressure-sensitive adhesive and the siliconised liner. Depending on the application, the adhesive is permanent, removable or designed for deep freeze. The label is supplied pre-printed or printed just before or during application, as in print-and-apply. Rolls are specified by core diameter, outer diameter, winding direction and label size.
From practice
Adhesive, material and substrate must match. On damp, cold or curved surfaces, labels come loose. Check adhesion under real conditions such as the cold chain and condensation, and not on the clean sample case. Record the roll specifications and repeat them with every reorder. Differing core diameters or a wrong winding direction will stop the labeller. Store the rolls as the supplier specifies, because too much heat can make adhesive ooze at the roll edges. Change the label material only after a trial, even if the data sheet looks the same. The peel edge reacts to small differences in stiffness and liner.
Sequencing
IntralogisticsSupplying material or goods in exactly the order in which they are needed. In dispatch this means, for example, store-ready pallets packed to a loading plan and available in the order in which the retailer unloads them. At the line it can concern packaging materials or change parts in the order of the production orders. Technically it needs a leading system that sets the sequence and a sequencing buffer in which units are collected and re-sorted, for example a shuttle system with free access to every unit. Done manually, sequencing costs a lot of thinking and searching time and therefore drives automation in picking.
From practice
Sequencing delivers products to the line in the order in which they are needed, for example mixed pallets in customer sequence or change parts in the order of the changeovers. It needs a leading system such as a WMS or MES and disciplined stock management. If the stock figures are wrong, the prettiest sequence is scrap paper. In packaging it pays off with many variants and short runs, and for high-volume series it is unnecessary effort. Clarify beforehand what happens in case of a deviation. If a pallet is missing from the sequence, it must be settled whether the rest is re-sorted or everything behind it waits. That concept belongs in the functional specification and not just in commissioning.
Serialisation
Packaging technologyAssigning a unique serial number to each individual pack with unbroken traceability. In the pharmaceutical industry it is a legal requirement, and in food and branded goods it is increasingly used against counterfeiting and grey-market trade. The serial number usually appears as a DataMatrix code on the pack, together with product code, batch and expiry date. A serialisation line consists of a printer, a camera for verification, rejection of faulty packs and a control system that communicates with the database system. Aggregation assigns the individual packs to the case and the case to the pallet.
From practice
With serialisation, every individual pack gets its own number. In pharma it is mandatory, and in food it is increasingly used for traceability and anti-counterfeiting. Technically it requires printers, camera verification and a database link running at line speed. The effort lies less in the hardware than in IT integration and in handling rejects and reprints. Before start-up, clarify what happens to the number of a rejected pack and who releases numbers again. Also ask what the line does when the connection to the server drops. In pharma, validation comes on top, and then every later change to software or printer is a matter for change control.
Service level agreement (SLA)
CommercialAn agreement between a service provider and its customer that sets measurable characteristics of a service. These include service hours, response time, time to restore, availability, accessibility of the hotline and remote support, and escalation routes. Faults are usually classified by priority, with different times applying to each. An SLA also specifies how the values are measured and reported and what happens if they are missed, for example service credits or contractual penalties. The term comes from IT. In machine building it appears in service contracts, usually as an annex to a maintenance contract. Response time and resolution time have to be kept apart. The first describes when the provider gets in touch, the second when the fault is fixed.
From practice
A response time in an SLA usually means that someone gets in touch. That does not yet put a technician at the machine. Write in separately when the call back comes, when someone connects via remote access and when a technician is on site. Then look at the service hours. Standard contracts often apply on working days during office hours. Your line may well run three shifts, and the fault happens on Saturday night. The SLA clock then starts on Monday morning. Also clarify whether it starts with your call or only once the provider confirms the ticket. Without measurement and without consequences for breaches, an SLA remains a friendly declaration of intent. So have compliance reported to you regularly.
Servo amplifier (servo controller)
Mechanical engineering & componentsPower electronics that supply a servo motor and control its position, speed and torque in closed loops. The amplifier rectifies the mains voltage, buffers it in the DC link and uses an inverter stage to generate voltage and frequency for the motor. Control is arranged as a cascade. The innermost loop is the current controller, which sets the torque, followed by the speed controller and the position controller, which take their actual values from the encoder. Setpoints come from the motion controller, usually over real-time Ethernet such as EtherCAT or PROFINET. Unlike a frequency inverter, which mainly sets the speed of induction motors, the servo amplifier is designed for encoder feedback and fast positioning.
From practice
A servo amplifier on the shelf is only a spare part if it fits the plant. So I always ask about the firmware version running in the machine and whether a new amplifier with newer firmware will simply take over the old parameters. Sometimes it does, sometimes you first need a laptop with the right software version, and nobody has one at night. It is neat if the control system loads the parameters into the amplifier itself during start-up. Ask for that. Amplifiers that sit on the shelf for years have a problem of their own. The DC link capacitors age even without power, and some manufacturers specify that they must be reformed slowly after long storage. Servo amplifiers give off a fair amount of heat in the control cabinet. If the cabinet cooling is sized on the tight side, you get sporadic overtemperature alarms in summer.
Servo drive
Mechanical engineering & componentsA controlled drive that continuously measures and corrects the position, speed and torque of an axis. It consists of a servo motor, an encoder and a servo controller, and a higher-level motion controller supplies the setpoints. Servo drives are the basis of format-flexible machines. They replace mechanical cams and line shafts, because motion profiles are stored in software and called up for each format. Several axes are synchronised with one another through electronic gearing or electronic cams. Safety functions such as STO are usually integrated in current controllers.
From practice
With servo drives you change format through the recipe, save compressed air and mechanical cams, and can change the cycle rate without rebuilding anything. In return they cost more, and when something goes wrong you need someone who knows the system. The swap itself is quick. What takes long is a new controller arriving without parameters, with nobody knowing how the axis gets referenced again. Then the line can easily stand for a weekend although the spare part was in after an hour. Have the parameter sets handed over. Decide which drives are kept in stock. And ask for a description of how the axis goes back into operation after a swap. It is best to try this once during acceptance.
Servo motor
Mechanical engineering & componentsAn electric motor for controlled movements with precise positioning and high dynamics. In automation it is usually a permanent magnet synchronous motor, whose rotor carries magnets and turns in step with the rotating field without slip. An encoder on the motor shaft reports position and speed to the servo amplifier, and the motor cannot run without the amplifier. Servo motors have low inertia and can briefly deliver several times their rated torque, which allows fast acceleration. A holding brake is available as an option. The servo motor differs from the three-phase induction motor in rotor design, feedback and operation on an amplifier. By contrast, the term servo drive refers to the complete system that includes motor and amplifier.
From practice
Servo motors look alike, and that is exactly where the trouble in the spare parts store begins. Two motors of the same frame size can differ in encoder, brake, shaft with or without keyway and connector design. If the encoder does not match the amplifier, nothing turns at all. On new plant, put the type codes of all motors into one list and ask how many variants are really needed. After a swap the axis usually has to be referenced again, even with an absolute encoder, because the new motor does not know where the mechanics are. And please do not drive a pulley onto the shaft with a hammer. The bearing remembers the blow, and sometimes the encoder does too. In wet areas the connectors are the weak spot. A connector left hanging open after cleaning will make itself known by the next night shift at the latest.
Shaft coupling
Mechanical engineering & componentsA machine element that connects two shafts and transmits torque from one to the other, for example from a motor to a gearbox or a lead screw. Rigid couplings join the shafts without compensation and require precisely aligned shafts. Flexible couplings compensate for misalignment, that is radial, axial and angular offset. Elastic jaw couplings with a plastic spider also damp shocks and vibration. Torsionally rigid designs such as metal bellows or disc couplings transmit motion without backlash and are standard on servo axes. The coupling is usually fastened by clamping hubs or keys. Characteristic values are rated torque, torsional stiffness, permissible misalignment and maximum speed.
From practice
A flexible coupling forgives misalignment, but the bearings pay for it. After a motor swap, things often just get bolted down without alignment, because the coupling will take care of it. A few months later the bearings are noisy. With jaw couplings, take a look under the guard now and then. Fine debris underneath means something is out of line, quite literally. Spiders come in different hardnesses, often recognisable by their colour. Fitting the wrong one during a swap changes the vibration behaviour of the axis, and on a servo axis that can go as far as oscillation. Keep the right spiders in stock with their hardness noted, they cost next to nothing. And the coupling needs a fixed cover. A rotating clamping hub with a protruding screw likes to grab a sleeve.
Shelf-life extension
Quality & safetyThe sum of measures that keep a food product saleable for longer than it would otherwise remain. They act on the product, the process or the packaging. On the product, recipe, preservatives and water activity have an effect. During processing, the means are heating, high-pressure treatment and chilling. In the packaging, barrier films, protective atmosphere, vacuum and oxygen absorbers keep out oxygen, moisture and germs. Aseptic filling into sterile packs belongs here as well. Freshness indicators extend nothing, they only show the condition of the pack. A measure holds only for the combination of product, pack and storage condition with which it was tested.
From practice
Shelf life comes from the interplay of product, barrier, protective atmosphere and seal quality, and the weakest link sets the result. Before investing in more expensive film, check the seal seams and residual oxygen on the line. That is where the most common losses tend to lie. A seam with a wrinkle or product residue in the seal lets air in, however good the film is. Also ask how the best-before date was fixed in the first place. A storage trial under real conditions says more than the figure on the data sheet. Do not change film, gas mixture or fill quantity without reassessing the shelf life. The date on the pack applies to exactly that combination.
Shelf-ready packaging
Packaging technologySecondary packaging that goes onto the shelf without unpacking: remove the lid or tear the perforation, done. The term corresponds to retail ready packaging. Such a pack is designed to open easily, stand stably on the shelf and show the goods, so that store staff can refill the shelf in a few movements. Retail chains prescribe SRP specifications as binding. Anyone investing anew should carry their retail customers’ SRP requirements into the user requirements specification. Typical designs are folding cartons with tear-open perforation, trays with film and corrugated cases with a viewing window.
From practice
Behind shelf-ready packaging are retailer requirements. The case is torn open and put on the shelf. For the line this means perforated blanks, clean erection and often a cartoner with a lid or tray function. Get the retail customer’s approval before the machine is sized. Tear-open perforation, graphics and stability are prescribed and not open to negotiation. The perforation in particular is delicate. If it tears too easily, cases open on the pallet, and if it tears too hard, the store complains. Blanks with perforation must run evenly through the erector, so the carton supplier belongs at the table too. Have samples from series production tested, including after transport and in the cold.
Shift handover
Production & energyThe passing on of information from the outgoing to the incoming shift at shift change. Content includes the status of the lines, current and upcoming orders, faults and the measures taken, quality deviations, blocked stock, safety issues and open tasks for maintenance or cleaning. The handover takes place verbally at the line or at the shopfloor board and is documented in the shift log, on paper or digitally in the MES. Shifts often overlap by a few minutes for this. A structured handover follows a fixed sequence or checklist and separates information for awareness from tasks with a named owner. It is part of shopfloor management and helps to trace events across shift boundaries.
From practice
The shortest shift handover consists of the news that everything is running. What the night shift readjusted at the sealing station at four in the morning, the early shift then only finds out when the seams leak again. A few minutes of overlap at the line are time well spent, provided the handover follows a fixed order. What is down, what was adjusted, what is blocked and what the next shift has to do belong in every handover. During commissioning I read the shift log every morning before I go to the line. It often says more about the state of the plant than any status report. Make sure the entries are specific. An entry saying the machine was playing up helps nobody. Time, alarm text and action taken do help. And ask suppliers working at night to write in the shift log as well.
Shift model
Production & energyThe arrangement that defines at what times and with which shift groups a plant or line operates. Common forms are operation in one, two or three shifts on five working days, and fully continuous models in which several shift groups take turns around the clock, seven days a week. Models also differ in shift length and direction of rotation. The shift model determines the available operating time and with it the weekly output. It also sets when there is time for maintenance and cleaning and how many people are needed. For investments it is a basic assumption in the business case. In Germany the Working Hours Act sets the legal limits, and in companies with a works council the details are usually agreed with it.
From practice
The business case says three shifts on five days, and the plant works two. Gaps like this only show up when the new line fails to reach the planned output and everyone looks at the machine. So clarify the shift model before the line is sized. With fully continuous operation, on the other hand, the weekend is missing as a buffer. Maintenance, cleaning and changeovers then have to go into planned stoppages, and those belong in the production plan, or they will not happen. Projects add a further point. Commissioning and training must reach every shift group, including the night shift and the group that happens to be off. If you only train the early shift, the calls come at two in the morning. And if a new model with more shifts is needed, introducing it with the works council and recruiting often takes longer than the delivery time of the machine.
Shopfloor management
Production & energyA management approach from lean management in which managers lead where value is created, that is at the line. At its core are short, regular stand-up meetings at a board with a few indicators on safety, quality, performance and staffing. Deviations are made visible. Actions get an owner and a due date and are followed up in the next round. The meetings are usually cascaded. Line meetings are followed by a department round and then by the plant management round, so that problems that cannot be solved locally are escalated on the same day. Gemba walks, standardised problem solving and visual management are part of the approach. Typical indicators are OEE and the reject rate.
From practice
Many plants have shopfloor boards. What is on them is the interesting part. If they show last month’s figures, printed out and laminated, they are decoration. The meeting at the line lives on yesterday’s figures, written in by hand. A quarter of an hour is enough if decisions get made and nobody presents slides. Every action needs a name and a date, otherwise it will still be up there in four weeks. Watch whether escalation works. If the line reports three times that spare parts are missing and nothing comes back from above, the team stops reporting. In projects you can make good use of the round as well. Five minutes on the commissioning status at the line’s board save a fair number of emails.
Should-cost analysis
CommercialA method for determining what a part or service ought to cost if produced economically. Costs are built up from the bottom. Material follows from weight and raw material price, manufacturing from the operations with their times and machine hour rates, and then come assembly, engineering, overheads, logistics and profit. It is based on the drawing, the parts list and cost data from comparable parts. The result shows the cost drivers and serves as a basis for negotiation and make-or-buy decisions. A bid comparison only shows what the market asks, whereas a should-cost analysis estimates what the work actually costs. It suits drawing parts such as change parts well and is harder to apply to special purpose machines with a high share of engineering.
From practice
For change parts I like to do the sums myself. Material, milling time and a realistic hourly rate with a bit of margin give you a figure to open the conversation with. If the machine builder’s price is far above it, you get either an explanation or a discount. Both are useful. The method also works the other way round. If a quotation for commissioning a special purpose machine contains fewer hours than the work normally takes, it is no bargain. The missing hours come back as a change order, or they are missing from the optimisation phase and the line goes into production half finished. So look closely at the items that seem suspiciously cheap as well.
Shrink film
Packaging technologyPolyolefin or PE film that shrinks under heat in a shrink tunnel and tightly wraps around packs, trays or pallets (hood shrinking). The film is stretched during manufacture and cooled in the stretched state. When heated it returns to its original form and contracts, by different amounts in the machine and cross direction. It can be printed and sealed. For packs from which air has to escape, perforated film is available. Film thickness and shrink behaviour are matched to pack size, weight and the stability required of the bundle.
From practice
Thinner or recycled shrink films require adjusted tunnel profiles, covering temperature, blowers and belt speed. Run film changes as a trial with documented parameters and not during live production. The tunnel’s energy costs belong in the comparison against stretch or carton solutions. Also look at how the rolls are stored. Film should lie cool, dry and away from radiators, otherwise its shrink behaviour changes, and then people wonder about loose packs. Ask for the shrink behaviour in machine and cross direction as a data sheet, and keep a retained sample from every delivery so that you can compare in case of complaints.
Shrink tunnel
Packaging technologyA hot-air tunnel in which the film laid around a pack shrinks and contracts into a firm unit, for example a six-pack or a tray with film. Inside, a belt carries the packs through several heating zones, and blowers distribute the hot air evenly. Temperature, dwell time and air flow determine the shrink result. The tunnel sits after the film wrapping station, either integrated in the shrink wrapper or as a separate unit. Energy consumption and film quality are the ongoing cost drivers.
From practice
The shrink tunnel is an energy hog. Heating power, blowers and run time determine running costs. When buying, ask about insulation, idle-time power reduction and consumption at your film thickness. Also clarify what the tunnel does when the belt stands still: if the heating stays on, the film in the tunnel can be damaged. When switching to thinner or recycled film, the temperature profile and belt speed must be reset, otherwise the pack comes out loose or the film tears. Allow for the heat-up time before the start of a shift, because a cold tunnel shrinks nothing. Keep blowers and air ducts clean, because film residue and dust change the air flow over time.
Shrink wrapper
Packaging technologyA machine for bundling packs with shrink film, either without a base, with a tray or with a pad. The products are grouped and wrapped in film that is fed from the reel, sealed and cut off. Afterwards the pack runs through an integrated shrink tunnel, where the film shrinks tightly around it. A cooling section at the exit fixes the shape before the packs move on. Standard for secondary packaging in the beverage and canning industry, for example for six-packs and can bundles.
From practice
Film quality and the shrink tunnel determine the result. Holes in the film, loose corners or discolouration are rarely machine faults. Watch temperature distribution in the tunnel, belt speed and cooling section, otherwise packs stick together on palletising. Factor the tunnel’s energy demand into running costs. Agree film thickness and film type as the basis for the manufacturer’s output specification, otherwise the manufacturer measures with its film and you run yours. At acceptance, use your own film to check what happens to the film in the tunnel when the belt stops. Ask as well which pack sizes run without conversion, because trays and pads have their own change parts.
Shutdown window
Project management & CAPEXA planned period, agreed with production and sales, in which a line is shut down for conversion, installation or commissioning. Its length and position in the calendar determine the installation logistics and the installation sequence plan. Stock has to be pre-produced and customers supplied before the line stops. All preparations that are possible without a shutdown are completed outside the window, for example pre-assembly, control cabinet construction and cable preparation. The window itself contains dismantling, bringing in, connection and commissioning. It is often placed in works holidays or in periods of low production.
From practice
The window is always too short and still not used to the full. On site the fitter waits for the electrician, the electrician for the site connection, and the connection for a crane that is booked elsewhere. Plan the window to the hour with a shift schedule for all trades. Bring forward everything that does not need a shutdown, that is control cabinet, pre-assembly of conveyors and cable trays. After installation, allow time for cleaning, hygiene release and the first trial packs, otherwise the window ends with a machine that is standing there but may not yet produce. Keep a fallback plan ready. Imagine it becomes clear on Friday that production will not be possible on Monday. Then it must be settled who decides and what the customer is told.
Shuttle system
IntralogisticsA storage system in which several autonomous vehicles serve the rack levels in parallel. In a container or carton store, one shuttle runs on each level, pulls the container out of the rack bay and takes it to a lift at the aisle end, which handles the vertical movement. For pallets there are channel shuttles that drive into the storage lanes. The dynamics are higher than with a single stacker crane per aisle, and performance grows with the number of vehicles. If a shuttle fails, throughput slows down. When a stacker crane fails, the aisle stops. That is an argument for availability.
From practice
Shuttle systems with a vehicle on each level reach high throughput for containers and cartons and grow with the number of shuttles. They suit picking and buffering ahead of dispatch, less so heavy pallets. Check maintenance access and redundancy. A single shuttle failure must not block the whole aisle, otherwise delivery reliability collapses. Also have it explained how a stranded shuttle gets out of the aisle and whether that works during running operation. And look at the lifts at the aisle end. All the throughput is bundled there, and when a lift fails, even many shuttles help little.
Signal list (I/O list)
Automation & roboticsA table of all input and output signals of a control system. For each signal it lists the equipment designation, a plain-text description, the signal type, digital or analogue, the PLC address, module and channel, the terminal and, for analogue signals, the measuring range and unit. Further columns state, for example, normally open or normally closed, sensor type, safety relevance and the test status from the loop check. The signal list is developed alongside the circuit diagram and software and is the basis for PLC programming, HMI texts and commissioning. Signals exchanged between machines also appear in the interface list. Spare channels for later extensions are listed as well. The term I/O list is also widely used.
From practice
During the loop check the signal list is worked through line by line. One person actuates the sensor out in the field, another watches the PLC, and the line gets ticked off. If the list is wrong, this takes forever and ends in an argument about who is right. After commissioning it soon goes out of date, because changes are then only made in the program. Have the signal list handed over in its final state and spot-check it against the program. For analogue signals the measuring range and unit belong in every line. If a 0 to 10 bar pressure sensor is swapped for a 0 to 16 bar one, the terminal fits, but the PLC calculates with the old scaling and shows wrong values. With 4 to 20 mA a broken wire can be detected as a fault. And count the free channels. The reserve from the quotation is often used up by the end of commissioning.
Single source / second source
CommercialSingle source means buying a part or service from only one supplier although others would be available. With sole source, by contrast, there really is only one supplier, for example because of a patent or because only the machine builder holds the drawings. Reasons for a single source include volume bundling or high costs for tooling and approvals. The risk lies mainly in supply failures and the lack of price alternatives. A second source is another technically approved supplier for the same part. It requires a supplier-neutral specification, rights to use the drawings and first article inspection, and for packaging materials also a machine trial on the line where the material is to run.
From practice
Many plants are single source for change parts and wear parts without ever having decided to be. The machine builder supplies only its own part numbers, keeps the drawings, and so becomes the only source. Deal with this in the purchase order. Ask for the manufacturer’s designation of every bought-in part in the parts list, and for change parts the right to have them made to drawing by third parties. With packaging materials a second source takes more effort. A film with an identical data sheet can run quite differently on the flow wrapper. And a second source that is approved but never ordered from is of little use when it counts. By the time the first delivery arrives and the line runs on it, the bottleneck has long since arrived. Order small quantities regularly so that both sources stay in regular use.
Singulation (infeed)
Packaging technologyFunction in product infeed that brings products arriving chaotically into a defined spacing and orientation for the machine entry. Common solutions are lane conveyors with graded speeds, timing screws, star wheels or vision-guided robotics. Lane conveyors pull the product stream apart with faster-running belts, and a timing screw sets the spacing through its pitch. Singulation differs from grouping in that it separates products instead of collecting them. On many lines the infeed is the real bottleneck, not the machine itself.
From practice
No packaging machine runs without clean singulation, and it is often the real bottleneck, because products stick together, tip over or arrive doubled up. On new lines, test the infeed with real products, including poorly formed ones. At a test the nicest product tends to run through. So I deliberately let a few crooked pieces run, and goods at the temperature at which they really arrive at your plant. Also try the surge after a stoppage, when everything arrives at once. On existing lines it pays to look at belt speeds, guides and sensors before investing in the main machine.
Site rules
Project management & CAPEXRules governing safety, access, working hours and coordination of contractors on the installation site. They usually cover induction and access authorisation, conduct in case of accident or fire, escape routes, storage and set-down areas, and contact persons. On brownfield projects they include rules for working alongside ongoing production, for example hygiene airlocks, dust protection and hot-work permits. Food plants add requirements on foreign bodies, for example for tools, consumables and glass.
From practice
Besides safety, site rules lay down everyday matters: storage areas, crane and forklift, disposal of packaging waste and hygiene rules when entering production. For brownfield conversions, coordination with ongoing production comes on top, because noise, dust and hot work need approvals. In food plants, counting tools in and out is part of it, so that no screw ends up in the product. Site rules become part of the contract at the time of order and not first at kick-off. Send them out with the enquiry, otherwise they turn into a point of dispute after the order.
Six big losses
KPIsA classification of the losses on a production line into six groups, originating in TPM and forming the basis of OEE. Availability is reduced by breakdowns caused by faults and defects, and by losses from changeovers and adjustments. Performance suffers from idling and minor stops, often called micro stops on the line, and from running below the design speed. Quality rate is reduced by scrap and rework during normal production and by start-up losses after a changeover, a fault or cleaning. With this classification, downtime data and fault reasons can be sorted so that every loss is assigned to one component of OEE and can be tackled specifically.
From practice
On paper the six groups are neatly separated. At the line, the debate starts with the first stop that lasts a few minutes. Then the question is whether that is still a minor stop or already a breakdown. Set a limit in minutes, write it down and leave it alone rather than changing it every quarter, or your figures will no longer be comparable. The two performance losses are easily overlooked because nobody records them by hand. Micro stops of a few seconds are too short for any shift report. Reduced speed after a fault tends to stay that way for weeks, because the machine runs more calmly like that. You will only see either of them in the machine data. Feel free to ask the operator why the line is not running at rated speed. There is often a good reason, but sometimes it was dealt with months ago.
Skin packaging
Packaging technologyA packaging format in which a heated top film is drawn down over the product under vacuum, conforming to the product and to the backing card or tray like a second skin. The product is fixed in place and enclosed largely free of air. Before forming, the film is heated and stretches so that it follows the contour of the product. It is sealed onto a coated backing card or onto the tray rim. Common for fresh meat, fish and consumer goods, produced on tray sealers or thermoformers with a skin station.
From practice
Compared with classic modified atmosphere trays, skin packaging lowers the cycle rate, because the film has to be heated and evacuated. Critical are products with sharp edges that pierce the film, with meat and fish for example bone ends and fish bones. The same goes for heights above the tray edge, where the film has too little reserve. Test your actual product at its extremes, meaning the largest, tallest and pointiest piece, and take it from running production rather than a tidy demonstration sample. Skin film and backing material must be released together. Watch for juice and fat on the sealing edge as well, because the seam will not hold there.
Slat chain (table-top chain)
IntralogisticsA conveyor chain made of flat plates joined by formed hinge knuckles and pins, which together form a continuous conveying surface. Slat chains are made of stainless steel or plastic, usually POM, and run on wear strips. They come in straight-running and side-flexing versions for curves. A pitch of 38.1 mm, or one and a half inches, is widespread. Several chains side by side form wide conveyors and accumulation sections. They are used above all in filling and packaging lines for bottles, cans and jars. Because the containers can slide on the chain, accumulation conveying is possible, with belt lubrication or running dry depending on the materials. It is distinct from the modular belt conveyor with its wide belt built up from modules.
From practice
On a bottle line you soon hear when something is wrong with the conveyor lubrication. Containers rattle, tip over at transfers, and too much pressure builds up in the accumulation. Wet lubrication comes at a price, though. It uses water and lubricant and makes the floor slippery. When switching to dry lubrication, chain material and lubricant have to match, and the supplier should test this with your containers. The chain elongates over time. Measure the elongation regularly instead of waiting for the first time it jumps on the sprocket. Then replace chain and sprockets together, because a new chain on old sprockets wears quickly. On glass lines, shards lodge in the hinges and wear strips and grind both down. Take a look under the chain at every deep clean.
Sleeve labeller
Packaging technologyMachine that pulls a printed tube of shrink film over a bottle or cup and shrinks it to a precise fit in a steam or hot-air tunnel. The sleeve arrives as a flat-laid tube on a reel, is opened, cut to length and pushed over the container. Stretch sleeves instead stretch over the container and need no tunnel. Sleeve labellers allow all-round decoration even on complex contours. Separability of the sleeve from the container is now a recycling criterion.
From practice
Printable all round and optionally with tamper evidence, that is what speaks for sleeves on bottles, cans or cups. Contours are where it gets difficult, because not every shape shrinks free of wrinkles. The printer pre-distorts the artwork so that it sits straight after shrinking, and that only works if film, tunnel settings and container match. Thin-walled cups and bottles can also suffer in the tunnel themselves. Run your own containers and your own sleeves at the FAT, not the manufacturer’s, and check the alignment of the artwork. Look at the tear-off perforation after shrinking too.
Smart glasses
Digitalisation & AIA head-worn display device that projects information into the field of view and partly overlays it on the real environment, known as augmented reality. In production it serves hands-free worker guidance with step-by-step instructions during changeover, remote support from experts via camera, and order picking. Depending on the model it is controlled by voice, finger gestures or buttons. Models differ in weight, battery life and operation. Depending on the design, one display sits in front of one eye or one in front of each eye.
From practice
In remote support smart glasses prove their worth fastest. The service technician sees what the maintenance engineer sees and saves the trip. For continuous use during a shift, weight, battery, glasses-wearers, hygiene requirements and acceptance are the hurdles. I would test any pair first with the people who are meant to wear it for eight hours, and not with the project team. They quickly notice whether it presses, mists up or is flat after half a shift. Clarify data protection for camera footage early with the works council, otherwise the glasses stay in the cupboard after the pilot and the effort was wasted.
SMED
KPIsA method for radically reducing changeover time, developed by Shigeo Shingo. The abbreviation stands for Single Minute Exchange of Die. First, internal changeover steps, during which the machine is stopped, are separated from external ones, which can be done while the machine is running. Then internal steps are moved outside wherever possible, and both parts are shortened and standardised. The goal is single-digit minutes. As variant diversity grows, this is often more economical than a faster machine.
From practice
SMED is the method for cutting changeover times systematically. Everything that can be prepared while the machine is running is moved outside, and the rest is standardised and speeded up. On packaging lines the time sits in change-part trolleys, counting scales, recipes on the HMI and a fixed sequence. An SMED workshop at the line, in which the changeover is filmed, usually produces the first ideas while the video is being watched together. After that everyone sees how often tools are fetched or searched for. During a changeover I have someone stand by with a stopwatch and a sheet of paper and write down every move before I talk about improvements.
Software standard (PLC)
Automation & roboticsA plant-wide specification for how control software is structured, named, documented and diagnosed. It covers the programme structure, the function block library, the variable names, the alarm concept, the HMI operating philosophy, the operating modes and the interfaces to higher-level systems. The programming languages themselves are defined by IEC 61131-3, and the standard determines how they are applied in the plant. It is handed to suppliers with the user requirements specification and reduces onboarding time, troubleshooting and dependence on a single programmer. For packaging machines, PackML can supply the states and operating modes.
From practice
Without a software standard every machine in the plant looks different, and maintenance needs a separate specialist for each manufacturer. The standard does not have to be thick. Structure, naming convention, alarm concept, operating modes and interfaces are enough to start with. Attach it to the tender package and check compliance at software acceptance, because no supplier changes their programme afterwards. Trigger a fault there and see whether alarm text and acknowledgement look the way you specified. Also expect bought-in machines with their own controller. A clean interface is enough for them. PackML is a sensible core for packaging machines.
Solid board
Packaging technologyMulti-layer, solid board made of bonded paper webs without a fluted structure, usually recycled-fibre based, in thicknesses from under one to several millimetres. Compared with corrugated board it is heavier, smoother and more resistant to puncture and moisture, but less stiff per weight. The smooth surface prints well and can be die-cut and scored precisely. Solid board is usually specified by thickness in millimetres or by basis weight. It is used for cases, interlayers, die-cut parts, hinged-lid boxes and displays.
From practice
Solid board is often chosen for cases and die-cut blanks for erecting machines, because it can be die-cut precisely and tolerates moisture better than corrugated board. The catch is that it is heavier and dearer per area, and the scoring must match the thickness or the liner will crack when erected. Grain direction matters too, because a score across the fibre cracks more readily than one parallel to it. When switching from corrugated to solid board, check whether the erector’s magazines, suckers and folding stations can cope with the stiffer material. Also recalculate the extra weight, because it ends up on the pallet and in transport. A trial run with a whole pallet of blanks tells you more than a stack of samples.
SolidWorks
Digitalisation & AIA 3D CAD system from Dassault Systèmes, very widely used in special-purpose machine building and among suppliers. It is used for parametric design of parts and assemblies and derives drawings and bills of materials from them. Simulation is added to this. Manufacturing and purchasing documents come out of the models. The structure of parts, assemblies and derived drawings corresponds to that of other 3D CAD systems. This is why exchange through neutral formats such as STEP is the usual route between supplier, operator and subcontractor.
From practice
For the operator it is secondary whether the supplier designs in Inventor or SolidWorks. What counts is that the design data ends up, at the end of the project, in a format your organisation can read. Agree that in the contract and not just at acceptance, because after that the supplier has little reason left to meet data requests. I write down exactly what is delivered: assemblies and single parts as STEP, drawings as PDF, bills of materials as a table. And I have the data handed over in the state of the machine as delivered, not in the state of the quotation phase. Ask also whether the bought-in parts are included as models, otherwise the dimensions of the drive and sensor are missing at a later rebuild.
Sound pressure level
Quality & safetyA measure of a machine’s noise emission, given as the A-weighted emission sound pressure level at the workstation in decibels. It is measured by a standardised method under defined operating conditions and depends on distance and room, unlike the sound power level, which describes the source itself. Stating it is a mandatory part of the operating manual under the Machinery Directive. For the operator, employees’ noise exposure is what counts, and above certain trigger values hearing protection and noise-reduction measures are required, regulated in the occupational safety ordinance on noise and vibration.
From practice
Manufacturer figures apply to the individual machine in a test chamber. On the shop floor, cappers, compressed-air blow-off, vibratory chutes and conveyors all add up, and decibels do not add like metres: two equally loud machines give only about 3 decibels more, and that can still be enough to cross a trigger threshold. Require the sound pressure level under your own operating conditions in the user requirements specification and re-measure after commissioning. Compressed-air nozzles and ejectors are often the loudest components and can be tackled with little effort. The hall floor and walls help decide whether it echoes. Reducing noise after the fact is more expensive than at purchase.
Source code handover
Automation & roboticsA contractual arrangement on whether and in what form the operator receives the source code for the controller, robot and operator interface software. The options are an open and commented handover, a handover with know-how protection on individual modules, or only the compiled programme. Libraries, symbol tables, comments and the access data for protected areas belong to the source code, as do the drive parameters and vision projects. A further option is deposit with a third party, such as a notary, which takes effect in an agreed release case, for example if the manufacturer can no longer deliver. Without source code, in-house changes, troubleshooting and a change of supplier are practically out of the question.
From practice
The source code usually gets discussed only after the order has gone out. By then it is expensive or impossible to obtain. I therefore write the handover into the enquiry. The source code for all controllers comes with comments, libraries and symbol tables, the passwords are handed over with it, and know-how protection applies only to clearly defined technology modules. For special-purpose machinery this belongs in the user requirements specification. If the supplier resists, deposit with a notary offers a way out, but clarify the details with a lawyer. At acceptance, check that the delivered project opens and loads on a fresh computer. Without access you depend on the manufacturer in the event of a fault, and the manufacturer does not always have time.
Spare parts package
CommercialThe recommended initial stock of critical parts supplied with a piece of equipment. Usually the manufacturer proposes it as a list of items, quantities and prices. It contains wear parts, parts with long lead times and parts whose failure stops the line. Negotiated together with the equipment, spare parts are generally cheaper than when ordered individually later. The package is checked against the failure-risk analysis of the plant and neither bought nor struck out unseen. Selection depends on lead time, availability on the market and failure impact, and belongs to the operator’s spare parts strategy.
From practice
A starter package should contain short-life wear parts such as blades, sealing bands and belts, plus parts with long lead times such as special motors and parts whose failure stops the line. What the maintenance technician can order from a catalogue in two hours does not belong in it. Have the package justified item by item with failure impact and lead time. That turns a price list into a risk decision. I also compare the list with the standard parts and motors already on the shelf in the plant. Much of it then does not have to be bought twice. Ask as well whether the manufacturer stores the parts until acceptance or only procures them on order.
Spare parts strategy
Project management & CAPEXSystematic determination of which spare parts are held in-house and in what quantity, which the supplier keeps in stock, and which are only procured when needed. The basis is failure risk, lead time and the consequences of downtime. Parts are classified by wear, criticality and lead time. Wear parts are assessed differently from parts that fail rarely and then unexpectedly. Consignment stock at the supplier and spare parts packages for commissioning are also part of the strategy.
From practice
Assess every part against two criteria: failure probability and procurement time. Parts with long lead times and high downtime risk belong in your own stock, even if they are expensive. A servo controller with months of lead time costs less on the shelf than a weekend of downtime. Parts that can be bought from a dealer around the corner need no storage space. I require a classified spare parts list with lead times from the supplier and make it part of acceptance. That includes finding out which parts the supplier holds itself and how quickly it ships them. After a year in operation, look at the consumption figures and adjust the list, because the supplier’s forecast is only an estimate.
SPC (statistical process control)
Quality & safetyA method for monitoring and controlling a running process by means of statistically evaluated measurements. Samples are taken at fixed intervals, and statistics such as mean and spread are plotted on a control chart. The control limits are calculated from the variation of the stable process, usually at three standard deviations of the plotted statistic either side of the centre line. They must not be confused with the tolerance limits of the specification. Points outside the limits, trends or unusual runs indicate a special cause, and the process is then corrected according to a defined reaction plan. Random variation is left alone. Cp / Cpk describe the capability of a process, SPC monitors its stability. Control charts are covered by the ISO 7870 series.
From practice
In packaging you mostly meet SPC on fill weight. The checkweigher records every value anyway, the software draws the chart, and things still go wrong. A typical mistake is overcorrection. Anyone who adjusts the filler after every outlier makes the spread larger rather than smaller. Operators need to know that a single point within the limits calls for no action. Mixing up where the limits come from is just as common. If the chart shows the tolerance limits, nobody reacts until underweight packs have already been produced. Define in writing for each chart who does what on which signal. If the filling machine has trend control, clarify at acceptance how it interacts with the SPC evaluation. When the control adjusts automatically and the operator also intervenes according to the chart, the two work against each other.
Special-purpose machine building
Automation & roboticsThe design and manufacture of machines built for a specific task rather than as a series product. This is typical when the product, packaging material or available space rule out a standard solution. It starts with the operator’s user requirements specification, from which the manufacturer derives a functional specification. Design, manufacture, factory acceptance test (FAT), installation and commissioning follow, then acceptance at the operator’s site (SAT). As a one-off, the machine gets its own risk assessment and CE marking. The price is usually higher, as is the adaptability. What counts is a clean specification and design alignment against the real product.
From practice
A special-purpose machine is the answer when no standard fits. It is a risk when the user requirements specification and acceptance criteria are missing, because as a one-off it is never as proven as a series machine. So allow time for rework after commissioning, and have trials run with your real product before ordering. Check the manufacturer’s references, spare parts concept and documentation. A look at the documents of an earlier machine is particularly revealing. Also check honestly beforehand whether a standard machine with an adapted infeed would not be enough. It has usually got its teething troubles behind it.
Specific energy consumption
Production & energyAn indicator that relates energy consumption to a production quantity, for example kilowatt hours per tonne of product or per 1,000 packs. It can be formed for individual energy carriers such as electricity, compressed air, steam or cooling, or as a total of all carriers. In energy management to ISO 50001 it serves as an energy performance indicator. The value depends heavily on line loading, product mix, changeovers and rejects, because at low output the base load is spread over fewer units. For meaningful comparisons, consumption is therefore normalised for influencing factors such as production volume or outside temperature. In projects the indicator is a good way of comparing quotations from different machine suppliers under the same conditions.
From practice
Figures per tonne look good in a presentation and mislead quickly. If a line runs at half load for a week, the value per pack rises, although nothing at the machine has got worse. Anyone comparing two plants is often mainly comparing two product ranges. The number only becomes useful once it is clear what it refers to and which quantity sits in the denominator. With a high reject rate it makes a real difference whether good packs or all packs produced are counted. In purchasing, on the other hand, the indicator serves you well. Ask every bidder for the consumption of electricity and compressed air per 1,000 packs, at a defined format and a defined output. Rated power alone says little about that. Put the value into the acceptance criteria, and then it will actually be measured.
Stacker crane
IntralogisticsAn aisle-bound machine that stores and retrieves pallets or containers in a high-bay warehouse. It runs on a rail at floor level and is held at the top by a guide rail. The carriage with the load handling device moves along the mast, a telescopic fork in the case of pallets. Travelling and lifting happen at the same time, which shortens the cycle time per storage or retrieval. One machine serves one aisle, or several aisles with a transfer car. Single-deep and double-deep storage are common. Proven technology with high reliability, in which the aisle binding is at the same time the redundancy risk.
From practice
Stacker cranes are the right choice for high storage density and predictable throughput, that is for pallet or container storage with a fixed aisle structure. For packaging operations the connection to the line end via conveyor technology matters most, together with how faults in the aisle are handled. If a crane stops in the middle of the aisle, the whole aisle is shut. A fallback strategy with manual access and emergency operation therefore belongs in the user requirements specification. I also ask the supplier how a technician safely reaches a stopped machine and how long it takes until it runs again. Clarify as well which spare parts the supplier holds and which you need in your own stock.
Stacking factor (safety factor)
Quality & safetyA safety factor between a carton’s box compression strength (BCT) measured in the laboratory and the stacking load permitted in use. The BCT is determined on a single carton in standard climate by loading it in a compression test until it fails. Dividing the BCT by the stacking factor gives the permitted load. It takes account of storage time, humidity, temperature, pallet overhang, stack offset, handling and transport loading. The harsher the conditions and the longer the storage time, the higher it must be set. It is a planning value that packaging development and logistics agree together.
From practice
The BCT from the test certificate applies to standard climate, immediate loading and perfectly aligned cartons. None of that exists in the warehouse. Weeks of storage, cold-store humidity, overhanging cartons and shifted layers all eat into the value. So calculate with a stacking factor that packaging development and logistics agree together. Reassess it as soon as storage height, pallet pattern or storage location change. If the warehouse stacks higher than planned, even a good BCT no longer helps. And if the supplier changes the corrugated board, ask for the new BCT, because even a different flute changes the value.
Stage-gate process
Project management & CAPEXA phase model for investment projects in which defined phases are separated by decision gates. Typical phases are idea, feasibility, basic engineering, execution and close-out. At each gate a panel assesses maturity, viability and risk against defined criteria. It releases the next phase together with its budget, sends the project back for rework or stops it. The budget is thus released phase by phase and not all at once. Originally the model comes from product development, and in plant engineering it is adapted for CAPEX projects.
From practice
The benefit lies in stopping. A gate at which no project has ever failed is just a formality. Define which documents must be ready at which gate: layout with material flow, checked quotations, risk register and cost forecast with contingency. Staff the panel with people who are allowed to say no, meaning plant management, finance and production, and not just the project team. Put decisions with conditions and dates in writing, otherwise a release with reservations soon becomes a release without them. And avoid the classic mistake of placing orders before the release gate because the delivery date is pressing. After that there is no way back, and the gate is only theatre.
Stainless steel 1.4301 / 1.4404 (304/316L)
Mechanical engineering & componentsThe two most common austenitic stainless steels used in machine building for food plants. 1.4301 (AISI 304) is the standard material for frames, cladding and dry areas. 1.4404 (AISI 316L) contains molybdenum and is more resistant to chlorides and cleaning agents, which makes it the standard for wet areas and product contact. The L stands for a low carbon content, which makes welding less critical. Corrosion protection comes from a thin chromium oxide layer, the passive layer, which renews itself on a clean surface.
From practice
Material selection belongs in the user requirements specification, otherwise you get 1.4301 everywhere. Salty products, chlorine-based cleaners and condensate attack 1.4301, and pitting corrosion starts at weld seams and under seals. Specify 1.4404 for product contact and wet areas, along with ground and pickled weld seams. Make sure no foreign rust is introduced during manufacture from steel tools. A wire brush or a disc that has previously ground structural steel is enough, and the surface starts to rust. I always ask whether the workshop keeps separate tools for stainless steel. Ask the supplier, too, where 1.4301 is installed, and have that stated in the quote, not left until acceptance.
Stakeholder
Project management & CAPEXPersons and groups who influence a project or are affected by it. In investment projects these include production, maintenance, quality assurance, purchasing, health and safety, the works council, logistics, authorities and suppliers. A distinction is made between those who decide, those who set requirements and those who merely need to be informed. Stakeholders are identified at the start of the project and rated by influence and impact. The rating shows who is involved in which phase and how often they are communicated with. Whoever brings maintenance in only at acceptance gets their objections at acceptance.
From practice
Stakeholders in packaging projects are more than production and purchasing. They include quality, maintenance, health and safety, logistics, sales with its retail requirements and the operators themselves. Whoever involves them early gets requirements into the user requirements specification. Asked for the first time at commissioning, they will say that this was never what they had in mind. Walk the line once with the shift leader before the tender. That often brings more than several meetings in the office, because the shift leader will show you where the faults really sit. Ask the maintenance technician too which spot is already hard to reach today. Note down who really has influence, unofficially as well. The foreman everybody asks sometimes weighs more than a box on the organisation chart.
Static charge
Packaging technologyAn accumulation of electrical charge on a surface, created when two materials touch and are separated again. In packaging machines this happens mainly when film rolls are unwound and when labels are peeled from their backing web. Insulating materials such as plastic films hold the charge, and in dry air the same applies to paper and board. Films and blanks then stick together, dust and product powder are attracted, and people get a shock when touching parts. Ionising bars produce positive and negative ions and so neutralise the charge, and higher air humidity works in the same direction. Only conductive parts can be earthed. In potentially explosive areas, the German technical rule TRGS 727 describes how ignition hazards from static charge are avoided.
From practice
Static is a winter problem. As soon as the heating comes on and the air in the hall dries out, film wraps itself around the rollers, blanks stick together and operators get a shock from the machine. In summer the same line runs with the same material without trouble. Earthing does little for film, because an insulator does not release its charge to earth. What you need here is ionisation, as close as possible to the point where the charge causes trouble. Ionising bars do get dirty, though, and then work much less well, so their cleaning belongs in the maintenance schedule. With powders such as coffee or spices, the charged film pulls dust into the seal. Then everyone looks at the sealing jaws, although the problem starts a few metres earlier at the unwinder. A simple field meter clears that up faster than any experiment with the sealing temperature.
Statutory safety inspection (UVV inspection)
Quality & safetyA recurring inspection under the accident prevention regulations, carried out at least annually by a competent person for industrial trucks such as forklifts and pallet trucks (DGUV Regulation 68, Germany’s accident prevention regulation). The inspection covers condition and function, for example brakes, steering, forks, mast and safety devices. Results go into an inspection report, and an inspection sticker on the vehicle shows the next due date. In plants the term is also used for the inspection of other work equipment, whose intervals then follow from the risk assessment under the Industrial Safety Ordinance (BetrSichV). A missing sticker is a quick indicator of unmanaged fleets and liability risk in a Shopfloor Analysis.
From practice
On new lines the statutory safety inspection likes to slip under the radar because nobody feels responsible. Have new work equipment inspected before first use where that is required, and enter the inspection dates straight into the maintenance plan. Then an expiring sticker becomes an appointment and not a surprise. Missing inspection records are asked for immediately after accidents and in audits, usually before anything else. On walk-rounds of the shop floor I read the stickers on forklifts and pallet trucks first. It shows quickly how the fleet is managed and whether anyone is responsible for it at all.
Steering committee
Project management & CAPEXThe senior decision-making body of a project, made up of the project sponsor and managers from the departments affected, such as plant management, engineering, production and controlling. This committee releases budget and milestones and decides on changes to scope, schedule and cost that exceed the project manager‘s authority. It is also the highest escalation level in the project. The project manager reports to the committee and prepares resolutions with decision papers, but usually has no vote. It meets at fixed intervals and at short notice when needed. In a stage-gate process, the committee decides on moving to the next phase. Responsibilities and powers are set out in the project charter or a RACI matrix.
From practice
Many steering committees look at status slides and nod. That is expensive time with little to show for it. The committee is needed for questions that you as project manager are not allowed to answer alone, such as more budget, a postponed commissioning date or a dispute between production and engineering. Put the decisions at the top of the agenda and send out the papers a few days in advance. Anyone who hears about a problem for the first time in the meeting will prefer to postpone. Make sure the members attend in person. A deputy without decision-making authority listens politely and then has to go back and ask. Bring bad news early. A steering committee forgives a delay it was shown in good time far more readily than a surprise shortly before the SAT.
STEP file (CAD data exchange)
Digitalisation & AIA neutral file format for exchanging 3D CAD models between different CAD systems, standardised in ISO 10303. Such a file, with the extension .stp or .step, contains the geometry as a solid or surface model, for assemblies also the structure of the individual parts, and depending on the application protocol, colours and further product data. Common protocols are AP214 and the newer AP242, which can also carry dimensions and tolerances on the model. The design history is lost on export, so the model can only be modified to a limited extent afterwards. STEP is used above all for layout planning and clash checks and for exchanging data with suppliers. For manufacturing and inspection the drawing usually remains the governing document.
From practice
For layout planning I ask for a simplified STEP model of the machine in every enquiry. Outer contour, control cabinet, utility connections and the space needed for doors and maintenance are quite enough. You will not get the complete design anyway, and if you do, it will bring your computer to its knees. Look at the file before passing it on. Sometimes the guard fences are missing, sometimes the origin sits somewhere in the middle of nowhere, sometimes the units are wrong and the machine is suddenly as big as the hall. For bought-in parts and subcontract machining, STEP is everyday business. Parts are still mostly made to the drawing, though. So always send both, model and drawing at the same revision level, or the workshop builds whatever happens to be on top of the pile.
Sterilisation
Quality & safetyA process that kills microorganisms in a product or a pack. For foods this is usually called commercial sterility: the product no longer contains viable germs that could spoil it under normal storage. Heat treatment is the usual route, for canned goods under pressure with saturated steam in an autoclave, for liquid products as ultra-high-temperature heating followed by aseptic filling. Packaging materials are sterilised with steam, hydrogen peroxide or radiation before the product goes in. The effect depends on temperature, holding time and the initial microbial load, and it is proven by validation.
From practice
The sterilisation of packaging or product with steam, hydrogen peroxide or radiation determines the choice of material and the sizing of the machine. Films, cups and seal seams have to withstand the heat or the peroxide. In food packaging this mainly concerns aseptic filling. There a whole batch goes wrong if corners are cut in the sterile zone. Heat also changes taste, texture and nutritional value, and the recipe has to cope with that. Validation and documentation belong to acceptance and are not a step added afterwards. Have the supplier show the evidence of sterilisation performance before the plant is released, and clarify who revalidates after a rebuild.
Stopping time measurement (overrun measurement)
Quality & safetyMeasurement of the time and distance a hazardous movement takes to come to a stop after the safeguard is triggered. The total stopping time is made up of the response time of the safeguard, the response time of the safety control system and the mechanical run-down of the drive including its brake. It is an input for calculating the safety distance under ISO 13855 and must be checked at acceptance and periodically thereafter. Measurement uses a stopping-time meter that records the trigger and the standstill. The longer the stopping time, the further the safeguard must stand from the danger point.
From practice
Stopping times change in operation. Brakes wear, parameters get changed, a motor is replaced with a larger model. The value measured at commissioning then no longer holds, and the calculated safety distance becomes too small. Measure in the worst state, meaning top speed, greatest mass and a warm brake, and more than once, because the values scatter. The measurement belongs where the hazard arises, not at the motor shaft. Make the stopping time measurement a fixed item in periodic inspection and require the measurement record at acceptance of every safeguard. I look at the number in the record, not at the tick in the inspection report.
Strapping
Packaging technologyLoad securing in which cartons, bundles or pallets are enclosed with plastic or steel strap. Polypropylene and polyester are common plastic straps. A machine lays the strap around the load, tensions it, closes it and cuts it off. On plastic strap the closure is made by friction welding or heat welding, on steel strap by seals or clips. Edge protection is often added on pallets. Strap tension and closure quality are the process parameters.
From practice
Strapping is fast and saves material, but without edge protection the strap cuts in. Automatic strapping machines need cleanly aligned load units, and on uneven stacks the machine stops. Strap tension depends on the goods. Too tight crushes cartons, too loose lets the load slip. Plastic strap gives a little over time, polypropylene in particular, and for heavy loads or long journeys you should consider polyester or steel. Give the supplier your worst load unit to test. When costing, check strap consumption and the maintenance of the seal head. The head works under friction and heat and belongs in the maintenance plan.
Stretch blow moulding machine
Packaging technologyMachine that forms PET bottles from heated preforms by stretching and blowing. The preforms are heated in an oven, stretched lengthwise by a stretch rod in the blow mould and blown against the mould wall with compressed air. In the common two-stage process the preforms are injection moulded separately and delivered. The machine is often positioned directly ahead of the filler and forms a blow-fill block with it and the capper. This saves transport and handling of empty bottles, with preform logistics replacing bottle logistics.
From practice
A lot hangs on the preform. Dimensions, weight and neck finish must be right, and the heating profile has to suit it. Blow moulds also have to be changed at a format change. A blow-fill block gives you fewer interfaces, but less flexibility during stoppages. If the filler stops, the blow moulder can hardly keep running. Ask the supplier what happens to the preforms standing in the oven when the machine halts, and how long it takes afterwards to produce the first usable bottle. The blow air touches the inside of the bottle and belongs in the hygiene assessment.
Stretch film
Packaging technologyStretchable polyethylene film for load securing on pallets. It is produced as blown or cast film and mostly used as machine film, pre-stretched in the stretch wrapper (typically 150 to 300 percent) and wound around the load unit with a defined holding force. The film stays elastic and holds the load together through its restoring force. A cling layer makes the turns stick to one another without adhesive. Unlike shrink film, stretch film is tensioned by stretching and not by heat.
From practice
Film thickness, pre-stretch and wrapping programme determine cost and load security. Do not buy film by the price per kilogram but by the consumption per pallet. A thinner film is often dearer per kilogram but can be cheaper per pallet if it stretches further. Test programmes with a tilt or transport trial and document the approved recipe, otherwise every shift adjusts the settings. At the pallet base one usually wraps tighter, so that the load sits firmly on the pallet and nothing slips out. If the film is changed, check the programme again afterwards, even when datasheet and colour look the same.
Stretch hood
Packaging technologyA load-securing machine that pulls a tubular film over the pallet without heat. The film is drawn off the roll, cut to length, welded at the top, opened out by reefing fingers, stretched sideways and pulled down over the load. As it relaxes, it wraps tightly around the goods. Compared with stretch wrapping it gives a closed hood with no film overlap and high throughput. It differs from the hood shrink wrapper in having no shrink frame, so the energy for heating is not needed.
From practice
The hood film must match load height, pallet size and product. For different heights the hood length is adjusted, and different footprints need additional film rolls. Ask the manufacturer about changeover time for a film change and behaviour after a film tear. The height clearance needed is often underestimated, as is the effect of hall temperature on film properties. Sharp load edges cut into the stretched film, and edge protection helps here. Also check that the load sits flush on the pallet, because an overhang tends to tear the hood at the corner. Tubular film on the roll is heavy, and without a lifting aid the film change becomes hard labour.
Stretch wrapper
Packaging technologyMachine that wraps stretch film around a pallet. On a turntable wrapper the pallet rotates while a film carriage travels up and down a mast. A rotary-arm wrapper leaves the pallet standing while the film carriage circles it, which helps with unstable loads. Ring wrappers guide the film reel on a ring around the stationary load and are intended for the highest outputs. In the film carriage a pair of rollers running at different speeds pre-stretches the film, and pre-stretch has a strong influence on film consumption. A photoelectric sensor measures the pallet height.
From practice
With a stretch wrapper the running costs lie in the film. Pre-stretch, number of wraps and film thickness determine consumption and load security, and better pre-stretch saves film for the same stability. Check how the wrapper handles a film roll change, because an empty roll halfway through a pallet leaves a poorly secured load. Run all pallet formats through it, including those with overhang, since film likes to tear on protruding cartons. The wrapping programme should be selected from the article number, otherwise the wrong one is running on the night shift. And clarify whether the wrapper can hold the cycle time of the palletiser. Otherwise the pallets queue up in front of the wrapper and the palletiser waits for space.
Substantial modification
Quality & safetyA change to an existing machine that creates new hazards or increases existing risks to the point where the existing protective measures are no longer sufficient. Typical triggers are fitting a robot, raising output or speed, altered safety functions and linking several machines together. Where a substantial modification exists, the operator is treated as the manufacturer. The operator must carry out a new conformity assessment procedure with risk assessment, technical documentation and CE marking. A repair that restores the original condition with equivalent parts is generally not a substantial modification.
From practice
The question always comes up with a retrofit, an output increase or fitting a robot. Document the assessment before the conversion and not once the machine is running again. Even if you conclude that there is no substantial modification, the reasoning belongs in the record. A higher speed set by a parameter in the drive does not feel like a rebuild, but it can be one, because the run-down and with it the safety distance change. Clarify in the contract who takes on overall conformity when several machines are linked together. Without this arrangement, you as the operator are the manufacturer of the complete line.
Supplier audit
CommercialA systematic check, on site or remote, of whether a supplier meets the customer’s requirements. The system audit assesses the quality management system, for example to ISO 9001, the process audit a specific manufacturing or assembly process, and the product audit finished parts against the specification. Typical triggers are the approval of a new supplier or an accumulation of complaints. The audit follows a questionnaire and ends with a report listing nonconformities and actions. ISO 19011 serves as guidance. A supplier audit is carried out by the customer and thus differs from a certification audit by an independent body. For machine suppliers it covers design, manufacturing, control panel building, software development and service.
From practice
With a new machine supplier I go to the assembly hall first and only afterwards to the meeting room. In the hall you see how many machines are being built in parallel and how tidily people work. Ask to meet the people who will actually do your project, above all the project manager and the software developer. You already know the sales people. Ask whether panel building and programming are done in house or by subcontractors, and who picks up the phone at night when something jams. Have a look at the documents of a current project, as far as the supplier is allowed to show them. Drawing revisions, parts lists and a well kept punch list say a lot. And ask about their workload in your planned delivery period. A supplier who says yes to everything either has spare capacity or a problem.
Supplier evaluation
CommercialThe regular and traceable assessment of suppliers against defined criteria. Common criteria are quality, measured for instance by complaints and defective parts per million, delivery performance in terms of OTIF, price development, service response time and quality of documentation. Figures come from the ERP system, softer criteria from the assessment of the departments involved. Weighted and combined, they produce a classification such as preferred, approved, conditionally approved or blocked. Poor results lead to actions agreed with the supplier or to delisting. ISO 9001 requires external providers to be selected, evaluated and monitored against defined criteria. A supplier audit is a one-off check on site, whereas evaluation runs continuously.
From practice
For parts suppliers with frequent deliveries, evaluation by performance figures works well. With machine suppliers it does not. A supplier who delivers a line every few years has no meaningful delivery performance and no defect rate in ppm. Evaluate each project on its own instead, straight after the SAT, while everyone still remembers. Record whether FAT and SAT were on time, how long the punch list was, when the documentation arrived and how service responded in the first weeks. Otherwise nobody will remember by the next project, and the difficult supplier wins the contract again because he was cheapest. Be suspicious if nearly all suppliers end up in the same class. Then the evaluation was filled in for the auditor rather than for purchasing.
Surface roughness (Ra)
Mechanical engineering & componentsA parameter for the fine structure of a surface. Ra is the arithmetic mean roughness value in micrometres, the average distance of the profile from its centre line. For product-contact surfaces in food plants, smooth, easily cleanable surfaces are required, often with Ra up to 0.8 µm. This is achieved through grinding, electropolishing or suitable sheet metal quality. It is measured with a profilometer that draws a stylus across the surface. Ra says nothing about the shape of the roughness, so two surfaces with the same Ra can differ in cleanability.
From practice
Roughness determines cleanability: product residues and biofilms lodge in scratches and weld seams. Specify Ra values for product-contact surfaces and the finish of weld seams, fully welded and ground smooth, in the URS. Check at FAT with a profilometer or comparison samples. Coated or blasted surfaces can look smooth while still being poor to clean. Also record who takes the measurement, the supplier or a third party, and at which points. Ask to see sample plates and write into the order which sample applies. If an existing plant has cleaning problems, look at weld seams and transitions first, before you change the cleaning agent.
T
TCO
KPIsTotal cost over the service life of a plant. This includes acquisition, energy, maintenance, spare parts, change parts, operating personnel and disposal, occasionally also downtime costs. Over longer periods, future costs are often discounted to present value. TCO stands for total cost of ownership. It is the honest benchmark for investment decisions, and the lowest quoted price surprisingly rarely wins in this calculation. The result depends on assumptions about service life and how heavily the plant is used, which should be stated openly.
From practice
Looking at TCO over the planned service life often turns two seemingly equally priced quotes into a clear favourite. Energy, compressed air, change parts, wear parts, maintenance contracts, operating personnel and downtime costs differ greatly. Request these figures in the quote comparison matrix. Whoever cannot or will not provide them has never calculated them themselves. I ask at least for the compressed air and electricity consumption and for the wear parts list with prices and service lives. Those are the items that weigh on the books year after year, while the purchase price is paid only once.
Teach-in
Automation & roboticsProgramming a robot by manually moving to positions and saving them with the teach pendant, as opposed to offline programming on a computer. The programmer moves the robot by hand at reduced speed to the required points and stores them as path points. Motion type and speed are set for each point, for example point to point, linear or circular. The pendant carries an emergency stop and a three-position switch that has to be held in the middle position. Working directly on the real product is the advantage, the standstill of the plant meanwhile the disadvantage.
From practice
Teach-in is quickly done for a new pack pattern, but the line stands still meanwhile. Make sure at least two of your own staff can teach, otherwise the plant waits for the service technician at every new format. The three-position switch on the pendant belongs in the training, so that it is used properly and does not degrade into a token safeguard. For palletisers, pack-pattern generators on the HMI are the better solution. Enter the new format, done. After that, at most fine corrections need teaching. And back up the programme right after teaching, otherwise you teach from scratch after the next fault.
Teams
Digitalisation & AIMicrosoft Teams is a platform for chat, video conferencing, telephony and shared file storage, tightly integrated with Microsoft 365. In many industrial companies it is the standard tool for internal and external meetings. Chats and meetings are organised in teams and channels, which are set up per project, department or topic. External participants such as suppliers or consultants join meetings by invitation. During a meeting, the screen and documents can be shared with all participants.
From practice
Most customer meetings today take place in Teams, from the kick-off to the offer discussion with the supplier. What works well: write the minutes directly during the meeting and send them out the same day, otherwise decisions get lost. The chat is no substitute, because nobody finds what is written there later. Settle at the start who takes the minutes, and ask every participant before a recording whether it is allowed. When you show a layout or a drawing, circulate the file beforehand so that not everyone stares at a blurry picture. And check sound and camera before the supplier is brought in.
The share of time in which a machine is technically able to produce, measured against an agreed time base. Only stops caused by the machine itself count as downtime, such as mechanical defects or control faults. Stops caused by missing material or staff, by blockage or starvation from neighbouring machines, by changeovers, cleaning and breaks are excluded. Availability in OEE, by contrast, covers every stop within planned production time. Technical availability is the figure agreed in purchase contracts and acceptance tests. The time base and the rules for assigning stops have to be written into the contract. Terms and calculation are covered by the German guideline VDI 3423, and for packaging machines EN 415-11 describes how efficiency and availability are determined.
From practice
A percentage in the purchase contract looks respectable. Without a time base and clear rules, it is worth little. Write down which time the availability refers to, over how many shifts it is measured and who logs the stops. Arguments arise later over borderline cases, for example when the film is just within specification and the sealing station cannot cope with it, or when an operator intervened wrongly. The supplier likes to book such stops as someone else’s fault, the customer as a machine fault. Agree in advance who decides in case of doubt, and have both sides sign off the stops shift by shift during the performance test. Anyone who only starts assigning faults at the end of the week remembers nothing and argues about everything.
Technical purchasing
CommercialThe purchasing function that procures technical goods and services and brings technical expertise to the job. It covers machines, plant, components and spare parts as well as services such as engineering, installation, commissioning and maintenance. Technical purchasing sits between specialist departments such as engineering or maintenance and commercial purchasing. Its tasks run from clarifying the requirement against the user requirement specification, through supplier selection and bid comparison, to negotiation and the purchase order. It also handles contract topics such as acceptance, liability for defects, payment schedule and guarantees, and supplier evaluation. Many companies separate project purchasing for investments from purchasing for maintenance and spares.
From practice
In many projects technical purchasing comes in too late. Engineering has already settled on a supplier, and purchasing is supposed to knock a bit more off the price at the end. That usually works, except that the supplier gets the money back through deleted items or change orders. Suddenly the spare parts package, the second training session or the documentation in the local language has gone. Bring purchasing to the table while the user requirement specification is still being written. Then they can request the commercial terms at the same time and compare bids that really are comparable. When I read a quotation, I look at the exclusions and assumptions first and only then at the price. The exclusions tell you what will come back later as a change order. And a buyer who has once seen the machine running negotiates differently.
TEEP
KPIsA metric for how fully a piece of equipment is used, measured against total calendar time. TEEP stands for Total Effective Equipment Performance. It is calculated as OEE multiplied by the loading factor, which is the share of calendar time scheduled for production. While OEE only assesses the time in which the line is planned to run according to the shift pattern, TEEP also counts unscheduled shifts, weekends and public holidays as unused time, and depending on the plant’s convention, planned maintenance stops as well. A week has 168 hours. Running two eight-hour shifts on five days therefore gives a TEEP of just under 48 per cent, even with an OEE of 100 per cent. The figure is mainly used to reveal spare capacity before an investment.
From practice
TEEP is of little use in the daily line meeting. It comes into its own when someone applies for an additional line. With every such request, I first check how much calendar time the existing equipment actually uses. If it runs two shifts on five days, it stands idle for more than half the week, and a third shift is often quicker to organise than a new machine is to deliver. The sums are rarely that simple, though. A night shift needs people who first have to be found, and maintenance has so far done its work in exactly that free time. Anyone who fills it has to settle beforehand when servicing and cleaning will happen in future. And never compare the TEEP of two plants with different shift patterns. The plant with more shifts wins automatically, and that tells you nothing about the engineering.
Temperature sensor (Pt100 / thermocouple)
Mechanical engineering & componentsA sensor that converts temperature into an electrical signal. Two designs dominate in machinery. The Pt100 is a platinum resistance thermometer with 100 ohms at 0 °C, and its resistance rises almost linearly with temperature. It measures accurately and stays stable, but responds more slowly. A thermocouple consists of two different metals and delivers a voltage that depends on the temperature difference between the measuring point and the reference junction. Types J and K are the most common. Thermocouples are small, fast and suited to high temperatures, but less accurate. Pt100 sensors are wired with two, three or four conductors. With three or four conductors the lead resistance, which would otherwise distort the reading, can be compensated.
From practice
At the sealing station the sensor decides whether the seam holds. It still gets treated like a penny item. If it sits too far from the sealing face, the machine dutifully controls a temperature that never reaches the film. And after a sensor swap the recipe suddenly no longer fits, although nobody touched a setting. Usually a different type went in, or the sensor is no longer pushed home in its bore. Write type, length and diameter for each measuring point into the spare parts list and keep the common sensors in stock. Thermocouples need the matching compensating cable. Plain copper wire works too, it just shows you some number or other.
A structured request for quotation sent to several suppliers based on a URS. It defines scope of supply, interfaces, acceptance criteria and commercial terms so that the quotations become directly comparable. Besides the URS, the documents usually include the layout, format list, requirements for documentation and training, and a time frame. The bidders answer fixed questions in a given structure, and queries and answers go to all participants at the same time. Evaluation then takes place in a quotation comparison matrix. Unlike an informal enquiry, a tender is an orderly procedure with deadlines.
From practice
POWERJO structures tenders so that every supplier answers the same questions in the same structure. These range from performance data through formats and interfaces to component standard, documentation, acceptance criteria, incoterms and payment schedule. This includes a comparison matrix in which the quotations are normalised to the same scope. Only then does the real price difference become visible. Anyone who writes the URS sloppily gets quotations that cannot be compared, and ends up negotiating over offers that do not cover the same thing. The Tender Package provides exactly this template for a machine or a palletising system.
Tertiary packaging
Packaging technologyPackaging level for storage, handling and transport that combines several sales packs or outer packs into a shipping unit. Typically this is the palletised, secured load unit, consisting of a pallet with load securing by stretch film, shrink hood or strapping. Depending on the goods, interlayers, edge protection and a pallet label are added. Dimensions, height and labelling are often laid down by retail customers. Tertiary packaging follows on from primary and secondary packaging and is the level that warehouses, hauliers and retailers handle.
From practice
Transport costs and damage rate hang on the tertiary packaging, and it contains more parts than one first thinks: pallet, stretch film, interlayers and edge protection. Savings lie in volume use and film consumption, risks in load securing. Never change the pack pattern or film without a test under transport conditions and without coordinating with logistics and retail customers. Ask whether your pallets are stacked two high at the haulier or in the racking. Then the bottom carton carries the entire weight, and that is not automatically in your specification. Damage often only shows up at the customer’s ramp and not in your own plant. Anyone who wants to know for sure can have a transport simulation run in the laboratory beforehand.
Test piece (contamination reference sample)
Quality & safetyCertified test pieces with a defined foreign-body sample of known size, used for the regular functional testing of detection systems. For metal detectors they are made of ferrous metal, non-ferrous metal or stainless steel, for X-ray systems of glass, ceramic, stone or metal. The sample is usually a sphere or small rod embedded in a plastic carrier and supplied with a certificate stating material and size. The detectable test-piece size defines the sensitivity of the system and is documented in HACCP plans and customer standards. Testing takes place at the start of the shift, after a product change and at defined intervals.
From practice
The test is only meaningful if the test piece passes through at the least favourable position, in the middle of the product and at the centre of the tunnel opening, not on top at the edge. Agree the test-piece sizes for your product with the supplier at SAT, not from a catalogue. At SAT I have all the agreed sizes and materials run through, including the smallest. In the end what counts is that the rejector fires and the test piece lands in the reject bin. Test pieces have a habit of going missing. Number them, check for replacements and train operators on the test interval and documentation. A test piece that ends up in the goods is a foreign body with a certificate.
Thermal expansion
Mechanical engineering & componentsChange in length of components due to temperature change, described by the coefficient of thermal expansion of the material. Aluminium expands roughly twice as much as steel, and austenitic stainless steel lies above structural steel. Relevant in packaging machines at sealing jaws, shrink tunnels, long conveyor runs and plastic parts. The change in length follows from the initial length, the temperature difference and the coefficient, so it grows with the length of the component. Plastics usually expand considerably more than metals. When two materials are joined rigidly, heating creates stresses.
From practice
Typical consequences are sealing jaws that were set cold and bind when warm, plastic change parts that no longer fit after the warm-up phase, and guides on long aluminium frames that distort in summer. Set thermally loaded assemblies at operating temperature, and provide clearance or a floating bearing for mismatched material pairs. In chilled and frozen areas the same applies with the opposite sign. There the part shrinks, and a joint that was tight at room temperature opens up. Do not measure fits of plastic change parts in the cold workshop. Try them on the warm machine. Long runs should be measured once more in the warm state at acceptance.
Thermal inkjet (TIJ)
Packaging technologyAn inkjet printing process based on the drop on demand principle, in which drops are only formed when printing takes place. Ink supply and printhead sit together in one cartridge. Small heating resistors in the nozzle chambers heat the ink abruptly, a vapour bubble forms and ejects a drop. Every cartridge change therefore puts a new printhead into the machine. TIJ prints at high resolution and is suited to plain text, barcodes and DataMatrix or GS1 codes. Water-based inks are intended for absorbent substrates such as board and paper, while solvent-based inks also work on films and coated surfaces. Compared with continuous inkjet (CIJ), the printhead has to sit closer to the product, and the print height per head is limited.
From practice
TIJ is popular mainly because the printer needs hardly any maintenance. There is no ink system and no solvent to top up, and the cartridge is swapped in seconds. In return, you pay for every code through the cartridge. Work out with your real volumes how that compares with a CIJ printer. Trouble often comes from pauses. If the line stands for a while, ink dries in the nozzles, and the first codes afterwards are faint or patchy. Find out how the printer clears its nozzles after a pause and whether the downstream code inspection reliably catches such packs. And keep enough cartridges in stock. No ink means no best-before date, and without a best-before date the goods go nowhere.
Thermal transfer printer (TTO)
Packaging technologyCoding printer that transfers ink from a thermal transfer ribbon onto film or label via a heated print head. The head carries a row of tiny heating elements that warm the ribbon dot by dot so that the ink adheres to the film. It is used on flow wrapper and thermoforming machines for best-before date, batch number and barcodes. Printing is intermittent with the film stationary or continuous with the web running. Print quality is high and the ribbon is a consumable. Unlike inkjet and laser it needs a flat web against which the head can be pressed.
From practice
The most common faults are ribbon tears and missing print after a roll change. Usually the ribbon tension is wrong or the film does not accept the ink. The ribbon has to suit the film. For films, wax-resin or resin ribbons are often the answer, because a plain wax ribbon rubs off smooth film quickly. Test film and ribbon together for abrasion and cold resistance if the product is chilled. Print head life is limited. Plan for spare heads and a code verification sensor so that unprinted packs do not reach the carton. And clean the head to a schedule, because dust and ink residue quickly turn a clean print into a misprint.
Thermoformer
Packaging technologyMachine that forms packaging cavities directly from a film web, then fills and seals them in one line. The bottom film is heated, drawn into the mould by vacuum or compressed air and cooled. Filling section, top film, sealing station and a cutting unit follow, and the cutting unit separates the finished packs from the web. Vacuum or protective gas can also be introduced in the sealing station. Typical uses are sausage, cheese and medical devices. Output is high, but the machine is bound to one format through its forming tools. Unlike a tray sealer, which seals ready-made trays, the thermoformer forms the tray itself.
From practice
Every format change on a thermoformer is a tool change. Thermoformers are deep-draw machines, and their output depends on film, forming depth and cooling time. So check tool costs and lead times per format. With film consumption the waste counts too, since edge trim and film scrap remain after cutting and have to go somewhere. Also ask how long start-up takes after a film change and how much film ends up as scrap in the process. And look at the hygienic design in the wet area, because that is where the wheat is separated from the chaff. At acceptance I have the supplier show how long a format change takes with the real tools, not with the figure from the quotation.
Three-phase motor (induction motor)
Mechanical engineering & componentsAn electric motor that runs directly on the three-phase mains or from a frequency inverter. Three offset windings in the stator create a rotating field that induces currents in the squirrel-cage rotor and drags it along. The rotor always turns slightly slower than the rotating field, and this difference is called slip. Speed follows from mains frequency and number of poles, so a four-pole motor on a 50 Hz supply runs at just under 1,500 revolutions per minute. Rated power, voltage, current, speed, power factor, degree of protection and efficiency class are stated on the rating plate. Frame sizes and mounting dimensions are standardised by the IEC, which is why motors from different manufacturers can usually be interchanged.
From practice
The three-phase motor is the workhorse of every line. That is exactly why nobody notices it until one stops. Then the search through the stores begins, and often there is a motor with the right power and the wrong flange. On new plant I therefore ask for a motor list with frame size, mounting arrangement, power and brake, and hold it up against what is already running in the factory. Three or four frame sizes usually cover most of the conveyors. Also check whether a motor runs slowly on the inverter for long periods. Its own fan then barely cools it. Without a separately driven fan or temperature monitoring, the winding dies quietly.
Throughput time
KPIsTime from the start of production to goods being ready for dispatch. It is made up of processing, transport and waiting times and is usually dominated by inventory and waiting, not by processing. By Little’s law, the average throughput time equals the work in process divided by the throughput rate. Anyone who wants to halve throughput time must therefore tackle inventory and not speed up machines. It is determined with a value stream analysis or by following a batch from release to loading.
From practice
Short throughput times tie up less capital, need less storage space and allow a faster response to orders. The first place to look is the inventory between process steps: buffer stock, half-finished pallets, goods waiting before packaging. A value stream analysis makes the waiting times visible, and the ratio to pure processing time is often sobering. Switching to smaller batches frequently achieves more than any machine speed-up. That only works if the changeover times allow it, otherwise the changeover eats the gain again. Follow a single pallet through the plant once with a tag and a clock, which convinces sceptics faster than any slide.
Tightening torque (bolted joint)
Mechanical engineering & componentsThe torque applied to a bolt or nut to generate a defined preload in the joint. Preload is what clamps the parts together, and the torque is merely the quantity that can be set and measured during assembly. A large share of the torque is lost to friction in the thread and under the head, so the preload actually achieved varies considerably with surface finish, coating and lubrication. Guide values are given in the bolt manufacturers’ tables and apply only to the property class and coefficient of friction stated there. Highly stressed joints are calculated to VDI 2230, the German engineering guideline for bolted joints. Tightening is done with a torque wrench or a controlled nutrunner, and critical joints are also tightened by angle.
From practice
Stainless bolts in stainless threads tend to gall. Tighten them dry to the table value for zinc-plated steel bolts and you will find out at the latest when undoing them, because the head snaps off. With new machines I therefore ask for a list of tightening torques for the assemblies maintenance opens regularly. Bearing covers, gearbox flanges, couplings, tool holders in the sealing station. Where nothing is written down, everyone tightens by feel, and feel is a poor guide for an M6 in aluminium. Pay attention to what goes on the thread as well. Assembly paste lowers friction, so the same torque produces more preload, and the bolt can be overloaded while it is still being tightened. A torque wrench without calibration control is, incidentally, just a spanner with a scale.
Time-series database
Digitalisation & AIDatabase optimised for timestamped measurement values: high write rates, strong compression, fast queries over time ranges and automatic deletion of old data after a set retention period. It forms the basis for trend displays, condition monitoring and anomaly detection on production lines. Each value is stored with timestamp, measured quantity and origin. Older data is often condensed, for example into minute averages, so that storage does not overflow. The curves are usually displayed in dashboards that overlay several signals.
From practice
A time-series database fills up faster than you would think: a hundred signals sampled every second add up to substantial data volumes over the years. Define which signals are stored, how often and for how long, and above all who will analyse them later. The value lies in comparison. What the sealing temperature looked like last month before the complaint came in can only be answered if the data is still there. Without event markers such as changeover and fault, trends are hard to interpret. So I decide from the start which events are recorded alongside. Also make sure all systems use the same clock time, otherwise measured value and event do not match up.
Timing belt drive
Mechanical engineering & componentsPositive-engagement belt drive with a toothed belt and toothed pulleys that transmits rotary motion without slip and without lubrication. Common profiles are T, AT and HTD. In packaging machines it serves as the axis drive for gantries, pushers and conveyor segments, and to synchronously couple several shafts. The belt is made of an elastomer with embedded tension cords that carry the force. Linear movements are also possible when the belt is attached to a carriage. Belt tension is set with an idler or by moving the motor.
From practice
Timing belts need the right tension and aligned pulleys. Too little tension lets teeth skip and shifts synchronisation, too much destroys bearings. Specify that belt tension is checked in the maintenance plan. For food areas, low-abrasion belt coatings are available. Open belt drives above the product are a hygiene risk and should be enclosed. If the position of an axis slowly wanders although nobody has changed a setting, look at the belt first before searching the software. Record profile, pitch and width of each belt in the spare parts list, otherwise someone orders a profile that almost fits.
Timing screw
Packaging technologyChange part used to singulate and space containers or products ahead of fillers, cappers, labellers and packers. The screw, with variable pitch, picks up products from an accumulation, accelerates them and hands them off at a fixed pitch to an infeed star wheel or dog carrier. It turns in sync with the following machine, so its speed determines throughput. Screw geometry is container- and format-specific, and the screw is usually made of plastic or stainless steel. Height and lateral position are adjustable and are reset at every changeover.
From practice
The timing screw is a precision change part. Wear or incorrect height lead to tipping, jamming and scuffing on the container, and so does a slightly different bottle contour. Every container shape needs its own screw, so plan for this when packaging changes and have the screw made by the machine manufacturer to the container sample. Backpressure ahead of the screw must be limited, or it will jam with lightweight containers. When containers snag on their way through the screw, look at height and side guides first before you touch the speed. Keep a spare screw for your main formats in stock, because making one to a sample takes time.
Tool centre point (TCP)
Automation & roboticsA reference point on a robot’s tool to which all programmed positions and paths relate, for example the tip of a suction cup or the centre of the gripper jaws. The TCP is measured relative to the flange and stored as a coordinate system with position and orientation. Paths and path speed refer to this point, as do reorientations in which the tool is turned about the TCP without the point moving. If the TCP is wrong, all paths and orientation moves are shifted. A separate tool data set is kept for each tool, which often also holds mass and centre of gravity.
From practice
After every gripper change and every collision, the TCP has to be measured again. Otherwise you wonder about placement errors nobody can explain. A simple test helps. Move the TCP onto a fixed tip and tilt the tool in orientation. If the point wanders, the TCP is wrong. Set up a separate tool data set for each gripper and document it. With grippers that have several suction cups, it must be clear which point is the TCP, otherwise everyone programmes the way they think is right. The same applies to grippers on a tool changer, where every variant needs its own data set. After measuring, run the programmes through once slowly in manual mode before the line starts up again.
Top loader / side loader
Packaging technologyTwo loading principles by which products are placed into cases, trays or folding cartons. In top loading, the pack is first erected and presented with its top open. A gripper or robot inserts the products from above, and the pack is then closed. In side loading, the pack lies next to the product flow with one end open. The grouped products are pushed in horizontally, after which the flaps are folded and glued. Top loaders are considered gentle on the product and flexible with changing pack patterns, while side loaders reach high outputs with dimensionally stable products. A wrap-around packer, by contrast, does not fill a ready-made case at all. The blank is folded and glued directly around the product group.
From practice
Which principle fits depends first and foremost on the product. Soft bags, stand-up pouches or bottles with delicate labels are hard to push, so they are better placed from above. Dimensionally stable folding cartons, on the other hand, run fast in a side loader without much fuss. The side loader is unforgiving, though, when the case is cut tight or a second case supplier works to slightly different tolerances. Then the group jams on insertion, and on the night shift someone stands next to the machine pushing it in by hand. When choosing a machine, I always have it tested with the most difficult items in the range, not with the sample product from the brochure. Bring cases from every supplier you actually use.
TPM
KPIsMaintenance concept that involves operators in basic upkeep and systematically eliminates losses. The name stands for Total Productive Maintenance. Its core idea is autonomous maintenance: whoever runs the machine every day is first to notice early signs of a fault. The operator cleans, lubricates, checks against a checklist and fixes small faults. Skilled maintenance staff remain responsible for planned maintenance and larger interventions, and both sides set standards together. Cleaning counts as inspection, because leaks, loose parts and contamination show up before they cause a stoppage. Success is usually measured with OEE and the six big losses.
From practice
Whether TPM works is decided in the shift plan. If the operator gets five minutes for the checklist but the line is expected to run full output from the first minute, the checklist stays in its folder. Schedule the time firmly and let production and maintenance write the standards together, otherwise it becomes a paper that one department wrote for the other. On packaging lines TPM pays off in fewer micro-stops. Change parts last longer, because someone handles them daily and spots a worn gripper before it causes a stop. And at three in the morning the operator knows the machine when nobody from service picks up the phone. When a company introduces it, I first ask where the time sits in the shift plan.
Traceability
Quality & safetyUnbroken proof of which raw material batch ended up in which finished pack and where it was delivered. Under food law, Regulation (EC) 178/2002 requires companies to be able to name their suppliers and customers, one step back and one step forward. The proof is practised in recall scenarios. Equipment must support batch separation and data capture, for example through coders, scanners and a link to the production data system. The packaging line is the last link in the chain, because this is where batch number and best-before date are applied to the pack and linked to the pallet and delivery note.
From practice
Traceability means knowing, within hours in an emergency, which batch went into which pallet. Technically this means batch numbers at every packaging level, linked to the pallet label and the delivery note. The critical point on the line is the batch changeover. Anyone who does not document it cleanly in the system has to quarantine whole days instead of individual hours during a recall. Rework and returns that get mixed into a new batch without anyone noting it are just as awkward. Mixed pallets tend to catch the evaluation off guard. Run a recall through once while nothing has happened. Then you see where the data is missing.
Track and trace
Quality & safetyTracking and tracing of products along the supply chain by means of unique identification. Codes such as DataMatrix or barcode are applied to the product, the outer carton and the pallet and scanned on the line and in the warehouse. A system assigns data such as batch, time and location to each code. Tracking shows where a unit is at the moment, tracing shows where it came from and where it went. Aggregation records which packs are in which carton and on which pallet. The method is used in the food, pharmaceutical and electronics industries to detect losses, delays and affected batches.
From practice
The technology is rarely the problem, as a printer and a scanner are mounted quickly. Most of the effort lies in the connection to the ERP and the line control system, and in the exceptions. These include scrap, reprints and repacked goods. Each of these cases needs a status in the system, otherwise stock and codes will drift apart sooner or later. Start at pallet level with clean batch documentation before serialising every individual pack. Before ordering, I have the exception cases played through once and ask who gets the alert when a read fails at three in the morning. Often that has not been settled yet.
Training data
Digitalisation & AIDataset used to build a machine-learning model: images, measurement series or text, usually with a label for the desired result. The dataset is normally split. One part is used for training, another for checking against examples the model has not seen. The quality, volume and representativeness of the training data determine the model’s performance more than the algorithm does. Rare fault cases must be collected deliberately, and labels must be assigned consistently, otherwise the model learns the contradictions too.
From practice
At the supplier’s, detection always looks good in the lab, with their images. In the plant, different lighting, new batches of packaging material and dirt on the lens all come into play. So collect the training images on the real line, over several weeks and shifts. Document the dataset like a set of test equipment, with version, origin and labelling. Deliberately include borderline cases and bad days, not just the pretty samples. Define who owns the data and who maintains it, and settle in the contract that you can take it with you if you change supplier. Otherwise the next provider starts again from zero.
Transfer car
IntralogisticsA rail-guided distribution car that transports pallets or loads across several conveyor lines, for example between palletisers and a stretch wrapper. The car carries a roller or chain conveyor section that takes the load from one connecting line and delivers it to another. Its position is controlled by a measuring system, and the handovers run as a handshake with the conveyors of the lines. The transfer car is often the unrecognised bottleneck. Its capacity depends less on travel speed than on waiting times and handovers at the lines.
From practice
A transfer car distributes pallets from several lines to a few discharge points and saves on conveyor technology. In return it is a single point of failure, and if it fails, all connected lines stop. Plan for emergency operation with manual removal. Maintenance access should be laid out so that the car can be taken out of service safely while the lines are still collecting in their buffers. The track gets dirty easily from film scraps and labels falling into the rail, so cleaning belongs in the maintenance plan. Also ask for a list of spare parts, above all drive, wheels and measuring system, and decide which of them you keep in stock.
Transfer point
Packaging technologyPoint in a line where products or packs move from one conveyor or machine to the next. This includes belt transitions and transfers to star wheels, pushers, chain conveyors or robots. At a transfer point the speed, height or guiding of the pack changes. It is therefore a typical site for tip-overs, jams, product damage and contamination, because residues collect there. Every transfer point needs a clear owner and defined tolerances for gap and height offset, especially at interfaces between machines from different suppliers.
From practice
Count the transfer points in your layout. Each is a source of faults, especially for light, tall or unstable packs. Watch for minimal gaps, matching heights, adapted speeds and side guides with no edges. Small pouches find every gap, and a carton with a flap catches on the one screw that is not countersunk. With multiple suppliers, define in the interface list who is responsible for which transfer, including tolerances. Otherwise everyone points at the other when the pack tips over. Transfer points are also the right place for jam detection and buffer control. At acceptance, let the most difficult pack you run go over every transfer for several hours.
Transport simulation (ISTA)
Quality & safetyA laboratory test that reproduces the stresses of the distribution chain: vibration on the shaker table, shock and drop, stacking pressure and climate effects. Test procedures of ISTA (International Safe Transit Association) or to ASTM define the sequence and intensity for each shipping route, for example palletised freight, parcel carrier or overseas transport. The test samples are conditioned beforehand, opened after the run and assessed against criteria for pack and product that were defined in advance. Retail customers and shipping platforms often require the test as evidence.
From practice
A passed transport simulation proves that the packaging survives this test profile. It does not replace knowing the real chain. If you do not know the route, you test the wrong profile. Choose the method by shipping route, that is palletised freight, parcel carrier or overseas, and have the result documented before a packaging change goes into series production. The samples should come from series production, with real contents and real closures, not hand-built samples from development. In the event of retail complaints, the report is your strongest argument. Attach it to the packaging material specification so that it can still be found two years later.
Tray
Packaging technologyFlat cardboard tray used as a collation pack, either open or shrink-wrapped in film (tray shrink). It is die-cut and folded from corrugated or solid board and holds cans, bottles, cups or pouches. The term is also used for preformed plastic trays, for example for fresh produce, which a tray sealer closes. Shelf-ready variants (shelf-ready packaging) with perforation are a retail requirement, and perforation quality determines handling in the store. Unlike a folding carton or outer case, a tray is open on top or closed only by film.
From practice
For retail requirements and stable load units, trays are the standard. There are cardboard trays with or without film and plastic trays for fresh produce. Tray quality determines the fault rate at the tray erector and the stability on the pallet. Pay attention to scoring, grammage and tolerances in the specification, and get samples from the packaging supplier before machine acceptance, preferably from a series run and not hand-made samples. Hand-made samples always run, series blanks show what the machine can really do. Mind the climate in the hall too, because damp board scores and folds differently from dry board. And check on the perforation whether store staff can open it without a knife.
Tray erector
Packaging technologyMachine that folds flat blanks into trays or cases and glues them with hot melt. A sucker pulls the blank from the magazine, the side walls are raised against a forming die, hot melt is applied to the tabs and the bond is pressed briefly until the glue holds. The glue system consists of a heated tank and nozzles. Designs work intermittently or continuously. The machine often sits ahead of tray packers for bottles, cans or cups, which fill the finished tray.
From practice
Tray erectors react sensitively to blank quality and hot-melt temperature. Check the magazine capacity. Work out how long the machine runs on one magazine load, because the operator should not be topping up blanks every few minutes. Then there are changeover time and access to the glue system, especially when someone has to work on it with hot melt and gloves. A second erector as redundancy pays off on high-output lines, because every stop there hits the filler. Warped or damp blanks can be seen in the store room before they bring the machine to a halt. At acceptance, also try blanks from the upper and the lower end of the tolerance.
Tray sealer
Packaging technologyMachine that seals pre-formed trays with a top film. It is standard for fresh produce and often works with modified atmosphere (MAP), where the air in the tray is drawn off and replaced by gas to extend shelf life. The trays run into a tool with a nest for each tray format, and the top film comes off the reel, is sealed onto the rim under heat and pressure and cut around the tray. Designs range from semi-automatic machines with manual loading to lines with automatic tray feeding. Tool changes and film guiding determine flexibility.
From practice
Ask about sealing tools per tray format, residual oxygen values and the leak test. For line output, infeed counts: trays must arrive precisely timed and clean at the sealing rim. Product on the sealing rim is the most common cause of leaking packs. The tools are heavy, so ask about the changeover time and whether a change-part trolley comes with the delivery. Protective gas costs money, so have the gas consumption per pack stated. Fresh goods drip and smear. At acceptance I therefore look at the sealing rim first and the machine second. A sample in a water bath under vacuum shows leaks visibly, because bubbles rise from the leaking spot.
Trial run (trial operation)
Project management & CAPEXA defined operating phase between commissioning and acceptance, in which the plant runs with real product, real packaging materials and the future operating staff. The results are documented, for example output, rejects and faults. Scope, duration and success criteria are fixed in the contract beforehand, otherwise it remains unclear when the trial run counts as passed. During this phase responsibility for the plant usually still lies with the supplier. The performance verification, which checks the promised values, is often carried out during the trial run.
From practice
During the trial run the plant runs under production conditions but is still the supplier’s responsibility. That sounds clear and is still often forgotten. Agree in advance who supplies product and packaging material, how rejects are compensated, and from what point production passes to you. Take packaging material from the current delivery and not hand-picked samples, otherwise the problem only shows up in continuous running. Make sure every shift has run the machine once, the third one included. Operators who were involved in the trial run cope far better with faults later on than those who only had a briefing.
Tugger train
IntralogisticsA tractor with several trailers that supplies stations on a fixed route to a schedule. The train bundles transports and replaces individual forklift runs. Roll cages, trolleys or pallets ride on the trailers and are coupled and uncoupled at the stations, known as stops, or loaded and unloaded from the side. A timetable defines when the train serves which station. It is steered by a driver and increasingly also runs driverless as an AGV tugger train. The design follows the material demand of the lines, the container sizes and the routes in the plant.
From practice
The tugger train supplies several lines in a single run and takes forklift traffic out of production. That lowers the accident risk and the number of empty runs in the plant. It requires travel routes of adequate width and suitable curve radii, stops at the lines and containers or trolleys that fit the train. The route analysis shows whether the volume justifies a tugger train or whether a milk run with a hand pallet truck is enough. A tugger train lives on its timetable. If it arrives late, the line stands, and if it arrives early, the stop is still full. Where pedestrians and train share the same aisle, you need clear rules and marked walkways.
Turntable
Packaging technologyRotating table plate at the end of the line or at a manual workstation that takes products from a conveyor, buffers them for a short time and holds them ready for manual removal. The table turns at an adjustable speed, a surrounding rim keeps the products on the surface, and the operator removes or packs them at the edge. It is the simplest form of decoupling between the machine and manual removal. Turntables are inexpensive and uncomplicated but have only limited capacity. A light barrier at the rim can report a full table to the upstream machine.
From practice
Turntables buffer only a few minutes but are cheap and virtually trouble-free. They make sense as a collection point at the end of semi-automatic lines, before manual final inspection, or as an interim buffer for sample removal. Sizing depends on diameter, rim height, product orientation and whether the table stops the upstream machine when full. Work out how many packs really fit on it, because the figure on paper assumes perfect distribution. Look at ergonomics as well, since the operator stands at the same edge all day. Centrifugal force pushes light packs outwards, so tip-sensitive products need a low speed.
Two-hand control
Quality & safetyA protective device in which a hazardous motion is triggered only as long as the operator actuates both controls at the same time. Both hands are thereby kept outside the hazard zone during the motion. Requirements and types I to III are set out in EN ISO 13851. Type I requires both controls to be actuated at the same time, type II also requires both to be released before a new start, and type III adds synchronous actuation within 0.5 seconds. The controls have to be protected against defeat, for example by distance, shrouding or shape. Distance to the hazard point is governed by EN ISO 13855.
From practice
Two-hand control protects only the operator who actuates it, and not a second person reaching into the machine next to them. So always check access from other sides and from behind. Typical faults are controls placed so close together that they can be operated with one hand and an elbow, or defeated with tape. Distance, defeat-resistance and simultaneity belong in every safety acceptance check. At acceptance, try it out yourself once, with an elbow, with tape and with staggered pressing. If you and a colleague hunt for loopholes at that stage, you find them before operation and not first in the third shift.
U
Ultrasonic sealing
Packaging technologySealing method in which high-frequency vibrations weld the film at the seam by friction, without heating the sealing jaws. A generator feeds a converter that passes the vibration through a sonotrode onto the film, which is pressed against an anvil. The heat arises exactly where the sealant layers lie on top of each other. Advantages are short sealing times, tight seams even with product in the seam, and lower energy demand. The method is used for pouches, coffee capsules and thermoformed packs.
From practice
The practical advantage is that product in the seam disturbs less than with heat sealing, for example with powder or crumbs. It suits pouches, trays and closures, but demands matching materials and one sonotrode per format. Each sonotrode is tuned to the generator and cannot simply be swapped. Ask about service life and the price of replacements. Have the sonotrode change demonstrated, because afterwards the gap to the anvil has to be right again. For difficult seams, a trial at the manufacturer with your material pays off. I insist on product in the seam during that trial, as dirty as in your line and not as clean as in a test laboratory.
Unified namespace (UNS)
Digitalisation & AIAn architecture concept for industrial data in which all systems publish their current data to one shared place and obtain data from there. Technically this is usually an MQTT broker to which controllers, edge devices, MES, ERP and analytics are connected. The data sit in a topic structure that mirrors the plant, often based on the ISA-95 hierarchy from enterprise via site, area and line down to the machine. Instead of many point-to-point interfaces, each system talks only to the broker. New applications subscribe to the topics they need without touching existing connections. The UNS represents the current state, and a time series database is needed in addition for history.
From practice
With a unified namespace, people like to argue about technology, which broker, which protocol. The real work lies in the naming structure. If every integrator names their signals however they please, you end up with a very modern data swamp. Define the structure and the names before the first line is connected, and write both into the plant standard and into every purchase order. Older machines do not speak MQTT, so you need a gateway at the line that translates the control data. Agree with IT who may read from the broker and who may write to it. Otherwise any laptop on the network can publish data that other systems take at face value. Start with one line and a real use case, such as downtime recording, and build out from there.
Uninterruptible power supply (UPS)
Production & energyAn uninterruptible power supply, or UPS, is a device made up of batteries, a rectifier and an inverter that keeps delivering without interruption during a power failure or voltage dip. The battery keeps critical loads running until the mains returns, a generator takes over or the plant has been shut down in an orderly way. Common designs are the standby UPS, the line-interactive UPS and the online UPS as a double-conversion unit, in which the load runs continuously via the inverter. In the food industry a UPS usually backs up controls, computers and monitoring systems, and larger loads such as refrigeration only in individual cases. The bridging time depends on battery size and load.
From practice
A UPS for the control system, HMI and server prevents data loss and long restarts after voltage dips. For the drives themselves it is usually disproportionate. After commissioning, check whether the plant restarts in a defined way after a power failure. This is rarely tested and is costly if it goes wrong for real. At acceptance, and in agreement with maintenance, disconnect the mains once while the line is running and watch what happens. Think of the battery as well. It ages, and a UPS whose batteries nobody has tested for years may last far shorter than expected. Put the battery test into the maintenance plan.
Unit
Packaging technologyFunctional unit within a machine or line that fulfils a defined task, for example a doser, sealing station or labelling unit. A unit has its own drives, sensors and interfaces and can often be replaced or retrofitted as an assembly. Manufacturers build machines in modules from units and buy some of them from suppliers. In tenders it matters which units are designed with redundancy and which are a single point of failure, whose breakdown stops the entire line.
From practice
When designing a line, look at each unit on its own and ask about maintenance interval, replacement time and wear parts with long lead times. Anyone who knows the critical units plans the spare parts package and redundancy deliberately instead of spreading the money evenly. In tenders, a unit list with manufacturer details helps. It brings out the third-party components the machine builder buys in, and with them the question who actually shows up when something fails. The machine builder, or a supplier you never had a contract with. I therefore ask for the list with type and supplier in the quotation and do not wait for commissioning.
Unit cost
KPIsTotal packaging cost per unit produced. It is made up of packaging materials, machine costs, labour, energy, scrap and downtime. Machine costs consist of depreciation, maintenance and wear parts and are usually allocated to the unit via the machine hourly rate. Unit cost is the figure by which packaging projects are judged in the end. It is calculated per good unit and is only meaningful if the reference quantity and the cost types are chosen the same way in every comparison.
From practice
Unit costs make investments comparable. Automation that saves labour but increases scrap and downtime can end up more expensive than the manual solution. Calculate the unit costs before and after the project using the same method, which is the most honest proof of success. Record the starting values before the project begins. Afterwards it is hard to reconstruct what the pack cost beforehand. Ask about the influence of batch size too. With small batches, changeovers and start-up losses weigh more heavily on the unit costs. And fix which costs are included, for example whether the overhead share of maintenance belongs in. Otherwise the calculation that looks best wins in the end.
URS (user requirement specification)
Project management & CAPEXA document in which the operating company describes its requirements for a plant or a computerised system. The term comes from the GMP environment of the pharmaceutical industry and is also found at food manufacturers with high quality demands. In content, a URS largely corresponds to the German Lastenheft, the customer’s requirements specification. What sets it apart is that every requirement is numbered individually, worded unambiguously and testable. The URS is the starting point for qualification. Design qualification checks whether the supplier’s solution covers all requirements, and IQ / OQ / PQ prove that the installed equipment meets them. A traceability matrix links each requirement to its test. The EU GMP Guide refers to it in Annex 15.
From practice
A URS is often copied from the last project and extended by a few lines. Then it contains general demands for GMP-compliant design that no test could ever prove, and nobody notices until qualification. I go through every requirement individually and consider which test we would use to tick it off during qualification. If I cannot think of one, the requirement gets rewritten or deleted. Separate must-haves from wishes, or you will end up negotiating the quotation over things you could do without. The supplier usually replies with a list marking each requirement as met, partly met or not met. Read the partly met items carefully above all. That is where the arguments at acceptance will come from.
USDZ
Digitalisation & AIFile format for 3D models and augmented reality (AR), developed by Apple and Pixar based on Universal Scene Description (USD). A USDZ file bundles geometry, materials and textures in a single package. USDZ files can be opened directly on iPhone and iPad and overlaid as an AR model in the real space. The models are usually derived from a 3D CAD system by conversion. They are models for viewing and not design files, and are not suitable for manufacturing or for making changes.
From practice
A machine model as a USDZ on an iPad, right there on the shop floor: this lets plant managers and operators see before ordering whether the new line fits the planned space and how the operator side sits. For layout discussions with people who cannot read a CAD drawing, this is often more convincing than any plan. Place the model on the real floor and walk around it. That quickly shows whether the forklift still gets through, where the door swings and whether the operator can see conveyors and control cabinet at the same time. Check beforehand with a tape measure on the floor that the model appears at the right scale, otherwise it misleads you badly on the question of space.
Used machine
CommercialA machine that has already been in operation and that an operator buys from the manufacturer, a dealer or a previous owner, often after refurbishment. For standard tasks it is an economical alternative to a new machine. CE status, documentation, spare parts supply, control system generation, state of wear and rebuild costs have to be checked. The machine must suit task, product and format, because conversions are design work. If it is rebuilt or integrated into a line, a substantial modification may exist, which brings a new CE assessment with it.
From practice
A used machine with no documentation and a discontinued control system gets expensive, even if the purchase price looks low. Before buying, check the control system generation, because a discontinued PLC is a disqualifying factor. Review the documentation and the spare parts list, assess change parts and wear condition, and arrange a trial run with your own product. Rebuilding, transport, installation and the CE assessment after modifications come on top of the purchase price. This is often sensible for standard tasks with solid mechanics, rarely so for format-intensive processes. I try to have the machine shown to me under power at the previous owner’s site before it is dismantled.
User management (HMI)
Automation & roboticsA function of an operator interface or SCADA system that manages users, roles and access rights. It defines who may change parameters and recipes, select operating modes or acknowledge alarms. Graded roles are common, for example operator, line leader, maintenance and administrator. Users log in with user name and password, with an RFID card or through a company-wide directory service. After a set period without input, the system logs the user out. Changes are recorded with user and time in the audit trail. Regulated sectors impose particular requirements, for example EU GMP Annex 11 or the FDA’s 21 CFR Part 11. Roles and rights belong in the functional specification and are checked at acceptance.
From practice
The classic is the sticker on the panel with the password for the technician level. Close behind comes the commissioning engineer’s account that still has administrator rights years later. At acceptance I have someone from the plant, not from the supplier, show me how a new user is created and an old one deleted. If only the supplier can do that, the machine still partly belongs to them. Decide who looks after the users in the plant, and update the list whenever someone leaves the company. With gloves on, logging in with a card is far more pleasant than typing on the touch panel. The automatic logout needs judgement. If the time is too short, the shift keeps logging in again and at some point shares one password. With too long a time, the technician level stays open while the technician is long since sitting in the canteen.
User requirements specification (URS)
Project management & CAPEXDescribes what the customer needs and what for. It contains requirements, performance data and boundary conditions from the operator’s point of view, for example products, formats, output, availability, interfaces, hygiene and safety requirements and acceptance criteria. The supplier replies with the functional specification (Pflichtenheft), which describes how the requirements will be met. Every tender rests on the URS. An incomplete URS leads to incomparable quotes and expensive variations. In German it is called Lastenheft.
From practice
A usable URS describes outcomes, not solutions. The most common mistake is copying a manufacturer’s brochure. Then only that manufacturer can supply. Better to write down what the machine has to achieve and how you will measure it. Anyone demanding availability must also say how it is measured. For hygiene, name the zones and the type of cleaning, and for acceptance criteria a method of measurement that a third party can follow. A good URS is as short as possible and as precise as necessary, and it makes quotes comparable. Have production and maintenance read it before it goes out. That is exactly what POWERJO’s Tender Package is for.
Utilisation rate
KPIsThe share of planned production time within calendar time, the metric that sits above OEE. Together with OEE it gives TEEP, which relates output to the whole calendar time. Times without a shift, such as nights or weekends, are not occupied. The time base must be clearly fixed in the plant, for example 24 hours on seven days. For example, a line at 85% OEE running one shift has more unused capacity than a line at 60% OEE running three shifts. Investment decisions must therefore look at both levels.
From practice
Utilisation rate shows how much of the theoretically available time a plant is scheduled to produce at all. It is the honest view of capacity reserves. A line that produces for only 60 percent of the time often does not need a faster machine, it needs more shifts or shorter changeovers. That brings the same quantity without a euro going into new technology. Put this figure on the table before any investment in output, preferably next to the shift model. Otherwise you may buy speed where time is what is missing. There are also cases where the night is left empty on purpose, because of staffing or energy costs. That belongs in the calculation too.
Utilities connection plan
Project management & CAPEXOverview of all supply connections of a machine or line, with location, quantity and quality. It covers electrical connected load with protection, compressed air with pressure, consumption and quality class, and also water, steam, cooling, vacuum and data network. For each medium, connection type, nominal size or cross-section and height above the floor are stated. The supplier draws up the plan and the operator checks it against what is available on site. It is the basis for installation planning and for defining the scope of work provided by the site, and it is updated when the layout or the machine changes.
From practice
Compressed air is the classic case. The compressor’s rated output is sufficient on paper, but the pipe to the new line is too narrow, or the network sags when several machines start up together. So check not just the connection values but also the supply across the whole plant, meaning spare network capacity, transformer and cooling water capacity. From the supplier’s utilities list I have the peak consumption and the continuous consumption given separately, and hold both against what the compressor really delivers day to day. And define who installs and pays for the last few metres between the building connection and the machine. That is where the work likes to get left lying.
V
Vacuum generator (ejector / pump)
Mechanical engineering & componentsA device that generates negative pressure in suction cups and vacuum grippers. Two principles are common in handling technology. The ejector works on the Venturi principle, with compressed air flowing at high speed through a nozzle and entraining air from the suction chamber. It is small, wear-free and fast and can be mounted directly on the gripper, but it consumes compressed air as long as it sucks. Compact ejectors integrate valves and vacuum switches, often with an air-saving function that switches off at the set vacuum and cuts back in when it drops. Electric vacuum pumps such as rotary vane pumps or side channel blowers work without compressed air. They suit large suction volumes and porous workpieces such as cardboard that constantly draw in leakage air.
From practice
Ejectors are convenient, which is why they are everywhere. Leave one sucking permanently without an air-saving function and it blows money out through the silencer, even when there is no part on the gripper. With cardboard and other porous materials the suction cup constantly draws in leakage air. That is where an ejector reaches its limits, and an electric pump or a side channel blower is often the better choice. Watch the hoses. A vacuum hose that is too long or too narrow makes the gripper slow, and you only notice once the cycle rate goes up. Silencers clog with dust and board fibres, the vacuum drops gradually, and at first only the odd part falls off. That is why silencers and suction filters belong in the maintenance plan.
Vacuum gripper
Automation & roboticsA gripper that picks up cartons, bags or products by vacuum via suction cups or a flat gripper pad. It is the standard on palletising robots and case packers. The holding force results from the vacuum and the effective suction area. Suction cups come as flat cups and as bellows cups, which compensate height differences and uneven surfaces better, while flat grippers work with a foam pad. The vacuum is generated by an ejector working on the Venturi principle with compressed air, or by an electric vacuum pump or blower. Valves and vacuum sensors switch and monitor the grip.
From practice
A vacuum gripper is fast and format-flexible as long as the surface is sealed. Perforated cartons, dust and open flaps make the grip fail, and that usually shows only when the pallet is already leaning. Test suction cups and vacuum generators with your worst cartons and not with the nice ones from the supplier’s sample. Plan for filter changes, because carton dust clogs filters and ejectors. Suction cups are wear parts and belong in stock. Also compare the compressed-air consumption of the ejector with an electric vacuum pump. An ejector eats compressed air as long as it sucks, and that adds up with several grippers.
Vacuum packaging
Packaging technologyA pack from which air is removed before sealing. The absence of oxygen extends the shelf life of meat, cheese or coffee and protects against oxidation and freezer burn. Work is done in chamber machines, where the pouch with its product is evacuated and sealed in a vacuum chamber, or in thermoformers and tray sealers with a vacuum function. Pouches or films with a barrier layer are normally used. Vacuum is often combined with modified atmosphere (MAP), or the film is drawn tightly over the product as skin packaging. Pulling a vacuum replaces neither refrigeration nor hygiene.
From practice
Vacuum gains you shelf life, but sensitive products get deformed, and film and seal seam have to withstand more. Chamber machines are flexible, and for series output you use thermoformers or tray sealers with a vacuum function. Soft goods get squashed, and bone ends and sharp edges sometimes pierce the pouch. Freshly roasted coffee keeps releasing gas, which belongs in the planning. Moist product causes work too, because it draws liquid during evacuation that then ends up at the seam. Residual vacuum and seam inspection belong in the quality plan, and an oil-lubricated vacuum pump with its oil level and filter in the maintenance plan.
Method that shows the material and information flow of a product from goods-in to dispatch on a single map. It records process steps with cycle times, stock between the steps, waiting times and how orders are controlled by planning and releases. Process time and throughput time show what share of the time actually adds value. In most cases the product spends the larger part of its throughput time sitting rather than moving. The map of the current state is followed by a target state, which is the basis for decisions on layout, material flow and automation.
From practice
At a desk you get a handsome map on which the pallet that has stood in front of the release since Friday does not appear. Walk the path from raw material to pallet yourself, with a stopwatch and a notepad, and take somebody from the shift along. Then you see where stock eats up time and where the line waits for approvals. In packaging plants value stream mapping complements downtime analysis. One shows you the losses at the machine, the other the losses between the machines. Start with a single product, or the map becomes unreadable. Ask the operators what makes them wait at the line.
Valve manifold
Mechanical engineering & componentsAn assembly that combines several pneumatic valves on a shared carrier with a shared compressed-air supply and electrical control. It is controlled via a multi-pin connector or directly by fieldbus, often supplemented with electrical inputs and outputs. The valves sit side by side as modules and share supply and exhaust air, and each consumer is connected to the outputs with its own hose. Benefits are less tubing, faster assembly and easier diagnostics. A manifold can be extended as long as the carrier still has free slots.
From practice
Place valve manifolds close to the cylinders, because long hoses make movements slow and imprecise. Watch for spare slots on the manifold, pressure zones for different pressures, and safe venting for safety functions. With a fieldbus connection you can see switching cycles and faults in the control system, and maintenance should make use of that. In wet areas, protection rating and mounting orientation count. Keep one spare valve per valve type in stock. On new installations I have a list or drawing made that shows which slot on the manifold serves which cylinder. Without labels, someone stands in front of a row of identical valves at night and guesses.
Variation order (change order)
CommercialA written change to an existing contract after award, with a changed scope, changed prices or changed dates. Triggers are change requests from the operator, new requirements or gaps in the specification. Usually a change request comes first, in which the effects on cost and schedule are assessed, and only then is the variation order placed. Disciplined change management, in writing, priced and with the schedule impact assessed before work starts, separates profitable projects from disputes.
From practice
Variation orders almost always arise from gaps in the URS: a forgotten format, an interface, a hygiene requirement. The clearer the tender, the fewer of them. When one comes, ask in writing and have price and schedule impact stated before you instruct the work. Whoever lets work start first and negotiates afterwards negotiates from behind. Keep a change log on the project, otherwise nobody remembers the sequence in the end. A variation order with no schedule consequence is rare, and the date often costs more in the end than the price. That is why I always ask about it actively, even when the supplier says it can be done on the side.
Vertical conveyor (lift)
IntralogisticsA lift or vertical conveyor that moves cartons or pallets between levels, for example from the ground floor into a warehouse or across travel routes. Common types are lifting stations with a platform that moves the load singly, and continuously running conveyors with forks or carriers that keep several units moving at the same time. The platform carries a roller or chain conveyor section that takes or delivers the load at each level. Where required, the shaft is enclosed and the access points are interlocked. Capacity is limited by lifting height, speed and waiting time at the handovers.
From practice
Vertical conveyors are single points in the material flow. If the lift fails, the line stops. Plan for redundancy or a manual workaround, and address early the fire protection with the floor penetrations as well as the safety requirements for shaft access. These are matters for the building authority and the insurer, and both take time. Also clarify how a lift with goods on the platform can be cleared when the control is down, and who is allowed to do it. Plan the handovers at both ends carefully, because interfaces tend to get pushed onto the other supplier. Decide in advance which spare parts for the drive and the interlocks you keep in stock.
VFFS
Packaging technologyVertical Form-Fill-Seal, a vertical flow wrapper, in German a vertikale Schlauchbeutelmaschine. A flat film is formed into a tube over a forming shoulder, sealed longitudinally, filled from above (weigher, screw or volumetric doser), sealed transversely and cut off. The transverse seal closes the filled bag and at the same time forms the bottom of the next one. A fin seal or a lap seal forms the longitudinal seam. Typical uses are snacks, coffee, spices, sugar, powders and small items.
From practice
With VFFS the output comes from the dosing and not from the machine. A multihead weigher for piece goods or a screw doser for powder sets the pace. Clarify in the format list the bag formats, film construction and whether stand-up pouches or flat bags are required, because that determines the forming shoulder, sealing tools and add-on stations. As a rule each bag width has its own forming tube with shoulder, and changing it takes time. With crisps and similar snacks, nitrogen is often flushed in, and then the gas consumption belongs in the running cost calculation. Ultrasonic sealing pays off where product dust would otherwise leave leaking bags in the seal seam.
VFFS machine
Packaging technologyA vertical form-fill-seal machine (VFFS) in which a film web is drawn over a forming shoulder, shaped into a tube around the forming tube, sealed lengthwise and closed at the bottom by cross-sealing jaws. The product drops from above through the forming tube into the bag, suited to bulk goods, snacks, powder and frozen goods. Afterwards the bag is sealed at the top and cut off, and the same seal forms the bottom of the next bag. Dosing is usually via a multihead weigher or screw feeder above the machine. The longitudinal seal is a fin seal or a lap seal. Its horizontal counterpart is the flow wrapper.
From practice
How fast a VFFS machine really runs depends on the film. Sealability, coefficient of friction and thickness decide whether catalogue output is achievable. Test your own films at the FAT and have the sealing parameters documented. For changeovers, the forming shoulder change time and the recipe management count, and so does the question of whether the infeed, made up of chain, belt and singulation, keeps up with the cycle rate. Watch the cross seal. Crumbs and powder in the seam are the classic problem with bulk goods, and then only extraction, ultrasonic sealing or a different dosing system will help. At the end of acceptance, run a longer endurance test and analyse the stops by cause.
Vibration isolation
Mechanical engineering & componentsDesign measures that separate vibration between a machine and its surroundings: resilient machine feet, damping elements, separate foundations, balance masses, or deliberate tuning of the natural frequency. The aim is to protect sensitive equipment such as weighers and vision systems, and to reduce loading on the building and frame. It works in both directions, because it also keeps vibration from the surroundings away from the machine. For this, the natural frequency of the mounting must lie well below the excitation frequency. If the two are close together, resonance occurs and the vibration is amplified instead of damped.
From practice
Checkweighers and multihead weighers are the ones that suffer. A palletiser or forklift lane nearby distorts readings, and the line ejects good packs. Check distances to vibration sources in the layout, and provide separate foundations or isolated frames for weighers. Retrofitted dampers rarely work as well as a properly planned installation location. Suppliers like to leave out that a weigher that ran perfectly in the workshop can behave differently in your hall. So have the weighing results checked at the installation site during acceptance, with the neighbouring machines running. Note when the false readings occur. If they follow the rhythm of forklift traffic or a neighbouring machine, you have almost found the source.
Vibratory conveyor
Packaging technologyConveying device that moves bulk material or individual products by directed vibration of a trough. The trough vibrates at an angle to the conveying direction, so the material is thrown forward in small hops. It is driven electromagnetically or with unbalance motors, and the conveying rate is controlled via amplitude and frequency. The vibratory conveyor is used for feeding and dosing at multihead weighers, sorters and feed systems, and for sticky or delicate products also as a shaker conveyor with horizontal motion.
From practice
Vibratory troughs need a rigid foundation. On flexing platforms or thin steel frames the conveying rate changes with load, and the weigher below shows unrest. Sticky or frozen products build up, and a coated or heated trough helps there. If the product changes with moisture or bulk density, the same setting suddenly delivers a different quantity, so the amplitude belongs in the recipe. Watch for cleanability without tools and for noise, because several troughs above one weigher are loud. Springs and magnetic drive are maintenance items, so ask about intervals and spare parts.
Virtual commissioning
Automation & roboticsTesting of the real PLC software against a simulation model of the plant before assembly. The model reproduces kinematics, sensors and actuators. In the software-in-the-loop variant the controller runs as a virtual PLC on a computer, in hardware-in-the-loop the real controller hardware is connected to the model. Sequences, interlocks and fault cases are tested without anything being at risk on the real machine. The method finds logic errors before they cost time on site and gives a time buffer for tight conversion windows in existing plants. As a copy of the plant, the model is a form of digital twin.
From practice
On site, virtual commissioning saves time, but it costs money beforehand, and somebody has to build the model. For complex lines I therefore ask early who builds it, who pays for it and whether it stays with the operator after the project. Especially with tight conversion windows in an existing plant you win time this way, because logic errors show up on the computer before the fitters arrive. Fault cases can be played through as well, such as a sensor that jams, without anyone risking anything on the real machine. For standard machines the money is better spent on a thorough FAT with your products and formats. The model only checks what is in it, though. A product that behaves differently from the model shows its true colours only on the real machine.
Virtual office (telephone answering service)
Digitalisation & AIExternal office and telephone answering service in which calls are answered on behalf of the company. The provider’s staff answer with the company name, record name, callback number and enquiry, and pass it on by message, as an email or a text message depending on the agreement. It works to the hours and procedures agreed with the client and takes no technical decisions on its behalf. Small businesses and freelancers stay reachable this way, even when nobody is at the desk.
From practice
Anyone standing on the customer’s shop floor cannot answer the phone. In some areas the mobile is not even allowed in, and next to a running line you would not hear a word anyway. A telephone answering service means a caller still reaches a person and the enquiry gets through. The callback follows the same day, ideally with a short note on what it was about, so you do not ring back blind. Someone who only gets the voicemail soon rings the next provider. For on-demand specialists this is a simple way to stay professionally reachable. Tell the service beforehand what to say on the phone and how to reach you in urgent cases.
Vision system
Automation & roboticsA camera system for position detection (robot guidance), for completeness and quality inspection, or for code reading. It consists of a camera with lens, lighting, an evaluation unit and software with inspection programmes stored as recipes per format. A sensor triggers the image, the system reports pass or fail to the controller, and the controller rejects the failed parts. Lighting and product variance determine reliability more than the camera does. Buying a vision system without a sample-part trial means buying risk.
From practice
Before ordering, I always have the system tested with sample parts, good ones and bad ones and the borderline cases that even your inspectors judge differently. After that, look at ambient light, dust on the optics and variation in the product, because inspection in daily operation fails on these more often than on the camera. The system needs an owner who creates and changes the recipes per format. Without one, the tolerance gets widened a little after every false reject, until the system no longer inspects anything. Also have it shown how the recipes are backed up and what happens after a camera replacement.
Figure for the share of the volume actually used out of the volume available on a pallet, in a shelf slot or in a lorry load space. It relates the volume of the packed goods to the space the load unit or means of transport offers. On a pallet it depends on pack dimensions, pack pattern, number of layers and permitted pallet height, on a shelf on the slot dimensions and the clearance needed for handling. It assesses packaging and transport together, because the packaging dimensions determine storage space and freight costs. Pallet overhang improves the calculation only in appearance, because it costs stability and protection.
From practice
A few millimetres in carton dimensions often decide whether one more layer fits on the pallet or whether space is wasted at the edges. In one real case, 20 mm more width and 4 mm less height gave 12.5 per cent more cartons per pallet and six fewer lorries per 100,000 cartons. So never calculate the figure on its own. Pallet height, shelf dimensions and BCT belong in the same calculation, because every change of dimensions also changes the stacking strength of the carton. Put the packaging supplier and the haulier at one table. One likes to optimise the material, the other sees the load in the lorry, and nothing is won until both fit together. Whenever dimensions change, I have a sample stood on a real pallet before anybody places an order.
Volumetric / gravimetric dosing
Packaging technologyTwo basic principles for determining quantity when filling. With volumetric dosing a fixed volume is measured out, using a piston, screw, cup wheel or flow meter. Gravimetric dosing captures the weight during filling via load cells, and the fill ends when the target weight is reached. Multihead weighers work gravimetrically, weighing partial quantities and combining them to a target quantity. Gravimetric dosing is independent of density variation but usually slower and more expensive. Volumetric dosing is usually faster and simpler, but the fill quantity then follows the density of the product.
From practice
The choice depends on the product, not the catalogue. With stable density, volumetric with trend control from the checkweigher is enough. Where density varies, as with powders, granules or aerated masses, gravimetric pays off through less overfill. Density also changes with temperature and moisture, so test your product across several batches and not on one single good day. Have dosing accuracy demonstrated as a standard deviation with your product and your output. Also clarify who is responsible for reconciling against the Fertigpackungsverordnung, the German regulation on pre-packaged goods, and whether the checkweigher adjusts the doser itself.
W
Warranty bond
CommercialA bank guarantee that secures the buyer’s warranty claims in place of a retention of part of the payment. In the guarantee document the supplier’s bank undertakes to pay up to a stated maximum if justified defect claims are not met. The bond runs for the agreed warranty period and is returned afterwards. The manufacturer gets their money, the buyer keeps their security. On the manufacturer’s side it ties up part of the credit line, known as the aval facility, until it is returned. The return deadlines should therefore be fixed in the contract.
From practice
The amount is a matter of negotiation, usually a share of the order value for the length of the warranty. Look closely at whether the bond is issued on first demand or can only be called once the defect has been proven. On first demand is more comfortable for the buyer and a risk for the supplier, and you will see that in the price later. Read the text of the bond itself, because term, maximum amount and return are set out there. Small suppliers feel a bond in their credit line and in bank fees, and then a retention until the punch list is cleared is often the more pragmatic route. Have procurement or a lawyer check the wording first. The supplier’s standard text does not always fit your contract.
Warranty vs. guarantee
CommercialStatutory warranty (Gewährleistung) is the legal claim of the buyer for defects present at handover or acceptance. The manufacturer must rectify or replace. How long the buyer can demand this follows the law or the contract. A guarantee (Garantie), by contrast, is a voluntary, contractually shaped commitment by the manufacturer, for example a performance guarantee of 95 % availability. It goes beyond the statutory rights for defects and applies only to the extent the contract sets out. Performance guarantees with measurable criteria and consequences are a matter of negotiation and worth a lot to the operator. A warranty bond is often used as security for the warranty period.
From practice
How long the statutory warranty runs is set by law, and in the contract the period is usually negotiated. Check from when it runs and whether it starts again after a repair. Clarify that with your lawyer. A performance guarantee needs measurable criteria, such as availability over a defined period, output at a defined format or the reject rate. Without a measurement method and without consequences for missing it, the guarantee is just a word on paper. Possible consequences are repair at the manufacturer’s cost or a contractual penalty. Also settle who measures and how stoppages caused by the operator’s own side are deducted.
Water vapour transmission rate (WVTR)
Quality & safetyWater Vapour Transmission Rate: the amount of water vapour that diffuses through a film or pack per unit area per day, stated in g/(m²·d) under defined conditions. Common conditions are 23 °C at 85 % or 38 °C at 90 % relative humidity. The figure describes how well moisture-sensitive products such as dry goods, powders and baked goods are protected, and equally how well moist products are protected against drying out. It falls with film thickness and depends strongly on the material. Polyolefins such as PE and PP are good moisture barriers, whereas EVOH protects against oxygen but not against moisture.
From practice
A WVTR value without stated temperature and humidity is worthless, because suppliers measure under different conditions and the figures are then not comparable. Fix the test condition in the specification. Remember that the pack counts and not the film. Seal seams, folds and creases significantly increase the actual transmission rate, and thin coatings can crack when creased. For shelf-life problems, measure the finished pack first, then the film. Also have the supplier tell you whether the value was determined on a flat roll sample or on a finished pack with its seals and folds.
Wear part
Mechanical engineering & componentsA component that loses function in normal operation through friction, abrasion, fatigue or ageing and is therefore replaced on a planned basis. Typical wear parts in packaging machines are knives, sealing jaws, suction cups, belts, slide strips and seals. They are distinct from spare parts, which are only replaced after damage, and from consumables such as lubricants or filter elements. For wear parts, the manufacturer gives inspection and replacement intervals in the operating instructions, often in operating hours or cycles. The distinction matters in contracts, because normal wear is generally not treated as a defect and is therefore not covered by the statutory warranty. Which parts count as wear parts should be listed explicitly in the quotation or contract.
From practice
Wear parts are a favourite subject for arguments after acceptance. The supplier says wear, the operator says defect, and the contract says nothing precise. Before placing an order I therefore ask for a wear parts list with expected service lives, based on the real product and the real cycle rate. That lets you stock the first spare parts package sensibly, and it gives you something to point to if a knife is blunt after a week. Watch for parts only the machine builder can supply because they are format-specific or specially made. Suction cups and belts, on the other hand, are often standard parts that the supplier sells under its own part number. Ask for the original manufacturer’s designation. The annual cost of wear parts belongs as a separate line in the bid comparison matrix.
Web guiding
Automation & roboticsControl of the lateral position of a running film or paper web in a packaging machine. Optical or ultrasonic sensors detect the web edge or a print mark, a controller compares the position with the setpoint and an actuator corrects it. Pivoting frames, adjustable unwinds or rotating frames serve as actuators. Depending on the application, the control follows the edge, the centre of the web or a line in the print image. It gives straight seal seams, accurate cutting and correct print registration during changeovers and roll changes.
From practice
An uneven web run has mechanical causes: unevenly wound rolls, uneven film tension, misaligned guide rollers or worn bearings. The control masks this for a while, until its adjustment range is used up. Check roller alignment and the supplier’s roll quality at changeover. Edge sensors must be suitable for transparent and printed films, so clarify this before ordering. Dust and film abrasion like to settle on the sensor, so it belongs in the cleaning plan. Also ask how much adjustment travel the guide has. If the web already runs at the stop in daily operation, nothing is left for the next roll defect.
Weighing and dosing systems
Packaging technologySystems that measure out products in precisely defined quantities and hand them over to the packaging machine. They work automatically or semi-automatically and handle dry as well as liquid products. Volumetric dosers measure volume, for example by cup, screw or piston, and dispense a fixed quantity. Gravimetric dosers weigh the product with load cells and reach the higher accuracy, for example as a multihead weigher for piece goods. Bulk-solids dosers weigh off the product and carry it on a conveyor to the packaging machine. The systems are used for spices, baked goods, snacks, pet food, flour, and for oils and sauces.
From practice
Dosing accuracy is real money. A give-away of just a few percent adds up across millions of packs to a sum that shows in the calculation. Choose the dosing principle by product: multihead weigher for piece goods, screw for powder, volumetric doser for free-flowing material. If bulk density fluctuates, a volumetric doser drifts, because it delivers volume while the pack is sold by weight. Require proof of accuracy with your own product instead of the manufacturer’s test material, and over enough packs in one run. Sticky, crumbly or damp product never behaves on paper the way it does in the system. Also ask how long cleaning and product changeover take.
Weihenstephan Standards
Digitalisation & AISpecifications developed by the Technical University of Munich in Weihenstephan with industry partners for the data interface between machines in the food and packaging industry and higher-level systems, namely WS Pack for packaging machines and WS Food for food processing machines. They define data points, communication protocol and the meaning of the values to allow machine data acquisition and OEE evaluation across manufacturers. The machine reports states, counters and faults in a defined structure, so that each manufacturer does not invent its own format.
From practice
Anyone wanting to evaluate lines from several manufacturers gains from a standard suppliers already know. Require the interface in the tender, because adding it afterwards is expensive. At acceptance, check that all data points are delivered with actual content, not just the mandatory fields. A data point that exists but permanently reports zero is no use to any OEE dashboard. Also compare the reported states with what can be seen at the machine. Whether it is running, stopped or waiting for material must show up in the data stream just the same. The standard is a tool for data acquisition, and the benefit comes only from consistent evaluation.
Welded construction
Mechanical engineering & componentsA component or assembly made of plates and sections joined into one solid unit by welds. In mechanical engineering this produces frames, bases, brackets and vessels, usually in structural steel or stainless steel. Welding introduces heat, which causes distortion and residual stresses as the part cools. Larger constructions are therefore stress-relief annealed or built with machining allowance and milled on their functional faces after welding. The drawing specifies weld type, weld thickness and quality level to ISO 5817. ISO 3834 describes the quality requirements for the welding shop. For stainless steel in food processing, smooth fully penetrated welds and removal of heat tint by pickling are added to the requirements.
From practice
A welded construction is only as good as the drawing and the welder. If the drawing gives no quality level, every shop welds to its own standard, and you end up discussing that standard at goods inwards. With stainless steel for wet areas, look at the back of the weld as well. Unfused roots, pores and crevices are exactly where bacteria settle later. The second issue is distortion. Anyone who finishes welding a frame and only then finds that the bearing seats are out of line has a problem that straightening rarely solves cleanly. Have functional faces machined after welding and agree beforehand who does the milling. Large frames do not fit on every machine, and transport to the machine shop takes time.
Winding direction (reel stock)
Packaging technologySpecification of how a film or label web is wound onto the reel core. It covers the position of the print image, inside or outside, and the running direction of the design as the reel unwinds, for example head first or foot first, left or right. For label reels, numbered winding positions are common and are shown in a sketch. Together with core inner diameter, typically 76 mm, maximum reel diameter, web width and splice marking, this forms the reel specification for a machine. Which direction fits is set by the unwind of the machine.
From practice
A reel with the wrong winding direction sits upside down on the machine. If you are lucky you notice while loading it, if not, only after the first trial run, when the label stands on its head or the film runs with the print facing inwards. Record the winding direction as a numbered sketch in the packaging material specification and check it with every new item setup. This also applies to a change of supplier, since not every manufacturer winds the same way by default. Core diameter and maximum reel diameter must match the unwind, otherwise reel running time falls and the operator changes reels more often.
WMS (warehouse management system)
IntralogisticsWarehouse management software that manages stock, storage locations, putaway and retrieval, and picking orders. It controls strategies such as FIFO and FEFO, manages batches and best-before dates and, in automated warehouses, passes orders on to the plant control system. The WMS differs from the ERP system, which handles purchase orders and stock values, and from the MES, which controls production. In automation projects it is the governing system over the material flow. Through interfaces it talks to the ERP system, the plant control, label printers and the forklift management system.
From practice
A WMS pays off as soon as stock, batches and locations no longer fit in the warehouse manager’s head. For packaging lines the connection at the line end is decisive: print the pallet label, book the pallet, assign the storage location, and do it automatically instead of on a slip of paper. When buying, check the interfaces to ERP and the forklift guidance system and ask who maintains the master data. The interface to the plant control tends to be underestimated in projects. Describe there what happens in case of errors, for example when the pallet is booked but never arrives, or the other way round. Test such cases at acceptance, before they turn up at night.
Work breakdown structure (WBS)
Project management & CAPEXA hierarchical breakdown of the entire project scope into sub-projects and work packages, usually by trade or phase. The top level is the whole project, below it come sub-projects such as machine, conveying, building and utilities, and below those the individual work packages. Each work package has an owner, a deliverable and a budget. The WBS shows the scope completely: what is not in it is neither planned nor paid for. It is the basis for the schedule, cost tracking and the assignment of suppliers and interfaces. In German it is called Projektstrukturplan, abbreviated PSP.
From practice
On machine projects the main machine is rarely where it sticks. It sticks at what is missing from the WBS: foundations, utility connections, conveying equipment between the trades, training, spare parts and documentation. The removal of the old plant is also easily left out. Go through the WBS with maintenance, the electrical workshop and quality assurance before you lock down budgets. Those three usually find gaps quickly that the project team had missed until then. Attach the supplier and the budget to every work package right away, and the WBS later serves for cost tracking as well and is more than an outline. A work package with no name behind it is not one. Then the project manager ends up doing it personally in the evening, when the others have already gone home.
Worm gearbox
Mechanical engineering & componentsA right-angle gearbox in which a worm, a shaft with a helical thread, meshes with a worm wheel. Input and output shafts cross at right angles without intersecting. Even a single stage achieves high ratios, and the gearbox runs quietly and is compact. Because worm and wheel slide against each other, efficiency is lower than with helical or bevel gearboxes and falls as the ratio rises. At high ratios a worm gearbox can be self-locking at standstill. That is no substitute for a brake, because vibration can cancel the locking effect. The worm is usually made of hardened steel and the worm wheel of bronze, which makes the wheel the wear part. Worm geared motors frequently drive belt conveyors and roller conveyors.
From practice
Worm gearboxes get warm, that comes with the design. How warm they may get is stated in the manufacturer’s data sheet. A hand on the housing is no measuring instrument. Oil is where it gets tricky. Many worm gearboxes are filled at the factory with synthetic polyglycol oil, which does not mix with mineral oil. Topping up from the wrong can risks sludge and foam in the gearbox. In food plants there is also the question of H1 oil. Write the oil type on the gearbox and into the lubrication schedule. On retrofits, take a look at efficiency. A conveyor running three shifts with a worm gearbox turns part of its power into heat, and a bevel gearbox in the same place often manages with a smaller motor. In exchange it lacks self-locking, and on more than one inclined conveyor someone has quietly relied on that.
Wrap-around case packer
Packaging technologyCase packing machine that forms the case directly around the previously grouped products instead of pushing them into a ready-erected case. The blank is taken from a magazine, guided under the group, folded around it at the sides and top, and closed with adhesive at the glue flap. This design saves material because no insert case is needed, and it is gentle on the product. In return it is more format-sensitive, since the blank must match the product group exactly. Typical products are bottles, cans, cups and boxes.
From practice
The wrap-around case packer pays off at high outputs and with uniform products such as bottles or cans. It saves board and holds the group stable, but it reacts to anything imprecise. If the cans are a millimetre thicker for once, or the group stands loosely, the blank no longer fits and the glue flap sits crooked. Ask the supplier which tolerance the supplier assumes for product and blank, and run your least favourable batch through at acceptance. With many formats or delicate products, a cartoner with a pre-formed case is often the safer solution. Include the changeover in your calculation before you decide on the design.
X
XPS packaging
Packaging technologyTrays and containers made of extruded polystyrene foam, XPS for short. The foam is extruded as foam sheet and thermoformed into trays. It is lightweight, thermally insulating and insensitive to moisture. XPS trays are used in the food industry mainly for fresh produce such as meat, fish, fruit and vegetables, often with an absorbent pad and film overwrap, or sealed on a tray sealer line. The foam cushions impacts and insulates against temperature swings. Recyclability of the trays is limited, and reuse as a food tray is not usual.
From practice
XPS trays are lightweight, cheap and good insulators, but are coming under pressure over recyclability. Anyone who wants to switch checks alternatives such as barrier-coated board, PET trays or mono-PP directly on their own tray sealer line. Sealing behaviour and tools differ, and a tray with the same dimensions still needs a different sealing temperature and time. Run the trial with original product, because meat juice or fat on the sealing edge shows whether the seam stays tight. Also check how the new tray separates in the magazine and whether the existing change parts still fit. Work out the price gap only after the trial, not from the quotation.
Z
Zero-pressure accumulation conveying
Packaging technologyA conveying principle in which packs or cartons are accumulated and passed on in zones so that they do not touch or press against one another. Each zone has its own drive and sensor, and a zone only releases once the next one is empty. It is built with roller conveyors whose rollers are driven and switched off zone by zone, and with modular belts or belts divided into sections. Simple accumulation conveyors, by contrast, let the product press against running rollers, belts or each other. The zoning prevents damage, jamming and back-pressure at handovers.
From practice
Zero-pressure accumulation costs more than a simple accumulation conveyor, but it saves on damage and faults with pressure-sensitive packs such as flow-wraps, thin-board cartons or displays. Set the zone length to your longest pack format and check the control logic with a format mix. With short packs the buffer capacity drops, because each zone usually holds only one pack. Shiny or transparent film puts some photoelectric sensors off, so try your own packs. For the buffer ahead of the palletiser, a block-release function makes sense so that layer formation does not have to wait for every zone. At acceptance, run the buffer completely full once and then let it empty.
Zoom
Digitalisation & AIA platform for video conferences, webinars and online meetings. Participants join through an invitation link, in a browser or with an app, so the other party’s IT environment is not a precondition. The host shares the screen, which lets everyone go through drawings, layouts or quotation documents together. Meetings can be recorded, and appointments can be booked through the platform. In project work it replaces travel for meetings where nobody needs to see a machine on site.
From practice
POWERJO uses Zoom for get-to-know calls with freelancers and customers. Coordination within the Tender Package also runs entirely online, so nobody has to travel for it. Only record a call if everyone involved has agreed to it beforehand. Then nobody argues later about what exactly was agreed. Send the link with the invitation and test your screen sharing before the meeting if you plan to show drawings. I find a short written result after the call more useful than any recording. Hardly anyone watches an hour of video a second time. Agree beforehand who writes up the result.
